Te rere
Oe on Fade BOO
S ot —aete tl
Lae:
=
ay
aA gyy +
eratercsee:*, ; ; .. is ores
aioe
>]
semee a :
7
me oome se
c
ceed!
gt Pes
b
ha
psa
en
Hh
‘
ay
' ea , x (- qi all a PA H
F 7 is 14 us 7 i _
al DA cite wer fs : Sich fe tt fae ; ty W's
TON AHERN) aie etal, e ie ' Coa:
K ‘ pov eS ae ; mY y : 7 ° {
a é a ait * j pa is } : | ; ‘
x : 7 a f , my Nf ket i a
eat ei oy
PaO eh
vet
A
JOURNAL
OF THE
melATIC SOCIETY
BENGAL,
EDITED BY
THE SECRETARY AND SUB-SECRETARY.
VOL. XD
PART IIL.—JULY TO DEclZMBER, 1844.
Nos. 151 to 156.
ANS
fg, *
“ It will flourish, if naturalists, chéméist8,/ Sut ies, philologers, and men of science, in different
parts of Asia will commit their observati writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society,
in Calcutta; it will languish if such communications shall be long intermitted ; and will die away
ifthey shall entirely cease.”—S1r Wm, JongEs.
. CALCUTTA:
BISHOPS COLLEGE PRESS.
1844.
a0 a
¥
we
ve
y
ig”
Contents.
PART If.
No. 151.
Page.
1.—Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. By Mr. A Shakespear,
Assistant Secretary to Government. N. W. P., .. ose sees wees
II.—Some original Passages on the early Commerce of the Arabs. Communi-
Peenee eA. Spenser, 55, Ny S.4505. iwhames Ul late, 00 des fh eee
IlI.—Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar, through the Sakhee Sar-
war Pass and Buzdar, with other routes. By Major R. Leech..... eons
1V.—Index to History of the Toorks, by Baron Hammer Von reer § By
Dr. E. Roer, Sapte viajes eiaieis NE a “ ceiee
V.—A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. By Major R. cet C. B. Ist
Assistant Governor General’s Agent, N. W. P. (Concluded, ).... Jone
V1.—Proceedirgs of the Asiatic Society forthe Month of July, 1844.,.. eoce
No. 152.
I,—Remarks on a Boodhist Coin or Medal, sent to the Society through Captain
Macleod, Assistant Commissioner, Tenasserim, by H. H. the Prince of Mek-
kara. By Captain T. Latter, 67th B. N. I. in a Letter from him to the
_ Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal,...... ain os 05 vere
II.—View of the principal Political Events that occurred in the Carnatic, from
the dissolution of the Ancient Hindoo Government in 1564 till the Mogul
Government was established, in 1687, on the Conquest of the Capitals of Bee-
japoor and Golconda; compiled from various Authentic Memoirs and Ori-
ginal MSS., collected chiefly within the last ten years, and referred to in
the Notes at the bottom of each page. By Colonel Mackenzie, ( Concluded, )
ILI.—Note on the Osseous Breccia and Deposit in the Caves of Billa Soorgum,
Lat. 15° 25’, Long. 78° 15’, Southern India. By Captain Newbold, F. R, S.
IV.—Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. By Lieut. H. Yule, Bengal En-
gineers, ee eooe coce ecco e2ee cove eoes
V.—Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. +: ,|3 pha Jursle® By Captain
Newbold, F, R. Se aioe eove eo 4 hacks . Raney esce
495
019
527
500
553
Ixil
571
578
610
612
632
VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the Month of August, 1844,.. ....1xxiil
No. 153.
I.—Notes taken on a Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in 1838 and 1839, by
Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. Arranged and translated by Major Robert
Leech, ee eeee eese eoes e eeete eeee
II.—Flora of the Naga Hills, by J. W. Masters Es, To Capt. T, Brodie,
Principal Assistant Commissioner of Assam. piciae on cece
I1I.—Journal of Captain Herbert’s Tour from Almorah in aN, Ww. W., and
S. W. direction, through parts of the province of Kemaon and British
Gurhwal, chiefly in the centre of the Hills, vide No. 66, Indian Atlas.
(Edited by J. H. Batten, Esq. C. S.) .... od ale wed eens
667
iv Contents.
Page.
1V.—Notes on Nerbudda Fossils. By Dr. G. G. Spilsbury, H. C. M. S. ( With
plates, ) oe ecco cove Pees cove Cree Shee 7O5
V.—On the specific Gravity of Sea Water. By J. Middleton, Esq. C.S. F.G.S., 766
V1.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of September, 1844, ....Ixxxv
No. 154.
I.—Extracts from a report of a journey into the Naga Hills in 1844. By Mr.
Browne Wood, Sub-Assistant Commissioner, ina letter to Captain A. Sturt,
Principal Assistant Commissioner, Nowgong, dated 14th April, 1844, Go-
laghat, +. cece Arse eos eos eave een ayes |
I1.—Notes taken on a Tour aio: parts of Baloochisthan, in 1838 and 1839, by
Hajee Abdun Nubee of Kabul. Arranged and translated by Major Robert
Lech. (Concluded, ) ee eecoe eeece eoee e@ete @ese 786
Il1.—Itinerary from Yezd to Herat, from the Political Secretariat of the Go-
vernment of India, ee eove eeoe eerve eoce Bece 827
1V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of October, 1844,..++....XCVii
No, 155.
I.—Extracts from the late Dr. Voysey’s Journals, when attached to the Trigono-
metrical Survey in Southern and Central India, .... «ey cose 859
11.—Geological Remarks during the March from Benares (Old road,) via Ha-
zareebaugh, Bankoora and Burdwan to Barrackpoor. By Dr. J. Row,
B. M. S., ee @eseoe e@eee e@oee eee eevee @eee 862.
II1I.—A Geographical Notice of the Valley of Folidabad. By Capt. G. H.
MacGregor, C. B. ee eeee geee eeee eete eee 867
1V.—An account of a remarkable Aerolite, which fell at the village of Manic-
gaon, near Eidulabad in Khandeesh. Communicated, with a specimen, to
the Asiatic Society, by Capt. James Abbott, B. A. late Resident Nimaur.
With a Chemical #xamination by H. Piddington, .. eee. 880
V.—A few Notes on the subject of the Kumaon and Rohilcund Tutaee: By J.
H. Batten Esq., Civil Service, wed’ cele oce a Ah esee SOF
VI.—The Osteology of the Elephant. From the India Sporting Review. (two
plates, ) .. ecee coins cess wove veee cose OLD
VI1l.—Queries respecting the Human Raee, to be addressed to Travellers and
others.. Drawn up by a Committee of the British Association for the ad-
vancement of Science, appointed in 1839, and circulated by the Ethnogra-
phical Society of London. .... eee sees . eves 919
V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the Month of avalos 1844, ..0. CXXI
No. 156.
I.—‘‘On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhimalayas,”’ by B. H. Hodgson,
Esq: with some additions and annotations.—a Synopsis of the Indian Pari,
—and of the Indian Fringillide, By EK. Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic So-
ciety’s Museum, evee oooe cree woee eose @ece 933
I].—Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieutenant R. Baird Smith, Ben-
gal Engineers. ones As ah Eyal oes ecee s/o ntwe owes 964
11I.—Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula from Masulipatam to Goa,
comprising remarks on the origin of the Regur and Laterite; occurrence
of Manganese veins on the latter, and on certain traces of aqueous denuda-
tion on the surface of S. India. By Captain Newbold, F. R. S.,.. oh. 984
1V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the month of December, 1844, ., exxxili
inuoex
TO PART II, VOL, XIV.
Page.
Aerolite; An account of a remark-
able, which fell at the village of
Manicgaon, with a specimen, sent
to the Asiatic Society, by Capt.
James Abbott. With a Chemical
Examination by H. Piddington,.. 880
Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. Notice on the.
By Captain Newbold, .. He Gao
Baloochisthan. Notes taken on a Tour
through parts of, in 1838 and 1839,
by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul.
Arranged and translated by Major
Robert Leech, sas -» 667-786
Boodhist Coin or Medal. Remarks
on a, sent to the Society through
Captain Macleod, by H. H. the
Prince of Mekkara. By Captain
T. Latter,
Cashmeeree Language. A Grammar
of the. By Major R. Leech, .... 553
Commerce of the Arabs. Some ori-
ginal Passages ou the early. Com-
municated by Dr. A. Sprenger, .. 519
Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar
Route from, through the Sakhee
Sarwar Pass and Buzdar, with
other routes. By Major R. Leech, 527
Elephant. The Osteology of the,
From the Indian Sporting Review. 915
Extracts from the late Dr. Voysey’s
Journals. Trigonometrical Survey
in Southern and Central India, .. 853
Valley of Jullalabad. A Geologi-
cal Notice of the. By Capt. G. H.
MacGregor, ....
Geological Remarks during the March
from Benares (Old Road,) via
Hazareebaugh, Bankoora and Bur-
dwan to Barrackpoor. By Dr. J.
Row, .. Sete sitar
History of the TYoorks, by Baron
Hammer Von Purgstall Index to.
By Dr. E. Roer, views
Indian Earthquakes. Memoir on.
By Lieutenant RK. Baird Smith, ..
Journal of Capt. Herbert, on a lour
from Almorah through parts of the
province of Kemaon and British
Gurhwal, chiefly in the centre of
the Hills. Edited by J. H. Batten
Esq. 6 eee 734
ese e@een e@eee &
867
862
eeee
550
964
Page.
Kassia Hills, and People. Notes on
the. By Lieut. HH: Yule, e®eesee*e 612
Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. A
few Notes on the subject of the.
By J. H. Batten, Esq.,..
Masulipatam to Goa, Notes, chiefly
Geological, across the Peninsula
from comprising remarks on the
Regur and Laterite, By Capt.
Newbold, F. R. S. ..-- Secs
Naga Hills, Flora of the, by J. W.
Masters, &sq. To Capt. T. Brodie,
Naga Hills in 1844 Extracts from a
report of a journey into the. By
Mr. Browne Wood, in a letter to
Captain A. Sturt,.. ..+. ea
Navigation of the river Nurbudda,
Notes on the. By Mr. A. Shakes-
pear, oe ecee coon seve 495
Nerbudda Fossils, Notes on. By Dr.
G. G. Spilsbury, ease 700
Osseous Breccia and Deposit in the
Caves of Billa Soorgum, Southern
India. Noteonthe. By Captain
Newbold, ...... awa dese O10
Political Events that occurred in the
Carnatic, View of the principal,
dissolution of the ancient Hindoo
Government, in 1564 till the Mo-
gul Government was established
in 1687, on the Conquest of the
Capitals of Beejapoor and Golcon-
da. By Colonel Mackenzie, ....
Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie-
ty, lxii-lxxiil-lxxxV-xcvli-cxxi-cxxxili
Queries respecting the Human Race,
to be addressed to ‘l'ravellers and
others. Drawn up by a Com-
mittee of the British Association
for the advancement of Science,..
Sea Water. On the Specific Gravity
of. By J. Middieton, Esq. ......
Subhemalayas, On the Leiotrichane
Birds of the, by B. H. Hodgson,
Esq: with some additions annota-
tions,—a Synopsis of the Indian
Pari,—and of the Indian Fringil-
lide. By E. Blyth, .... csese 993
Yezd to Herat, Itinerary from the
Political Secretariat of the Go-
esee O27
887
2266
707
771
78
219
766
vernment of India,
INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS
TO PART II, VOL. XIV.
Page.
AppotTt, Capt. James. An account
of a remarkable Aerolite, which fell
at the village of Manicgaon, near
Eidulabad in Khandeesh. Commu.
nicated with a specimen, to the
Asiatic Society. With Chemical
Examination by H. Prppineton, 830
Batten, J. H. Esq. Journal of
Captain HERBERT’s Tour from Al-
morahina N. W., W., and S. W.
direction, through parts of the pro-
vince of Kemaon and British Gurh-
wal, chiefly in the centre of the
Hills,.. bei ie ake seagenoe
— —— A few Notes
on the subject of the Kumaon and
Rhohilcund Turaee, .... ere
Biytu, E. Esq. ‘‘On the Leiotri-
chane Birds of the Subhimalayas,’’
by B. H. Hodgson, Esq : with some
additions and annotations.—a Sy-
nopsis of the Indian Pari,—and of
the Indian Fringillide,.. eses Ooo
ETHNOGRAPHICAL Society of Lon-
don, Queries respecting the Human
Race to be addressed to Travellers
and others. Drawn up by a com-
mittee of the British Association
for the advancement of Science,. 919
GoveERNMENT OF Inp1a, Itinerary
from Yezd to Herat, from the Po-
litical Secretariat, BN A Pre. 7]
Inpian Sportine Review. The
Osteology of Elephant. From the, 915
Larter, Captain ‘Il’. Remarks ona
Boodhist Coin or Medal, sent to
the Society through Captain Mac-
leod, Assistant Commissioner, Ten-
asserim, by H. H. the Prince of
Mekkara, ..s.« “veel
Leecu, R. Major. Route from Dera
Ghazeen Khan to Candahar, thro.
the Sakhee Sarwar Pass and Buz-
dar with other routes,.... sepemded
——_——_————— Grammar of the
Cashmeeree Language, ........ 503
Notes taken on
a Tour through parts of Baloo-
chisthan, in 1838 and 1839, by Ha-
jee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul, 667-786
MacGrecor, G. H. Capt. A Geo-
graphical Notice of the Valley of
Jullalabad, es. oe ah)
Page.
MackeEnzix, CoLonEL. View of the
principal Political Events that oc-
curred in the Carnatic, from the
dissolution of the Ancient Hindoo
Government in 1584 till the Mo-
gul government was established in
1687, on the Conquest of the Capi-
tals of Beejapoor and Golconda, ., 578
Masters, J. W. Esq. Flora of the
Naga Hills, To Capt. T. Brodie,.. 707
MippLETON, J. On the specific Gra-
vity of Sea Water, .... ese 400
NeEwBoLp, Captain. Note on the
Osseous Breccia and Deposit in the
Caves of Billa Soorgum, Southern
Turlig,..c5e's eevee e@eeo 610
——————_——_—— Notice of the
Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat,.... Sieh oe
——— Notes, chiefly
Geological, across the Peninsula
from Masulipatam to Goa, compri-
sing remarks on the origin of the
Regur and Laterite, .... coee 984
ProceEpDiINnGs of the Asiatic Socie-
ty, lxil-]xxiil-1Xxxv-xcvii-cxxi-cxxxili
Roger, E: Dr. Index to History of
the ‘loorks, by Baron Hammer
Von Purgstall,.. wala OW)
Row, J. Dr. Geological Remarks
during the March from Benares,
(Old Road,) via Hazareebaugh,
Bankoora and Burdwan to Bar-
rackpoor, sees 862
SHakespgar, A. Mr. Note on the
Navigation of the river Nurbud-
dshinutate
Smith, Bairp R. Lieutenant. Me- :
moir on Indian Earthquakes. .... 964
Spitspury, G. G. Dr. Notes on
Nerbudda Fossils,.. .... pint POD
SPRENGER, A. Dr. Some original
Passages on the early Commerce
of the Arabs, .. walls omit Blo
Voysry, Dr. Extracts from his Jour-
nals, when attached to the Tri-
gonometrical Survey in Southern
and Central India, .... eoee 853
Woop, Browne Mr. Extracts froma
report of a journey into the Naga
Hills in 1844, in a letter to Capt.
A. Sturt,.. @eore ee2ee @eee 771
Yue, H. Lieut. Notes on the
Kasia Hills, and People, ........ 612
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY.
Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. By Mr. A. SHAKESPEAR,
Assistant Secretary to Government N. W. P.
The benefit which would result from opening a direct communica-
Importance of the tion from the sea into the heart of Central India, by
aulgject. means of the Nurbudda river, was acknowledged
by Major General Sir J. Malcolm as far back as 1820, and steps
were taken by that officer for collecting the necessary information.
Since then, although no regular scientific enquiry has been insti-
tuted, yet Government has, from time to time, shewn itself alive to
the importance of using the stream of the Nurbudda as a medium
of communication, and making it an outlet for the produce of the
neighbouring country.
Upon its waters the produets of the valley of the Nurbudda, rich
Channel tor the in mineral and vegetable resources, would be borne
produce of the valley : ; :
of the Nurbudda. to a market, and available for adding incalculably
to the national wealth.
But it is only of late years, since extensive coal beds have been
Making coal beds diseovered to exist within a short distance of its
pear: banks, and the value of the mineral to be there pro-
cured has been tested and established, that the still greater importance
of this stream has been felt.
No. 151. No. 67, New Sertzs. 3 Y¥
496 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. [No. 151.
In the present day, when steam communication has become so ex-
tensive and so necessary, we cannot too deeply feel the importance of
relying upon this country alone for the supply of coal required for its
consumption. No coal has been found nearer to Bombay than that
above alluded to in the Hosungabad district. All this supply there-
fore would be available for the western coast. The discovery of coal
beds at a nearer point than they are now, is so remote a contingency,
that it can hardly be said to affect the present question.
The following compilation has been made with a view to exhibiting,
in a concise form, all the authentic information which has been ob-
tained up to the present time regarding this important river.
The materials from which it has been drawn, consist chiefly of
Information whence Official documents on the records of Government,
ey extending from 1520 to the present time. An ex-
tract has, however, been appended from an interesting report, to be
found in Appendix No. II, of Malcolm’s Central India, on the Geo-
logy of that part of the country, furnished by Captain Dangerfield.
The map (reduced from one compiled in the Office of the Surveyor
General of India,) which will be found attached, shews the course of
the river from Hosungabad to the sea. On it the principal obstacles
to the navigation are noted.
The amount of information already acquired may be best exhibited
The information PY dividing the whole length of the river, from
how tobe exhibited. Fiogyngabad to the sea, into three portions, and
treating each separately.
Ist. From Hosungabad to Mundleysir.
2d. From Mundleysir to Tulluckwara, and
3d. From Tulluckwara to Baroche.
Hosungabad to Mundleysir.—The river taking its rise in Gond-
Ist Portion. warra passes Hosungabad in a stream of about 900 yards
broad, and is at this point, distant about 318 miles, in a direct line
from the sea.
Between Hosungabad and Mundleysir our first information re-
Ist. Native Sur. garding the stream is derived from a report made
veyor in 1833-31. by a native surveyor employed by Captain Ouseley,
Principal Assistant to the Governor General’s Agent at Hosunga-
bad. |
1844. | Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 497
This survey* was made in 1833-34, and from it Captain Ouseley,
considered that “ the possibility of making the whole river navigable
exists, but the expenses would be great, with the exception of Dha-
dree, where a loch would be requisite, or portage if an uninterrupted
navigation were adopted. There is no place from Behraghur near Jub-
bulpoor to the mouth of the river, that might not be rendered passable
for such boats as are now used, thirty or forty feet long and eight or
ten wide, flat bottoms. All the places in the sketch marked as rapids
could, with trifling expenee, be rendered passable. Mundhar, twenty
or twenty-five miles east of Dhadree, is a fall of ten feet, but on one
side a rapid only, and could be eleared. From Dowlutpoor to Oon-
kerjee, the sides are high rocks generally, and a contracted and very
rapid current running among detached rocks and islets.”
The rest of this portion he speaks of as wide and navigable. Regard-
ing the fall of forty feet at Dhadree, he considered, that even if this
proved an insurmountable obstacle to a continued navigation, it might
be made a place for unloading above, and replacing the goods in other
boats below the fall ; a portage of half a mile only would be required.
It must be borne in mind, however, that these opinions were ex-
pressed upon the report of a native surveyor, who, although a man of
apparent intelligence, could have had no experience, and very limit-
ed knowledge of the means available for improving navigation. It
does not appear, moreover, that he took any steps for ascertaining with
accuracy the fall of the river, or making such observations as would
afford grounds for deciding on the steps which would be necessary for
overcoming the obstructions to be met with,
In 1840, in consequence of the repeated representations of Lieutenant
9a. Lieut. Hore’s Hore, Junior Assistant at Saugor, an experimental
experimental trial. trial + to transport coal by rafts from Hosungabad
was made on a small scale by Lieutenant Browne, Principal Assistant
at Hosungabad.
In reporting in November 1840, the total failure of the attempt,
Captain Browne writes as follows: ‘‘ From Hosungabad to a distance
of 20 or 25 miles below Hindea, the river is open during the rains;
* The original survey is not to be found on record, Captain Ouseley appears only
to have submitted the result of it with his opinions.
Tt Made between August and November, 1840,
498 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. [No. 1851.
but there, from the description of the person sent with the boat, a fall
of a considerable height is met with, sufficient to stop the progress of
any boat; every inducement was held out to the boatmen to proceed
further, but they flatly refused, and would not even permit their
empty boat to advance without being insured the value of it.”
““From enquiries made of the boatmen at Hindea, it seems that no
boat has ever been known to pass this plaee, and it is considered by
them an impossibility.”
Captain J. Abbott, late Assistant in Nimar, whilst in charge of
3d. Capt. Abbott. that district, “lost no opportunity of collecting, and
noting down, all the information procurable from persons who had
visited the principal obstacles.” His own actual knowledge was li-
mited to the boundaries of his district. From what this officer states
in his observations upon the obstacles impeding the navigation of the
river, submitted in March of the present year, it appears that from
enquiries he had made, the river is navigable, (except in the driest
season, when it is spread over too wide a surface,) from Hossungabad
to within 20 miles of the Dhadree falls. That at Dhadree it is preci-
pitated over a ledge of rocks forty feet in height, and for about 20
above this, navigation is impeded by roeks and rapids. The rest of
this portion, 2. e. from Dhadree to Mundleysir, is navigable the greater
part of the year to vessels of light burden ; but during the very dry
months, from the middle of March to the middle of June, the water
at the rapids is too shallow to float the larger river craft.
Regarding the second portion ; viz. from Mundleysir to Tulluckwara,
1Id Portion. we have fuller and more satisfactory information.
As early as 1820, Major General Sir J. Malcolm had contemplated
Ist. Lieut. Mathias? Opening a river communication with Baroche, and
journey in 1820. = with this object several officers were deputed by
him to survey the course of the stream. The following extract from
a Journal of a Voyage made down from Mundleysir by Lieutenant V.
Mathias, of the 6th Regiment N. I. gives us our first information res-
pecting this portion of the river :—
‘ Left Mundleysir on the morning of the 26th March 1820, in an
open boat called a punt, made out of a single tree, about 12 feet in
length, 20 inches in breadth, and drawing 18 inches water, with my-
self, two boatmen, and a small quantity of baggage.
1844, ] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda, 499
* From Mundleysir to the Hern Phall, a distance of eighty (80) miles,
there is an uninterrupted navigation for small boats from the com-
mencement of the Monsoon till the end of April, and it is then only
interrupted in one place,* three miles below Muheysir, where part of
the river falls down a small precipice, and a back stream is there
made use of for the boats. But during the last six weeks of the hot
weather, from the shallowness of the water, and the boatmen neglect-
ing to deepen the back stream as the water decreases, it of course
becomes dry ; but should it ever be required to be made use of during
those six weeks, I have no doubt, from the appearance of the river, that
a little labor would make it navigable all the year round.
* From the nature of the rocky bed of the Nerbudda at the Hirun
Phall, I conceive it impossible that the obstacles to navigate it could
ever be surmounted. From the circumstance of small ridges of rocks
running parallel to each other in the river, and only distant from
twelve to twenty feet, it causes such a rush of water through them,
that the boatmen are afraid to pass it, being unable to guide the boat
elear of the rocks; and one which I prevailed upon the men with some
difficulty to make the attempt with, was upset, and the men much bruis-
ed against the rocks. Buta still greater obstacle exists about a mile
below that, where nearly the whole water of the river rushes into a
channel not more than forty yards broad, attended with a consider-
able fall, and with such violence, that any boat trying to pass it, must
inevitably be lost.
** Finding myself unable either to proceed along the bed of the river
or in a boat, I determined upon getting down to Hamp Island, in the
expectation that I should there be able to get boats and return by the
river to the Hirun Phall, or if not, proceed from thence to Baroche ;
for which purpose I came back about three miles, and landed on the
North bank of the river at the small village of Dhair, and proceeded
nearly due North to Kooksee along a good cart road, distance ten
miles and seven furlongs. From hence I marched in a North-west
direction to Rajpoor, distance twenty-nine miles and one furlong ; also
a good cart road, but the last twenty miles is through a thick jungle. I
then moved in a Southerly direction to Allie Mohun, through an
* Luhesvidara.
500 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. | No. 151.
open jungle, distance nine miles and five furlongs, till within two miles
of the place, when it thickens to a deep jungle with small hills. From
that to Moondlah, a distance of twelve miles in a South-west direc-
tion, through a deep moving country, in many places well cultivated
by the Kressans, or Bhillala tribe, and thickly studded with large
mowah trees. From this I went to Oomtee in a Westerly direction,
ten miles, through a beautiful cultivated country, thickly planted
with the largest description of mowah trees; and from hence to
Hamp, in a South-east direction, by the Gore Ghaut, is ten miles and
six furlongs, and is through a wild hilly and jungle country, culti-
vated in spots for the first five miles by the Kressans.
« Here I was much disappointed in finding myself unable to pro-
ceed in any direction, from the nature of the country and the rocky
bed of the river; and to add to my further disappointment, not a
boat was to be procured, nor could I hear of one ever having been
seen between the Hirun Phall and Mokree, except the punt, or small
passage boat at this place, now useless from its decayed state. The
bed of the river is here, when full, about two furlongs in breadth, with
masses of large rocks in every direction, and the water at this time
confined within a narrow deep channel from twenty to forty yards
in breadth, as far as I could see from the highest hill in the neighbour-
hood ; and in one spot that I went to the channel was not ten yards
in width, the water rushing through it with a slight fall and tremen-
dous force. Nothing now remained, but to make my way to Makree
by the nearest route I could find; but not being able to take my
baggage through hills, I was obliged to go to Kewaunt in Guzerat,
and only distant from the Gore Ghaut in a Northerly direction eight
miles. From that I went to Barsnee, in a South-west direction
twenty-one miles and seven furlongs, through an highly cultivated
country, thickly studded with mangoe, mowah, palmira and other
forest trees. From hence to Tulluckwara on the Nurbudda, in a
South-west direction is twenty miles and seven furlongs, through an
open jungly country.
“ Here I again embarked, and went up the river as far as Mokree,
distance about twenty miles, and there found an insurmountable ob-
stacle to navigation in a fall of the river which of itself is inconsider-
able, but prevents the possibility of a boat ever passing it. I then re-
1844. ] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 501
turned to Tulluckwara, where I had left my baggage, from inability
to take it with me from the hilly nature of the country.”
In addition to this, and in order to establish the fact of the naviga-
Qd. Major Wilson’s bility between Mundleysir and Chiculdah beyond
journey. a doubt, Major Wilson, at Sir J. Malcolm’s request, *
went from the Hirun Phall to Mundleysir in the end of July 1820,
“ when the small quantity of rain that had fallen rendered the river
uncommonly low for the season.”
“The resultt of the examination of this part of the river,” Sir J.
Malcolm writes, ‘‘ was that with the exception of the portage of Lu-
hesvidurrah near Moheysir, where the river, from the fall or rather
rapid, is always very difficult, and sometimes dangerous ; the naviga-
tion between Mundleysir and Chiculdah was practicable for light
craft nine or ten months in the year.”
Major Wilson also informed Sir J. Malcolm, that from his enquiries,
and from the meteorological observations he made whilst he was at
Mundleysir, it appeared that the wind blew at this time of year
almost always from the West, increasing with the Monsoon, and
enabling boats, when the current was at its height, to stem it, and to go
in two or three, and sometimes in one day from Chiculdah to Muheysir.
He stated, that the river between Hirun Phall and Mundleysir was
almost straight, and that this was a great advantage to the flat-bottomed
boats, as they never had to shift sail in coming up. In going down,
they were aided by the current and resorted to punting, where that
was slack and the water shallow.
Lieutenant J. Anderson of the 17th Regiment Bombay N. I.
3d. Lieut. Ander- WaS appointed to survey the Nurbudda between
son’s journey in 1842. Hindea and Hirun Phall in October 1841, but owing
to the non-arrival of the necessary instruments, he was prevented from
making any regular survey. When ordered to join his Regiment at
Bombay, he resolved to proceed vid Baroche in a canoe, “ hoping to
contribute somewhat to the scanty information already possessed
regarding the very difficult portion of the river between Hirun Phall
and Soolpan.”
* In a boat which Sir J. Malcolm mentions, as ‘‘a large and rather heavy passage
boat.”’
t We obtain our knowledge of the result of Major Wilson’s trip through Sir J.
Malcolm. No Journal by Major Wilson being on record.
502 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. [No. 151.
The following extract from his report gives the result of his obser-
vations as far down as Tulluckwara, with an account of the measures
he was compelled to adopt when stopped in his further progress at
the mouth of the Hatnee river :—
“IT left Mundleysir on the morning of the 21st March 1842, in
one of the ordinary passage boats used at the ferry, halted for the
night at Kuttora, and arrived at Chiculdah on the evening of the
22d at sunset.
“‘ This portion of the river, fifty-one miles in length, is navigable by
boats lightly laden until nearly the end of the dry weather, with the
exception of the rapids called Sahesur Durrah, which are about two
miles below the town of Muheysir.
*‘This is rather a formidable obstruction, consisting of a belt of
rock stretching diagonally across the river, and intersected by a great
many narrow and tortuous channels, through which the water rushes
with great impetuosity, until it is finally precipitated over a shelf
about eight or ten feet in height into a sort of trough, at the extre-
mity of which it again becomes navigable. Luckily, however, there is
a back stream near the Southern bank, which affords a rather difficult
passage for unladen boats until within about a month of the rains,
but might easily be made practicable throughout the year by means
hereafter explained.
‘* Between this and Chiculdah there are a few shallows and rapids,
but I observed no obstacle particularly worthy of notice, and have no
doubt that a comparatively trifling outlay would render this portion
of the river available for boats much larger than that I sailed in,
for nearly, if not quite, the whole of the year.
“ From Mundleysir to Chiculdah, the bed and banks of the river pre-
sent every where nearly the same features which may be exhibited
by the following section :—”’
High Bank.
b) BAT ee Mar.
.f Low Bank.
Pebbles imbedded i
Bed of the river. peak ea basalt ee ‘
Basalt chiefly columnar per-
pendicular to the plane of the
river, very rarely granite in
solitary masses.
1844. ] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 303
**T left Chiculdah on the morning of the 26th, passed Hirun Phall,
slept on the bank of the stream nearly opposite to the village of Burk-
hery, and reached the mouth of the Hatnee next evening the 27th,
where we spent the night on a rock in the centre of the river.
“ Our progress was unimpeded for twenty-five miles below Chicul-
dah, the river having mostly the appearance above described, until we
reached Dhurnarag, and (spelt Dhurmcote in the plan,) where it makes
a bend to the South, and its aspect is totally changed. Here there is a
gradual increase in the strength of the current, the rocks become
larger and more numerous, and the stream being somewhat contract-
ed, is divided into several channels through which it darts with consi-
derable force.
“ Although I experienced little difficulty in passing this rapid, and
have ascertained that light boats may be taken up and down at this
season without danger, if guided with ordinary care, it is nevertheless
to be considered a serious obstruction to navigation, since from the
position of the rocks it must be a dangerous spot when the river is
swollen, and from its extent it would require a good deal of labour to
make it generally available for traffic.
“‘ This is one of those places which, on the score of expense, it might,
at first sight be thought advisable to avoid by means of a road; but a
more accurate inspection than I had time to afford, would I conceive,
shew the possibility of overcoming even this obstacle at no very enor-
mous cost, partly by clearing the channel, and perhaps partly by the
mode recommended in my concluding remarks.
“ Below this the river is deep, and continues so to the Hirun Phall,
about a mile further down, where the greater part of it rushes through
a channel only a few yards in width, with a force against which it
would be useless to contend.
“The fall of this rapid is gradual, its channel varies little in breadth,
and throughout its entire length, which is considerable, the water
is broken into foam. But notwithstanding its formidable appearance,
of which its length is the most discouraging feature, I am by no
means inclined to regard it as so important as has been represented,
its proximity to the bank and the slope and position of the neighbour-
ing rocks being particularly favourable for the construction of a road
or locks, as might be found most convenient.
3 Z
504 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. [No. 151.
‘I here left the large boat, as originally intended, having brought
with me a canoe hollowed out of a single tree, and remarkably strong,
in which I proposed to make the rest of the voyage. This we
managed to get down with but trifling injury, not however until it
had been repeatedly upset, and once or twice sunk, although I had a
couple of strong ropes attached to it, and the assistance of five or six
persons to guide it.
“If found expedient a road, apparently about a mile and a quarter
in length, might be made on the northern side of the river, by
which both this and the rapid above might be cut off ; but owing to
the unevenness of the banks its construction would be expensive, and
it may reasonably be doubted, if the saving obtained by adopting this
plan in preference to others would counterbalance the disadvantages
of a mixed communication. This question can be determined only
by the most careful levelling, and a thorough and minute examination
of the spot during the different phases of the river.
“‘ Between this and Kukranuh, which is about sixteen miles below
Hirun Phall, I met with only three interruptions, so exactly alike,
that one description will answer for all. At these places there is an
abrupt descent of the river, and the channel becomes suddenly con-
tracted, the stream rushing through with such violence, that we were
obliged to use every precaution in letting down the canoe. However,
it luckily happens that in all of these the fall is inconsiderable, and
the channel narrows only in that particular spot, so that unlike the
Hirun Phall, there being no length of rapid to overcome, the difficulty
of making them navigable would be comparatively small.
‘«* With these exceptions, I found the voyage both easy and pleasant,
and it struck me, that from Hirun Phall to Kukranuh, there were
fewer shallows and a greater portion of really navigable water, than in
any portion of the river of the same length that I had met with
above.
‘*At Dhurmeaj, as before stated, the bed of the river is slightly
contracted, but below it resumes nearly its ordinary width, the main
body of the stream being in most places confined to a narrow channel
somewhat resembling a canal. A little below Hirun Phall, the rocks
rise on both sides in perpendicular walls, and the water is uncom-
monly deep, flowing fora long way with a gentle current, and with-
1844. ] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 505
out the slightest impediment. It is also worthy of remark, that in the
spots already alluded to, where there are serious obstructions, the
rock is but little elevated above the surface of the stream, and that
for nearly the whole way from Hirun Phall to Kukranuh there is a Jow
bank either on one side or the other, but generally on both, where a
road might be constructed if necessary. The hills on either hand are
pretty high, and covered with jungle.
*Kukranuh is a Bheelallee village in the Rajpoor territory, and
situated on the Eastern bank of the Hatnee, about a mile from the
Nurbuddah.
“ Here I was unfortunately compelled to abandon the idea of follow-
ing the course of the river, the boatmen, from the reports they had
heard of the unsettled state of the country, refusing to proceed any
further without an escort to protect them. I accordingly remained at
the village for three days, trying every expedient that I could think of ;
but although I offered a handsome reward, no one could be prevailed
on to accompany me to Haump, so great was their dread of the
Bheels. Finding therefore that nothing more could be done, and un-
willing to incur censure by any further delay, I was forced reluctantly
to make for ‘Tuliuckwara by land, intending to proceed thence by
water to Baroche.
“On the 31st, I marched four coss North to Walpoor, a village belong-
ing to Rajpoor Allee, reached Chucktollah on the Ist April in a wester-
ly direction eight coss, and Kona at five coss West on the 2d, on the
3d I proceeded to Barnee and arrived at Tulluckwara on the 4th.
“There is a garree track the whole way, having the appearance of
being much used, whieh the natives told me was the case ; in some
parts it leads through a pretty thick jungle, and here and there it is
hilly, but no where very steep, and on the whole, it is as good a road
as most of its kind.
“I was informed that there is a direct road from Wallpoor to Chi-
culdah ; and subsequently learnt, that there is a shorter route from
Kowant to Tulluckwara than by Barsnee; from which we may infer,
that should my information prove correct, this would probably be the
best line of road for establishing a land communication between Chi-
culdah and Tulluckwara. The distance from Kowant, through
Barsnee to Tulluckwara, is about forty-one miles, and that from
506 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. (No. 151.
Walpoor to Chiculdah, cannot, I think, exceed forty, so that taking
the shorter route from Kowant to Tulluckwara, and reckoning the
coss at two miles, the entire length of road would be about one
hundred miles, and Dhurmraj being fifty miles lower down, the dis-
tance might be still further reduced by making that the debarking
point, instead of Chiculdah.”
From* the information gleaned by Captain Abbott it appears, that
4th. Capt. Abbott. the river between Mundleysir and Chiculdah is na-
vigable for lightly burdened boats for the greater part of the year.
Below Chiculdah, he says, the stream is broken by long ledges of rock
into a number of narrow channels, forming what is called the Hirun
Phall, or Deer’s Leap. ‘These rocks, he further states, were described
as being extremely solid, and severed by intervals of sixteen or eighteen
feet.
«p.; ‘
! Dunneer, 3 do. above Warmong. ( Raja Ker Dun
Southern side
of the river,
J) nee.
North side of | Wargaum, opposite Mokree. : ;
the river, (Guddur, 44 miles above Wargaum. ‘ Rajpeplia.
“ Q. What description of boat can go up to Mokree?
** A. Toonies drawing two hands water (three feet,) when loaded
can go up as far as I have ever traded (to Dunneer.)
‘* @. How do you get your boats up from Chaundode to Mokree?
“A, Tracked up; the sails are of little use then, the wind being
mostly down the river.
“* @. How many men do you put in your boats then?
** A. Eight, ten and twelve.
“‘Q. Does the water run with great force then ?
“A. Equally as strong as in the month of July, 6, 7 and 8 miles
an hour.
“ Q. How much water in Chaundode Ghaut in the dry season?
‘A. Three hands (2 fathoms.) ©
** Q. How do you get your boats up the Mokree fall ?
“A. They are emptied of their contents, and then hauled up the
fall.
“‘@. How many men are necessary to get the boats up the fall ?
“A. Twenty.
** Q. How far have they to go before they can be reloaded ?
‘4. From eight hundred to a thousand feet?
“ Q, How is your merchandize transported that distance ?
‘* A. On men’s heads.
**@. Have they any hackeries at Mokree ?
‘A. No; the country is too mountainous.
1844,] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 515
““@. Can men be procured about Mokree to assist you with your
boats ?
** A. Plenty, at three and four annas per day.
“ @. What water at commencement of the fall ?
“‘ 4. Two hands (three feet), and above Mookree fall 4, 5, 6, 8,
10 and 12 hands, (as much as three fathoms.)
“@. How do you act coming back over the Mookree fall ?
“4. Empty the boats at the fall, and as there is not then sufficient
water to float the boats for about four or five hundred feet, they are
launched along a smooth bed of stones, which are very slippery, being
covered with a grassy substance, and they are guided down the fall
with little trouble, when the boats being reloaded, proceed with ease to
Chaundode in two and three days.
“@). Have you ever seen or heard of boats in great danger of being
lost going up the fall?
“A. No.
“ Q@. Can boats go up above Dunneer?
“A. Yes.
*Q. Why is trade not carried on above that place?
‘““ A. Because of the thieves, who would not pay above half the
price they would bargain to give for what we carry.
«‘] have measured one of the boats at Chaundode employed in the
trade to Mokree and above. Her length twenty-two feet, breadth four
feet and ten inches, depth two feet, her bottom quite flat.
“ August 20th. Reached Linnore, learnt there is a trade-to Mokree
and above, their cargoes are carried to Chaundode in large boats,
when they are put into the toonies and proceed as afore-men-
tioned.
“ August 25th. Entered the Bowapearra Ghaut, where we met
with much difficulty from a heavy fresh and unfavorable winds.
On September Ist, we reached Ramnapore, since which time we got
pretty well, until the fresh commenced, which compelled us to return
to Baroche.”
Lieutenant Anderson (the report of whose journey between Mund-
4th. Lieut. Ander- leysir and Tulluckwara has already been given,)
son in 1842, concludes the account of his trip as follows: —
“TI embarked at Tulluckwara on the morning of the 5th, and arrived
516 Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. (No. 151.
at Baroche on the 7th, having performed the entire journey from
Mundleysir in twelve days, not including the delays at Chiculdah
and Kukranuh, and I am convinced that I should have accomplished
it in less time, had I been permitted to proceed altogether by water.
“The following extract from the report drawn up by Captain
Dangerfield, and to be found in Appendix II, of Malcolm’s Central
India, gives some valuable and interesting information regarding
the bed and vicinity of the Nerbudda, and may well find a place
here. |
“The banks of the Nerbudda for a considerable distance between
Extract from Capt. Mundleysir and Chiculdah are from forty to seventy
Dangerfield’s Report : eA
on the Geology, &c. of feet high, and consist, independent of a thin upper
are eae 1, layer of rich vegetable mould, of two distinct strata
eee Central 4¢ alluvium the upper which is very light coloured,
contains a great quantity of indurated mar], and is strongly impreg-
nated with muriate of soda or common salt, which the natives extract
by lixiviation and subsequent evaporation by the sun, in shallow com-
partments near the banks, and sell it to the poorer classes, particularly
the Bheels in the neighbourhood. This stratum is usually from
thirty to forty feet thick.
“‘ The one on which it reposes, and from which it is divided by a
strongly marked horizontal line, and a difference of colour, (this last
being of a redder hue,) contains a very large proportion of carbonate
of soda in general, but slightly contaminated by the muriate. This bed
rarely exceeds ten or fifteen feet thick, and rests immediately on the
basalt forming the bed of the river. In the dry season, both these salts
form a thick efflorescence on the surface of the bank, and this alone is
collected by the natives. ‘That from the lower bed forms an article of
export for the use of the washermen, &c. &c. ; but the soda itself is not
extracted like the common salt, nor is its value but in the above way
known. % * * % * *
“ The bed of the Nerbudda, consisting as already remarked, for a
considerable portion of its course of basaltic rocks, gives rise to numer-
ous shallows and small falls. Of these, the three principal are, one at
Deyree, where the river is much contracted: a second at Semadarah, a
little below Mhysir; and a third at the Hurn Pahl, or Deer’s Leap,
below Chiculdah: whence, till its entrance into Guzerat, the stream
1844.] Note on the Navigation of the river Nurbudda. 517
finds its way contracted to within half its usual breadth between two
hilly ranges, and its course being much impeded, so as to render navi-
gation impracticable, by large masses and elevated ridges of the
rock.
‘Passing higher up the stream from Mundleysir, the Northern
bank, after about thirty miles, becomes rocky and precipitous, and
consists of gently inclined beds, chiefly of green stone slate, containing
interposed mica in small grains. But the island of Mundatta and
part of the opposite bank appear mostly to consist of horn stone slate
of a reddish or greenish grey, and sometimes porphyritic. Above this
for a considerable distance is, on each bank, a very wild woody tract,
resembling that already noticed below Chiculdah, excepting that the
river is in general deep, and less obstructed by rocks.
““This part consists of a succession of low hills and deep ravines
and water-courses, is covered with high thick forests, and is scarcely
capable of being travelled in most parts for seven or eight miles
from the river by any but foot passengers. Iron ore abounds ; but the
country being almost desolate, it is only smelted at Kantcole and
Chandgurh, for the supply of the Indore and neighbouring markets.
It is of a good quality, but from the imperfect mode of working, the
metal is little valued, excepting for common purposes. The hilly tract
below Chiculdah is better populated, chiefly by wild Bheel tribes ;
and nearer Broach on the Southern bank are the Rajpeeply hills, in-
habited by the Coolie tribe. In these hills are situated the several
cornelian mines, of which a concise account has been given by Doctor
Copland, in the first volume of the Bombay Literary Transactions.
From Burwaee to Chiculdah, the whole valley, from the Satpoora to
the Vindhya mountains, is nearly level, well watered, cultivated, and
inhabited.”
Supplement to Note on the Navigation of the Nerbudda River.
To make the Note more complete, a few extracts have been made
from a paper on the Nerbudda river, by Lieut.
Kk. P. DelHoste, 16th Regiment, N. I. to be
found in the Volume of Transactions of the Bombay Geographical
Society, from 1836 to 1838.
Vide Note at the end.
518 Supplement to Note on the Navigation of [ No. 151,
The information afforded by Lieutenant De |’ Hoste, although procur-
[Of Portion 1L.] “5 by him in 1829, will nee find a place here, as
6. — - —* it relates only to the portion of the stream be-
tween Soolpan and Tulluckwara. “This officer
informs us that he left Tulluckwara in April 1829, with the intention
of following the course of the river towards its source as far as he
could. He got as far as Soolpan,* at which point he writes, that ‘‘ the
‘stream of the river from being from 60 to 100 yards broad, suddenly
‘narrows to about 60 feet, and on each side is hemmed in with steep
“ precipices ; the middle of the river is also studded with large rocks,
“and the stream, even at this season, rushes through the intervals
“with surprising rapidity, dashing large pieces of wood which were
“ floating down from one side to the other with a force which no boat
‘could have withstood, neither indeed, would it be possible to steer a
“boat in such a rapid current through such a tortuous and narrow
*‘channel. Both banks are precipitous and covered with thick jungle,
‘‘and all further progress is rendered impossible.”
Regarding the stream at Mokree Ghaut, where he descended into the
bed of river, he says, ‘‘ at this place there is a ridge of rocks stretching
‘‘completely across the river, which is nearly one hundred yards
“ broad, causing a fall of about 12 feet in height. I took the oppor-
‘tunity of bathing in the river, the water of which was perfectly clear.
“The force of the current was such as to compel me to hold on by
“the large rocks, of which the river is full below the fall ; the bed
“was covered with large round pebbles, rendering it difficult to
“ walk.”
At the village of Goragaum (about 54 miles below Mokree,) he says,
“that the course of the river appeared impeded by rocks, through
“which the stream passed with a continued gurgling sound, that could
“be heard at a considerable distance.”
At Gurreysir, distant 6 miles from Tulluckwara on the right bank,
he crossed the stream in a good sized boat, and writes as follows re-
garding this part of the river: ‘‘ Beyond (2. e. above) this village, the
“river appeared full of large rocks, the passage for the water between
* Vide Transactions of the Bombay Geographical Society, from 1836 to 1838, No.
VI. p. 174.
:
niece
cs
litherences
teria Ieleinel Sacltration § months
wrdiabitedt
2 Makiovapner
2 Rerads
4 Nagern
5 Mag ris
6 Dusrpaaessnerh
Y Coosauns hut
8 Nawiret
2 Debcrmrre
0 Wines
8 Sarr
2 ide
[2 Hirteahk
1a Hier reapwore
1 Konnh
46 Futiopocr
17 Degroly
® Kotenh
@ Dew From Hatsuar to
20 fou Hanaper water
21 Hadar * hey Dted sh bee woiter
22 Darninupeore i
28 Kianyeatn
24 Aumaly —
aeurr
40 Farnn
44 Rengin
42 Sarmewilee
42 Ualecser
FE Dawunauin
416 Wagle
fae Morea sp cascore
42 Limumerce
48 Wargeen
49 Dorgan
$0 Atrana
& Toolkhenah
o¢ Dedeh
$8 Pullee Orda
4 Wump or
56 Sueredecrcanh
6 Lurnleak
£9 Ghrish
5? Cxleall
9 Rudcranach
60 Goolrasmunsady
Ol Grunerkeernk
OF Sanutehiowshe
62 Gocluvaunce
04 Cooxta.
[68 Bassoot
06 Bharroon
| OF Cunwe
Mahades
Comprlet in the Oice of the Swretyer Conevel of Tnctia, from Major
“f Mongorenn af avermnt extends
R = Wea
ha
QuUBEL
Dhergarmn
TLAN
Descriptive a the Navigamon of the
NERBUDDA RIVER
from
HOOSUNGABAD
te the
SHA.
rhe gyre be
Tica Survey of the Nerbuiide, from Tulluekiwera fe Lileer, and a Native Itmarary Sketch conpldtat (1
Wo Be GOB art GOK Clasia, $
Suite 6 Bip Miles fo f smok
Goceral: Mislielm's Hop of Mal
ATajpoow
Kamgurh,
DSueltanpoer
a, Limst Fle
Ipril,
S Fibrumry (240
Manxbow
\
— Werlihes
Fedluced. te ¢th of Original fer
the Jeurnad, As Sect of Berwad,
by HOM Srruth Oct 1044
®Mb leeyanniy
sAivwas
Naterans
Fosnanse™
Eo May
b
7
4
Meondae ,
Oorrabuerinvc
Featpoor
Ayjenthx
Nauwee
ve
Uiiergaer
wo Tada
oT Raton A
86 Dugurpoor
9 Putione
20 Siukhevrn
81 Wisjetter
22 Ovitettn
95 Jutposra
94 Bohasitier
95 Hungaun
ceregyausertt
87 Deere
99 Tousen
wo Hetla
1 Soolyuon.
D9 Heitlncarsteors
2 Kayon
S Butuan
4 hun0re
5 Vipultx
6 Kamgurh
7 Motakhud
Narula
16 Malka
LY Seereeraannens
| 26 Pulleegaun
29 Pitaantee
30 Sita
3 Hhitgawn
52 Dhuotica
33 Gungakheara
| S54 Moorater
SF fintghurra
Radtanp or
Erapesrs
o Sirla
Thea
Smrdepoora:
Bucheree
12 Kamery or
75 Unikaxjee Mabaray
44 Bugecoadea
48 Sillarn
46 Fukdoutgueh
49 Kontera
Tumtaus
Beery Krsvee
3 Chats. Najeve
By uncer
Necinmwer
Pellowra
Rate
Gechude
Gop yaum:
i Boorsah
Knlookary
Chrehelee
famfovr
Garendee
5 Peep ielywiurre
& Bagudpere
B. Chippmeveer
0 Letccrrd.
Veale hive
Arnah
Dermawar
S Buca Babevry
MacLlag hivert
Mircanpeer
Ganger
Putcore
Sraseepoor
Su Monae
Neenere
Mutheria
Picuce
Me Marreron
| | 88 eter
Grind Buegut. Tree avut: Nuheer Fits Shr
under it Leland Heharnt
ont free
dee
Micaseug porn
6 Siraar
7 Strsur DE
Vagleoguone
Tauothe
2° Wane
13 Asser
A Werratche +
15 Niowrns
16 Keypore
47 Keunidrode
18 Secsedrva
| 19 Oely
ao Lutle Pautna
21 Creat Passtnc
28 Murkarry
24. Poediar
25 Conner
86 Sanner
27 Great Banshee
2e Lille Bandari
29 Toone
$e Serew
Horde
LEFT BANK NERBUDDA
Wiesenperr
Gerahe
Towra
y Moh af
ee Tihunn Sevloer
1 Temple of Kur
#4 Sedlpan Mulindes Vi Gien seeesty
eo fealy place to Heniovs
ry wiles of Tver
Tier trees arud Meruze
waxed For 2 Gise Nunideve 20 tess
Seuth of Seelpan
Heeputehoap
i Cheri Dest
Badal,
Kertaundace
Corky
Cong gue
2 ulee
Bligruk a holy place
boats From above wie, belucen \
Has and. Soulpun iv bouts pisen;
| 68 Neasurperre
Keevmuaye
Necro
Viatearry
|| v2 heehty
78 Sithotee
Licrentad Wei, opp piss te LEICA
rapud.
Bamungxon
5 Barkost. —
Bhai
Nether ~
Adtulpeor
Akbuerpeor
Datkhavy
82 Buller
| & Berdosrneen
84 Paton
1
85 Dongergauns
Bucrkhery 50 Yards water Wiadle | 36 Subeenthars or 1000 Streams 1
Fald in 100 Feet of 6 bet To this
Rau a beat Can prrae eaarhy at
other tinea oily sneadl cancer
0 Brocka
both subes halls and junyzle the \ 8 Bulaaurn
witty of the Rewer hitle P wry \ 0 Now rastore
vaprat Mille rete froin Reve a Bango
suites Beat.
9S Movernt
| 56 Bjasson
5 Bowte
58 Svonmeul
, 99 Luton
oe Is te jeu
MU Fidetarn
RIVER
le go le baka unseen Front tha Gurhsd 6 Huhureta.
Oomly ta Baka
shalleue and rapret, low banta, sable on
overflows un Raw
touter
Thah
ia het
outage
winds | 10 Sabetaure
Po Ovnatethe
‘a Staged
16 Hindi
Puranuger ir
Aforpaiorr !
7
& Punneah,
g
Evapoer
10 Burede 20 Bh riatts
ex Sdlowele
<4 23 Lickore
at | 24 Chechare
25 happen
4 Kak-Blares rapul in $0 feat. 6 toe) 26 Rarngurk
Vi hong rapids called Blade Ker
Is Coduroopeora
3 Markundup Kovsies musren anc
rapid opponte Uniorjee
Aiwer eniy 100 fat anda vary
dup 3 fea water en raged
(5 Balle of Dharere 40 Fal in
faighi; 4 Branches or 5 im love
wwmter. un the
broken thet 90 or 100 Fat fron
Hock te Rock, boxte coma up | 3% Jape
to thes from Hirunphal 34 Pattoerak
to Junun Sunule Water & feet dap 55 Ayepah
nd vapul 36 veg vee
4 Sacer
@ Basin
19 Belourh
Yo Butlasee
et Hotelobe
28 Noord
29 Harsdpoor
Jo Dertcastecr
M Demawur
32 Baberve
rae an us
water) 2 Chole Jegrag hur
roars and a4
Mindhar for all
cor Water 2 feel aver rps} 9 Seoge oe Sogheepurh
27 Laesceghienn.
7 Burtue
uy, Bapud jas
fae ees
bouts
ed
Bavipooes
Malpoon
Bevri rice
Havre
Chowedt:
1844. the Nurbudda River. 519
* which was barely three or four feet, the total breadth was 80 yards
‘at this point, and the depth of water where I crossed (in the centre of
“the stream) 18 feet, measured with a pole; the right bank was low,
‘level, and slightly covered with jungle. * * * The left bank on the
“ contrary, was precipitous and rugged towards the river, but towards
“the South, numerous ranges of hills covered with jungle were visible.
«‘ These hills form the end of what is called the Sutpiri range. I may
‘add, that as far as Soolpan, the features of the country were similar.”
Between Gurreysir and Tulluckwara, ‘the road lay over a level and
* well cultivated tract of black soil; the course of the river was visi-
“ble the whole distance, and offered no impediments whatever to
‘navigation; the depth ascertained from the guides, varied from
‘twelve to fourteen feet.”
A. SHsKESPEAR,
Assist. Secy. to Govt, N. W. P.
Some original Passages on the early Commerce of the Arabs. Communi-
cated, by Dr. A. Sprenaer, B. M. S.
The Academy of Berlin offered some years ago a prize for the
best treatise on the commerce of the Arabs during the first three cen-
turies of the Khalifat, and the question has been answered in such a
manner, that the Academy awarded the prize to one of the candidates.
The prize essay has indeed the merit, that there are collected in it most
of the materials which were within the reach of the author; that is to
say, passages from original works which had been translated and printed.
But out of the thousands of Arabic manuscripts, which are preserved in
European libraries, not fifty have been translated. This prize essay is
therefore merely to be considered as a nucleus to which those who
have access to unedited sources may add new materials.
We may expect to find very detailed and exact information on the
Arabic commerce ; for early in the third century of the Hijarh, several
works have been written on the commerce of the Korayshites. One of
the authors of such a treatise is the celebrated historian Madayiny. I
have, however, never met with any quotation from these works, and if
4x,
520 Some original Passages on the early [No. 151.
Azraky, of whom we possess a history of Mekka,* gives no extracts
from them it is very likely that every trace of the information which
Madayiny and other diligent traditionists have gathered, is lost.
Aba ’Othmén Amr Bin Mahbub Kenany Jéhiz bole} + a man
of great learning, but of a very eccentric tendency of mind, wrote a
book on commerce l= j 3 ¥ BSI WLS which is frequently quot-
ed by Novayry, who died in A. H. 732, (A. D. 1331,) and it appears
therefore, that copies of this interesting book were still extant in the
fourteenth century. It seems, that most of the extracts which I have
collected on the commerce, flow originally from the same source, the
work of Jahiz.
The object of this Memoir being merely to publish inedited frag-
ments, the information which Masudy Edrisy and other authors give,
whose works have lately been published, can find no place in it.
I propose to give in another Memoir, some further notices on the
commerce of the Arabs with China and Polynesia, and of their geo-
graphical knowledge of the South seas.
I.— A passage from Ibn Khordadbeh.— On the Mercantile Roads.
Abt-l-kasim ’Obaydullah Bin Abdullah Ibn Khordadbeh, flou-
rished towards the end of the third century; this author has been the
object of considerable controversies among the orientalists of Europe.
Yet the two principal, nay, only passages on his life, having escaped
even the learning of De Sacy, it will be interesting if I insert here
one of the two; the other is contained in the second part of Al-
mas tidy, and I shall therefore translate it in the progress of that work.
In the Fihrist (MSS. of Paris, folio 202, recto, ) which has been written
in A. H. 377, the following notice is given of Ibn Khordadbeh :—
KIdIa 5S wlSs KISSD Goyd (sic) gon] ot A onre emlilta!
lois AF ly ony wlll gal Syid Ko all Og he hang Lpuoge”
ebeawS) pall are eh a Pear) re Bg 2 Yass eral) eas Jas!
cb yisd) US SILLS Atel GS Gay Gleatl pene CLS
rlkets clots! US $y331 Gols pill, galt ls
* There are several MSS. of this ancient work in Europe, one is at Cambridge which
has been left by Dr. Burckhardt, who in the preface to his Travels in Arabia, professes
to have largely made use of it.
+ Jahiz died in A. H, 255, (A. D. 868,) at an age of ninety-six years.
1844. ] Commerce of the Arabs. 521
* Abii-l-kasim Obaydullah Bin Ahmed (thus the name of our author’s
father is written in the Fibrist) Bin Khordadbeh. Khordadbeh, (the
grandfather of our author) was a Magian, and was converted to the
Islam by the Barmakides. Abd-l-kasim (our author) was consequently
appointed over the post and intelligence (spy) department in the pro-
vinces belonging to the Jebal, subsequently he came to the court of the
Khalif Mo’tamed (who came to the throne in A. H. 256,) and became
one of his privy counsellors. He wrote,
‘«*], Aisthetical observations on Music ; (Mas’tdy gives a very inter-
esting extract from this work in his life of Mo’tamed.) 2. On the most
celebrated Genealogies of the Persians. 3. On the Roads and King-
doms; (this is, the title of the Geographical work from which I derived
the following extract.) 4. On Drink. 5. On Playing and Amuse-
ments. 6. Onthe Stars.(?) 7. On Courtiers and Companions.”
The geography of Ibn Khordadbeh is the only work which we still
possess of this author, and of this there is only one copy in Europe.
The MS. in question is ancient, bearing the date of A. H. 630 (A. D.
1232,) but it wants in most instances the diacritical points. It is pre-
served in the Bodleyan Library at Oxford, (No. 993,) and has been
transcribed by the author of this Memoir for his own use in 1838, and
from this transcript, the following passage is derived :—
Karey Krag So Kewylitly eyyahis Gadi Keil yS a ggall jle%s
SI ele Wyilug pgs Ryliall, Roi, Kt SM
wy wer ys Wena sel splat, ze2osls whalss csjloz'ly
sty a) wpSytg Le? pics clal mms laginns opis SI
wos? ra @ Aas) i} JyX>y2 h> rly Ks wy? Ue? lao
I egille®t Sylane beayy cH ING Word 2 ei Loyal I
522 Some original Passages on the early | No. 151.
Bernard ax Sl Sho SS ler Igslic leayy Logclad Rpidetbaw dill
weaye? ist} ye ie} 3 we PGI LE® SyaSy2 Ilo oly Sie
yal 5 wars y2 2 Jal 2S Qo ,M) ihe Wigpemdg KSUbail,
whee SEM gos ML I Heol F wd ya od toes I
Yara yar, Vaio 3 US alls oils arwdls
Here is a lacuna in my MS., in which instead of copying the Arabic text I wrote a
few lines in a German translation, of which the meaning is given in the English
version added to this text. After that, my copy continues :—
abet Sayed Kylie
I> pled 5 Iona Solow ost 8 w 9e yee? ey La Ga? pot oot
ih wle re Wyo calls’ Soles lerys ere aslo mest ye
urd] wy? z= oan che we pe) es wgshenc Lols
Sig ySh Mod RX? MH panes oad mgr IN patad xis’ iyo 9
6) Rgivoy} (2 i WodsS Lazy s copra MT od RQ SI od Mdaell
Translation.
“The Jewish merchants called Ranians, who speak Persian, Rum-
ish, Arabic, Spanish and Sicilian (Italian,) travel by land and sea from
East to West, and from West to East. They export from the West
(from Europe,) male and female slaves,* soldiers, brocades, beavers
and swords ; they sail from the country of the Franks on the Western
* The Bishop of Arles wrote a book against the Jews to Charle-Magne, in which
he accuses them of stealing and forcing away Christian children, and of transporting
them as slaves to Spain and Africa.
Oe eee ee
1844.] Commerce of the Arabs. 523
sea (Mediterranean, ) and disembark at Ferma, from thence they trans-
port their wares by land to Kolzom, which is a distance of five
days’ journey and twenty farsangs. From Kolzom they sail in the
Eastern sea to the Hijaz and Juddah, thence they proceed to Sinde,
India and China. From China they export musk, aloes, camphor,
cinnamon,* and other articles which are exported from that country ;
with these they return to Kolzom, and from this harbour they carry
their goods to Ferma, where they put them on board the ship to sail
in the Mediterranean, either to Constantinople where they sell off, or
they go to the country of the Franks and sell their wares there.
«There is another road. If they choose they bring their goods from
the Mediterranean to Antioch, to which town they have to transport
their goods by land, only three days’ journey. Then they go down the
Euphrates to Bagdad; then they go on to Tigris to Obollah; thence
they sail to ?Oman,t Sind, India and China, for all this is one unin-
terrupted road for navigation.
“The Russian merchants who are of Sclavonian origin, export the
furs of beavers and of black foxes from the most distant part of the
Sclavonian country, and bring them to the coast of the Rumish sea
(Black sea,) where the Greek emperor levies customs on them. Or if
they chose, they go in the river of the Sclavonians (Wolga,) and they
pass in the Gulf, the town of the Khazar, where they are taxed by the
Khazar king (who was a Jew,) and thence they continue their naviga-
tion into the sea of Jorjan (the Caspian,) where they land in any
* ‘* From China,’? says Cosmas Indicopleust. (Cap. xi,) ‘‘silk, aloes, caryo-
phyllum and tzandama are exported.’? The centre of the commerce of the South
sea appears from the same author to have been Ceylon. At Ceylon there are vessels
from ‘* Aithiopia, India and Fars. It has also commerce with Mala, from which
pepper comes, and with Calliana whence metal (#s,) various sorts of wood (ligna, )
sesamum and stuffs for dressing are exported, and with Sinde which exports musk
or castorin and androstachys.”’
+ The Jehannuma (A Turkish work on geography, printed at Constantinople A. D.
1731, p. 543,) contains the following list of articles which are to be found at ’Oman
Se) Ui unphal Cogile eye class gis} cle clo ely Ulyhej Kane
524 Some original Passages on the early [No. 151.
coast they like. The length of this sea is five hundred farsangs. Some-
times they transport their goods on camels from Jorjan to Bagdad.
The following are the land roads of the merchants: they proceed
from Spain or France, and set over the Straits to Sus el-aqsa; from
thence they proceed to Tangiers; thence to Ifrikyyah; thence to Egypt ;
thence to Ramlah; thence to Damascus; thence to Kifah; thence to
Bagdad; thence to Basrah; thence to the Ahwaz, ; thence to Fars;
thence to Kerman; thence to Sinde; thence to India and China.
Sometimes they go by the land road of Armenia (?) in the country
of the Sclavonians; they proceed to the gulf of the town of the Kha-
zars; thence they sail on the Caspian (to the mouth of the Oxus) ;
thence they proceed to Balkh and Ma-wara-n-nahr ; thence to Taghoz-
ghoz; thence to China.*”
IT.—Extract from the Kitab-et-boldan.—On the Mercantile Roads.
The following extract has been copied from an Arabic MS. of the
British Museum, (add. MSS. N. 7496, folio 75, recto.) This volume
contains a very interesting work on geography, which as it appears
from its contents, was composed in the fourth century of the Hijrah. The
author’s name is not mentioned, but in the fly page an opinion is ex-
pressed, that it is an extract from Balazory’s Kitab Fotuh al-boldan.
This opinion is not founded, for the work is not as ancient as Bilazory ;
moreover, I have read the Kitab al-Fatuh of Bilazory from one end to
the other, and I found that the two books have not one sentence in
common.
The geographical work in question is the best Arabic work on geo-
graphy I know of. It contains in most instances the history of the
* El-Mas’udi gives some details respecting this road to China, (vol.1. p. 333.)
From his account it appears, that there is a path from Samarkand over the mountain,
now called Kara Tagh and the desert. The distance of this way to the Chinese fron-
tier was forty days journey, but it was dangerous, and camels could not be taken on it.
The caravan road which avoided the mountains and desert was four months’ journey.
The latter road was known to the ancients. Cosmas gives even the distances, though
not very correctly. The distance from China to Persia (Balkh) is according to him,
150 days’ journey to thirty miles each; the way through Persia was eighty days’ jour-
ney; the road from Nisibis to Seleucia (Bagdad) was thirteen days.
In another passage (Vol. II, p. 138,) Cosmassays, ‘‘ If you go from Persia to China
by land, you have a much shorter way, for this reason you always find a large quan-
tity of silk in the Persian markets.
1844. | Commerce of the Arabs. 525
places which are described in it ; the relations of one city to another, the
ancient Persian name, interesting pieces of poetry, &c., yet it has
hitherto escaped the notice of the learned, owing no doubt to the
scarcity of MSS., for to my knowledge there exist only two copies of
this book in Europe; the one in the British Museum which is ancient,
correct and clear, having almost all vowel points, and one in the East
India House, which if I recollect right, has Number 617. Haji Khalfa
seems not to have been acquainted with the book.
On comparing the following passage with the passage of Ibn Khor-
dadbeh which precedes, we cannot doubt that they both flow from the
same original source, as we have said above. We compose the decom-
posed rays of light to obtain again uncoloured truth.
Day yey Wlalds LEM AT, Radney) Cole? attr Lets csp!
all oey Fl si Grd yo Woyilug yt 1s? wt ule
Loyd SRE? 3 po GL Gy cly ol w oles? Gill
Kx N og Sey dS} ay gel DS dg Loy MN yygnXt ei
w gles? KSlial} let bold Mast Jb oF BM SS wy spas 3
Ae Kellall pst yo weds o5 Kliall SS pgs’? o3 aygall
Ley y3 Kslivad! pei SW lis CO pel oe 2 Gla ta ys
sy) J SS xnnr Kind gro lo xrom Igels Glayst Igor
: Li} Rd y5 Lgis IO yo Gert ls
526 early Commerce of the Arabs. [ No. 151.
Translation.
‘* Ray.—This town is the centre of the commerce of Armenia, Azer-
bijan, Khorassan, Khazar, and the country of Borjan. The sea mer-
chants sail from East to West, and again from West to East, and they
export brocade and a superior sort of beaver from the country of the
Franks to Ferma by sea, (from Ferma they go by land,) to the Red Sea
and take their wares by sea to China, from China they export cinna-
mon, mamyran, and all sorts of China goods. These they bring to
the town of Kolzom, whence they transport them by land to Ferma.
‘‘The merchants of whom we are speaking are Jews, and are called
Rodhanians. They speak Persian, Rumish, Arabic and Frankish, (2. e.
a dialect of German,) they come (by sea) to Antioch, thence they go to
Bagdad and thence to Obollah.
‘The Sclavonian merchants deal in fox and beaver skins (fur,) which
they bring from their most distant countries to the Rumish sea, were
they pay custom to the Greek Emperor. Then they proceed by sea
to Samkiish, who is a Jew, then they go (by land) to the country of the
Sclavonians ; then they sail on the Sclavonian sea till they come to the
Gulf of the Khazars, where they have to pay custom to the Khazar king.
Then they sail on the sea of Khorassan, and ply on the river which is
called the Sclavonian river; sometimes they go on shore in Jorjan and
sell off. All these wares come to Ray, which is the market of the
world.”*
* The latter part of this passage is very confused and corrupted, but it may
easily be corrected from the passage of Ibn Khordadbeh.
Besides Ray, the town of Jyroft in Kerman, two days’ journey from Sirjar and
four days from Hormuz, was a great place for commerce, in which the caravans of
Sijistan and Khorassan used to meet. (Ibn Haukal MS. of the Bodleyan Library.)
( To be continued. )
527
Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar, through the Sakhee
Sarwar Pass and Buzdar, with other routes. By Major R. Lercnu.
Deré Ghdézee Khan.—Charratta 9 miles, 200 houses, 2 wells, 64
miles from Der& Gh4zee Khan, the Sharga canal crosses the road.
It is thrown off by the river 9 miles above at Gurmanee, and waters
the country 5 miles below at Pag4; at a mile further the M4nik4
canal crosses the road. It is thrown off by the river at a place called
Chainw4lla, 27 miles above, and extends 25 miles to the South to a
place called Hawair.
Wador, through |
brushwood. J 9 miles, 400 houses, 1 well 112 feet deep.
( Water brought
Pakhee Sarwar, a A large village } from a spring in
18 miles, ae 2
stony road. and a mausoleum, ; the mountains 5
| miles distant.
Siree, 14 miles through an uninhabited road, a desolate fort, a fine
stream; the Pass commences 4 miles out of Sakhee Sarwar by a
steep descent ; it then runs through a ravine, whose bed is covered
with large stones. It is commanded by the steep faces of the hill.
The mountains have been deserted on account of the frequent attacks
of these mountaineers; viz. Jeti Omalinee and Bidda Amaddnee; both
however under the command of Jala Khan Logh4ree.
Ascent of the Sulliman range (Kalee Koh,) at a place called Ootpa-
lana, or camel saddle: some say from the shape of the hill: some say
from the steepness which causes even a saddle to fall off in the ascent.
This is a zig-zag road for horses and camels, the face of the moun-
tain covered with loose stones that each shower brings down. There
is an easier road to the south that goes to Racknee, but not for a mo-
ment to be reckoned a gun road.
A table of 5 miles, and } ( 40 reed huts of)
a descent of the same | ; | Lanjdnee Kathrydns |
toa place called Rack- r bal yo 9 under Ameer Hajee ie ney,
nee. J L Khan of Darazoo Kote. J
The gun road from the Der4jét to Rackee enters the mountains
from Sangad, and is as follows :—
Sangad, commencement of the Pass.
Fort of Koh, 16 miles, 50 houses of Jaths, a stream and valley.
Lodr-wad, 14 miles, scattered huts of Buzdars
of the Backaree clan, under Pandee. \ The above stream.
4c
528 Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 15).
Ambar, 13 miles, a granary of the Buzdars
and Sadhwanees in caves.
Manjawal, 14 miles, uncertain habitations of
Buzdar shepherds.
Ditto ditto.
\ Ditto ditto.
Rackee, 12 miles, a good gun road. From Sangad to Candahar is
a gun road.
There are quantities of grain, wheat, rice, and barley in Ambar,
Darazoo in Barackam, Chotydley, Tal Dukkeede ; in fact en the whole
road, water is plentiful as well as firewood, except at Baghdo and
Smalan.
There are sheep to be procured along the whole road. Camels are
procurable at Tal Bérackam, Kholloo and Pishing ; the inhabitants are
quiet.
Racknee. ( A stream from
Dardzoo-ka-Kot, the ; {Kholoo called
residence of HajeeKhan - 20 miles. § ng aaa | Han, as well as
and 40 Kathryans. iy ‘ | rain water.
Rachwhie hese No habitation, except in the
Fay ateoain, 5 miles. Pear y which is inhabited
by Kathryans.
A difficult steep narrow ascent and descent. Nika-panee 12 miles ;
no habitations, sufficient water for drinking.
Fort of Dost Maho-
med Khan, a level rn 5 miles, sa fe: eh ts .. water
from the former stage.
Fort of Fazul Khan.... 1 mile, i as pee OENS Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto, Aly Khan, 1 mile, 100 ditto ditto. Ditto ditto.
Chotydly over hills,
passable to camels > 36 miles.
and horses.
There is no water to be met with on the road, except in most in-
considerable quantities and uncertain places, which however, when
found, is too salt to drink.
The remaining gun road from Racknee to Candahar is as follows :—
Racknee.
200 houses of }
| Ishyanee Kathry- | A rivulet, as
Chobar4, - +4 4 miles, ¢ ans under Mahar > well as water
| and Dakoo Ma- { in tanks.
laks.
Dardazo6 Kot, 16 miles, before described.
Kooh, the head of)
[den ‘
the Han stream, 5 miles, before described.
1844.] Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 529
The road level,
Bor appr, wll loi No habitation, | a slight ascent ;
black hill, not to be areas a rivulet. ; Soap stone met
passed, bieith,
Balé Dékai, a hill) No fixed habitations ; shepherds
which is turned, the sometimes come here for a few
road leading ene eeeicadn months.
the bed of the stream. J L
Lwang, or ford
knee deep. The vos | 6 miles, no habitations.
called Hanokee.
der Sahab Khan, who is under Fazla
Khan of Kholoo.
400 houses of Tareens Water from
Chotyaly, +. 12 miles, under Biland Khan. ... | Barie.
20 habitations of Zarkan Pathans un-
Palydne,... 14 miles,
Sobha Khan's 11 wile 200 houses of Ustu- The former
fort, 2 > ({ryanees, es rivulet.
( 700 houses of Tareens }
Tal, famous for | under Sobha Khan, Fai- | : ;
wheat which is Ditto ditto
aadeik 121 miles, 4 zullé Khan, HazdrKhén, id ese.
ee. | Abdullé Khbdn, and |
Pee PasON, --- | Baboo Khan, .. sare
‘ " ( Water from
eka f 400 houses of Ta- | Baghdo, plen-
DukkeeorRah, !4 miles, {reens under Gul Raz, ; tiful cultiva-
A stream rises
Kakads, under Hasam h
ere.
Kban and Peraz Khan.
300 houses of Dhu-
Mids, +e. .OSee
Uninhabited ; in the
600 houses of Dhumad
Baghdo,... ... 10 miles,
A spring of
water.
A stream, from
which a_ few
acres are culti-
vated.
A stream, in
the bed of which
the road runs.
Spring of wa-
ter.
_Sinzavee, «» 7 miles, |
Chinjan,... .... 11 miles, <~ neighbourhood are
Zikhpel Dhumads,
A few houses of
Sanatyd Kakads,
300 houses of Sa-
natya Kakads,.
60 houses of Sa-
natya Kakads, ..
380 houses of Bat-
Bazar in the The river of
valley of Pishing, i 13 miles, I paindé bang: "ae Surkhab.
Gulisthan Karez, sixteen miles, before described. This road isa gun
road, Hajee Khén Kakad brought two guns with him from Candahar,
mmagee, .. ... 1} miles,.
MeATCZ, <«s- «ee 8 miles,
Ingand, oreo Miles, Sets of springs.
es Sear SR ea
530 ftvute from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 151.
and engaged the Tareens of Tal. Hajee Khén could secure protection,
he said to an army passing by this road.
No.. 2.
The road of Rod Bahar, from Beebee Nanee in the Bolan Pass
to Kaldt.
Beebee Nanee Jam and Baradee, twelve miles, 100 houses of Puj Belo-
chees ; they do not pay tribute to Mehrab Khan, and are generally em-
ployed in guarding caravans through the Pass of Bolan. The water is
in mountain springs. Rice, wheat, barley and juwaree are cultivated
here, and there are gardens of mulberries, apricots, peaches and
grapes. Indeed, the fertility of this road may be inferred from its
name, Rod Bahar, signifying the valley of spring. From Beebee
Nanee, the first six miles is in a plain. The road then enters the Pass,
which is 150 yards wide, in which a half-hid stream runs; the two vil-
lages of Jamand Baradee are off the road, on an elevated plateau ; the
next stage is Zer-i-Kotal, “foot of Pass,” a distance of twenty miles,
There are no habitations here, nor on the road. The stream at the
stage is plentiful. After leavirty Jam Baradee, the valley opens out
to the breadth of three miles, in which the tamarisk tree forms a
jungle, and in which plain the water is lost. The Pass is then formed
again, and the water again appears at four miles distant from the foot
of the Pass. The stage is level; on the top of the Pass three-quarters
of a mile from the bottom are the ruins of an old town, the streets of
which are still to be traced, and several sunken spots denote the site
of wells or reservoirs, The natives have searched in vain for old coins.
The city is said to have belonged to Giours, (Greeks ?)
The road from the old town then descends a little, again ascends,
and finally has a considerable descent, and takes a level nature, and a
third descent to Sar-i-Deh. A collection of wild fig trees, and water
in stagnant pools, a distance of eighteen miles ; this stage goes by the
name of Rod Bahar; it is supplied throughout its length with water, and
is cultivated in patches of wheat, rice and juwaree; peaches, apricots,
mulberries, &c. also abound in small gardens. In this stage there
are about 400 houses of Puj Mughandovee and Kulovee Brahins,
who are cultivators. Firewood is plentiful. The next stage is Irar-
mookh, four miles, inhabited in the summer by Brahin shepherds; viz.
Ladies, Jatooees and Kulooees, to the amount of 150 tents. The
1844.] Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 531
water is in three wells, and the cultivation depends on the rain. This
stage is out of the Pass. Narmookh is in a plain which is divided
from the plain of Takht by a projecting range of hills. From Nar-
mookh, the next stage is Takbt, fourteen miles, inhabited cnly
in the summer months by wandering shepherds. If rain falls, water
will be found at Takht; the next stage is Johan, fifteen miles, a fort
containing 30 houses of Johanees under Katar Dad, the son of Sahab
Khan Johanee. The water here is in a running stream.
Rice and wheat are cultivated to some extent, and there are a few
gardens. The next stage is Kishan, twelve miles, containing 10 houses
under Jangee Kishanee.
The water is in a running stream; rice and wheat are cultivated to
some extent, and there are a few gardens and cultivation.
Kalat is thence 15 miles.
This road is passable to cavalry and camels, but by no means to
guns. Snow does not fall in the Pass, its boundary being Narmookh,
(Narmool of maps.) The inhabitants begin to emigrate to Catchee
(Cutch Gundava,) by the middle of September, some on account of the
cold, others on account of the scarcity of grass for their flocks, and the
remaining cannot stay behind, as they would be too weak to withstand
the plundering attacks of the Dhumad Kakads.
The heaviest falls of snow in Kalat do not cover the ground knee-
deep, and it never remains on the ground for more than seven days.
Snow begins to fall in the beginning of December, and lasts to the
end of February.
When the inhabitants of Rodbar emigrate to Cutchee, they first
bury their grain, and cover it very artfully, so as to escape observation.
The inhabitants return to Rod-Bahar by the end of March. Wheat is
sown in the end of August, and reaped in the beginning of April.
Rice or the rubbee crop is sown in the middle of May, and reaped in the
middle of September.
There is grazing ground on the mountains for flocks during March,
April and May, and forage for horses might be procured; during May
the wheat stalks could be given to horses, and as long as it lasted.
No. 3.
Road from Manziljah at the entrance of the Bolan Pass to Kalat
Manziljah in the Dasht Khurd, or small plain, called Bedoulat ; there are
532 Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. [No. 15],
no habitations here, neither is there water. Itis said, however, to have
been brought by Meer Naser Khan, Brahin chief of Kalat, from Zada-
khoo, a spring ten miles to the north, by means of a small duct to fur-
nish the army of Ahmed Shah Duranee. From Manziljah to Marow
is ten miles, over a level road having only one slight hill. This village
contains 500 houses of Koodds, under Sardar Ala Dinna. There is plen-
ty of good spring water; wheat and juwaree are plentifully cultivated.
From Marow to Isplinjee is ten miles over a level road. The water is
in springs; the village contains 500 houses of Bangulzains, Brahins
under Noor Mahommed Wadera, (Patel.) From Isplinjee to Koohak
is sixteen miles over a level road, the water is in wells, the village is
only inhabited in the summer, as are the other villages on the road to
the extent of six hundred houses of Bangulzais or Badoozais, who pay
taxes to the Mahommed Shahees, the owners of the soil.
From Koohak to Gazah,a set of worked springs in the district of
Mangochur, twenty-four miles, a level road having no water or habita-
tions on the way.
Mangochur is three miles distant to the right. It contains 2,000
houses of Langaus. It is under Kalat. From Gazah to Karez
(spring) of Giranee is ten miles. There is a spring called
Shireenah, four miles from Gazah. The road is level. Karez-i-Gir-
anee contains in the winter 80 habitations, and in summer two
hundred of mixed Brahin tribes; the water here is remarkably good,
compared with that of Kalat. From Karez-i-Giranee to Kalat is
eight miles. The last three miles being through fields and gardens.
No. 4.
Road from Kot ( Kwettah of maps, ) to Kalat from my Journal.
18th June, 1838.—Left Kot, the road passing between two hills, and
reached Saryab, a distance of seven miles. There are no habitations here.
The water is in worked springs, in which are a quantity of fish. This
is an extremely cold place in winter. A report prevails, that two cara-
vans, one of indigo and one of madder, proceeding to Hindustan were
caught in a fall of snow, the madder merchant offered to burn his
madder if the other would share the cost. The indigo merchant re-
fused, encamped at a distance, and perished in the night from the cold.
19th June.—Passing a hill at four miles from Saryab entered a plain,
and keeping along the skirt of the hills to the left, to ayoid the deep
oo <
CC ——e
1844.] Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar, 533
rugged “nullas” that cut up the lower plain, reached Pilingabad, a
further distance of 8 miles. The town of Teeree is in the neighbour-
hood. Pilingabad contains about 300 houses of Affghans, and is sur-
rounded by fine gardens of apricots, almonds, mulberries and grapes.
The former grow to the height of English elm-trees, and the vines are
trained up them.
21st June.—Marched four miles and a half to Mastung, a walled
town, situated in a wilderness of gardens. It contains about 3,500
houses, and a Naib, or governor, on the part of Mehrab Khan, generally
resides here. Mastung is famous for its melons. The inhabitants in
the neighbourhood are Mashwanees and Sangoos, and a sprinkling of
the different other tribes of Sarawan Brahmes. ‘The seasons of Mas-
tung are twenty days in advance of those of Kalat.
The direct road from Mastoony to Kalat, is then vid Mangochas as
follows :—
Mastoong Cha (well 5 No habitations. The road isper-
12 miles,
of Guroo situated inthe fectly level.
kad vale of Mastoong.)
Mungochar, .. «+16 miles, before described.
This road is only chosen when express is required, on account of the
distances between the watering places.
The other road, the same by which I travelled, is as follows :—
26th June.—Left Mastung and marched by the round about road to
Kalat, halted at Shireenab, no habitations. ‘The water is in worked
springs, and salt to the taste. The distance is twelve miles. The
neighbourhood abounds in hares.
27th June.—Marched seven miles to Karez (worked springs,) of Dost
Mahomed. The road running through a valley ; thirty habitations; some
cultivation.
28th June.—Marched nine miles to the Zyarat (Mausoleum) of Zard,
twenty houses inhabited, and the like number in ruins. At a half mile in
front is a garden, the fruit of which was this year destroyed by a blight.
29th June.—Marched eight miles to Sar-i-Karez ; no habitations ex-
cept twelve in ruins, a small stream. Mangochar was visible to the left.
30th June.—Marched sixteen miles to Zyarat, a village containing
200 houses. Mehrab Khan’s stud is stationed here.
1st July.—Marched four miles to Kalat. This road is a gun road
throughout.
534 Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 151.
No; 23.
Route from Dadur to Sukkur via Shikarpoor, Quarter Master General's
Office, Camp at Larkhana, 23rd December, 1839.
Distance. |
Stages. wr Bae: Remarks.
o & O60
f= = pio}
el le
Dadur.
Nowsherra, .. 7 4 Vide route from Gundava to Dadur.
Myhysir, 15 3 At nine miles cross a deep nulla from
Nowsherra, with little water in it, but mud-
dy road; good water in a nulla South-west
of the village. Myhysir contains about 200
houses and 10 shops, plenty of forage for
camels, and kirby for horses; encampment
on the North-east of the village.
Bhag,.. of HLS 6 In this march cross six nullas, one of which
has water in it, road good, and cultivation of
juwaree in the vicinity of this place ; water
bad, and from a tank filled in by the fall of
rain. Bhag isa large place, with plenty of
supplies, it contains about 2,000 houses and
100 shops, forage for camels in the vicinity
of this town, and kirby for horses ; juwarree
fields all the way from last stage ; encamping
Kassim-ka- ground on the Kast of the village.
joke,.. > si sa 6 Cross five nullas in this march, one of
which runs on the left of the road with pools
of water in it, road good, with cultivation of
juwarree on both sides at some places. This
village is small, with 75 houses and 8 shops ;
supplies limited, plenty of forage for camels,
at one mile from the village, and kirby for
horses ; encamping ground South-west of the
village.
Kunda, mp a Bs) 7 In this march cross five nullas, with one
running on the left of the road, as before ;
road a foot-path, and bad cultivated fields of
juwarree on both sides of the road. Kunda
is a small but good village, with about 200
houses and 30 shops ; water in a nulla on the
left of the village till the end of February,
when it could be had by digging in the bed
of the nulla; plenty of forage for camels and
Carried oa og ——|kirby for horses; encamping ground South-
ward, -| 74 | 2 |west of the village.
ee ee ee ee
ee ee
1844.] Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar.
Distance. |
Stages. a
=
Bro. forward, | 74
Rojan,.. sat so
eal
Janeederrah, .| 1
Jagghan, 1]
Shikarpoor, .. 12
Kheahyee, .. 14
|
Sukkur... .. 13
es Be
~“I
535
Remarks.
eS GARE SL On Se
At five miles three furlongs pass the village
of Roree, where the guns were halted, and from
whence desert of twenty-six miles is crossed ;
road good on aplainallthe way. Rojan isa
poor village, with few huts, water bad, and in
three wells built of burnt brick, no supplies of
forage for camels and kirby for horses ; en-
camping ground South-east of the village.
Road good from the last march. Janeeder-
rah is a small ghurry, in which Commissariat
supplies are stored and guarded by a party of
infantry from Shikarpoor. This village is de-
serted ; water in five wells, two of which are
now dry; sufficient forage for camels and
kirby for horses, supplies very limited; en-
camping ground on the East of the village.
In this march pass four dry nullas, road
good. Jagghan is a small village with 60 houses
and few shops, water from five kutcha wells,
forage for camels in abundance, and kirby
for horses, supplies very limited ; encamping
ground on the South-east of the village.
Road good, through thick jungle; having
no nullas to cross in this march. Shikarpoor
is a large town, with considerable supplies and
population ; encamping ground on the South-
east of the town, where there are several wells.
In this march cross eight dry nullas,
road good through jungle. Kheahyee is a
small village with about 100 houses and 8
shops, supplies few, water from two pucka and
ten cutcha wells; plenty of forage for camels
and kirby for horses; encamping ground on
the South-east of the village.
Cross 17 nullas in this march, road good,
but through thin jungle. At seven miles on
the left of it, the river Indus is met, and on
the right bank of which Sukkur is situated.
——|It is the Head Quarters of the Brigade in
O 'Upper Scinde.
(Signed) Nrex Campzeuy, Major,
Acting Quarter Master General.
4D
536 Route from Deré Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 151.
No. 24.
Route from Sukkur to Larkhanah, Quarter Master General's Office, Camp
at Larkhana, 23rd December, 1839.
| Distance.
Stages. A eee Remarks.
(ES EEE ERSTE GEESE MER SREY or SEE
Camp Sukkur.
Bangudjee, ..| 10 0) In this march pass four dry nullas, roada
foot-path, but good through thin jungle; 10
houses and | shop, water from the Indus,
and encamping ground on the bank of it;
plenty of forage for camels and kirby for
horses.
Shaleanee, ..| 8 2 Pass eight dry nullas in this march, road
a foot-path through thin jungle, and leading
through the bank of the river ; 20 houses and
4 shops, river water, and encamping ground
on the bank of the Indus; plenty of forage
for camels and kirby for horses.
Muddehjee,..| 9 5 Pass seven dry nullas in this march, road
a foot-path through thin jungle, leaving the
river at about three miles from the last stage.
About 150 houses and 20 shops, water from
six pucka wells, supplies plentiful; encamp-
ing ground on the South-west of the village.
Lots of forage for camels and kirby for
horses.
Nowaderah, .. 9 4 In this march pass seven dry nullas, road
a foot-path, through jungle. About 100
houses and 8 or 10 shops, water from four or
five pucka wells. The river is left about three
miles from this place; supplies plenty; en-
camping on the N. W. of the village ; forage
for camels and kirby for horses.
Larkhanah, ..| 12 3 Cross nine dry nullas in this march, road
good through thick jungle.
—— |———| Larkhana is a large town with abundance
fo) ie il: 6 | of supplies.
(Signed) N. CampBeti, Major,
Acting Quarter Master General.
1844.] Route from Deri Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 537
No. 25.
Route from Kotree and Gundava to Sukkur on the Indus, Quarter Master
General's Office, 19th December, 1839.
Distance.
Stages. - |
Remarks.
| Miles
oo fF ee eee
eee prea ee
Kotree,
a
phe Vide route No. — from Larkhana to
| Dadur.
|
|
Gundava,..-.|.7.| 9 Ditto ditto.
Oodauna,..-.' 14 , 7 | A walled village with considerable culti-
vation around, water from cutcha wells,
outside ; at this time scarce and insufficient
for a small force. The road good, over a
level desert plain, crossing a large canal at
six miles, twenty yards broad and fifteen
feet deep, with steep banks; cultivation
commences at one mile from Oodauna.
Forage abundant, supplies few.
A large walled town, water in canals but
indifferent, much cultivation and several
other villages around, at a distance of from
one to three miles. Road over a level
country, but more bushy, passing one village
on the right at three miles and the ruins of
old Oodauna, with some cutcha wells, and
two or three large villages on left, at seven
miles. Supplies plentiful at Kunda.
Burshooree,..| 9 2 Two walled villages, with considerable
cultivation around, on the edge of the
Ruun desert; water from small cutcha
wells, road good all the way, and for the
first two and a half miles through cultiva-
tion, then a desert plain until within one
and a quarter mile of Burshooree. Forage
abundant, but few supplies.
Rojan, -..... 26; O Two walled villages on the eastern side
of the Runn, or desert, with a little culti-
vation, and one good pucka well. The
road over the Runn is very good. Parties
with laden cattle should march just so late
in the evening, as to arrive across it by
day-light. Forage abundant, few supplies.
Janeedera, ..| 11 2 | A large square fort and a village, the
— village at present in ruins, having been
Car. forward, | 78 7ildestroyed some time ago, by a plundering
Hounds, ...| 10 4
Ble
538 Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. [No. 151.
Distances.
Stages. | cj pee Remarks.
en | (eae
| | Ss)
igi i
Brought for. band of Beloochees. There is considerable
ward, 78 7+ cultivation around, and some of the popu-
| lation scattered in huts in the fields. There
are four good pucka wells, one of which is
inside the fort. Khangaum, a large and
populous place, is about four miles to the
northward, at present an out-post from
Shikarpore, road good, except at the 9th mile
where it is deep in sand. Forage plentiful
and some supplies.
A fort and village with some lofty square
fortified buildings, outside, considerable
‘cultivation and some good pucka wells.
‘The road is over a level but more woody
country, passing two or three villages on
the right and left. Jaghan has a small but
good bazar, with considerable supplies, and
| forage plentiful.
Shikarpoor, ...; 13 4 A large town or city, the capital of Up-
per Scinde, with extensive bazars and abun-
dant supplies. A large fort on the east side
of the town, the buildings are in general
lofty, the country around an extensive level,
bushy plain, with much cultivation ; water
plentiful from wells. Road good, over a
level, but very bushy or jungly country.
Kahee,.. .-| 14 4} A large village, and also much cultivation.
The road winds a good deal over a level,
but very bushy or jungly country, with
many fine clumps of trees, and several
villages at a distance from the road.
Sukkur,.<. 2.12 6 To the bank of the Indus river near
[the flying bridge to Bukkur Killa. The
road from Kahee is in general good, but
crosses about 10 water-courses or nullas,
all at present dry. Pass Thoomanee at
11 mile on right. Rubail on left, at 24.
Durraha at 54, and Soomar at 63 ; both on
right. Jaffrabad at 74 right ; Nusseerabad
at 74, on left; and Abad at 94, all small
| villages, with many trees, and considerable
Total,.. .| 130} 62! cultivation about them.
(Signed) N.Campsexyt, Major,
Acting Quarter Master General.
Jaghan,.. ..| I1 4
to|H
—_——=
1844.] Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 539
No. 26.
Route from Shikarpoor to Larkhana, Quarter Master General’s Office,
Camp Sukkur, \5th January, 1840.
Distances.
Stages. a her hgh Remarks.
= |5e
= |xL
Shikarpoor.
Samun Kote,.| 4 234| A small village; about 10 houses and 2
| shops ; water from two wells.
Nowser,.. --| 3 | 24| Ditto; 30 houses and 6 shops, supplies
limited ; water from two cutcha wells.
Kamboowa,..| 1 5 This village contains about 20 houses
and 1 shop; water of wells.
J es Pe 61| This is a good village, of about 50 houses
and 7 shops; water of wells in the village.
Gahay-ja, ..| 4 31} ditto ditto ditto.
Ahmed Shah Katch,.| 4 of ;, road and water as before.
Turpurneéa.... ..| 4 35 ,, ditto ditto ditto.
eee So 8 2 5» ditto ditto ditto.
Ispan Paee Kat, ..| 3 iM 3» ditto ditto ditto.
Demiaktt,.. .. ..| 4 > 5 ditto ditto ditto.
Beaiavmeace,.. ..° ..| 3 No village, road very bad, water from
a Mountain stream.
SetCMeo tate aa ..1 (3 Ditto ditto, road as before, water from
ditto.
median .: «es eh OS Ps ,, road and water as before.
Dangulraee, .. 3 rr », road very bad, water from
ditto.
Zyimi00, 1. «« 3 No village, road very bad, water in
abundance.
Mgee, 82. lee ae
Jeraee, .. ee
Cheirjagarain,..
Seejgulta,:. 9...
No village, road and water as before.
ie 16s, oo ditto ditto.
ee » ditto ditto ditto.
A village, road good, water from a
‘karez.
mm 0 OF
542 Route from Deré Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. [No. 151.
Stages. Remarks.
a
O
Soouk Deeval, .. 4 A village, road good, water from a karez.
MEMEOKOOL: 0; sees pest 8 Ditto ditto ditto ditto.
Geraee Reman, ..| 4 Ditto ditto ditto ditto.
Darabund, Sion Tisyeth uw A large town, water from a karez, road
good.
Goondee Arim Khan,| 4 Ditto ditto ditto ditto.
DEEERCE,s jo .) 3 », water and road good.
Dereh Ismael Khan, 7 A large town on the Indus.
DA a0 ais"), we| LO
At least one month’s supplies require to be carried along with an
army, forage for horses and camels is abundant throughout. The road is
represented to be easy for troops and carriage. The road at Kota Kaee,
and from Dangulraee to the foot of the ghaut at Maj-garra, will be
found difficult for artillery.
To Captain Alexander Burnes, on a Mission to Cabool, &c. &c. &c.
Loodhiana.
Si1z,—In obedience to the accompanying instructions received from
Lieutenant Leech, I most respecfully beg to hand up a report on the
great Pass of Bolan, examined and carefully drawn up in as plain and
concise a manner as possible, and hope it will meet with your appro-
bation.
I have the honor to be, &c.
Bhag, 22d August, 1838. (Signed) James Nock,
Draftsman to Lieutenant Leech.
Report on the Great Bolan Pass. By James Nock, Draftsman to Lieute-
nant R. Leech, Bombay Engineers, Assistant on a Mission to Cabool,
&c. &c. &e.
Every cafilla from Khorassan destined to Cutchee, Shikarpoor, and
Scinde, frequenting the Great Pass of Bolan, go through Shawl, and those |
from Mastung are generally composed of a body of men, waiting for the
arrival of a cafilla to Bolan, or of different tribes of Brahin Baloochs,
1844.] Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 543
emigrating from Kelat, and its subordinate places to Cutchee, in failure
of rain to procure pasture for their flocks and cattle, and find means of
subsistence by cultivation, in a more favored and watered country, near
to their own..
2d.—The entrance to the Pass of Bolan does not show any striking
Entrance tothe Pass, #PPearance. From Mastung, leaving Feerungabad
nature of height, &c., to the left, the road takes a direction N. E. 60°,
ascents, difficulty en- ; , i
countered, remedy, meeting the hills at 3 coss, where there is an as-
rier, Fe. cent and descent of + coss, road not in any way dif-
ficult, composed of earth and small stones; thence Minguljah 9 coss,
in a plain, and no water here. From Shawl to Siriab Hills 4 coss, and
plenty of water, bearing N. E. 80°; thence to Minguljah the halting
place. Caravans and any body of men travelling from Mastung, should
be careful in having a good supply of water for a 12 coss journey.
3d.—Leaving Minguljah to the commencement of the Pass is a dis-
tance of 3 coss back, bearing to Mastung 8. W. 65° and to Shawl N. W.
100°. Having here reached the Pass, you meet an ascent and descent
of 200 and 100 paces, a cross road from Murravee Spilingee and Kelat
also join, a description of which also follows. Bolan then takes a 65?
N, E.; the breadth between the hills or heights on both sides is about
200 yards, the sides and hills just near rise about 200 yards high, not
accessible at its immediate part, but footmen can ascend from the parts
round about; the places being exposed, the heights also are not so com-
manding as to obstruct the passage of a body of men; even cannon can
be managed to be mounted on both sides. The road is a gradual de- -
scent, mixed with loose stones and earth, 4 coss; one coss further on |
are to be seen three trees on the right side of the hill, where there is
a spring, and water can be procured a mussuck-full at a time; thence
1} coss further, a path-way strikes apart from the road, to a place
called Doosan, a watering place, and also leading to the resort of rob-
bers, composed of Dhumad Kakads. 4 a coss further on, is Doosan-ka-
moo, where cafillas from Mastung and Shawl halt for a short time.
Water is procured from 4 a coss by a road or ravine running to the left
to the above mentioned place ; this place is better known by the name of
Mamadgozee.
4th.—From Mamadgozee, or Doosan-ka-moo, the road takes a 5.
EK. 100° direction, and narrows at the corners to 70 feet, and both
4k
544 Route from Deréd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 15}.
sides of the hill, after a sweeping space, meet at the distance of 150
yards, making a Pass of 50 or 60 feet breadth ; the heights are lofty,
but accessible ; there are eight windings, measuring on the whole 1350
yards, the centre of the spaces between the windings is about 300 yards,
bearing N. E. 20° to S. E. 170°. This place is called Seree Bolan,
thence 60° N. E. 200 paces, the heights mingle with the hills, and the
sides become a gradual slope from the hills; thence 4 mile distant is
Mooch or Sir Kujoor; springs of water, running stream, underneath ;
breadth between the sides 600 feet, heights much exposed, and no
difficulty of access, good road of loose stone and earth; a fixed halting
place of cafillas.
5th.—From Mooch or Sir Kujoor the direction is §. E. 120°, 3 coss
distant, the heights to about the right $ a coss, leaving but a bare bank
to mark the road, to the left a running stream of water. This place is
called Koolee ; thence S. E. 115° 1 coss, Khakeedawoo a burial place,
are to be seen, a great number of graves of those slain in protecting cara-
vans against the Dhumad Kakads and Marees. To the left is also a date
tree, and a chokee in ruins; plenty of water. The road is rough and diffi-
cult from large loose stones, and the uneveness of the ground ; but a party
of pioneers could soon remedy the evil, by removing the stones, and
filling up the rough parts. 8. E. 147°, $ a coss is Ahleegoom ; the water
here disappears under-ground, and on that account gives name to the
place. Road as above and the same remark, hills to the right, distant
3 coss, and left 8 coss, leaving an immense plain.
6th.—S. E. 155°, 23 coss road in a plain; 1 coss to the right is Khu-
jooree ; 60 houses of Koochak and Pooshy Baloochs, and 2 coss further on
is Jam and Barurdee, 80 houses of Koochak and Poosjh Baloochs ; thence
S. E. 165°, 4 coss, road to Beebee Nannee. The hills near, again leaving
an entrance of about 300 yards. A river of the same name runs here,
two feet water, heights on both sides 300 and 400 feet high, accessible
on all parts ; halting place of cafillas.
7th.—The hills again turn off on both sides, leaving a wide plain to
traverse to Kirtah, 130° S. E. 6 coss. About of this road you
meet a detached hill on a rising ground, and a passage of about 20 feet,
called ‘Tillowgheer, which place could be avoided by keeping to the left.
Kirtah contains 40 houses of Koochak Baloochs under a chief named
Futteh Khan, who murdered his nephew a few months back to secure
‘
——— ee ee
1844.] Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 545
himself his possessions, A river runs here, three feet water, and it isa
halting place of cafillas.
8th.—From Kirtah due south is Sang Soolah 3 coss, one of which
is an ascent and descent, a passage of 200 yards between the hills, the
heights are bare and exposed on all sides ; crossed the river twice, also
river Gundruff 250 feet wide and 3 feet water; the hills on both sides
rise 150 and 250 feet, road not very difficult and 400 feet broad. 175°
S. E. 24 coss, crossed the river three times, bed of the river rather rough
from loose stones, 2 feet water and 200 yards wide. Due south 4} coss is
Kuftaree Chirak, crossed river, road difficult as above, 400 feet wide.
S. E. 125°, the road narrows to 150 feet, the heights easy of access, 100
and 150 feet high, 200 yards, ascent called Pas Pash; crossed river, 3
feet water. S. W. 150°, 250 yards in length, having crossed the river three
times, 2°feet water; due south Kohn Dil, and crossed the river three
times. Cafillas halt for awhile here to refresh, 200 yards.
N. E. 45°, 400 yards descent ; the road is 600 feet broad, heights
150 and 200 feet high, accessible on all points. N. E. 35°, 200 yards
ascent, place called Kohee Singh.
N, E. 453 coss Drubbee, halting place of cafillas, heights not in any
way difficult of ascent, breadth of the road 200 feet.
Hence to the termination of the Pass S. EK. 100°, 1 coss, the hills
take a N. W. and S. W. direction, and the river towards Daddur 2 of
a coss South. Daddur from the mouth of Bolan is. about 35° N. E. 3
coss distant on low ground, and on open plain.
The established cafilla march is from Mastung and Shawl to
Patelisied” calla, Minzulzah 12 coss; no water here except at Si-
marches in Bolan. riah, 3 coss from Shawl.
2nd Stage.—Next Mooch or Sir Kujjoor 93 coss, plenty of good
water, and the road generally a gradual descent.
3rd Stage.—Hence Beebee Nannee, 73 coss, 6 of which no water to
be found, arriving at Beebee Nannee plenty of water from river near.
4th Stage.—Hence Kirtah 6 coss, plenty of water from river.
5th Stage.—Drubbee, 83 coss, having to cross the river very often,
and many ascents and descents.
6th Stage —Daddur, 5 coss in Cutchee, making a distance in all of
about 50 coss, every allowance for windings, &c.
On the whole, the passage through Bolan cannot be considered
546 Route from Derd Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. [No. 151,
very difficult. Between Mooch and Bebee Nannee you meet with a
rough road for about 2 coss or so, and also on the way to Drubbee,
which obstacle can be soon remedied by a body of Pioneers, in re-
moving the stones and levelling the road. About Mamudgozee and
Teree Bolan, the road is narrow, yet there is sufficient passage of 62
and 70 feet wide for a body of men; also the ascents and descents show
but small impediments, the heights likewise on both sides are not com-
manding ; and however defended, would produce little effect in opposing
an army. Shah Shujah passed the road on to Candahar with 14 guns,
10 drawn by bullocks, 3 pairs to each gun, and four by horses, 2 pairs
to each; and encountered little or no difficulty in the way.
This season, owing to the failure of rain, the depth of water in the
River and depth of river did not exceed 3 feet, else at other times
ellen ecrens'® at Pos Pash, there used to be 4 and 5 feet water,
a ae ee tes and a rapid running stream. Shah Shujah passed
Bolan. from Daddur to Drubbee and Kohee-Dil in the
cold season, and on account of the depth of water being 4 feet in the
passage, procured a great number of labourers, and levelled and dug the
high grounds in the bed of the river, and causing the stream to run
more freely, thereby obtaining a small depth of water to ford the river
with his army and guns. A better gun road for artillery, cavalry and
infantry can seldom be met with, and favourable under any circum-
stances to the passage of a large army.
At the entrance of the Pass, there is a cross road bounded by a good
pass of sides 50 and 100 feet high, direction S, E, 120° 14 coss long,
then a valley in the same direction 2 coss, also an ascent and descent of
2 coss over a mountain ; very rough road, from huge stones. This part
requires to be levelled, and the large stones blown up by gunpowder;
thence S. W. 30° over a perfect plain 3 coss to Muravee; 500 houses of
Koord Balooches under Ullahdeena, &c. 2 coss further on is Splingee ; 700
houses of Bungulzaee Baloochs, under chiefs Noor Mahomed Wuddeia
and Jan Mahomed; living on the produce of their lands. ‘These two
places is two stages distant from Kelat.
There are no habitations on the road to Bolan except at Kirtah, be-
Villages situated tween Mooch and Beebee Nannee. There are three
mace d beatin rand villages, named Kujjooree of 60 permanent mud
habitants, &c. houses of Koochak, Pog, Pooshy and Mungundooee
1844.] Route from Deré Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 54%
Baloochs, situated 1 coss right of the road; and Jam and Barurree 2
coss right side of the road, and distant 3 coss from Kujjooree and
Beebee Nannee, containing 80 houses of Koochak Poshy, Pog and Mun-
gundooee Baloochs. The chief of Koochak, Poshy and Pog Balooches is
Futteh Khan of Kirtah, and of Mungundooee Baloochs is Bhawul Khan,
residing at Nurranook and Rodhway, among the hills south of Bolan,
about 7 coss distant. He has about 250 Mungundooee and Koolee
Balooches under him, and Futteh Khan of Kirtah is the chief of 300 of
the tribes above described, leading peaceable lives, and find subsistence
by cultivation.
Round about the Pass of Bolan to the south are the Bolan Marrees, 350
in number, having no fixed habitation, and moving from place to place
where pasture can be found for their cattle and
Beever. of aks: flocks. They are under Durreh Khan, Peeraz and
fe. zine distant from Suttuk Khan, infesting the road and plundering
cafillas and travellers, They are deadly foes to the
Hunanall Patans, living near the hills about Shawl, under Shurreef
Khan and Sahebzadda, 450 in number, leading peaceable lives.
North of the Pass are the Hunnanal Patans mentioned above; next is
the famous freebooter chief Shah Boojruk. He has about 600 Dhumad
Kakads under him, all noted robbers, and a dread to cafillas and tra-
vellers, plundering where they can reside, at Largoongur 10 coss among
the mountains; also 1000 Dhumah Kakads under Nasseer Khan, son
of the late Secunder Khan, also living by plunder, and infesting the
Pass. Their place of abode is Cohast and Gurmode, 12 coss N. W. of
Beebee Nannee.
Azeem Khan Baroozee is the chief of 400 Punnee Patans, He resides
at Sang among the hills, 8 coss from Kirtah; he has 5 cannon; he
lately held the situation of Naib of Seewee. Sang is said to be a well-
fortified fort, having high walls, and in a good state of preservation ;
these people lead quiet lives.
Baddra, under Sayud Khan Baroozee, contains 60 houses of Punnee
Patans, situated 13 coss north-east of Kirtah, leading peaceable lives.
The Marrees, under Dodha of Kahan, 4000 in number, they are pro-
fessed robbers, and infest the Pass. Kahan is situated about 20 coss from
Daddur, among the hills. For the last year, they have not committed
any depredations about the Pass. Mehrab Khan, it seems, has made
548 Route from Deré Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. (No. 151.
some arrangements with Dosha Kurnaee, the residence of Pusund Khan,
who is in the service of Kohn Dil Khan. He is also the chief of ten in-
dependent forts, consisting of 8000 inhabitants of Mukkeeanna and
Chilgurree Patans, living peaceable lives. These places are 10 and 15
coss N. E, from Daddur among the hills.
Seewee is about 7 coss east of Daddur, subject to Candahar : can mus-
ter 4000 men of Kujak Kakads, Punnee Patans and Seelaune Balooches.
The season of the year most unfavorable to cafillas, and to the
Season of the year Movements of troops is from the latter end of July
wale ee to the middle of September, during which time
cafillas, &c. there are three or four falls of rain, which causes
the river to swell fur a few days, after which it subsides, and falls to its
usual depth of 4 and 5 feet the farthest. This season for want of rain,
the river has fallen so low as | and 2, in few places 3 feet.
During the day the weather is oppressively warm, and travellers expe-
Hot weathers rience great fatigue and suffering on that account ; and
from what I have seen and felt, I would not advise travelling through
Bolan in the hot months, except in cases of extreme necessity. The |
nights also are very hot. After leaving Mooch, shelter from the sun is
not to be met with, especially for a large body of men.
Forage for cattle and other animals of burthen is got from the hills,
Forage. near and round about Bolan: the plain also affords good
grazing land, mm an ordinary season of rain. The Pass itself, and its im-
mediate vicinity, can find grass and forage for any number of cattle and
horses, even in this season. If there be no rain and scarcity, grass is to
be found about the parts along the road. The description of grass found
about Bolan is similar to the hay given to horses in Hindostan; and to
camels and bullocks a peculiar shrub growing wild, called stoomby by
the natives, and another called ¢rat, considered strengthening, and a good
substitute for camel thorn and leaves of trees.
Provisions and grain are not to be had in the Pass. An army passing
aL abe Ay ought to be pactionla in procuring a good supply
for a seven days’ journey at the least through the
Pass, barley or jow for horses and mules, wheat for camels and bul-
locks.
Barley, wheat, jowaree, rice, doomba (or fat tailed sheep,) goats, &c.
can be procured from the towns and placesin Daddur and round about.
1844.] Route from Dera Ghazeen Khan to Candahar. 549
From Kirta, Jam and Bomoree, Kujjoree and Rodhbar, near the Pass,
2000 khauvas of rice can be procured. Hurnaee, Cutchee, with Bhag
and its subordinate places can furnish an army of 100,000 men, with a
commissariat of provisions for many months; my informant tells me for
years together.
Shah Shujah in one day obtained 1000 khauvas of wheat from See-
wee as tribute.
Animals best adapted for carriage are camels for baggage, and horses
for cannon; for tents and light burthen for quick
Animals of burthen
best adapted forthe passage, mules and yabboos would be preferable ;
f Bol
pogeore’’"" bullocks also cannot be objected to even for can-
non.
State of the Thermometer after leaving Kelat.
64 Morning, ]
¥2th ool 90 Noon, Open plain of Mangochur and Koohuk.
1838. ¢
82 Sunset,
64 Morning,
13th Augt. 92 Noon, Road to Murravee, open plain.
88 Sunset,
64 Morning, )} Muravee and road to Minzuljah, open
14th Augt. 94 Noon, plain.
88 Sunset,
70 Morning, ) Minzuljah, Bolan, and Beebee Nannee,
15th Augt. 102 Ncon, open plain.
94 Sunset,
84 Morning,
16th Augt. 102 Noon, Beebee Nannee to Kirtah, open plain.
94 Sunset,
86 Morning,
17th Augt. 102 Noon, Kirtah to Daddur or to Nowshera, open
100 Sunset, plain.
84 Morning,
18th Augt, 100 Noon, Nowshera, in a close mud house.
96 Sunset,
64 Morning,
19th Augt. 100 Noon, Nowshera, in a close mud house.
96 Sunset,
(Signed) James Nock.
550
Index to History of the Toorks. By Baron Hammer Von Purcsrauu,
[The following is an abstract of the contents of Baron Hammer Von Purgstall’s
valuable History of the Toorks. It is translated from the original work in our Library
by Dr. E. Roer, Librarian to the Society, and published by us as an Index which may
guide the readers who may be in search of historical authorities to some which might
otherwise escape them, as this excellent work is rare in India.—Eps. }
The Title of Baron de Hammer's Work is the following :
History of the Golden Horde in Kiptschak ; that is, of the Moguls
in Russia, by Hammer Purgstall.
The work presents three divisions, the first of which contains the
history itself in nine books. Each of these books is furnished with a
title, while its contents are given on the margin.
The titles and contents of the books are as follow :—
First Book, ( p. 1—383.)
On Kiptshak and its inhabitants previously to the invasion of the
Moguls, especially on the Turks and their: tribes. Contents: Plan of
the work. Boundaries of Kiptschak. Kiptschaks the same with Patzi-
nakites. Districts of Kiptschak. Its Towns and Inhabitants. The
Turks. Turkish tribes in Kiptschak. Immigrations of a later period.
East and West Turks. Turkish tribes. Continuation. The four
principal Tribes. Customs of the Kiptschaks. Classes of the Tribes.
Second Book, (p. 33—94.)
On the Moguls, their national characteristics, first appearance (in
history,) and on Tchengis Khan. Contents: The Moguls. Name of
the Moguls. Description of them. Dschuweinis’ description. Muned
Schimbaschis’ description. Form of the body and dress.
Their houses, food, wives. Sport, weapons. Character. Origin
(descent) of the Moguls. The family of Tchengis-Khan, Temudschin.
Temudschin’s exploits in war. Further exploits of Temudschin. Battle
at the fountain. Baldochune (1202) expedition against the Naimans.
(1203.) Tchengis-Khan’s expeditions (1206.) Chinese war (1210,) The |
Shaho of the Chuarems. The blood-vesper and carnages. Buchara’s
carnage in ‘Transozana. Chuarem’s flight and death. (Silkide,) 10th
February, 1221. Rebiul-achir, May, 1221. Redschel, July 1222.
Persian expedition. Expedition against Kiptschak. Rebral-achir, June,
13844.) Index to History of the Toorks. 551
1220. Ssafer, April, 1222.’ Battle on the Kalka. Distribution of
countries and appointments (officers.) Tchengis’ death, 18th August,
1227. |
Third Book, (p. 95—143.)
The reigns of Batu and of his two first successors. Contents: I.
Batu. The two hordes, price of gold. Ogatas becomes Grand-Khan.
Expedition against Kiptshak, 1223. Schewwal, 21st December, 1237.
The burning of Moskan. Carnage at Waldimir. Tschermaghun’s
expedition against Persia. Reduction of Kiew and of some Volhynsan
towns. The Moguls in Poland. Battle at Chmielik, 18th March,
1240. Battle of Liegnitz, 9th April, 1241. Invasion of Silesia and
Moravia. The Moguls in Hungary. Battle on the Saj’s. The con-
quests of Grosswardein, Perg and Gran. Expedition through Dalma-
tia and Croatia. The Moguls in Austria. The first Russian prince
in the camp of the Moguls.
Kujuk becomes Khan. Mergku becomes Khan. Silkide, February
1251. Reign of the Moguls in Russia. The grand-prince Michael
murdered 1246. Russian princes in Batu’s camp. Distribution of
the Mongolian army in Russia, Sertak, Ulaghdschi.
Fourth Book, (p. 144—181.)
The reigns of Berke. Contents: Berke. Warlike preparations,
Schaaban, September 1254. Succession. Census. Burundai before
Hatitsch. Hulagu’s expedition in Russia. Irbil’s conquest. The
empire of Rum divided. Battle against Arikbugha. Scheich Seiffed-
din. Beheadings. The general of Noghai Berke. Expedition in
Kiptshak. Division of the conquests. Halagu’s death. Alaka becomes
Khan. Russian princes in the camp. Kiptschak’s relations to Asia
Minor. Turkish colony in Dobrudscha, Tseddin’s plan against the
emperor. Berke’s death.
Fifth Book, (p. 182—247.)
On the political institutions, that is, of the laws, religion, state of
civilisation, finance, administration of justice, etiquette, dignitaries of
court and officers of state of the Moguls.
Sixth Book, (p. 248—280.)
_ The reigns of Mengku Timur, Tudie Mengku, the Tetrarchia of
Tulabuka, Skidschik, Alghui and Toghrul, and reign of Toktai to the
accession of Usbeg.
Ar
Or
Or
bo
Index to History of the Toorks. [No. 151.
Seventh Book, (p. 281—326.)
The reign of Usbeg, and expiration of the dynasty of the Blue horde.
Eighth Book, (p. 327—367.)
The reigns of Urus-Khan, his two sons, Tochtasmish Khan and the
two invasions of Timur.
Ninth Book, (p. 368—412.)
The reigns of the Khans of the Golden horde, from the death of
Tochtasmish Khan to its expiration.
Second Division, (Appendices. )
I. Extracts from the Menasirul-awalin of Aaschik.
‘IJ. The rain stone extracted from Mohammed B. Manosun’s work
on gems.
III. Invasions of Kiptschak by the Turks and Arabs, and expedi-
tions of the Petscheneges and Polowzes, previously to the epoch of the
Moguls.
List of the invasions from the commencement of the historic time,
more complete than those in the Treatises of Sulm, Phumanr on the
Kumans Polowzes, Tazyges, or in Schloezer’s Chronicle of the Polow-
zes (in his history of the Germans in Transylvania) in Horvath’s History
of the Kumans, and in the Appendix on the Polowzes, as added to the
instructions of Klaproth’s Travels in the Kaukasus and in Georgia,
p. 32.
IV. The poem of Purbeha Dschami, with the addition of fifty
Mongolian words.
V. Thirty-six diploms of Mongolian state-officers, (from the collee-
tion of state papers of Mohammed Hinduschar. )
VI. Venetian Treaties, with Dehanibeg and Berdibeg.
VII. List of Russian families, descended from the Tartars.
VIII. List of the names of Russian princes who entered the Tarta-
rian camp, and a list of fifty succeeding Mongolian rulers in Kiptschak.
IX. List of names of Tartarian ambassadors in Russia.
X. Division. )
Critics given by three Russian academicians on this work, and the
author’s reply.
008
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. By Major R. Lexcu, C.B.
lst Assistant Governor General’s Agent, N. W. P.
( Concluded from p. 420.)
Adverbs of Time.
Az, to-day~ Sulli, to-morrow morning
Yawa, yesterday Kajis, at noon
Autra, day before yesterday Sakale, in morning
Paga", to-morrow Kuni-kuni, sometimes
Tami paga", day after to-morrow Kaal uhyat, day after to-morrow
Paga do® karit, ditto ditto Duyami phiri, again
Parus, last year Daadd, always
Yuhus, this year Brinzaki pata, after an hour
Wuny, now
Adverbs of Place.
Boaut, before Kaut, where
Nibar, without Yut, here
Path, after Yati, hence
Andar, within Hut, there
Thod, above Ati, thence
Bou, below Tout, there
Pyat, upon Kun, toward
Tal, under Tati, there
Kasheeri, to or from Cashmeer ‘Tatyuk, of there, (adj. 2.)
Kati, whence
Adverbs of Quantity.
Yoot, this much Yoota dik, whatever you give
Tyoot, that much Tyoota nima, I will take
Koot, how much
Conjunctions, Interjections, Sc.
Ta, and Nah, no
- or 4 (Chu na, is not)
: ats, without Hato-ho,. . hole
San, with Hataho, ..
Yudwai, if Hataba, ..) holla, brother
Yithai, even 80, gratis Hatasah,.. § holla, sir
oe oe ¢ leat Kami bapat, why
utna, .. Yut hyn, thus
ee 4 Bei, moreover
uits, : Kyuth, how
Bapat, sa fon account of Kyazi, «2 omit woh
a Kouv khatra, .. y
Tamat, Fe \ till Athuk, but
Y Youkaniky4, because, for
554 A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. [No. 151.
VOCABULARY OF NOUNS.
Substantives mith their Genders, and some of their appropriate pa
jectives.
Nab, m. sky Thod, high Saf, clear
Zoon, f. moon Rats, fine Katsa, full
Aiyit, m. sun Taut, hot Prezalawur, shining
Tsdndar, 7. new moon Zauyul, fine
Taruk, a. star Prezalan, shining
Gruhun, m. eclipse of sun Lagan, is taking place
Kroan, 2. ditto of moon Lagus, has taken place
Tap pyun, m. sunrise
Mandul, mm. halo
Rood, mm. rain Sata, much Vyut, heavy. [cotton
Sheen, 7. snow Pamba seera hisha, like flakes of
Bhambari, like slates
Doat, 2. hail Sata, much Sakht, heavy
Shishar gant, f- icicle
Tilakatur, 22. ice Pishul, slippery
Lawah, f. dew Adar, damp
Soor, 7. frost Toh hyu, like rice, husky
Trat, f. thunder-bolt Band, large
Wuzmal, f lightning
Gagararai, f. thunder
Rajaram boodariny doony, a rainbow
Literally, Rdéjaram Bahadur’s bow
Wavy, m. wind Sakht, high
Banahali hyund, like Banahal’s
Samoor, 272. simoom
Waharat, f rainy season
Harud, mm. autumn Rut, fine
Retakool, 7. summer
Wandu, m. winter Sakht, severe
Joant, 7. spring Jwan, fine
Patr chhanin, falling leaves
Bamun, budding of trees [money
A whirlwind is said to be the devil looking after a lost piece of
Mats, / earth
Bungul, m. earthquake Yata, slight
Bal, . : :
Parbah, m. Sa hill ini eet zy 00 long
Wan, m. sut, low ikhan, slippery
Labur, m. a hillock
Wudarr, 7 table land
Kamy, 7. a stone, flat Pharish, rough
Pal, m. a round large stone Sakij, soft
Tuj, 7 a clod of earth
1844. ] A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
Dath, f |
Tral, ff a large clod of earth
Rab, f. mud Taing, thin Mut, thick
Lats, 7. dust Gat, thick
Nala, 2. a defile Tsaut, narrow
Noar, mm. Zyoot, long
Garu, 2. house Rut-jwan, fine
Jolahar, / chimney Kaij, roomy
Talou, m. roof
Pathur , 2. floor
Kalai, /. a fort Dair, strong
Laur, 7. a hut
Look garu, a little house
Koothir, 7 a small room
Kuth, mm. a room
Dalan, m. a hall | ee ba pas
iram,
Tham, 7. a post Thamij, / a small post
ce a bund or dam
Khod, m. a pit Seer, f. a brick
Gop, f. a cave Koanda, f. a kiln
Zeena pauwur, 7. flight of steps
Kadul, mm. bridge Duas, 7. wall.
Thaut, a m. pier gle a Vn eap of ashes
Shahr, m. a city Gam, m. village
Gdmapoor, m. a small village
Burij, 7. tower
Nar,
Aguin, Fire, 7. Tongul, 7. a coal
Ugun,
Tembar, /. a spark Reh, / a small flame
Alav, m. a large flame
Soor, 7. ashes Du, m. smoke
Tsiny, f. charcoal Tsoeng, a. lamp
Saait, f wick Zoowur, f. candlestick
Tar, m. lamp recess
Kangree, ta hand basket with live coals in its earthen lining
- Kangur, $
Sudur, m. the sea Talav, m. tank
Kuol, f. a river Nagarda, m. mountain stream
Nag, m. a fountain
Jwai, 7, a canal Kroor, m. a well
Dal, m. a lake Henur, a gutter
Poany-woany-zal, water
Kala, m.
Heer, 7. head. Baud, large; Dulomb, round
Wod, ¢
556 A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
Tal, /. scalp.
Wauk, f. a ringlet
Deka, mm. forehead
Kan, 7. ears
Acharwal, 2. eyelashes
Daar, f. beard
Koad, 27. brain
Buth, 2m. face
Wut, m. lip
Kaar, f neck
Naar, f. veins
Achhnat, f. a wink
Goentsa, f. moustache
Hongainy, f. chin
Dand, mm. tooth
Nakawoar, 2. nostril
Aas, m. mouth
Mats, 7. thick of arm
Athu, mm. hand
Nam, 2. nail
Kis, 7. little finger
Bab, f breast
Lar, 7. side
Kamlear, a. back waist
Toon, 7. navel
Zuk, ——
Khad,
Tsot, ——
Kuath, mm. knee
Tulupud, 2. sole of foot
Khuratzund, m. big toe
Man, 7.
Wund, m.
Kernaniaz, liver
Tukawat, f- kidney
Gadood, #. mutton flesh
Zang, f. leg below knee
Nal, 2. bone
Adij, f. bone
Pak, 4
Pail.
Garwaul, married man
\ heart
m. Matter
Garwajainy, married woman
Khatal, divorced woman
Maand, widow
Mast, 2. hair
Val, hairs, a hair
Bichur, forehead curl
Ach, f eye
Buma, /. eyebrows
Yawun, youth
Muh gand, mm. cheek
Nast, /, nose
Hut, am. throat
Neuga, /. temple
Ashteant, # a glance
- Danda baer, ~ gums
Kangoo, #. shoulder
Nair, f- below ditto
Anguj, f. finger
Nyat, m. thumb
Wach, 2. chest
Kaainy, f. rib
Thar, f.
Trek, f. \ back
Yad, f stomach
Momar, :
Hyat, \ penis
Mandul, ——
Pon,
Tsenk, good
Bhoer, m. foot
Wileenj, f. liver
Rat, 2. blood
Tsam, skin
Khing, snot
Auhohur, a batchelor
Auharish, a maid
Harish muts, a bride
Maharaza, a bride groom
[No. 151.
—————————————_———_—_————_ Sti‘
1844.]
Mahariny, a bride
Moal, father
Moaj, mother
Khalah,
Mas,
Masoo, husband of ditto
Pophoo, father’s sister’s husband
Poph, father’s sister
Mam, mother’s brother
Mamany, ditto’s wife
Koor, daughter
Nosh, son’s wife
Hash, mother-in-law
Kakany,
Kaka moaj,
Kakajee,
Bualjee,
Petan, father’s brother
Pechany, ditto’s wife
Nany,
Baij ded,
Baadiama,
Buad bab, father’s father
Jad, ditto’s father
Buid nany; 2 >-,, >. —:
Fading, ( ditto’s wife
Dadabab, foster father
Dadamoaj, ditto mother
Dodaboaee, ditto brother
Dodaboace kakany, ditto’s wife
Dadanany, wife of foster grand-
father
Binye, sister
Boa,ee, brother
Banthur, son of sister
Bapathur, ditto brother
NAsatur boaee, son of bhélah
Masatur benyi, daughter of do.
Pitur boaee, son of amoo
Pophatur boaee, son of pophoo
Popathur benyi, daughter of do.
Mamatur boaee, son of mam
Mamatur beenyi, daughter of do.
Zur, daughter’s daughter
Hihur, husband’s father
Masa hash, husband’s mother’s
sister
Roon, husband
\ mother’s sister
brother’s wife
mse mother
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
557
Khawand, husband
Drui, husband’s brother
Zam, ditto’s sister
Hash, husband’s mother
Kolai, ’
Ashiny, ¢ wae
Nechu, son
Son, rival wife
Sauj, wife’s sister
Soalu, wife’s brother
Chhauk, white
Kruhun, black
Wozul, red
Lider, yellow
Mudur, sweet
Tsuk, sour
Tynt, bitter
Bata, cooked rice
Gheu kulcha, ghee cake
Tsut, bread
Khatai, kind of bread
Machama, rice boiled with sugar
Busrak, a sugar puff
Syun, any cooked dish
Purat, a greasy cake
Doda wugr, rice and milk
Mund, a kind of oil cake
Doda mair, rice much diluted
Khanda hakan, a sweetmeat
Bhetsur, boiled rice with grain
mixed
Denda, barley sugar
Firiny, blanc mange
Kand, loaf sugar
Jomul, raw rice
Khand, soft sugar
Buzmut phal, parched grain of any
kind
Gor, molasses
Dan li, parched rice
Moraba, preserve
Buzmut maz, fried meat
Ras, gravy
Fulda, furmetty
Wishki kashaba, barley water
Wugra, rice pudding
Anjima, congee
Wur bata, rice boiled dry
508
Dasit maz, minced meat
Nabad, sugar candy
Guash taba, mash meat
Anchar, pickle
Atha tsocha, dry pancake
Thool, egg
Bakar khany, pie crust
Thoola mund, omelette
Sheer mal, a kind of meat
Buzmut thool, roasted egg
Taftana, bread with oil
Adoam, half roasted egg
Tel kulcha, oil cake
Syoomut thool, boiled egg
Thula kaand, eggshell
Thula haanyiny, yolk of egg
Thula chatsar, white of egg
Wushki wat, barley bruised and
boiled
Kabdaba, roast meat
Tika tuji, skewered meat
Waza bata, rice bought from cook-
ing shop
Waza syun, cooked meat ditto do.
Mas, wine
Chah, tea
Chut chai, tea boiled with su-
Moghal chai, gar and spices
Aum dod, raw milk
Suhhabul, lukewarm
Zaumut dod, curds
Tsokyar, vinegar
Guras, butter milk
Zyal, cream
Basmat,
Jyerzeen, ; kinds of rice
Sukdés, §
Katsa, red-hair, (or light colored)
Khur, bald from disease
Shaur, double-sighted
Hithar, covered with white, blot-
chy
Yaid muras, dropsy
Zanga tsot, amputated leg
Kaij, dumb-woman
Kaanz, rice water vinegar
Zair, deaf-woman
Gala band, a scald
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
[No. 151.
Khanda koan, sunken eye, blind
Theer koan, protruded ditto ditto
Huny umut, gout
Dahalad, covered with dark blot-
ches
Tunda, handless
Larits, eunuch
Leha loot, an abusive man
Haramzoad, a scoundrel
Zinalad, a whoremonger
Apazyoar, a liar
Byazur, a usurer
Laud, inflicted with (a man )
Laiz, ditto ditto (woman )
Kala doad, a head-ache
Nalwasun, swelled testicles
Ukhung, pain of half-head
Aush, a tear
Kana pak, ear-wax
Shok, spittle.
Phel, a large boil
Phephur, a small boil
Shitill, small pox
Tamul, rice cleaned
Dairyer, rice uncleaned
Wieshka, barley
Foony wushka, dog-barley
Gogul, turnip
Kremihak, cabbage
Muj, radish
Muli wany, radish tops
Gazair, carrot
Hand, endive
Gasu, grass
Dramun, short grass
Kaund, a thorn
Swai, nettle
Poesh, a flower
Kul, a tree
Heedsman, jasmine
Kari haul, joy
Krera rant, wild grape
Tang, a pear
Tsoorit, apple
Daan, pomegranate
Taanj, wild pear
Nyuk tsoorit, small apple
Tal, mulberry
1844. ]
Tsunun, peach
Aar, a sour plum
Thar, a bush
Badam, almond
Doon, walnut
Viring, a nut
Phres, a poplar
Veer, a willow
Dewana veer,
emits, 6...
Traela, wild apple
Injara, a fig
Kapas, cotton
Phohur, rough
Pishhaul, smooth
Takur, hard
Mund, blunt
Taut, hot
Shuhul, cold
Huk, dry
Adur, damp
Zayul, fine
Poot, coarse
Gub, heavy
Lut, light
Zyoot, long
Tsut, short
Wechar, thick
Taun, thin
Thaud, high
Sun, deep
Dulam, round
Surug, cheap
Drug, dear
Tikhan, quick
Lut, slow
Nyoor, near
Door, far
-Mushak dar, odoriferous
Phaka lad, offensive
Look, small
Band, large
Nyool, green
Pup, ripe
Aum, raw
Rummut, cooked
Su , a lion
Hungul, elk
; weeping willow
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
Ninyamair, a deer
Roos, a musk deer
Haput, a bear
Lu?, a fox
Shal, a jackal
Ramahoon, wolf
Padar su", a tiger _
Puriz, monkey
Wandur, an ape
Dumb, a fat-tailed sheep
Haund, a ram
Gaib, an ewe
Tsawul, a goat
Wuts, a calf
Watsar, a heifer
Soer, a hog
Haust, an elephant
Woont, camel
ox
Haist kokur, elephant bird, turkey
Broar, a cat
Gagur, a rat
Woodur, a beaver
Packhin, a water fowl
Wankokur, a wild fowl!
Raza hoanz, an eagle
J yagar pachhin, a roe
Rata moghul, a “ night mogul,”
owl
Kautur, a pigeon
Kakoo, partridge
Titar, a small partridge
Batur, a quail ;
Kav, a crow
Jal, woodcock
Didar, female of ditto
Gant, a vulture
Pauz, a hawk
Katijh, a swallow
Toata, a parrot
Kautur, a sparrow
Kaula toont, a fishing bird
Bryag, a pelican
Poampur, a moth
Zuts, a fire-fly
Tila wanyiny, a glow-worm
Haloo, a locust
Khaha boat, grasshopper
Gada, fishes
4G
560
Gad, a fish
Baja gada, large fish
Chhatri, a kind of fish
Gurun, ditto very small
Neecha gad, a kind of fish
Nadur, waterlily stalk
Goar, a water root
Gool, the kernel of ditto
Messa, a raw root
Jeewar, a small water root
Pamposh, a waterlily
Bumbi posh, ditto
Pamback, the cup of the lily
Bumb, lily root
Sipp, ..
“ala a shell
Hil, water weed
Kyoo, a root
Kream, a crocodile
Zalgur, jack o’lanthern
Vidri gad, a kind of fish
Kana waja, a ear-ring
Nasta waaj, a nose-ring
Waaj, a ring
Anawat, a toe-ring
Bungree, a bracelet
Aana waaj, a looking-glass-ring
Haanzra, a necklace
Lakam, a bridle
Kalagee, head stall
Kaathi, saddle
Gal, mane
Laut, tail
Daus, a wall
Boonthim dugun, front yard
Pathim augun, back yard
Haer, stone or mud-stairs
Hachoo haer, a ladder
Branda kaany, entrance steps
Bar, door
Koothur, a room
Garru, a house
Dalan, a hall
Doar, a window
Virama, flat beams
Koothi, round rafter
Dalon, ceiling
Kanyiny, terrace
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
[No. 151.
Solahar, cook-room
Pash, roof
Dabadul, wooden back to lean
against
Woegamur, trap door
Pacha, batten
Burza, for leaf thatching
Dwari puat, leaf of window
Panjra, shutter
Toemb, a tent
Barput, leaf of door
Srana kut, bathing room
Ganjuna, cupboard
Tihhish, a shelf
Pakhaan, a necessary
Hanhal, a chain
Pu, eye of chain
Tapadana, skylight
Kulaba, fire-place
Gund, log of wood
Thasa bar, creaking door, theft-pre-
ventive
Boar, mud plaster
Hurs mutz, white earth for plaster
Wut, passage
Deedhi, out-roomed
Wata laur, a traveller’s serai
Lari nav, accommodation boat
Khoor, an oar
Wav wal, a sail
Danga, kind of boat
Hasti nav, ditto
Paranda, ditto
Hamatul, pole for pushing boat
Vag, tracking rope
Nav, a boat
Shikaari, a fishing boat
Bahats, a barge for merchandise
Ajdar, a dragon
Gunnas, a kind of serpent
Buch, a scorpion
Sarp, snake
Puhur, a kind of viper
Ryai, an ant
Gunuryai, a large ant
Kana hapiny, earwig
Duruk, a leech
Ama kyum, a tape worm
1844.)
Khoela, a worm
Dara hyum, a wood worm
Nool, a mungoose
Kanka lat, lizard
Niny mendub, a frog
Paat hyum, silk worm
Buma siny, a kind of worm
Sangchoora, a kind of snake
Syai, a small black worm
Kaad hyum, a flesh worm
Dacha poampur, a worm in trees.
Dakur maz, mutton
Paneer, cheese
Bad maz, beef
Tsaman, fresh cheese
Phu, a kind of cheese
Sadamund gurus-pesh, thick but-
ter-milk
Suan, gold
Chaand, a
ie PULEE
Tram, copper
Shistur, iron
Lua,i, brass
Nag, lead
Pulad, steel
Chats kany, marble
Nilawat, a kind of stone very hard
Patur, a slab slate
Potaji, a slippery stone
Kaing phal, a pebble
Zakmak, a flint
Kajawat, stone used as pestle
Waukul, mortar
Grata, a mill
Atha gratiny, a hand mill
Shoant, ginger
Lidar, turmeric
Martsa wangan, red pepper
Dagni wal, coriander seeds
Gyav sheer, dragon’s blood
Manaz, henna
Marats, black pepper
Darcheen, cinnamon
Shangar, liquorice
Khizur, dates
Bamstoont byoal, quince seeds-
Ala byoal, pumpkin seeds
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
561
Laar byoal, cucumber seeds
Babaree byoal, sweet basil
Irmoghul, seed of flea wort
Nast, snuff
Tamak, tobacco
Aala, cardamums
Kaung, saffron
Raung, cloves
Tul, oil
Gyav, ghee
Handi byoal, endive seed.
Wada, frankincense
Afeem, opium
Zyur, zeera
Yimlee, tamarinds
Javend, bunhage
Saban, soap
Manch, honey
Syut, wax
Bangu “ bhung” zuris, barberries
Tsandun, sandal
Asur, mustard
Tsera krank, peach gum
Lach, lac
Audur, ginger
Buhur, a druggist, (Hindoo)
Wadar pyul, satyrion
Pamba tsaélun, china rhubarb.
Phula, soda, used in tea
Suz, potash
Parud, quicksilver
Wai, galangal
Raunga tsing, a small clove
Tsera naim, dried apricots
Yangu, asafoetida
Zafal, nutmeg
Wari, dried curry cake of mash,
onions, garlic, red pepper, car-
damums, salt, ginger and tur-
meric
Lekhawun, a writer
Mukeem, a shawl broker with
whom merchants from foreign
marts lodge
Wah farosh, shawl itinerant bro-
ker
Boota lekhawan, pattern designer.
Wagivgaur, mat-maker
562
Kral, potter
Ruphgaur, shawl-darner
Topagaur, needle-worker of cor-
ners
Paatigaur, worker in silk
Topi suwawun, cap-maker
Juraabi, \ sock-maker
Jurabagaur,
Sats, a tailor
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
[ No. 151.
Namdagaur, a felt-maker
Kéalcha woanawun, a carpet-ma-
ker
Daub, washerman
Chitta gaur, a chintz-maker
Laungi woanawun, a lungee-maker
Kaghaz gaur, a paper-maker
Janda sats, a patch work tailor
Araum, kitchen gardener
Doori woanawun, maker of breechesGroost, a cultivator
ties
Ashadgaur, an oculist
Dyara saraf, a money changer
Jarap, land surveyor
Thantaur, coppersmith
Khar, blacksmith
Nailchigar, hookah pipe-maker
Doon, cotton cleaner
Wouwur, a weaver
Kandur, baker
Dandur, vegetable seller
Soudagur, fruit seller
Kraipak, confectioner
Khdahauny gaur, knife grinder
Khanda wav, shawl weaver
Aujar woany, } grocer
Houti woal,
Kababa gaur, seller of cooked
meat
Sazagar, a tire woman
Guna woanawun, maker of hair
clothes
Roza wutawun, rope-maker
Chhan, carpenter
Dusil, bricklayer
Kucha haanz, a rice cleaner of the
Haanz tribe
Demba haanz, a cultivator of float-
ing lands
Thaheer, a street minstrel
Grata woal, a miller
Phut gaur, a basket-maker
Kangul, a kangree-maker
. Baghwan, a gardener
Turka chhan, a turner
Gatar woanawun, a ribbon-maker
Pooi woany, a woollen thread seller
Koad, cotton cleaner
Tsamar, shoemaker »
Watul, a sweeper
Bautigaur, an innkeeper
Tainhi gaur, a mint man
Mala khoash,
Gar mala,
Tsoor, a thief
Tsroal, a jailor
Meerda, a police officer
Chanda tsoor, a pickpocket
Haist woal, an elephant keeper
Bad, a mimick, (whence bauda
¢ a grave digger
Surawoal, a performer on the sitar, jushna, a play)
accompanied by the voice
Doolkiwoal,
Doolik waujiwun,
Surnoci, lute player
Soenur, goldsmith
Manur, Japidary
Mukhta tsurrachal, pear] arranger
Haanz, boatman
Gada haanz, fisherman
Rangaur, a dyer
Mandangaur, a pattoo-maker
Gaanz, a currier
Zinmazoor, woodcutter
a performer
on drum with Baipaar, a merchant
hand
Goor, a dairy man
Shahteer, a forerunner
Oonta woal, a camel man
Trangaree woainy, an_ itinerant
grocer
Puj, a sheep butcher
Kasab, a beef-butcher
Gupan roach, a herdsman
Pohul, a shepherd
1844. | A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. 563
Satsani gair, a needle-maker Hankal, a chain
Charbadar, a horse keeper Krdanjul, a basket
Kannul, a labourer Shrak, knife
Purzun, ditto of low caste Chéhi patala, a vessel for boiling tea
Wareny, a midwife Chéhi dabka, a cup and saucer safe
Wana raach, a shop-keeper Chahi naar, a tea pot
Manzim goar, a marriage agent Degyul, an earthen cooking vessel
Manzim yéreny, dittoa woman Tsinig lij, an earthen charcoal pan
Pheran, a shirt Tsony, an earthen lamp
Poats, a cotton surtout Kroond, a lamp
Durmah, a thick pattoo Latsij, a broom
Poambur, a single shawl Naut, an earthen pitcher
Loonggi, a lungee : Kartal, a sword
Paijama, breeches Banduk, matchlock
Koosh, high-heeled slippers Zooj, helmet
Mauss, boots Reenz, pellet bow
Atha trioon, gloves Chhépun, a sling
Chanda, a pocket Tsoeta, a stick
Paizar, shoes Barish, a spear
Poots, a veil Loor, a long stick
Naangil, a kind of shoes Ban, a cooking utensil
Karats, plaid Krdavahur, clogs for wet weather
Kijja koosh, high-heeled shoes Wagiva radh, a small mat
Atha daij, handkerchief Tsaangij, -. bide ot ouat
Shanda gund, pillow Binna yA. *%s bas
Kalecha, carpet Wilinj, a clothes’ line
Gabba, stuffed carpetting Choncha, spoon
Wurun, any kind of coverlid Kruts, a fire shovel
Watharun, carpet of any kind Duan, cooking place
Sataraand, woollen carpet Chumta, tongs
Khaainy, blanket Shukhur, a hanging basket
Satsan, needle Bustoor, a kid’s skin
Panadav, a thread Pechwan, a hookah snake
Jojir, a pipe
Verbs.
Ujun, to come Kadun, to extract
Anun, to bring Sumbardwun, to collect
Hechhun, to learn Chun, to drink
Trawun, to throw Tsumbun, to bore jewels
Pyun, to fall Jurun, to mount, (jewels)
Azmaun, to put to test Prezalun, to kindle
‘Roazun, to remain Tambulum, to be amazed
Wodonun, to stand Barnayun, to defile
Sherun, to prepare — Dunun, to disperse
Alandun, to hang Tsarrawun, to increase
Milanawun, to mix Uza dyun, to cause pain
Sulun, to raise up Khyal karun, to consider
564 A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. [No. 151.
Pressun, to bring forth Gindun, to play games
Asun, to be Tsatun, to cut
Mushuk hyun, to smell Myenun, to measure
Myoot karan, to kiss Iiarun, to sow, to scatter, to lose a
Dodarun, to rot game
Nyun, to take or carry away Rachun, to nourish, foster
Bakhshun, to give Lat dyun, to twist
Gandun, to tie Rarun, to cook
Woanun, to weave Naerun, to come on, go out
Hatiwalun, to swallow Chanun, to sift
Poathun, to grow up Tikun, to run
Walun, to rain W ufun, to fly
Harun, to lose
The Causal Verb is formed by adding adwun, as wufunawun, to
cause, to fly.
Wutun, to twist Wuchun, to see
Tikun, to gallop a horse Tsatun, to tear
Tatun, to wax hot Doarun, to run
Bhotsun, to fear Dyun, to give
Phatun, to split Soowun, to sew
Prazalun, to shine Thawun, to keep
Katan, to spin Dogun, to milk
Alarun, to shake Zanun, to know
Wuzun, to bubble Tsoori nijun, to thieve
Tikan watun, to spring up Loanun, to reap
Harhar kariny, t to dispute, to Pakun, to go
Tsoowiny, quarrel Khasun, to grow
Tsadun, to search Duwun, to sweep
Tsohun, to taste Makalun, to escape
Harun, to drop Malool gatsan, to be angry
Tsatun, to pick Kaditsunun, to drive away
Meelit gatsun, to adhere Peshab karun, to ease nature
Pakun, to pass current Lasun, to live
Bhyun, to eat Ziun, to be born
Shangun, to sleep Lagun, to beat
Wathun, to rise Kasun, to polish
Yatsun, to desire Riwun, to moan
Nindar kariny, to sleep Watun, to make
Tsap kariny, to remain silent Pat tsalun, to retreat
Atsun, to prick Tsambun, to pierce
Tsdépun, to show Dazun, to burn
Krakndd karun, to scream Galum, to rub
Kashun, to scratch gently Hyun, to take
Tachhun, to scratch violently Gyawun, to sing
Khasta karun, to wound Prazanawun, to become acquainted
Mulhyun, to purchase with
Parun, to read Boazun, to hear
1844.]
Gunzareen, to count
Cheerun, to strain
Phalun, to blossom
Priat karing, to split
Phutarun, to break
Chhalun, to wash
Grazun, to create noise
Sapazun, to become
Bihun, to sit
Mutur karun, to make water
Tsadun, to call for
Tsrat ding, to tumble about
Halakarun, to engage in battle
Pherun, to roll over and over
Tambalawun, to deceive
Wara boazun, to understand
Keenun, to sell
Farmdun, to order
Soazun, to send
Momalun, to congeal
Phrarun, to squeeze
Tsaravun, to increase
Trawun, to throw away
Karun, to make or do
Tehanun, to dig
Wawun, to sow
Galun, to Jessen
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language. 56
Or
Marun, to kill
Tsetun, to pound
Kadun, to extract
Walanagun, to agree together
Dapun, to speak
Trawun, to leave
Ralun, to take
Tsalun, to flee
Tsalanawun, to put to flight
_ Pherun, to ramble
Wadun, to weep
Watarun, to spread
Gatsun, to go
Natun, to tremble
Dolun, to slip
Gindun, to play games
Langun, to halt in gait
Thawun, to place
Behanawun, to cause to be seated
Bihun, to sit
Lekhun, to write
Khatun, to hide
Rackhun, to keep
Matsarawun, to entice
Wagun, to blow
Khoatsun, to fear
MODES OF ADDRESS.
To a Man.
A superior, .. ee aia
Anequal, .. ae ag
An inferior,
Hata sah, oh sir!
Huta ba, oh brother !
Hato, holla!
Toa Woman.
Elderly equal in rank,.. ..
Equal in age and rank, ae
Elderly inferior in rank,
Inferior in rank without reference
Hata didd, oh mother !
Hata biny, oh sister !
Hata maaj, oh mother !
to age, Hi ae = Hatai, holla!
To a Lad.
Hato nechivya, ae we Oh son !
Hato shuryda,.. - es Oh child!
566
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
(No. 151.
To a Girl.
Hatai koori, ...
Oh daughter!
Answers to Address.
To a superior,.. ae a
To an equal, .. is pi
To an inferior, a
Kya haz, what? your honor!
Kya sah, what? sir!
Kya ba, what? brother!
Kyiho, what?
Friendly Enquiries.
Khair chhoo shuren, ta bdtsan Is (all) well? were children and
ausu khair, .. a
Wara paatin chhuwa, guzrén
karan?
family well?
Are you getting on in a good
way?
Answer and Rejoinder.
Shukar khuda talas kun, ..
Tse ti ausoo khair, ..
Shuren tuhinden, .. sea
Chhwa khair gar,
Wajiny ausoo khair malis ta mj
chawoo Paes ;
Thanks be to God!
Was it well with you too?
Are your children well ?
Was your wife well ?
o Are your father and mother well ?
Answer.
Shukar hamdilla,
Thanks be to God !
Question.
Kya choo karan ta krawan,
What are you doing, and how get-
ting on?
Answer,
Wara paatin chhi® wuzrdn karan, We are getting on in good fashion.
Duhd panun wara paaten, chhi® We are passing our days after a
kadan, ee eo
How long is it since you left
Cashmeer ?
Who was Governor at that time ?
Which is the best and shortest
road for a traveller like me?
Are the people there civil to
strangers?
Is living there cheap, and can
a house be got for hire and is a
passport from the Sikh Govern.
ment necessary ?
good fashion.
Kaitud kal chhuw goemut to-
hi chhawa kasheer trawmuty.
Zat sa moas manz kusaus ha-
kim.
Nuh musafarsindi khdtara kus
wat chhe® jan ta lath.
Look tatikk musafaray gezat
chha karan.
Anajuk sroejar chhw tate-bei
garu kirai paatin eeya athi bei
sikanhindi sarkaruk talakcha
chhwa zaroor.
1844.]
What would be the best dis-
guise for a European to go there
in order to see every thing to
advantage P
What is the hire of a poney
from Amritsir?
How many guards would be re-
quired without a passport from
the Sikhs?
Which is the most pleasant sea-
son to arrive in?
How many days is a merchant
on the road from Lodiana?
For what sum would you con-
tract to conduct me there and
back, shew me every thing worth
seeing and pay all the expenses,
our whole trip to occupy one year,
and I agreeing to eat and dress
as you do?
How far is it to Jummoo?
I have lost the road, can you
shew it me which is the road to
Poormandal.
I don’t understand. I only know
enough of the Cashmeer language
to ask and answer the simplest
questions.
Go into the nearest village and
fetch a guide.
I put myself entirely under
your charge who know the coun-
try and people.
Can I get a lodging for the night
in Poonah, and food for my party
and fodder for our horses.
Are strangers allowed to visit
that shrine?
As you say, the place is worth
seeing, let us halt a day.
Are there any curiosities in the
neighbourhood ?
Where can I get a drink of water?
Can I purchase a fresh poney
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
567
Kusa chal ta pairon séhab kan
yuth tauh gatsit wara paatin sau-
rui saiar kari.
Tailisund béra Amarsar nishe
kaitua chhu.
Kaitya wata hawaikh gatsan
asin yudwai sikasund parwadna
asi nak.
Kus riat chhu rut watana kha-
tara.
Baipaari Ludiani nishi kats
doh wati manz baran.
Chukawit kaaitu yatsak hyun,
yut asi tant tacenu watanawak
bei put pheerit anak bei ikensa
wuchun laick asi tih hawak bei
sauree kharaj chani zimma 4si
safuruk kal chhui akhwaree amu
gami sharta zi tsehyoo khyun
chun gandun asi.
Jum koata chhu door.
Asi rawur wat tuhi tukuva asi
hawit Poormandalaich wath kusa
chhe.
Buchhus na boazan itsee hana
kashir kath zana purtsun ta da-
pun githui tithui kara.
Gats tat gamas manz gusnyoor
asi watahawakha anun.
Panun pan tsei chhus pusharan
kyazi mulkuk ta lookanhund pynd
chuh tsu®.
Proontsas manz rat roazanas
shaee paida sapazya be,i tsut
saityanhindi khatara be,i gasu
waishka gurinhandi khatara.
Vopar mahnavis zyarat asmanz
trawanas kinanah.
Tuhi chhiwa dapau sa shaee
wuchunus laikh chhih biyus do-
hasakhistih dera karou.
Yami tarafa kenchuz ajaibbon-
nisha chha.
Treshkathshaee banichiny.
Hekon ze" yat bazaros manz
4u
568
in the bazar, or enabled giving
mine, who has a sore back in part
exchange, and whose only pace is
a rough trot?
Take this rupee, and purchase in
the bazar all the necessaries for a
good dinner this evening, we are
very hungry after our long march.
Tell mea story to pass the time,
and keep me awake.
To-morrow’s stage is very long,
enquire the name of some inter-
mediate stage or village. |
Awake me to-morrow morning
a little earlier than usual, as the
stage is a long one.
Can I get any one to lead my
horse, my legs ache from our long
ride, and I should like to walk a
little.
As the next stage is a short
one, and the weather is cool, we
need not start till sunrise.
I shall not be able to pass for
your relation, my light hair and
eyes will prove me to be a Euro-
pean, the former I can dye, what
can I do with the latter?
We will start early and break-
fast on the road under some con-
venient clump of trees, where we
shall require nothing but hot wa-
ter to make some tea; cook some-
thing this evening which will only
require to be warmed up, we will
then go on and dine at Sopar.
As this is a noted place for
thieves, keep awake to night, espe-
cially towards day-break, as the
cool morning breeze springs up.
Shall we be insulted, if we ven-
ture into that crowd.
What is the name of that village
A Grammar af the Cashmeeree Language.
(No. 151,
akh rahwar tautna muill hemon
panun tautkya thar chdaukalad
chhoo bei pakanas manz yatal
choo sutah bei kentsa badala tsur
dimos.
Rat eeropai bagaras manz he>
sdari zarorak cheez rati bata bha-
tara azki kudla bapat asi satha
boucha lazimits chhee ti kyazi
zyoot pathan kaur asi.
Akh nakala asi nish dap sa yut
satha anda wati ta husy4ar rozan.
Pagahuk pathan chhoo satha
zyoot, tami gamuk nav pursta
yus wati manz asi.
Asi pagah suli pahan nindri
tuil zee tikya zi manzal chhoo
zyoot.
Koortsa chhua janis guris jilon
rati sata khasana saaitin bhurun
sanyan daud chhu karan ma,ine
watihana pyada yatson pakun.
Yeli boonthyum pathan tssut
chhoo bei toorihand wela chhoo
dera tulamuk hajat aftaba neranus
taeen chher nah.
Look pats yatspa kuriny zi-
bu chhus ashnav tihund koa-
- putszi aichh bei mast myoan kat-
sur chho imou nishano _ ga,iti—
meh Sahab zanan yudwai mastas
wasma kara aichh kya basa.
Payah yaits sulik dera tulit
wati manz kulikis sayastal kaliv
karon kents4 zaroor yatsina dsun
tati pani waraa chai karana
bhatara az rat hyut kentsa ran
kya suli” tats rawanas dik asi
Sami pata toapur manz ratich
tsut yatson khiny.
Yali tsoarihdénz shaée mashoor
chhaaz rat husyar roaz wara paat
subhas kane kya sulehuk wav
turan chhu wathdan.
Yudwai hut hujoomas manz
yatsa begizat yatsa sapadun.
Kumi gamuk nav kya chhu zi
1844.]
with the white dome to our right
hand?
Shall we find the rivers ford-
able, if not will there be boats
It looks like rain this evening,
we had better halt to-morrow.
Does my frequent use of my
compass and watch, attract the
suspicions of our companions?
I wish you would induce that
man, without offending him, to
discontinue his singing, for I can-
not sleep.
Iam glad I learnt your lan-
guage before thinking of visiting
your country.
Every one ought to do so.
To-morrow when we enter the
hills, 1 will break up my trunks
and put every thing I have in
bags.
I am sorry I brought my English
saddle and bridle, and yet I can’t
ride at ease on a native one, and
that I brought a crop-tailed horse.
Will it be better to preserve my
disguise as a merchant, or take
that of a doctor, I have only Eng-
lish medicines, and I don’t know
the names and qualities of those
used by the natives.
I will take care to reward you
handsomely, you have behaved
well, and taken great care of us.
You have alsohad a great deal of
trouble, we will also recommend
you to the Agent at Loodiana for
permanent employment there.
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
569
chhut gumbaz chhur dachun kun
dreut uvan.
Kauli yatsawa tar labun yud-
wai nah sat jaée manz ndva dsana.
Roodaik ala mat chhi dreut uvan ;
yats, jan chhu zi pagadh yat jdce
manz thards karon.
Aaisi kuni kuni kutub naméh
as bei satas hananis wachhan asi
miou sa,ityou nishi gumana nina.
Humsindi gyevana saatin ase
chhanas nindar yiwan tsa” hekaka
yiman dildsa paati boazanawit.
Shukar chhoo kya asi tuhunz
kath tsatas rait tuhindi welaiyatiki
saairi ki tajwee} toanti.
Pazi Prat akha yithai’ kanan
kari.
Pagah paharas manz watawu-
nu,i paniny sanduk phutarawiny
yatsa be,e pret ken khur jeenos
manz yatsa trawiny.
Yudwanai ti yanu wilai yataki
zeena saatin arams chhu na yuvan
toete mauda chan chhus kya 1a-
kumta angrez zeen panun be,i
Jait tsaut gur saait arrum.
Yats jivan chhu kyé yuhu,i
patrou baiparinhund yus chhu
me? na tai hakeem pairon kara
fakat angrez dawa saait chim be,i
timanhindi nav bhaseeyats hyu
yim look pidd chhi zaéna na® bo»,
Ba tohi rut indma yatsawu
di,un kya zi tohi jan khizmat ka-
ruwa be,irats raach karuwu satha
mashaghat kadawu tuhindi khé
tara ajant sahabas soofarish yatsa
kariny Ludiani yut anda wan-
dach noukuri tohi thavi.
The Lord’s Prayer.
Mali sani kya,
Bihishtas manz,
Chhuk mutaba,
Raka asin nav,
Choan doar,
Father our that
Heaven in
Art hallowed
Be name
Thy kingdom
A Grammar of the Cashmeeree Language.
Choan ujin,
Zameeni pyat hukm,
Choan pakawun,
Banyyan tithai,
Kanan yitha asmanaj,
Manz chhoo di asi,
Az tsut doh dishihainz,
Saainy bei wanzum,
Panun asi trav,
Yitha paat aaij chhi®,
Pananyen wauzain,
Walen trawan,
Asi ma ni® tramba Jawanas
manz,
Athuk asi balai,
Nishi® mukhalaota,
Youkanikya choanui,
Chhoo muluk hekum,
Sa barja abadaj,
Tamat amean,
[No. 151.
Thy come
Earth on will
Thy done
Be in that manner
As heaven
In is give us
To-day bread daily
Our and debts
Our us forgive
In the manner we
Do our debtors
Forgive
Us not lead temptation in
But us evil from
Deliver
For thine
Is_ (the)
power.
And (the) glory eternity
To. Amen
kingdom (the)
A New Testament in this language and Hindoo character has been
published at the Serampore Press, as has the Sermon on the Mount
in the Persian character by the American Mission at Loodiana.
March, 1844. R. LEEcH.
There are also in Cashmere, books in that language, in the Sharada
character, viz. Saliwatch Krishnavtdérs, Ram Avtars, &c. &e.
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY.
Remarks on a Boodhist Coin or Medal, sent to the Society through
Captain Macleod, Assistant Commissioner, Tenasserim, by H. H.
the Prince of Mekkara. By Captain T. Latrer, 67th B, N. L. in
a Letter from him to the Secretary to the Asiatic Society of
Bengal. }
My pear S1r,—I have the pleasure of returning you the coin
with which you intrusted me, together with the following remarks :—
The coin is Boodhist, and purely symbolical, having no legend, or
characters whatever. I am also of opinion that it does not present
any peculiarly interesting feature; is of a modern date; and at a time
when carelessness existed in reference to the symbols of the Boodhist
faith.
The first peculiarity that i will notice is the design in the centre,
(“a” fig. 1,) which is a Boodhist emblem, representing a “‘ tsédyd,” or
small Pagoda, in which are deposited reliques of Boodh, volumes of
the “ Tara,” or sacred Law; it is almost universally found depicted on
Boodhist coins. But there is a peculiarity about this one which I
am not aware has hitherto been met with, and that is, that instead of
this “ tsédya,” being represented as usual by a cumulus of hemi-
spheres, either three (v. fig. 3,) or six (v. fig. 4,) in number; in the
first instance always arranged two for the base, and one for the apex ;
No. 152. No. 68, New Series. 41
*
Oia Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. [No. 152.
in the other, three for the base, two for the next layer, and one for the
top ; this triple combination is essentially requisite for the truthfulness
of such Boodhist symbols. It will be first remarked that the ‘‘ tsédy3,”
in the instance before us, is not represented by a pyramid of hemi-
spheres, but by one of upright glyphs, surmounted with a sort of
parasol roof. It has been a common remark, that the different repre-
sentations of the sacred structures of the early nations of the world
shewed a remarkable similarity, in fact seemed to be copies of their
own domiciles. Now the best division, as far as domiciles are con-
cerned, of these early races, may be said to be two, viz. the Troglodyte
and the Scenite; the dweller in caves, and the dweller in tents;
and in proportion as the cave is a ruder and more uncouth dwelling
than the tent, so does it argue an earlier period. But there was a
Boodhism that was Troglodyte and a Boodhism that was Scenite, a
Boodhism of the cave, and a Boodhism of the tent, but Boodhism
was not introduced among the tent-dwelling race till at a comparatively
speaking very recent era. Now the “tsédya” emblems, (fig. No. 3 and
4) are representations of the hemispherical convavity of a cave, and
appertain therefore to the Boodhism of the cave, and are therefore of a
more ancient type than the one under consideration, (fig. 5,) which is a
scenite ‘‘ tsédya,” or representation of a tent, having a tentzlike roof,
&c. In the appendix on Boodhist emblems to his ‘‘ Notes on the state
of ancient India,” Col. Sykes says, “‘It is to be remarked however,
that when the Chaitya, or temple of relics is sculptured out of the
rocks, it is represented not by the triple hemispheres, but by a very
short truncated cylinder surmounted by a hemisphere, and crowned
with a parasol, or an umbrella.” Here we find described a mixed or
transition tsédya having the hemispherical top of a cave, and the parasol
roof of a tent. It is to be borne in mind, that though the race who first
inhabited the cave and consecrated it as a place of worship, were com-
paratively low in the scale of civilisation ; the decorations of them fell
to their posterity when well advanced in civilisation and art, as is
shewn by the magnificent nature of the ornaments; to them they
were haunts consecrated by the reminiscences of an ancient faith; —
and it is not atallunlikely that they (sufficiently advanced in civilisa-
tion to have possessed themselves of tents and roofed buildings) should
wv 9
have added the roofed, or scenite “ tsédya,” to the list of decorations.
1844. | Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. 578
I look therefore upon those Deghopes as more modern then the he-
mispherical “‘ tsédya”. The form however of the “ tsédya” before us,
which I may call a scenite “ tsédya,” is not, to the best of my knowledge,
found on coins, although, according to Col. Sykes, a complicated one
exists sculptured on the rocks of the cave temples; there is however,
an approach to one figured the last in the row of ‘‘ tsédyds” given by
Col. Sykes, in the plate accompanying the notes above referred to;
it is represented (fig. 6) in our plate, but this is a true and correct
“‘tsédya ;” for the individual objects of which it is composed are trine
in their combination. It is to be remarked, that 3 is a most sacred
number in the mind of a Boodhist, endeared to him as symbolic of
the most sacred tenets of his faith ; not only typifying the holy Triad,
“God, the Law, and the Congregation,” but also calling to his recol-
lection the three ways by which he progresses to Nieban, ‘“‘ the not to
be ;” the three grades of initiation before he can attain the crowning
point of his craft. If we count then the number of hemispheres in the
base and each side of the ‘“‘ tsedya&” (fig. 4,) or the number of quad-
rangular figures in the “ tsédya,” (fig. 6,) we shall find there are
three in each face; making by counting in that way 9 in the
three faces, forming a trebly expressive symbol of the expres-
sive three; for this reason, nine was ever held as a mystical and
holy number among Boodhists, hence its Burman name Ko, “to
worship, reverence,” hence likewise its Pali representation by the
nana rdddna, or nine jewels;”’ Burmanised into nadwa ra, “the
essence of the nine,” these jewels were worn, set in a ring, as a
charm against every evil. In our “ tsédya” however (fig. 6,) we have
10 upright glyphs, thus vitiating the whole. The scenic ‘‘tsédy&” is
the prototype of the modern “ Pyaththad.”
The next mark to which I wish to call your attention, are the two
similar upright figures on the right and left of the “¢sédyd,” (b. b.
fig. 1.) These are representations of the head of the Cobra Capella,
(Coluber Naga.) This is an interpolation of the Semitic myth of the
Dragon, &c. into Boodhist story, and which does not properly belong
to it; the account in elucidation of this will be found in the accom.
panying note,* and wil] at once point out its Brahminical origin.
* Gaudama remained with his family till he was 29 years of age, he had married
and had had one son; he then left his family and kindred and wandered in the
574 Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. [No. 152,
The two emblems over the roof of the “ tsédya&,” are doubtful, that
to the right (c. fig. 1,) may be intended for a representation of the
Boodhist praying wheel; or may be for the sun, and that to the left
jungles and woods for six years; at the end of that time he met a Brahmin of the
name of ‘Thoteya, who was cutting grass. This Brahmin gave him seven bundles
of grass, with these he continued his wanderings till he arrived at a peepul tree in
Booddha Gaya. He then felt a secret influence come over him, that the time of his
becoming a Boodh was at hand; he accordingly spread out the seven bundles of grass
and said, ‘‘ Let a sign appear.’’ Immediately there arose from the earth a throne of
diamonds, upon which he sat himself down, and then the mysterious influence came
over him that rendered him a Boodh. He remained seven days on this throne, being
impregnated with this Booddhic spell; this spot was called Raja Paleng, or ‘‘ the
Royal seat.”’ The ruins of a tsédya, built over it by after kings is still shewn. From
thence he arose and removed a short distance to the eastward, and sat down con-
templating the throne with a fascinated love ; he remained in this state without
moving, or even winking his eyes for seven days; this spot was thence call anie
meethaka, from anie, ‘‘ without,’’ and meethaka, ‘‘to wink ;’’ here also, as in all the
other spots, the ruins of a tsédya are shewn. Hence he removed toa spot a little
farther to the eastward, and kept walking backwards and forwards in contempla-
tion during the space of another seven days, this spot was styled Radana Chund-
komar, ‘‘ or the jewelled walk,’’ a building, the length of the walk, was built
over it by after kings, the ruins of which are yet shewn. From thence he moved
a short distance to the west; and there the Déwatas built him an habitation
of resplendent gems, in which he remained for seven days, and concocted the Abie-
dhurma, or ‘‘ excellent Justice,’’ the mode by which mankind may attain the
Niebun, this spot was called Radana Ghur, or the ‘‘ house of jewels.’’ Thence he re-
moved a short distance to a peepul tree where the shepherds came for shade, and
remained there seven days absorbed in meditation, this spot was called ‘ Ajie pala
Nigroda, or the shepherds’ peepul tree.’? Thence he removed to a place called
Mooja Linda, and there remained seven days, during which a fearful storm arose, such
as was never witnessed before, and the rain descended in torrents ; it was then that
the Naga king, who was in a lake close by, bethought himself to shelter Gaudama ;
he first intended to have raised for him by magic a shed of jewels, that should excel
in splendor the house made by the Déwatas, but then he thought himself ofa
method by which he might shew his devotion in a still more enthusiastic way ; so
he distended himself enormously, and turned himself seven times ‘‘ fold upon fold’”’
round Gaudama, so as to form a hollow cavity ; his head also he distended, and with
that he shielded the head of the God. In the midst also he formed a seat res-
plendent with gems, on which he placed Gaudama; but the latter was so absorbed in
meditation, that all this passing scene around him was unheeded. From thence
Gaudama rose and removed to a place, where he remained in meditation another
seven days. During these 49 days, Gaudama was undergoing that impregnation that
rendered him a finished Boodh. He neither ate, nor drank, nor washed his mouth.
He then arose, took refreshment, and commenced his ministry. The above account
is taken from a Pali work, styled Oossathako Lankara, or ‘‘the ornament of the De-
vout.’’ All the above-mentioned places are in the environs of Boodha Gaya.
a Bae tad ase
Bz oes
Dad ee
1844. ] Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. 575
(d. fig. 1,) for the moon; in the latter case it is another evidence of
the spurious nature of the symbol of this coin, as these two lumina-
ries have nothing particular to do in Boodhist writ.
The symbols on the left hand of the coin, figured by themselves,
(fig. 7,) are very common Boodhist ones. The lower one (c. fig. 7,)
is most probably a representation of the Swastika or cross, the distin-
guishing mark of a class of mystical Boodhists anterior to the time of
Gaudama. The three parallel lines, or scores marked (b. fig. 7,) is a re-
presentation of the tri-glyph, the usual emblem of the Boodhist Triad,
when they were wished to be expressed as three distinct things, viz.
Booddha goon, “ God or Boodha.” Dhamma goon, “the Law,”
and Sénggha goon, “the Congregation.” When these three were to be
represented as one, in fact the Trinity (¢hdrdnd goon “ the decisive at-
tributes”) then the tri-glyph was joined at the bottom like a trident.*
(a. fig. 7.) As standards are very commonly found among Boodhist
symbols, it is more than probable that the three glyphs were borne upon
the banner; whilst the trident surmounted the staff. The tri-glyph
seems to have been the cognisance of the town of Arracan, which was
a famous seat of Boodhism according to tradition; and hence might
have arose its name in Ptolemy of Tri-glyphon, which is the Greek
translation he gives of the Hellenised term Tri-lingum, shewing that
his information must have come from Brahmins, and that the latter had
already began to appropriate to themselves the rights of an elder caste.
I have said that the three glyphs when joined at the bottom were
symbolic of the Trinity, or Supreme Divinity; I believe it to be the
prototype of the Coptic, y implying ‘‘ potentiality”; the following are
its types in the Hieratic Egyptian 11, in the Hieroglyphic it which
Jast would be considered a very expressive Booddhie symbol.
It may not be here out of place to remark, that among many early
nations three scores, or marks, were emblematic of the Supreme
_ Divinity, either as among the ancient Hebrews by the three Yods
*y7 ; or by the high priest distending three fingers as he stretched out
his hand over the assembled multitudes whilst bestowing his yearly
benediction ; many instances to this effect might be collected from
* To explain myself more clearly, if in the Doxology it were required to express
by symbols, God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Ghost, then the
tri-glyph would be used ; if to expressthe Supreme and Triune God, then the trident.
576 Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. [No. 152.
various authors, but I will only mention a curious fact which has
not hitherto been noticed, viz. that the sWJ Allah of the Mussulman;
is nothing, but three distinct upright marks. Sometimes these are
found, L believe, united at the base.
I have already had occasion to mention the reliance that is to be
placed in numbers ; by this means we may often determine the family —
to which amyth belongs. The number ‘‘ Three,” however, seems to have
been common to all nations of the world as a sacred number ; besides
its arithmetical peculiarities, there are many phenomena in Statics
that must have been sufficiently known to all nations, to have ac-
counted for its sacred character. The number “ Seven” was held a
perfect, or sacred number among the Semitic families of mankind, in
allusion evidently to the seven epochs of creation mentioned by Moses ;
but in unmixed Boodhism it is not so held ; whereas “ Nine” is. Thus
we see at once that the episode in Gaudama’s life, mentioned in the
note, is evidently a Semitic interpolation of Brahminism, from its allu-
sions to the number Seven.
With reference to any other marks on this side of the coin, I am not
aware that they have any particular interpretation, and are probably
meant to fill up space.
On the obverse of the coin (fig. 2,) are various symbols, which
I take to typify a Boodhist representation of this universe in particu-
lar, and former universes in general. Before I enter into an explana-
tion, I must premise, that, according to the Boodhist, a Mahagabba, or
great system, or creation of universes, is characterised by the presence
of 28 Boodhs, a Béddagabba, or system such as the present mundane
universe is characterised by a smaller number ; the present is charac-
terised by 5 Boodhs, four of whom have already appeared, viz.
Kokoothanda, Kénagama, Kathabd, and Gdidama, the fifth Arieya-
maid, is still to appear. As he will be the 28th Boodh of this Maha-
gabba, he will close the number ; the universe will be utterly annihi-
lated, and then perhaps
Novus ab integro seclorum nascitur ordo.
It is difficult to determine what that curious emblem in the centre
(a. fig. 2,) may represent Two triangles having two other triangles
within them uniting their points in a circle having a dot in the centre.
There seems to be that Masonic character about this symbol, that
1844. | Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. STT
leads me to suspect that it may afford a corroborative argument to an
opinion some time since formed by me, that Boodhism and Freema-
sonry originally came from the same source, existed together, as some of
their symbols are identical, as also are their inculcations on the subject
of Ethics. This however is a subject far too lengthy to discuss in this
paper, and nothing but an ample discussion could do justice to the
subject, and elicit the curious instances that might be adduced. Till
however we can form a more decided opinion, we will call it what
perhaps a Boodhist priest would do (who however would be no great
authority), a representation of the Rajpaleng, or throne on which Gau-
dama underwent the Boodhiec influence. Above this are five drop-
shaped figures representing the 5 Boodhs of the present Buddagabba,
(fig. 9,) one of these has been nearly punched out by a hole made
for a ribbon, as this coin seems to have been worn round the neck to
avert the evil eye from a child. Figures of Boodh when small, are
found sketched as in (fig. 10,) or should they be still smaller, the three
are run into one (fig. 11.) I take then all thatis included in the inner
circle characterised by the 5 Boodhs, and the Rajpaleng of the present
Boodh, to represent the present mundane universe. Beyond these
are seen a number of circular figures, some of which have been forced
into one another by pressure, however their number is distinctly 28,
the number of Boodhs characteristic of that Mahagabba, or great
period, of which this universal world is the last member.
In conclusion, I beg to remark that I have coined a word “‘ Boodhic’’
to express a different idea from Boodhist, or Boodhistical. By
Boodhist or Bhoodhistical, I mean of or belonging to him whom the
present Boodhists style ‘‘ Boodh” viz. Gaudama. By Boodhic I im-
ply of or belonging to that Boodhism that existed long before the time
of Guadama, which the latter improved upon and rendered more
esoteric in its psychological system. Some symbols and ideas are Bood-
_ hic, such as the tri-glyph, the doctrine of the Metampsychosis, the
sacredness of the yellow color, &c. &c. Others again, such as a repre-
sentation of Gaudama’s foot, his throne, &c. are Boodhist. Most of
the Pra-bat, or impressions of Boodh’s foot, are Boodhistical, but
there is one Boodhic one, the only one I am aware of, close to the
town of Akyab, at a place called Peer-Buddha, it is held in reverence
by all natives of the east, whether Mussulman, Hindoo or Boodhist.
578 Remarks on a Boodhist Coin. [No. 152.
It is very probable that Boodhic reliques and symbols would be
found numerous in Abyssinia, some there undoubtedly are.
Dear Sir,
Yours truly,
T. Larrer.
P, S.—With reference to the obverse of the coin, (fig. 2,) any one in
any way acquainted with the Boodhist religious Cosmology, will be
almost sure to concur in the explanation I have given of it. With refer-
ence to that part of it, figured separately (fig. 8,) Ihave already declared
that to the initiated it probably will call tomind some masonic emblem,
its position on the coin in reference to the other symbols, would lead
one to suppose that it was meant to symbolise the handiwork of the
Great Architect and Geometrician of the Universe.
View of the principal Political Events that occurred in the Carnatie,
from the dissolution uf the Ancient Hindoo Government in 1564 till
the Mogul Government was established in 1687, on the Conquest of
the Capitals of Beejapoor and Golconda; compiled from various
Authentic Memoirs and Original MSS., collected chiefly within
the last ten years, and referred to in the Notes at the bottom of each
page. By Coronet Mackenzir.
(Concluded from p. 421.)
IV.
Continuation of the State of the Carnatic Balla-Ghaut, carried down
to the period of the death of Chick-Deo Vadyar, of Mysore, in 1704,
with a Map, explanatory of the extent and situation of the Mysore
Territories at that period.*
1. At the period of Chick Deo’s death, the political state of the Car-
natic began to assume a new aspect, that becomes
Final reduction and : . F
conquest of Beejapoor 20" 2aems interesting to an European reader, as
and Golconda, by Au- an accurate knowledge of its situation at this
rungzebe in 1687. f : E ;
time is essential for a clearer understanding of
these claims and pretensions, that not only then occupied the imme-
diate parties, but ultimately engaged the European settlements in
* This part was hastily noted for the use of Colonel Wilks’s designed work on the
particular History of Mysore in 1808.
1844.) Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. = 579
their contests, with consequences that have agitated these countries
down to a very late period, and it is also imagined, that a more perfect -
knowledge of the changes since introduced into the internal policy
and management of the country, may be assisted by a distinct view of
its state at that time, and of the successive administrations and rulers
that rapidly followed each other within this period in the government
of the Carnatic. It is proposed here to sketch out the situation and ex-
tent of the several powers that were in existence at this epoch, and in
connection with the new formed state of Mysore; this may be also an
useful preliminary to some account of the various modifications aris-
ing from the circumstances of the times, and the sudden appearance
of a new power on the theatre of action.
2. At the very moment that the recent Mogul conquest of Beeja-
poor and Golconda seemed to have swallowed up
Progress of the fur- :
ther conquests in the even the name with resources of these states, and
_ haa Peet threatened to reduce the whole of the Peninsula
pene to the Mahomedan yoke, the Marhatta nation which
had been suddenly risen, and under a form hitherto unknown in politics,
comprehending a system neither completely dependent on the will of
one person, nor yet regulated by any mode hitherto observed of con-
sulting the interests of a nation in the voice of their most distinguished
ad i the: eud- counsellors, wresting a share of the spoils from the
den growth of the Mar- conqueror, opposed an unexpected barrier to the
ee Power: Hindoos of the South; but as the effects of their
depredations on the provinces of the Carnatic, by repeated invasions
that they carried to the utmost extent about this time, had not yet
been made the pretence of invasion under the memorable claim of
choute, they are here barely introduced so far, to illustrate the policy
of Chick Deo and his successors, and the place which that new state
now began to assume in the general scale of Balla-Ghaut, which soon
after this time fell, to be considered as a dependent province of the go-
vernment of the Deccan.
3. One of the first steps of Aurungzebe, after the fall of Beejapoor,
A. D. 1689. was to detach Cassim Cawn with an army to
a ee omy teeth reduce the upper Carnatic. He was attended by
CossimCawna’sfouzdar geveral subordinate officers, civil and military,
of Carnatic Beejapoor.
among whom Ali Merdan is mentioned as fouz-
4K
580 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
dar of Canchee. He seems to have met little opposition. He soon suc-
ceeded in establishing the first Mogul system of government in the
country, and is considered as the first Mogul Fouzdar of Beejapoor
Carnatic. He was surprized by the Marhattas and the Chittledroog
chief at Dodairee 11 years afterwards, where he died of a violent*
death, whether by his own hands is doubtful. He yet appears
in this interval to have effectually reduced the open country to the
form of a province, dependent on the Soobedaree of Deckan, the general
government of which was soon after conferred on the celebrated Zool-
facar Khan. After the reduction of Golconda, that officer appears to
have been employed on an unceasing course of severe service for near-
ly 19 years till the death of that Emperor in 1707. Of the destructive
warfare in which the whole country was for this time involved, some
idea may be formed from its being especially stated, that in six months’
time he fought 19 actions, and marched or countermarched 3000 coss.}
To complete the measure of their wretchedness, the unfortunate inhabi-
tants were at the same time afflicted by the accumulated misery of
The provinces be- Severe famine,{ in addition to all the other horrers
yond the Coleroon
laid under contribu-
tion. tions beyond the Cavery to Tanjore and Trichinopoly,
of war. In this time he made three different expedi-
laying these countries under heavy contributions. He took Gingee and
Wakenkaira, places memorable in the history of that time, more for
the length of their sieges, than for the skill of the assailants, or the
strength of these fortresses. The former fortress had for sometime
been the refuge of Rama, the chief of the Marhattas ; its capture had
been a special object of the Emperor’s vigilance and attention, and it
was expected, that in its fall, the hopes of that aspiring nation would
have been crushed, and the possession of the strongest fortress of the
Carnatic Payen Ghaut have secured a seat of government, and a place
* See the Doodairee Memoir, confirmed by the Hakeekut Hindoosthan.
+ Scott, Vol. 11, p. — Some notices of Cossim Cawn and of the new Governors sent
into the Carnatic occur in the Madras Records, (perused since the above was written, )
in the end of the year 1687.
t This famine appears to have extended through the whole Peninsula. It is repeat-
edly mentioned in the Madras Records, with the precautions taken for the relief of the
rising settlement. In the Memoir of Sree Permadoor, and in the Records or Annals of
Condamir, the effects of the famine are detailed, and the extravagant prices to which
grain of all kinds arose. ‘The Cycle year Achaya is memorable as a period of aggra-
vated distress from war, famine, and pestilence.
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 581
ofarms. That siege being protracted for 10 years by treachery, by the
cabals and intrigues of the nobles and even of the princes, at last fell
in 1700;* but in these views, the Moguls were disappointed. Rama
escaped previous to the surrender, and the whole resources of the 96
Marhatta tribes were soon rallied around him, and Gingee was found
to be so extremely unwholesome, that some years afterwards their
armies cantoned on the plains of Arcot, which led to the establishment
of that capital of the lower provinces in 1716.f
4. In consulting undubitable memoirs of these times, we are struck
Deplorable state of with surprise at the extraordinary number of horse
the Deckan and Car- 3
natic at this period. | kept up by the several powers, and are astonished at
this day, how the country could support them. The Mahomedan writers
complain, that this war was protracted, and the country ruined by the
Imperialists not keeping up an adequate force, and in proofof this, state,
that at this long period of protracted warfare, ‘‘ the Cavalry kept up by
the Moguls amounted only to 34,000, while the late governments of Bee-
japoor and Golconda are stated to have constantly kept up the amazing
number of 200,000 horse.” This perhaps may be explained by recollect-
ing, that the Marhattas had now not only got possession of a considerable
part of the late territory and Ahmednuggur, and those tracts particularly
of Baglana, &c. where horses are reared ; but of the sea-ports of Dabool,
Overrun by the &c. as far South as Honore and Batcull, (and even
ae and Mo- from Goa,}) where horses were imported from Persia
and Arabia; whence they were enabled to overrun the Carnatic with
such vast swarms of marauding cavalry, that the writers of the time
describe them as swarming like ants or locusts.§ ‘‘ The establishment
of a fleet by Seevajee, seems to have particularly pointed to this re-
source, and though it is not mentioned in any account of these times,
it is not likely he would overlook the advantage of the trade already
carried on by the Arabs in horses from time immemorial. From no
* Madras Records.
t The 96 Madras tribes are enumerated in the Marhatta Memoirs, Vol. I, p.—
~ For notice of the trade in horses from Arabia and Persia to India, see Caesar
Prederick’s Account of Beejanagur and Batcull, Honore and Goa, in Churchill’s Col-
lections.
§ See Scott, Vol. II, p. 107.
582 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
other quarter could they be provided, since the whole interior resources
of Hindostan were in the hands of the Imperialists.”*
5. The whole of the Mogul conquests in the South at first appear
Mogul conquests (agreeable to the system established by Akbar,) to
in the Dekan formed have been formed into one Viceroyalty government
early into one Soobah
Gradually extend- o» Soobah, which at first comprehended their con-
ed with their con-
quests of the South. quests in the Deckan of Dowlatabad and part of
Berar ; but afterwards, as these by degrees fell, Beder and the rest of
Berar were added, and the capital being removed from Burhanpoor to
Aurungabad, they gradually extended their conquests further South,
till under Aurungzebe and his deputies, the Soobadaree of Deckan, now
at its greatest extent, was arranged into six Soobahs, viz:— |
And finally com- 1. Candeish, capital Burhanpoor. :
Sea tulm eet 2. Aurungabad, lately the capital of the Nizam-
doms, six Soobahs. Shahee dynasty. €
3. Beder, ancient capital of the Bhaminee Sultans.
4. Berar, Elichpoor generally the capital.
5. Hydrabad, lately Golconda, capital of the Cootub-Shahee dynasty.
6. Bejapoor, capital of the Adil-Shahee dynasty.
The last (No. 5 and 6,) were formed from the late conquests; and
the Carnatic and its dependencies were at this time formed into Circars,
dependent upon either of them ; being in fact those districts that had
been reduced, or laid under contributions by the late governments of
Beejapoor and Hydrabad, or Golconda; accordingly we find them enu-
merated under the distinctions of Hydrabad-Carnatic and Beejapoor-
Carnatic, in the official registers of the government of Deckan.
7. These were further distinguished into Balla-Ghaut and Payen-
Ghaut, according to their situation above or below the Ghauts.
8. The Carnatic-Hydrabad-Balla-Ghaut comprehend the pro-
Comprehending Vince, forming under a latter arrangement the five
sixty-six Mahals. — Cirears, of 1 Sidhout or Kurpa, 2 Ganjicotta, 3 Gooty,
4 Gurramconda, and 5 Cummum, comprehending 66-purgunnahs, regu-
larly assessed at a fixed revenue.
Four of these provinces afterwards formed the petty state of the
* See Seevajee’s Memoir, where a detail of his resources, finances, forces and strong-
holds at the time of his death is given. His army or fleet is also mentioned.
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 583
Patans of Kurpa,* who established themselves there about this period ;
and within a few years extended their possessions along the Eastern
Ghauts to the Cavery, including Barramahl, most of which at this time
belonged to Mysore. The part they afterwards acted inthe transac-
tions of these times will excuse this being noticed here, though at the
period we are speaking of, they were not yet known as pretenders to
power or consideration among the governments of the Peninsula.
9. The Carnatic-Hydrabad-Payen-Ghaut was divided into 14
Hydrabad-Car- Cirears, containing 129 mahals, composed of the
natic-Payen-Ghaut
afterwards the Pro-
Phctoisuip of An roon, along the sea-coast of Coromandel ; afterwards
cot. better known under the denomination of the Soobah
of Arcot.
Gingeet was the first capital designed for this province by the Mo-
guls, Arcot afterwards capital of the Soobah of the name. The Euro-
pean sea-ports and factories of Pullicat, Madras, Sadras, Pondi-
cherry, Tranquebar, Porto Novo and Negapatam were in this division ;
where in the confusion of the times, we find the European agents
alarmed and suffering from the predatory incursion of the Marhattas, Mo-
whole country extending from Guntoor to the Cole-
guls, Patans, &c. to procure a precarious protection by frequent pre-
sents and bribes to the officers of all descriptions. Yet amidst these
commotions, we find that the security derived to property, encouraged
many of the natives to settle under their protection, and thus laid the
foundation of the prosperity of these colonies that were at this time but
weak and defenceless. Further details of this province, which was
shortly to be the seat of events that ultimately led to a total change
of government and power in the country, would be here out of place,
than as they may be descriptive of the state of the country .n general.
10. The Carnatic-Beejapoor appears to have been altogether consi-
dered as Balla~Ghaut, unless we except the dependencies south of the
* See Memoirs of the family of Kurpa, Canoul, &e.
+ The principal Purgunnas or Mahals are enumerated in the Dufter. The tract lying
South of the Palar, including Vellore, Gingee and Barramahl, are denominated Moof-
tesee, being lately conquered. The tract North of that, extending to Guntoor, including
the present Jagheer, Nellore, Angole, &c. are all divided into Circars, see Dufter.
~ See Havart and Scott for the transactions at Gingee, and the Madras Records for
the Embassy to Seevajee, under the year 1672,
584 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
Coleroon, (rated as the Circars of Tanjore and Trichinopoly,) and
Gingee* and its district, where it had extended its conquests below
the Ghauts to the Eastern coast ; its Western provinces are enumerated
under their, respective Circars. In forming this new province of
Carnatic, it would appear that the arrangements of the preceding
government of Beejapoor had been followed; and though Adone, and
Ghazipoor or Nundial, lying South of the Toombuddra, from its natural
situation, might be considered as properly belonging to the Carnatic,
yet they are included} as distinct Circars (the 4th and 9th) of Soobah
Beejapoor, either owing to their being earlier reduced previous to 1648,
or to their being held at this time by some powerful families,t to whom
they were still left as the price of abandoning the declining fortunes
of the late dynasty. This eventually occasioned their separation from
the rest, when the Balla-Ghaut-Carnatic, in the course of events, came
under the domination of the possessor of the Mysore resources, 73§
years afterwards; nor were they ever after connected under the same
administration, until the cession by the Nizam in October 1800 to the
East India Company, brought all the country lying South of the Toom-
buddra and Kistna once more under one government, an arrangement —
which undoubtedly promises more firmly to secure the tranquillity of
the whole under one systematic rule, separated by these limits which
nature prescribes as the best mark of division between distinct powers.
11. The important frontier province of Sanoor Bankapoor, also was
not included in this arrangement, although it was part of the ancient
Carnatic kingdom beyond the Toombuddra. It had been at an early
period, on the fall of Ram-Raz, granted to one of the Patan chiefs of
Beejapoor, who by cultivating the good graces, and embracing the
party of the conqueror at an early period of this resolution, secured
its possession in that family as a jagheer or military fief, dependent on
the new Mogul conquests. In the Dufter it is entered as a Circar|| of
Beejapoor, including 16 Mahals, and rated at a fixed revenue.
* On Gingee as then reduced, depended the tract along the Coast from the Palar
to the Coleroon, which Sevajee reduced in 1677, and was held for 1U years, till Beeja-
poor and Golconda fell, or rather until the capture of Gingee in 1700.
+ Adani Memoir.
{ Sanoor Memoir.
§ A. D. 1761, when Serah was ceded to Hyder by Basalut Jung, but Adoni was re-
tained.
|| Sanoor subdivisions in the Dufter. 7
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 585
12. The important part that the three families* of Sanoor, Kurpa
and Canoul, (who appear to have now rallied around them the remains
of the first Affghan invaders,) took in the political transactions of the
Carnatic, shortly after the death of Chick Deo Raja, had not yet com-
menced; and the origin of their power was yet in embryo; but was
shortly to make a considerable figure in events connected with Mysore,
and the rest of the country.
18. It is proper to advert to this political organization of the country
under these divisions of Beejapoor and Hydrabad Carnatic- Balla-Ghaut,
as they are necessary for understanding the discussions that have since
repeatedly followed this distribution on the official and revenue records
of the Government; and the frequent claims and pretensions on differ-
ent chiefs or zemindaries as dependents on one or other claims, which
have been even referred to in the political negotiationst of later
years, under circumstances that tended to embarrass and distract; and
might have eventually been followed by more important consequences.
14. In the wars and negotiations that ensued for 110 years in the
Carnatic, before the basis of one regular system of Civil government
was established in 1800, the extent, situation and relative connection
of the several subjects of contention can scarcely be understood with-
out recollecting the origin of these two great divisions or governments,
which though sometimes united at first in one person, were afterwards
separated, and under the title of the Nabobs of Serab{ and of Arcot.
The officers holding them came by degrees to assume a political charac-
ter, and degree of power that enabled them to establish their families
in the hereditary government of these provinces in a state little short
of independence.
* 15. Indeed, their origin was so far lost sight of, that the legitimate
rights of the native provinces and population were entirely absorbed
in the mutual pretensions of the families of Hyder Alli and of Maho-
* Memoir of the Patan families of Sanoor, Canoul and Kurpa. The Kurpa-cur
obtained possession at one time of nearly the whole country extending along the East-
ern Ghauts, from the Kistna to the Cavery, including Cummum, Kurpa, Gurramcon-
da, Baramahl, Colar, &c.
t See the treaty of Seringapatam in 1792.
ft Hyder’s first appearance as General of Mysore, was followed by the pretensions to
the Nabobship of Serah, after the cession of Serah and Ooscotta, from Basalut Jung,
in A. D. 1761,
586 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
med Alli; pretensions that originated in the respective range of the
military command of two deputies of the Mogul viceroy of Deckan,
or rather (as in the case of Hyder particularly,) of persons who had
in the disturbed state of the times, possessed themselves of their title
and authority. Even the Carnatic itself in this short space lost its
name, when by an unaccountable misnomer, that name which originally
belonged to a central province of the upper country, and afterwards
to the empire founded upon it, was in European instruments of the
highest political import, exclusively applied to that tract of the lower
country, which stretches along the coast from the Gondegama to the
Coleroon, and which though formerly governed as a dependency of
the Carnatic, has always among the natives been known by the name
of Tonda-Mundalum, or Nara-Mundalum.*
16. To return from what may scarcely be deemed a digression from
the state of the country on Chick Deo’s demise, (since it relates so
intimately to the future destination of his acquired territory,) it is
proper here to notice the distribution that took place of the Southern
provinces under the Mogul arrangement. In this distracted state of
things, when the new form was introduced about 1687, 16 years previ-
ous to the date we are treating of, it would appear that the Mogul
chiefs were guided in some degree by the forms they found already
established under Beejapoor and Golconda, which do not appear mate-
rially to have differed in principlet from their own, if we compare
them with the system of Akbar, (or rather that of his Hindoo financial
minister Toder Mull.)
Rana-doolah, (or as is said Shahjee,) had originally organized the
conquered country south of Cavery into 7 purgunnahs or mahals, in-
cluding the capital. F
1. Serah, 3. Bookapatam, 5. Colar and 6. Hoscotta,
2. Boodiall, 4. Pennaconda, Bangalore, 7. Pedda Ballapoor.
But Bangalore with its district, (as has been already mentioned,) was
transferred by treaty to Chick-Deo, in the year 1687, within three days
of his getting possession.
* Nara Mundalum, z. e. the lower region, a name which with further illustration of
the Ancient History of this country, has but very recently come to our knowledge,
(February 19, 1810,) and furnishes a key to the real translation of the chassical
nomenclature of the Alexandrian geographers, Paralia, Soretanum, &c.
+ See Memoir of Serah.
1844,] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 587
17. These districts were subdivided, or rather the former arrange-
ment was preserved of samoots, or mahals; mouza, or established
villages ; and majara, hamlets or dependencies, under a system orga-
nized and managed by a new class or colony of Marhatta Bramins, who
attended the Mogul chiefs, and whose descendants still officiate in the
financial departments throughout the Carnatic. From a descendant of
one of their chiefs, several notices of this system were obtained at
Serab in 1801.
18. The above 7 purgunnahs appear under the latter arrangement
of Asoph Jah, to be then subdivided in 55* mahals, assessed at a
stipulated revenue or cudanee, collected under the immediate ma-
nagement of the imperial officers; but it is probable, that this subdivi-
sion existed also at this time (1704,) and on examination of the names
registered in the general Dufter of Deckan, there is reason to suppose,
that both the Patan and Mogul arrangements were generally regulated
by the ancient subdivisions of the country, as far as was consistent
with their general plan of reducing the conquered states to the form
of provinces, subdivided into lesser, convenient portions named circars,
taroofs, samools, mahals, mouzas, &c., and probably founded on the
arrangements of dasums, samas, naads, purgunnahs, habilies, grams,
&c. §c. that prevailed among the Hindoos from early times.t
19. The revenue of these organized provinces was realized by offi-
cers specially appointed for that purpose in the department of the
exchequer, (deewannee khalsa,) but the Moguls appear very early to
have introduced the practice of ceding considerable tracts of the best
lands to the munsubdars, to support certain bodies of forces maintain-
ed agreeable to their respective ranks and titles; which were original-
ly conferred according to the strength of their quotas though at the
time we are speaking of, strict musters were permitted to be dispensed
with. The circumstances of the times, when the conquest was effect-
ed by armies composed in a great measure of a militia thus maintain-
ed, and perhaps allowed to increase beyond the just proportion of
* See Appendix No. 6, containing the list of the mahals, extracted from the Dufter,
and collated with that of the Hakeekut, &c.
7 These divisions and provincial arrangements are particularly detailed in the
manner illustrative of the History of the Carnatic under the Balal dynasty; in the
Ram Raja Cheritra; in the Bangalore Memoir, &c. &c.; and the complete lists of the
96 dasums are obtained from all quarters of the Peninsula in different languages.
41
588 Politival Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152,
their grants, (for we find that inconveniences were very soon felt and
complained of,) and the necessity of conciliating the Deckan chiefs,
many of whom maintained high pretensions, also increased the evil in
the Beejapoor government. Indeed it had previously proceeded to an
extent that was supposed, from the overgrown power vested in the
great landholders,* to have accelerated the fall of that government ;
since latterly the Sovereign could be only considered as the head of an
arrogant aristocracy, who were more disposed to dictate than to obey.
In Golconda, their power was controlled by the influence of the Bra-
min ministers, who yet committed a fault the reverse, by attempting
to manage by corruption and the influence of wealth, which in time
of great national distress, is never found to improve public virtue.
The great influence conceded to the Mahomedan munsubdars in the
Mogul system, perhaps contributed to much of the disorders that soon
after ensued in the Carnatic, which was further increased by the num-
ber of Hindoo chieftains (self-erected,) zemindars or polligars, that
were dependent on the province, and attached themselves to one or
other of the several parties that soon after arose on the death of
Aurungzebe.
20. Upwards of thirty polligars} are enumerated, who were depend-
ent on the Southern parts of the Carnatic some little time previous to
the Mahomedan invasion, but they were probably still more numerous,
unless that title be restricted to a certain description of Hindoo
petty chiefs and polligars, who were still permitted from various motives
to hold their more remote, or less productive districts, on paying a fixed
tribute or condanee under a constrained allegiance, and were classed
as zemindars dependent upon the province of Carnatic. This tribute
was always collected with difficulty, and frequently by force of arms ;
but exclusive of these zemindars, whose weakness kept them in a state
of undoubted dependence, there are others enumerated in the list of
27 Hindoof chiefs dependent on the Carnatic Beejapoor, (in the Duf-
* See Universal History, Vol. 6, p. —.
+ See Bagalore Memoir for these poligars enumerated, also the Memoirs of Serah,
Bednore, &c. The famous Sevajee’s new-formed fleet extended their ravages to the
coast of Canara at this time, and he himself in person commanded it, when Baruloo
was plundered of a very considerable booty. See Marhatta Memoir of Sevajee.
{ See list of zemindars of Sera in the Appendix No. 7, but these are only the zemin-
dars registered in 1742.
1844] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 589
ter or Register, and which are presumed to have been continued from
the Beejapoor government,) whose pretensions to be included in this
list are more equivocal, and were undoubtedly not always acknowledg-
ed even at the forming of that record. Though Cassim Cawn subju-
gated the open country, neither he nor his successors could reduce
the rajahs of Seringapatam, Chitteldroog, Ickery or Bednore and
others, who maintained their independence, until Saadut-Olla Khan,
(who Bahadoor Shah appointed Soobah of the two Carnatics in 1710,)
by collecting all his force from Payen-Ghaut, Cuddapa and Serah,
obliged them to pay tribute in that year. Of these, at the period we
speak of (1704), Mysore or Seringapatam we see was nearly indepen-
dent, Bednore and Soonda were equally so, and were too near the Mar-
hattas to be reduced to a regular tribute, and we find they resisted
both, generally with success. Chztteldroog at times paid reluctant
contributions to one or other; and the chiefs of Mallialum and Tra-
vancore are not even enumerated in the Dufter of the Deckan. Their
claims on the former under the word Calicut, are indeed some years
afterwards mentioned as a matter of doubtful acquisition; and the
claims on Z’ravancore could only arise from the paramount preten-
sions of Madura, which under the head of Trichinopoly, together with
Tanjore, form two Circars in that record.
21. It has been already observed, that Tanjore and Trichinopoly
were not included in the -province of Beejapore in the register; though
it is highly probabie, that on the first expedition of Zoolfucar Khan,
they might have been considered as such, since Eckojee’s possession of
the former was effected under the authority from Beejapoor only [a few |
years before; but it is not known that any tribute was exacted from
them previous to that invasion. Zoolfucar, however, undoubtedly laid
under heavy contributions both countries, and though the Marhattas of
Tanjore are accused of keeping aloof during the siege of Gingee,
yet it is highly probable, (what is indeed alleged,) that influenced by
ties of consanguinity, some degree of assistance clandestinely furnished
to their countrymen at Gingee, had drawn the vengeance of the con-
querors on them; and in the contentions about Tanjore of late years,
we find a perwanna* of Zoolfucar Khan quoted as authority for the
* History of the Management of the East India Company quoted from memory, but
the work cannot be referred to here.
590 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
paramount claim of the Nabob of the Carnatic on that country; yet
these expeditions appear to have been rather desultory, and intended to
raise supplies, than to make a settlement of tribute, which we find a
few years afterwards exacted under a more systematic rule.
22. Trichinopoly at this time was under a weak regency, managed
by a woman, and from the large sums rated in the register, we may
presume the tribute actually levied was very heavy. As from about this
period we hear no longer of the wars and depredations of the Madu-
rans and Mysoreans, we may suppose that they were considered under
the protection of the Moguls. Mysore had got possession indeed of
Salem, Parmutty, Namcul and Darampoory,* but it is only in the next
reign we find Dodda-Daba Raja seizing on Coimbatoor. Shortly after
the Dewan-Fouzdar, (for he united both offices in his own person, )
Saadut-Oolla, had enforced, it is said, a tribute from Mysore. In the
civil contentions that agitated the empire at this time, it is difficult to
procure further documents to explain these transactions.
23. The sudden incursions of the Gatka Marhattat chiefs had at one
time alarmed Mysore, and put Seringapatam in danger. It is probable
these lawless freebooters (for such they are by all parties described
to be) had made this expedition from Gingee, and is the same men-
tioned in the Madras Records; but after the capture of that place, and
during the incessant predatory war that was carried on through the
Carnatic by the Marhattas, denominated in the story of the times “ the
wars of Santa and Dana,” there is room to think, that the proper coun-
try of Mysore enjoyed a degree of tranquillity and security little known
at this time by the other provinces.
24. It was in this interval then that we may imagine Chick-Deo ap-
plied himself to settle his country, to consolidate its resources, and to
establish those improvements and regulations which still distinguish
his name among the ablest and most beneficent princes of these coun-
* Sattimunglum and its district is doubtful; we may therefore infer that the Mysore
territory at this period extended no further to the South than to the present limits of
the Passes of Guzzelhutty, Caveripoorum, &c. The more Northern parts of Barramahl
are supposed to have been dependent on Colar, as Amboor, &c. A complete translation
of the Madura Memoir will throw further light on this part.
f¢ See Memoir of the Mysore family, and of the Calala family.
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 59)
tries. Even the Emperor appears to have courted his neutrality at
least, and only four years before his death, the title of Jug-
A. D. 1700. : :
Deo- Rayel, and a royal signet being conferred on him.
The Nazk of Maissur* for the first time assumed the honors of royalty
by ascending a throne; a measure which so wily a politician would
scarcely have ventured on without the assurance of the Emperor’s con-
currence; or at least, that it would not be followed by the vengeance
exercised towards his brother of Bednore some years before, for an ill-
timed assumption of the same distinctions.
25. We may then consider the territory, the title, and the resources
of Mysore fully established at the demise of this prince; its extent
being 28,416 square miles and 101 districts of a revenuet of
under an economy still more productive than that of the present day,
if allowance be made for ruined villages and the decrease of the value
of money since. This in the midst of a fierce and bloody war, which
after ravaging the whole Deckan for 10 years, and at this moment pro-
mising no termination, with the new Mogul government (still contend-
ing for the paramount authority it had scarcely established) on the
Cite sehen. North ame East, the Bednore, Chittledroog and
sore dominions in Malabar chiefs, and the weak state of Trichinopoly
1704, see Map No. 2. ; . 2 : ae
covering it from the West to the South, entirely in-
sulated by itself on the height of the Ghauts, at the death of Chick
Deo, Mysore commanded a respect which was felt by the most power-
ful, and kept its rivals among the native chiefs of the Carnatic in
awe.
APPENDIX No. 1.
EN storical Account of the establishment of the Europeans at Madras or
Chinnapatam, from a Marhatta Manuscript, communicated by one
of the ancient Provincial Officers in April 1802. Translated by
CaveELLy Venkata Boria, Bramin.
The Raja Streeranga Rayel reigned for the space of six years and two
A. D. 1639. months, from the Fusly 1049 up to the month of Avanee
A.S. 1562. of 1056. In this year Poonamelle was under the
* Alsothe Madras Records, A. D.
Maissur.
+ Bednore Memoir.
} See list of the Mysore districts at this period, Appendix No. 6.
where he is denominated the Naik of
592 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [ No. 152.
management and in the possession of the poligar of the Damarla*
family.
At this period, the Merchants of the English Company, who resided
at Visakapatam, proposing to build a cottee to carry on their com-
merce on the sea-coast, made proposals to build a cottee,t (factory,)
seeking there permission to form their establishment in some con-
venient place of the coast under their protection. The poligars
agreeing to their request, ceded the four undermentioned villages,
together with Madras Coopum, on condition of paying them 1200
Madras pagodas, besides the additional expence of supporting the
holy pagodas.
This grant and conditions were engraved upon a gold plate,
(for preservation as a record,) which they delivered to them with
authority to establish a daroolzarib, (or mint house, ) for coining carak
or Madras pagodas.
The four Villages then granted were, viz. :—
They built a cottee on the land of
Pe ee ie village, which is named Madras.
. On the land of this village is si-
4. Ditto, Chennk » Gespatn sx: dedi Mootaul and Pagdalpetta.
3. Ditto Maleput, olen ace The soil of this village is made use
of to make salt.
In the Fusly year 1056, Streeranga, Rayelt was dethroned, and his
A. D. 1647, dominions possessed by the Mussulmans. In the reign of
A.8. 1569. Sultan Abdool Hussain Jaanum Soobah, the English mer-
chants having lately built a cottee, (or house of commerce, ) now wished
to build a fort ; for this purpose they despatched Cassa Vee Runna as
vakeel (or ambassador) to the presence of the aforesaid Jaanum Soobah.
On his arrival, the Soobah being informed, by the address of the ambassa-
dor, of the wishes and expectations of the English merchants, taking
their request into his serious consideration, he bestowed his perwanna,
granting the above four villages as an enam (free gift) to them, with
* The ancestor of the present Calastry Rajah.
+ Cottee, a house of commerce or factory, different from cotta (tell,) a fort.
t This Streeranga-Rayel seems to have been one of the kings of Chandergherry,
perhaps the last. ‘This is the only branch of the royal family of which I have not yet
got a regular account of succession, but I have hopes of getting it; the last of them had
abandoned Pennaconda some years before (1804.) List of their successions have been
since obtained, (1810.)
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 593
permission to erect a fort, and to establish a daroolzarib, (or mint
house to stamp) on condition of their paying yearly into his treasury,
the sums of 1200 Madras pagodas. He then dissmissed the vakeel,
honorably, with the privilege of palanquin, umbrella, biruck varnava,*
and toodom. Afterwards the English merchants, agreeable to the
permission of the Jaanum Soobah, began to build a fort in the F usly
A.D. 1650. 1059; at this time an officer named Podellee Lingapa, had
A.S. 1572. sneceeded to the office of Soobadar, and managed the
revenues of the Soobahs of Seera, Cadapa, and Canchee.
In the forms of the Mussulman management of revenue, the term
caumil is applied to the amount of revenues collected and accounted
for to the administration for the time of the Rayels, and not attached
to districts. At this time their revenue was not included in the jum-
ma caumil of Podellee Lingapa; but Tripalkanee was granted as a
jaghire under the management of Podellee Lingapa under the go-
vernment of Islaum, and is therefore included in the jumma caumil, or
rental; therefore this village was engaged by the above vakeel dur-
A. D. 1685. ing his life, and upon his death, it was assumed by the
A. 5.1607. English Company in the Fusly 1094.
In the Fusly 1095 and Achaya Cycle year, Zoolfucar Cawn, distin-
A. D. 1686. guished by the title of Cawn Bahauder, advancing into this
A. 8. 1608. country with an immense force, and continued for 12 years em-
ployed on the expedition and siege of the fort of Gingee.f At last having
reduced that fortress, he appointed Davood Cawn to govern the Carna-
tic. During his management, the English Company cultivating friendship
with him, obtained permission to coin silver rupees.{ They also about
this time got the following villages from the district of the amildar
of Poonamellee, viz. :—
Caamil.
1. Mouza Agamoor, “ eae set ‘bags. 620. 0
2. Ditto Parsewauk, BS. ine 3 ase a SLOU: | 90
3. Ditto Tandewauk, aut sini ioe aa .-- 400 10
* Several kinds of military music, significant of military distinction.
+ Gingee was at last taken in the Fusly year 1110, or A.D. 1700, A. S. 1623.
t The translator, (a Hindoo), had rendered the Arabic words for Mint Caroot
Zourve, (literally Stamping, house, ) a mint to strike gold coins. It seems from the
context that the English had the privilege of coining gold only, and hence his error,
which is set right.—Eps.
594 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. (No. 152.
In the Fusly of 1127, the English Company, with the consent of
A.D.1717. Sadaoola Cawn, then Soobedar, and the amildar of
A. S. 1639. Poonamellee, received the following villages of the Poona-
mellee district, viz.:—
Caamil.
1. Mouza Trivatore, nis ae a wei bags. 2a0
2. Ditto Saut Kaud, A ace ne i: ae pan.
3. Ditto Connewauk, oe i se Be we t0O 0
4. Ditto Salvara, ... a ot “yy vals Dk eee
5. Ditto Loongombauk, ... 2g 2." 260 °S
In the Fusly of 1149, in the adie ena of Sufdar Ally Cawn,
A.D. 1739, the English Company got the following villages from the
A. S. 1661. Poonamellee district, viz. :—
Caamil.
1. Mouza Brumapore, Ie # ioe as Page PVE *h2
1. Ditto Sat Coopum, Hee te ss vit ae D2onsG
2. Ditto Adayavaram, fe a oe wis’ 8 20K:
4. Ditto Poodpauk, ... ae ang te sien vag TOR: A546
5. Ditto Vepary, ..- wale a
These five villages were rie to the English Cae econ the
Government of , Governor of Madras. At the same time the
above Cawn granted a vilinas called Coodpauk, (now called Chintadry-
petta,) as a jagheer to the Governor’s interpreter, which he enjoyed
during life, when afterwards his jagheer was assumed by the Company.
In the Fusly 1157, the French came with an armament and captured
aS A AN the fort from the Company, after which, in the Fusly of
‘'S' 1745. 1158, the English Company brought troops and recaptured
ue 1B. their own fort, defeating the enemy, and obliging them to
fly. During the troubles of these captures, the Company
lost their vouchers and purwannas for the grants and jagheer, being
plundered by the enemy.
Afterwards, the Nabob Shahmut Jung Bahadoor and Sampat Row
granted Mylapore and some other villages, together with the customs —
and sayar, viz. :—
Caamil.
1, Mouza Mylapore, p yi the jig Pagiemn2aibi gg
2. Ditto Mamalom, a aes Jy eae See TOO
3. Ditto Alatore,... ya pas ¢ abi NS «lee REEF
4. Ditto Numdumbauk, ... on ms os doa belied iz
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic from 1564 to 1687. 595
| Caamil.
5. Ditto Pallagarrum, ... ss a = w+} G68 ig
6. Ditto Chennamongol, with the customs, Sul ra 2
7. Ditto Revenue of the village, ae 138 6 1 2965
Customs of the Mint, « 2,186 104 2
8. Ditto Settee Cuddee, Le as Hee fe Snag
In the Fusly 1160, in the time of governor re tuseleeaem, when Nasir
Jung advanced into this country, the Nabob Mahomed Ally Cawn be-
stowed the whole district of Poonamellee in jagheer on the English
Company.
In the Fusly 1166, during the government of Lord Pigot, Mahomed
A. D. 1752, Ally Cawn then granted the Nabob to the English Com-
A. S. 1674. pany, and also ceded the district of Saat Maganum.
In the Fusly 1173, and in the month of Alpissee, by the advice of
A. D. 1759. Meer Hassadoola Cawn, Mahomed Ally Cawn granted in
A. S. 1681. jagheer the district of Canchee and some other purgunnas,
amounting to four lacks of pagodas.
APPENDIX No. 2.
Extracts from Historical Documents, confirming the Account of the
expulsion of the Hindoo Naiks of Tanjore, by the Marhatta Chief
Eickojee.
MS. Madura History, page 24.—Chokanaad Naig, 8th King.
About this time, Chengamaul-Daus, who had fled to Sdtar,
brought from thence the king of the Marhatta’s brother, Ya-ko-jee, with
2000 horse, who entered Tanjore without opposition; but finding that
the kingdom was fertile, and that Chengamala- Daus had no people of
his own, Ya-ko-jee anxious to possess himself of the sovereignty, sought
an opportunity to assassinate him. Having smelt of this plot, he escap-
ed to Mysore, where he led an obscure life.
APPENDIX No. 3.
Extract from the Naraputty Vijium, page 30,a Tamul MS.
Afterwards the king of the Bosalla Dasum brought abundance of
troops of all kinds from the court in the Northern division, con-
quered Compa-Goudoo ; the Rajah of Magadee, forcibly took posses-
sion of his capital Magadee and another city called Bengooloor, and
there established himself in the government of that conquered coun-
try.
4M
596 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
At this time, a Raja named Veejaya-Ragavarauze of the Ballega
caste ruled at Tanjore, whose ancestors were established in that state
by Kistna- Rayel on a very honorable footing. The king of Madura
proud of the strength of his army, suddenly marched against him, put
Vegjaya- Rauze to death, and returned after this victory to his capi-
tal. The son of Veejaya-Ragavaraja, named Chengamala Nazk, sent
his minister as ambassador, who made all possible haste to Bengaloor,
where he came into the presence of Hkojee, and represented thus:
I am the chief minister of Chengamalla Naik, king of Tanjore, who is
my lord, and being attacked and deprived of his country by the lord of
Madura, has sent to request your aid and support with all your forces
to conquer his enemy, for which he undertakes to defray the field
charges of your troops.
Ekojee upon this representation of the minister, consented to his
proposal; he then sent to Chickadava- Raja, signifying his having
engaged to go to the assistance of Tanjore, and the necessity that he
should be in condition to fulfil his engagements to the utmost in every
sense. kojee, therefore, for a sum sufficient for the disbursements of
his troops, made over to Chickadava Raja, his district of Bangalore for
1,200,000 rupees, and on receiving payment thereof, he marched. On
his arrival near Tanjore, he wrote to the lord of that city to discharge
the arrears of 5000 of his cavalry; the demand was complied with,
and he received sufficient to pay his troops for one month. Then under
the pretext of bringing more forces, he returned from thence back, and
having intelligence of the state of Aranee, he suddenly attacked that
fort, got possession of it, putting the garrison to death, and placed
Vadajee, one of his officers there, with a force to maintain it. He then
went to Tanjore with only about 200 horse, and represented to the
Tanjore lord, that his troops being in arrears to a very large amount,
they had refused to obey his orders until their balance was dis-
charged ; but if he would now advance him sufficient to discharge the
balance of two months, he swore to bring his whole army to reduce
his enemy, and to obey at all times his commands. He then took an
oath at Coombaconum in the divine presence of God, upon which
Chengamalia Raja paid him the money he wanted, requesting him to
hasten by all means to march against Madura; but the ungrateful
Ekgee, who had privately leagued with the Madura king, then re-
quested, that having on his account and for his service made over his
country to Chickadava Raja, and being obliged to carry his family
along with him to the field, he would grant him a place where they
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 597
might reside in security in his absence, as he was preparing to march
within a few days in a fortunate time towards Madura, to attack
the enemy; whereupon, with the consent of Chengamalla Raja,
being admitted with all his forces into the fort, he immediately placed
his guards on all the places of importance, and then intimidated
the Raja so much by threats, that if he did not leave the place, by
force to deliver him up to his enemy, the king of Madura, that after
this dreadful* conversation, ykojee forced him to leave the city with
only the dress he wore, leaving all his property behind, together with
all the royal family, who on some private carriages escorted by his
troops, were sent out of the district.
This great princet not able to evade this misfortune which was des-
tined by God, submitted to this degradation, and in this poor abject
condition, proceeded with all his family to Streerangapatam. Being
ashamed to behold Chickadava Raja, he remained privately in a house
of one of the inhabitants, which the Raja being informed of, came to
this lord, consoled and encouraged him not to be uneasy for the loss of
his fortune, and granted him his protection, assigning some villages for
his maintenance.
APPENDIX No. 4.
Translation of an Extract from a Tamul MS. History of the Marhatta
Family of Tanjore, containing an account of the revolution by which.
the Marhatta Bhoosla Family was established at Tanjore by
Echojee.
Now the descent of Eckojee Raja who conquered Tanjore, has
already been fully mentioned in the history of the Bhosala Vamshum.}
This Eekojee Rajah being the fourth of that name, when he was
ruling at Bangalore the second time, received a letter from Ali Abdil
Shah of Beejapoor, mentioning, “that Veejaya-Ragava Naiker of
Tanjore being besieged by the Trichinopoly Nazkers, a vakeel has
come to me from Tanjore on that account; therefore we send two
viziers, named Cauddil-Alas- Khan and Abdul Alt, together with some
troops, and you should also go along with them with your army,
attack the army of the Nazkers of Trichinopoly, and drive them away.
* Literally translated.
¢ When in Mysore in 1807, enquiry was made in vain for the descendants of this
family. It since appears, that a person belonging to;them, or claiming to be such, was
noticed in certain communications to Government in 1805 from the Southward,
~ Bhonsla-Vamshum, or the Generation or Race of the Bhonsla Family.
598 Political E'venis in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. (No. 152.
You must then put the Tanjore people under arrest* till they collect
the balance of the Paudshah’s tribute.f You should also collect the
amount of the expences of the army, and send it to the presence.”
On reading this letter, he immediately left Bangalore fort in charge
of Chaualakaattee- Soorya- Row, and marched along with the two vi-
ziers to Tanjore; in the way he took the fort of Arnee, thence he
marched to Tanjore, defeated the army of the Nazkers, and drove them
away. He then laid the mogallco on Tanjore, and encamped at Tree-
moollavoel, in order to collect the money of the tribute, and the expen-
ces of the armies; keeping the two viziers, Caudil-Alas-Khan and
Abdul Ali, without the fort to fix and collect the amount of the money.
It was while this Rajah was encamped at Tvreemoollavoel at this
Pe Aue ge time, that his second son Surpojee- Rajah was born, the third
person of this name in the Salleevahan Sakam, 1596, in the
Cycle year Rachasa; these circumstances have been already men-
tioned.
Vegjaya-Ragava- Naik and his relations of Tanjore delaying to pay
the money of the tribute, and being involved in contentions among
themselves about the supreme{ authority in the state, disputing who was
chief, dismissed the vakeel (who had been lately sent to Beejapoor,)
with the view of deceiving the two viziers, who resided without the
fort. This intrigue and deception being resented by his minister§
and the vakeel, they were discontented, and represented to the two
viziers, “that the Natkers would not listen to their advice, and evinced
much weakness and folly in their conduct, which was now so bad,
that they were likely to ruin the country ; that they were at variance
with each other, and were not able to manage the Samstaan ; that they
(the viziers) ought therefore to take the country under their direc-
tion, as the Nazkers, to the number of 15 or 20 people, were quarrel-
ling without any substantial reason, and ready to destroy each other;
that the people were no longer under the command of the Naikers,
and no longer respected their authority, and designed to seize on the
fort, and to cut off the NMazkers within two days; and recommended
therefore to them to rule the kingdom, (or assume the government.”’)
* Arrest, mogalloo, (Tam.) The original runs literally ‘‘ You will lay the mogadloo
on the Tanjore people till, &c. &c.”? The Malabar mogalloo seems to be the derna
of the Northern Hindoos.
+ Peishkush.
Original, ‘‘ Am I great, or are you great ?”
§ Muntree, the chief minister.
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 599
The two vizierscame to no resolution for two days, while they ex-
amined into the accuracy of these representations, which they found
were very true, and that all the officers of the country were speaking in
the same manner, (or held the same sentiments.) The viziers then
replied to the vakeel and chief minister, ‘“‘ we cannot do this business
ourselves; but we will give you a letter which you should both carry
and deliver to Eckojee Rajah, who is now at T’reemullavoel, and you
can bring him, then all the business will be settled.” Accordingly
the vakeel and ministers took that letter, and going to Zreemullavoel,
delivered it to Eckojee Rajah, acquainting him of the misconduct of
the Nazker’s warriors, and relations of the family who were in
Tanjore fort; thereupon Echojee Rajah set out secretly with some
of his troops to Tanjore, and after conferring with the two viziers,
went into the fort of Tanjore, accompanied by them in the Salleeva-
han Sakam year 1596, in the cycle Rachasa in the month of Mausee
in the day of Suptamee (or 7th) in the Sookala-Putchum. On that
day he came by the road leading to the gate of Tanjore fort, thence
now called Ali-Durwaja ; after advancing a short way, the Nazk, his
relations, their followers and warriors from the Aramana (or palace)
advanced to oppose the Rajah sword in hand. In this conflict the
Naik of Tanjore and seven or eight of his cousins were slain, the
remaining Nazkers fled in great confusion, whereupon the fort remain-
ed under his command.
Then the two viziers composed the troubles which still in some
degree prevailed in the fort, and then came out by the East-gate and
encamped without the fort ; as they came out by this gate with victory,
therefore itis called Futteh Durwaja. The Rajah then delivered the
fort into the charge of the late chief minister, and went and encamped
without the fort with the two viziers.
The Rajah then asked liberty of the two viziers to return to Banga-
lore, but they earnestly requested him to stay until their own differ-
ences were adjusted, for they were disputing to which of them this
country should now belong.
Affairs were thus in suspense for two months, when intelligence ar-
rived that Auwrungzebe having conquered all the several Padshahs of
Deckan, except Beejapoor, there was reason to suspect that the govern-
ment of Beejapoor also must soon fall. Abdul-Ali and Cawdil Alas
Khan therefore considered if they remained disunited and quarrelling
among themselves, after Eekojee Rajah’s departure they could not
preserve the fort ; that the Naikers of Trichinopoly were valiant men ;
600 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
and even that Ali-Adil- Shah would never permit of this country fall-
ing into their possession. On the other side, that Eckojee Rajah was
a warrior fully able to reduce the people of Trichinopoly; that his
brother Seevajee Rajah also was a man of such great power in his
country, that Adc- Adil-Shuh was not able to contend with them; there-
fore, they resolved that Eckojee Rajah was the fittest person to rule
the kingdom, who would from gratitude pay them due respect and at-
tention for such a service down through future generations.
Having thus considered and determined in their mind, they acquaint-
ed Lckgjee Rajah of their sentiments, and satisfied him (or prevailed on
him) to acquiesce in their proposals.
Soon after Eckojee Rajah was seated on the throne of Tanjore in
A. D. 1675. the epoch of Salleevahan Sakam 1597, in the
Psi" aa Cycle year Nala, in the month of Chittry; he
then sent to Ali- Adil- Shah of Beejapoor a nuzzur (or present) ade-
quate to his rank, and wrote him a letter, signifying that he retained
these two viziers with him, that the Padshah might not conceive any
suspicion of their fidelity. The Padshah on receiving this letter and
present was extremely pleased, and in reply addressed him a sunnud,
empowering him to enjoy the country of Tanjore from generation to
generation; in this manner he wrote a sunnud, and sent it with many
kinds of valuable cloths, &c. as presents to Eckojee Rajah.
Afterwards the people of Trichinopoly came to fight against the
Rajah, who repelled them, and obtained from them a written grant of
the village of Sondala- Mal, ‘for the expense of betel and nuts.”
He also fulfilled his engagements to Cawdil Alas Khan and Abdut-
Ali, and continued to rule the kingdom.
In the epoch of Salleevahan Sakam 1598, in the cycle year Pingala
to Echojee Rajah was born his third son Tookojee Rajah ; these three
sons were by his eldest wife Tippa Bauhee Saib of the Yengala caste,
and by his younger wife, Annoo Bauhee Saib, of the caste of Mola, he
had a daughter. He also had nine concubines ; of them were born seven
children, namely :—
1. Chundraban, 3. aati 5. aes ri ttle
2. a 6.
Of these seven sons, the eldest Chundraban was a great warrior. Alto-
gether Hekojee Rajah had ten sons. After ruling for some time he
departed this life in the Salleevahan Sakam 1604, in the cycle year
Rootrotcaury ; his eldest son Shahajee Rajah, (the third of that name,)
being appointed to succeed to the government.
1844,] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 601
APPENDIX No. 5.
Literal Translation from the Memoirs of Sheevajee, of the conference
between Sheevajee and his brother Eckojee of Tanjore.
CHAPTER LXXXII.
After this, (the taking of Chenjee,) on the other side of Chendee, the
army encamped at the village of Ardér near Treevundee, whence a
letter was sent to Eckojee Rajah, saying, “1 have not met your Majesty
since I was born, desirous of a meeting, I am come into your neigh-
bourhood, and beg that you will pay me a visit,” thereupon Eckojee
Rajah attended by Juggunath-Punt-Diwan and his army came and
waited upon Sheevajee Rajah in a most respectful manner. Charity
was largely distributed, afterwards they both eat out of the same dish,
which they continued to do daily, and conversed together in the pre-
sence of Ragoonath Narayen, and Dittajee Punt Vakneess, Havildar,
and Bdl-Prubhoo-Cheetneess and Kumbeer-Row Shenaputtee and
Anajee-Ragoonath Mujmoondar. Sheevajee Rajah began to say,
** Give to me the half of the Chendaverry* dominions and take you the
other half.” Eckojee Rajah answered, ‘“‘ You must then give to me the
half of the domains acquired in the Désh,t (country of Marhattas).”
Sheevajee replied, ‘‘ Our father acquired nothing in the Désh.” Ekojee
Rajah rejoined, ‘Formerly territories were acquired by our father in the
Désh, deliver the half to me.” Sheevajee repeated, “‘ Our senior ac-
quired nothing in the Désh.” Thus were words and disputes carried
on for fifteen days. At last Eckojee Rajah declared, “‘ We must fight for
it, within fifteen days I shall complete an army and call upon you; pre-
pare yourself.” Having so spoken, he set off in anger. Sheevajee
Rajah for the sake of peace followed out of his tent, but was not heard
by Eckojee, who mounting his horse rode on to Chendaver. As far as
Chendaver, Sheevajee Rajah ordered these officers to go in his escort ;
namely, Humbeer, Row-Shenaputtee and Manajee Moré and Roopdjee
Bhonsla, and Anajee Rogoonath. They went as far as Chendaver,
* The district of Tanjore.
¢ Alluding to their first acquisition of Poona and Poorender, which in fact were
not acquired by Shahjee, but descended from his ancestors, the dispute, therefore, here
turns upon the point whether the acquisitions of a father was to be divided among his
sons: leaving the ancient patrimony for the eldest according to Sheevajee’s assertion,”’
or ‘* that the whole lands without distinction possessed by a person should be equally
divided among his sons.’’ ‘The former distinction is well known in the Laws of Scot-
land under the distinction of Heritable Property, or Hereditary, and of conquest or
personal estate and property.
602 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
where they were presented with cloths and ornaments as marks of
distinction, and thence they took leave.
CHAPTER LXXXIII.
Thereafter Sheevajee Rajah leaving Ragoonath Punt and the She-
naputtee with the army, went to the Désh (native land), accompanied
by Dittajee Punt, and by Bal-Prubhoo- Cheetneess and by Manajee
Moré Panch- Hazaree (of 5000,) Anajee Moré and Annund Row,
Panch- Hazaree, and he arrived at Punhala.
The army behind was attacked by Hckojee Rajah’s troops, consist-
ing of twenty thousand cavalry and fifty thousand fire-lockmen, and
commanded by Jaggunath Punt Diwan, by Bheemajee Rajah, by
Roybanjee Rajah, and other officers of rank. These armies fought for
fifteen days. One day the cavalry (of Sheevajee) charged the four
sides and killed two thousand infantry ; disorder ensued (in Eckojee’s
lines); Jaggunath Punt and Bheemajee Rajah and Roybanjee Rajah,
the highest officers, were taken prisoners ; the infantry fled; the army
of Chendaver was destroyed; a thousand troopers and bramins and
Marhattas were killed. On Ragoonath Punt’s side, (2. e. Sheevajee’s, )
five hundred troopers lost their lives in the victory.
CHAPTER LXXXIV.
After that a treaty of peace was concluded, by which the half of the
country north of the Cavery, including the forts and palaces of Bdld-
poor* Kolar, Maharaj Gudd, and Juggdév Gudd, and Carnatic Gudd
and others were ceded to Sheevajee. The Kamaveeshdar of Arnee,
named Odajee Bhaskur, who had eight sons, viz. Soobén-Row and
Neevas- Row, and the rest had been gifted by Shaljee Rajah with a dis-
trict including the fort of Vumnneedoorg under these new cessions.
This gifted tract or enamt no person molested.
The fort of Veloor fell (to Sheevajee’s troops). In that quarter
Ragoonath Narayen remained at Chundee and Humbeer Row Shen-
naputtee returned with the army towards their own country. In the
Carnatic a territory ylang an annual revenue) of fifty lacs of
huns was acquired.
* Ballapoor and Colar are well known to be above the Ghauts; the other guddies
are in the Payen Ghaut, or Barramahl, and we see Bangalore is not included, which
confirms the account of its being made over by Eckojee to the Mysore Chief, previous
to his marching to Tanjore.
t The Arnee jagheer has been a matter of discussion of late years ; a person in posses-
sion of heritable property cannot divide it; but the latter, as his own acquisition or
conquest, he may divide or bequeath as he thinks proper.
603
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687.
] ¢
cer‘o9 |ero‘oe jooo'ze —fosu'es FOO Bae ve we eg yt on MOAG] 9 jooo'z, jr * HIMAUOAC 07
oge'z9 ne ae ies 588 8 eo ‘UIeIZARTIING JOInMeMING! O |OIC'Z9 |** oe ‘mpewisyq 61
LG6 ‘82 on _ = ne ** (£0731 QT ON) “Yeutoonsurepy| 0 |£66'9z [°° nit ‘ayeooTnsua AA | 8]
One (000 ST: 81 GGe Ce Borat ee re ee et (nyxeoyeH % ON) “looouooy,) Q /664'Zz'E |** — (“AooHMOoT,) “Inosutg Z|
GLE FS = a oe aa ae Me ae mt 4 al Glee |** Sis ** “Jepunoun | OT
O8P‘9 ee ee eo eo ee ee Deeg qneure N YUU, 0 O8t‘9 eo eo ee ‘qayeued GT
000‘86‘T 100099 |°° °° oe oe pis "* ‘epuoseureg “Iepuoy-uren ‘puoouadeog] PFT |99z ‘Clb |°* % ** “epuoouny; PT
08P‘9 = = ie 3 ‘orp ‘pL ‘ON ; 0 j0sr‘9 |*° ‘rapuntteg reiyyoo'T | ST
Z29‘OF eo ee ee ae ‘oyIp ‘sl ‘ON ; IOOIeEg 0 GE9 ‘OF eo ee ae ‘1noing al
LLG'TS8 . ieee. Sat << us “outp € “ON “Tl®qtpoog; 0 | L/Z't8 2 : ‘TeqIPeI AO TENE ORL AL
gesies%. |! tt ttt 4noMPET ST Pue ZT ON aTnpayog ‘ge “on BE lecu'ec’s |" ‘sIeUPHE Z} 46 ute Ue.
O0F‘0S ee eo eo ; ee eo (‘oapsne yoow) eyooMle[e 0 00b ‘c eo eo ‘aqyeoypomyeg 8
000'F% |000‘8 00r‘%E 006 ‘F%% ay es : ‘ZION “g 29S Axepurutez 04} 10; puy| O {OOPS |(“eIOYO 10) “euuryD eed |e
002‘EI 000‘tP 969'60'% nae echt a are pe OG ge COCO KCHEOKROSOT EO eE ooo EAE OE eT 969‘60‘% (‘erang 10) ‘eppag sooderjeg 9
000 jooo'e |Pamm fooe'ge —«SO8BAT B+ Gy sont “qf 20g ‘toO[FuEN ‘HooTSMeA! Q foos‘or |** °° “+ “HooTSNeg_¢
¥ ee (‘yeyaoye py oaz1y 10) Ayeyorq ‘Aoqiy Apjezty| o 009°IZ |*° es ve ‘Aeqorg b
s0e‘0s‘T |T01‘09 += jose’ss‘s wae se eotrr “ON "| SIUpUIMIAZ JO JsIT] Gog ‘Apuooseuy| Q {10089 ‘yepuootuuy Jo epuooeuuy §
‘< ee oe ee ‘ontp o}jIp aules ayy) go j00z'er [°° Coapsne jo Aqunog |
‘JOOQUIY ) B1OJUT 1O alOJUW)%
O00°S9°T jooo’es °° tty" a i. ** ueysopulyy] mNyooyepY oy) Sq oures oy] Q [ZEZ‘IZ‘e |" “i ‘a1oyesueg
pees Ayuowutos ‘10odureysy
“purgy °° H fs
‘eposeg |
rad saad| «s8e : ; Z
“N11 © ye ~Rhakey : sy | ‘saadnyy &
soadnyy ‘1a{sIsey Jo satdog
—— -——_——_——| wouoyip pure ‘uejsopurzy jnyeoyep 94} WoI} SSuIpear snotsea ‘syieMoY = |——-———— ‘leyjnqq viqdoosy oy} Woy
“66ZT JO sornp
“849g ay} Aq pa} *TTuIeeD
-eUllysiy Sak emun f°
‘sypyoyyT 40 syouunbing -¢g—‘aynusng ‘soodvfaag 403.119
>
|
4»
©
604 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. [No. 152.
‘soodnry 9¢/'02'% 24 0} Stvadde 41 [e303 oy} Aq yng “pozjtUO ST UNS DY T, x»
0 Og joe ft 8% “yTnqunseyy OP
are A || he take aes bo oa “Moog | 6E
0 00080‘T | (‘TTMorpuooy 10) TTMoIpuoo'y | SE
FIL |L31'86'¢ | IN3100H8arpujout seqjoog 3
0 |Ge9'1G [°° °° %* ‘toojameqyy| SE
0 (SSS 1h f° Se fot? «oS eMpadzoony PE
0 1896‘ a ee ‘100]]9 N-eouny | CE
0 '00t‘S °° (‘ellay[ON 10) ‘etaasyen |CE
000‘CL ee oe oe ee ee ** (‘ov1Ip OE *ON) “eatayepung| go {ogo‘GZ °° oi + (‘A190S510p
-ueyosdeyiad) ‘eunstpuooy | IE
c/e‘ee ee ee oe ee eo oe ee (‘qnyseye py 6% ‘ON) 0 cee‘ee eh oS £8 “eSUNSPAITS 0€
0c6'9 oe ee os oe On «+ ‘Ajgasueg Jo Ay[nyinseuio0og Q |g96‘9 *e * ‘INSE N-s10UeG | 6G
0cz¢ ee ee ee ee Be "1G ON “euofieg-ATyew-TAppus, 0 |0¢z‘e ae ** ‘ualrey[-[Npug | k%
000‘GF es *° ee oe “s ol ‘eyyeotpuoog ‘doodipuoog! Qy |nog‘ck {°° os °* “ayeoytpuoog | LG £
G/9‘99 ee ee eo es ee eo (‘cz ‘ON ‘eH ) iapuoog | 0 GL9°99 ee eo ee (‘seqqe1 ‘
-YeT 94} 0} MOU) 1oopuo0dg | 9%
~ Cn as ee ee ee ee ee ee ON) fe ee as G p 2 6LP oe = (‘unyjndea i
Pattee a -ag ‘W09) ‘Nssny-1ue}Ng |S
G0S/ET' 1O00-Gr -\cee'Ge'p. fe. ts tt See as pekse tp) Veeder edgo- yees 5 FCeR EET Ir | - "* ‘yeiag | VG
160‘ZG ete ee Ee (Gnyxee¥eyy EZ ON) Ayfaquereurqns| g [i6s‘g = f** 88 “TH TMYUNeuag | &6
Eo lees F- (‘xoopleN S100pynyy ) Loo] [eI Joo10Q ‘joorq Arnyesoopy| FI | [gO'1s‘s °° ge ** (“ur09 “1007
-9g 10 a10[9N) Soorppaysany | cS
‘ e- oe eo eo eo ee ¢ § : o1 ¥ (‘Aq[ng Teu
006°%Z Aynyyreueser AT19wW110,] ; ane : -uinsnf wo) ae Bai 1G
“puryd “APH a
“eposeg
red saad| ‘sseg “SV | SY Ze
“nl ¢@ ye) *Aqueg : :
saodny | ‘laysisey Jo saidog
—-—_—__—- qUsIoyIp pue ‘ue}sopuUlF] INYooyePT oY} wWosy sourpvar snouva ‘syieway |—-—————] ‘1oyjnq eiydoosy ay} wo1g
“66LT JO SoTNp
-ayog ayy Aq pay “Trmee gd
-eUlljsy sonusady euIUIn fF
(‘panuyuo) )—'sjoynyy 10 syouunbang -ce—‘oyousng ‘soodnlarg “nas
605
eee
“epoo
-eq iod| ‘sseg
‘sur © ye} “AQueg
soodny
“6621 JO SeTNp
-ayog ayy Aq pay
-eUll]sqy sonusaADy
Politicad Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687,
1844,]
“1aysIsay Jo satdog
jualeyIp pue ‘uejsoopulp] ynyoeoyxe PY OY} Woy sSurpeos snowea ‘syrewoy
ZL \ole‘or‘6r|‘soodny ‘jrueeg ewuns
*al0upag ul JooU0TZY ATOOFT! Cy
‘TTeyuodie Hy) gO
“1apooMeg-S3eN
| oooscocescoo
OOPS
008 °F,
OGZ‘SI‘E
OrES‘9
069‘1Z
028‘
Cb9'8C'T
0G ‘9¢
GZS ‘Z9
029'T
091%
096‘2T
qroIeeD
euUn ¢
as s *100U0 Fy -T]00 FY
oe = ‘qqequndin yy
ae as ** “BTATASSNO FY |
Yaeiqeun AA Jo yoresequing |"
se Sgndiyjog
"+ “yNYTEON Jo tNdyouoN |
+6 TMYpag 20 TOAPVT!
ss *s ‘JapunwiNng-5e yy
os Pe ‘rejoo-issun Fy
ee ee ae ‘TINNY
ee ‘IpuneIag 10 IPUOO}IG
ee ee ee ‘nNSunuye
oe
“1aynd etydoosy 94} wo
ZS
"IG
SERRA! OES CA Dx eR 8S Ret Rane 5 rk | A AE OEE eS ae OS
(‘panuyuog )—'spoyoyy 40 souunbing -¢¢—‘oyousng ‘soodvlaag «2.02.9
ee a ee
Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. (No. 152.
606
*pei}IWO
000‘86
oos‘ze
0P9‘S
000‘GL
006 ‘Z6‘T
000‘S1
OGL‘E3'T
OSL'E6
00S‘62‘T
0S2°S6
000‘¢Z
000‘G2 ‘TTI
‘pao
000‘9¢ |000‘%1
L886L‘T
129‘02‘L
-ssadny '*sSeg yueg
—— eS
"66ZT PIN PETS
GE9°E9'Z0'l
199°1S‘8S‘¢
‘soodnty
ee ee ee ee oe ‘aqIS
oz ‘ON ‘Aynyynae ‘Aqtidjuaegq
ee ee ee (‘yey pnsoa )
Kuun3ieg 10 ‘Auunsing veasing
eo ee ° - e- ‘Appeapnse py
(-yepy Aareauey]) ‘100je N ‘Aat00[[aN
(‘yep eppnsfkai009) eppuseeyji0p
“LON *Y 20g ‘1oodeTTeq YOryO
ce oe ** Cyey ted WEN
OTD TIEN) “MW FN ‘epeqoueg
so (‘qeET eppnsooaeny) ‘eppnseaeyy
(‘yey Aqmysunyyny ) eee
ee @e ee ee ee ‘1eA
e11oyalinN) ‘qeppnskiny “e1ad.in
ee ee ee ee ee (‘yey
e]nuerer) ‘el[nuerezy “e][nWe1er
pe. (8H 8 ON)
(Qnyeeqe]] SooipertyO) Sooipi0e Fy
eo eo eo ee ‘sqoo[e y, Ino
Ajuo Ajrow10y sem Jt ‘“ZGLT Ul pa
-pao eyo (ooey, euo) syoorey, xIg
qneyy eye ‘“ueyy uedeg ‘eypueog
co se se Spapnypour msi
pue ‘eieurdg iaMoT aq 0} pesoddug
s+ ‘yorstndwos ynoyytM Jou ‘pred
Aj[nj raaou ynq ‘esos UO partaay
Ayperyjaed eynqisy ay} eq 0} pasoddng
“66L1
‘aioskq JO uotytyred jo Ajyear} ay} Jo soTnpayog
24} YIM uostuedmod uO poojsiepuN aq ued se
1ej se suoljeueldxe pue ‘sy1eUlod ‘sSurpeed snore A
0¢2°99
0S2°E6
0
0
0 | 00c‘zE
0 | opg‘s
0 | 000°!
0 | 00S‘%6‘I
0 | 000‘GT
0 1 OSL‘ea‘T
0 | OSZ‘E6.
0 | 00S‘%2'T
0 | 0S2‘S6
0 | 000‘GZ
0
Z
000°6@‘tT
1] 128‘08‘2
0 | ceL‘es*Z
OI} se9‘s9‘ZO'T
€1} 198‘1S‘8c‘¢
ssaodny
*J9}JNQ ey) Ul
[tueegeuuin
** ‘pasoddns ‘t1jauemeq °°
ye ‘1oodeljeq euuryg
ais oe ‘Kuagspn yr
ae e+ «6 ‘Ayoasurqyyny
ee ee °° “BITaYLIO T,
se se Boorpyayyy9
as “4s ‘SoorpAe yy
ee ee ee ‘eypuoog
‘mssnuiepAP 10 100upag
ec
“eé
ce
6é
4¢
<¢
‘+ “‘IT[NqQUOEG| LT
ee “TUN ALES | OT
‘QdIUM[ISeY |CT
°° 9a10d]aaN FL
“elle ylu1004 |e]
‘soodeyyeq tueyD/Z1
ee “eyeqyueny | TT
‘yan spe OT
e* ‘a10mSuad |6
e¢ “ellayin pg
“ey NULIEy | /
** “1y4n 31907719
‘S001ps2e}3199)|G
** ‘Soorprey|p
** — ‘eypuerog/g
Me ‘1o0upeg |Z
‘giosh I 10 Weyedesutieg jo tepurmaz ‘unjjndesuriog| |
-erydoosy 1a1JNq 10 ‘1a}s13ay ay} Ul soureNy
SS eee ee =a
7
10 ‘oynusvg -Loodvtaag uo sjuapuadeg Lo sunpurwag sv ‘yng ydosp
‘youag fo yoqnog
fo sayfng ay? ur pasaqua sforyQ oopurzy
607
€ 1698‘19'G2‘S °° ne ie *Te}0],
eee | ee ee
00S‘LS ‘pphsinyeg ‘ppnsinyeys ‘eppnsinyes|0 |00S‘LE i aan dels alee we 2 Talis 4 « GMYsr1OAUES | LZ
00S‘Z8° ee ee ee ee ee 0 00¢°L8‘T ee ee ee e 8 ee 66 ‘qeyJOITpoor) 9%
(Opa eee. ee ae OO (OOD GO Ge ‘pa ;
PZ ‘EZ ON ‘TyeMeseg ‘{pucosurey -puajui aq ysnu Apuoosu0g °° s+ “{pnosunsy | CZ
06298 a a m= “eH OZ ON {0 1062‘98 ae me a “‘1eT[eq °° eS ‘Areqyeg | $2
CZ6LI eTMpeyas Ayeor vag) “welled eter
col‘te’6 j°° (‘hdoo pz ‘FZ °ON) ‘Atoaseueg|O (COT‘I6'6 =j°° *" = = Ippnouny |€%
OGC‘EL‘T ‘7 “ON *W 9as pue ‘Apusosfuny|0 |0cGC‘SZ‘T ee ee ‘Kpuooseuy °° se ee SepuooRUy | 2G
oos6Es'0I 4° Ot TG ON *y 998 pay|0 [096°62 OL °° — ** ‘Ajjauodie py °° «tpn qundan F | 1%
‘payimg = |yrayog ‘Asay sejog yytm Araqssnyuy|0 |0CL‘8T ee ee ‘igassnyuy °° on ‘K1aaysnsuy 0%
000°6 | 000‘e ‘peng | ** ‘es ON 0, 0ez2- = [° hoe! oss gkmooreaeg = < eee
006‘0g (00s‘ol ‘payimg j|°* ee *ayag gg ‘ON 0 |000‘SP ‘se ai +s «6 “FJNotUy ** «=: JO AwpululeZ "][NIITY ST
ssaadny |'sseg ‘JUeO}‘seodny ‘soodn iy
66LI i. Z
"6B6LT eTNpeyos ‘al0sk TN jo uonjsed jo Ayeaay ay} JO saynpeyog "19IJNG 24} Ul *erqdoosy iayjnq 10 ‘Joysloayy oO} Ul Soule Ny ~
ay} YIM uoslzedu0s uo poojsiapun oq ued se /[MeeQemMUNsS
ey se suo euL[dxe pue ‘sy1eUal ‘souIpead snole A
A aS ee Sa a a ee RR eR a aE SaEEENEEREEIEPROSN cs SE
\
(‘panuyuog )—'youag fo
yoqnog 40 ‘an0u«ng -Loodnlaag uo spuapuadag 40 suvpuruag so ‘yor ydosp fo safngy ayp ur pasajuasfary) oopurry
1844. | Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687.
608 Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. (No. 152.
*paiaysisal }
. JOU SI YOIYAM Jeqeyepy JO oaisnjoxy |
(‘pepnpour oq einpeyy =)
jo Aouepuodap ev se aiooueAriy,
jo oN} 9g} JOyJoyM [uqnoq)
ee | 6LE‘SP°619
G/8'€6'68'F | ** Joory Jo sqoq "yetag Jo sqoq
ata en LEN se Atrmed |69e‘19'ca's “EN se ATIMeY step
1
J
‘epuoog pure o10u
*pogq ‘alosAy Sutpnyoutr ‘100d
pue slofuey jo sresi1g useqjnog -eG SuIpnypout jou ynq 929 ‘v3
-JooIpuey pue ynoypig Ajoor
¢
(-Ajjeaouury, pue einp sueuy Wy pow -efaag uo wuepuedap siepurwe7 | -kty Aq passessog
‘epuoomeling Suipnpour ‘peq
oPG‘Ee ‘Eze Sow Sutpnjour) ‘Atdourmaqy, -oye yy Aq passassog ( ‘Tuopy Jou e10u
|
4
|
L
“100QULY 0} ISAAK pue YInog
62209‘ 2¢'I }ssorei0g 9Y} 0} AoojuNy WOIT
yeeys) ueteg ‘peqeipA Py ‘oryeureg
52969 ‘6P
* -eipsP ‘yeeyy eyeq ‘oueureg
98e°LI‘LP ‘1oodefaeg ‘yeeyy eyed ‘oyeureg )
‘sosadny *saodny
—_— ee Le Se a en — —=.
- as —— — = re | eS a eS SS SS ee SS AEE I en ee ns ay ee
"youl "YeRlas
‘aynUuLDD Jo suo: jnbopy 1aLH
Lo ‘sdrysqoquay om, ayz fo sarsnosas aayousnduos ayp mays 02 paubisap ‘Qoosp puv youry fo sdrysgoquay ayound
~aS OM} ayy fo S4ossedans ayy uaamjag paprap sv ‘uayfngy ayp 07 Gurpsooon aynusvy ay) fo sanuaaarz ay) fo qav.98q 7
»
1844.] Political Events in the Carnatic, from 1564 to 1687. 609
APPENDIX No. 9.
PROCLAMATION AGAINST THE SLAVE TRADE.
At a Consultation, present William Gyfford, Eisq., Agent and Grover-
nor, &c. &e.
An order in English, Portuguese, Gentue and Malabar, for pre-
venting the transportation of this country people by sea, and making
them slaves in other countries, this day was read and passed, and order-
ed to be hung up in four public places of this town ; the contents are as
follows :
Whereas formerly there hath been an ill custom in this place of
shipping off this country-people and making them slaves in other
strange countries ; we therefore, the present Governor and Council of
Fort St. George, have taken the same into our serious consideration,
and do hereby order that for the future, no such thing be done by any
person whatsoever resident in this place ; and we do hereby also strictly
command all our officers by the water-side, whether they be English,
Portuguese, or Gentues, to do their utmost endeavours to prevent the
same, or else suffer such punishment either in body or goods as we
shall think fit to inflict upon them ; and if any person shall hereafter
presume clandestinely to do anything contrary to this our order, by
shipping such slaves of this country, and it be proved against him, he
shall pay for every slave so shipped off or sent away, fifty pagodas, to be
recovered of him in the Choultrey of Madrasspatam, one-third for the
use of the Honorable India Company, one-third to the poor, and one-
third to the informer. Dated in Fort St. George the 9th day of Novem-
ber, one thousand six hundred and eighty-two.
(Signed) WILLIAM GYFFORD.
Fort St. George, 1682,
Monday, \3th November, 1682.
610
Note on the Osseous Breccia and Deposit in the Caves of Billa Soorgum,
Lat. 15° 25', Long. 78° 15’, Southern India. By Captain Newsoup.
These caves are situated in hills composed of the diamond limestone,
and had not hitherto, as far as I can discover, been visited by any Euro-
pean previous to my stumbling upon them. From the roofs of some
depend clusters of stalactites, while the sides and floor are encrusted with
stalagmite, covered with an ammoniacal and nitrous soil of little speci-
fic gravity, brown in colour, and apparently the result of decomposition
of the filth of bats and other small animals that lurk in the recesses.
The mouths of the caves are from +46 to 60 feet high ; but diminish
before many feet are traversed to semi-circular channels, or fissures of no
great length, which it is necessary to traverse on hands and knees.
Among the specimens sent, will be found a gypseous bone breccia, a
red indurated marl or mud, somewhat resembling that of the celebrated
Kirkdale caverns in Yorkshire, some fossilized bones of small animals
with a few fragments of the bones and tusks of animals of larger dimen-
sions, many of which were found at the depth of 18 feet below the floor
of the caves, imbedded confusedly in a hard gypseous rock and in red
mud, lying under a crust of stalagmite, which is covered by the light
animal soil before-mentioned.
I am sorry I cannot send the Society duplicates of the more perfect
bones and tusks of the larger animals, which I have reserved for exami-
nation in Europe. The bones are broken, but not water-worn : those
of the smaller animals are in great quantities.
The specimens now presented, poor and insignificant as they are,
may be regarded with some interest as the first offerings on the Society’s
table from the caves of Southern India, of a deposit analogous in mineral
composition, under a similar crust of stalagmite, to that in which Buck-
land first discovered some of the then most remarkable of his Relique,
which consisted of the remains of about 300 hyznas, the ox, young
elephants, hippopotamus, rhinoceros, horse, bear, wolf, hare, water rat,
and several birds: with the dung of hyznas nearly hard as bone, and
composed principally of the same substance, phosphate of lime, all con-
fusedly mixed in a loam or mud, or dispersed through the crust of
stalagmite which covers it.
1844. ] Note on Osseous Breccia and Deposit, &c. 611
From the circumstance of there being no apparent existing cause suf-
ficient to account for the presence of layers of earth, mud, and breccia
under a crust of stalagmite, to the depth of 18 feet and more, (for I did
not succeed in getting to the solid rock in two caves at this depth,) and
the surface of which is in one of the caves 8 feet above the present
highest water level of the land in the vicinity, I am inclined to refer the
deposit to the tertiary period, probably the plecocine division, in which are
classed the osseous breccias of the Mediterranean, the cave deposits of
Kirkdale, Sicily, and Australia.
It is highly probable, that a more extensive search into the deposits of
the caves of Billa Soorgum, than my avocations would permit, might
lead to far more interesting results than are now before the Society ; and
slight as the clue now afforded may be, it should not be altogether neg-
lected by observers in other parts of India, who may happen to be in the
neighbourhood of caves and rock fissures, particularly in those caves in
which the floors are covered by stalagmite.
I embrace this opportunity of calling the attention of observers, who
may have the opportunity, to the splendid discoveries made by the pre-
sent talented Secretary of the Geological Society, Mr. E. Forbes, in dredg-
ing the bed of the AXgean. Similiar researches in the vastly more prolific
bed of the Indian Seas would amply reward their labours.
List of Specimens.
No. 1. Osseous breccia.
2. Red marl or mud imbedding fragments of bones.
3. Irregular cylindrical bodies.
4, More like the dung of animals than any specimen of
stalactite ; they are found in the mud and loam mix-
ed with the bones.
5. Fragments of bones and tusks, and small bones in an
integral state found in red mud and loam, 18 feet
below surface.
6. Stalactite, 7 stalagmite, 8 grey as in like layer.
40
612
Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. By Lieut. H. Yuun, Bengal
Engineers.
A traveller approaching the Kasia Hills from the south, must in
spite of the tameness of their general profile, be struck by the singular
feature of a high sandstone precipice, which runs like an artificial scarp
for miles along their face, with its upper crest straight, sharp and almost
perfectly horizontal. Even when the precipice is interrupted for a space
by a jungly acclivity, this sharp crest continues equally defined by the
sudden cessation of the forest at its level.
As we enter the first low range of limestone hills, if instead of follow-
ing the beaten road to Cherra Poonjee, which mounts by bold staircases
and zigzags to the table land, we turn aside to track the Wa-lingtia, one
of the clear hill streams which so soon are to degenerate into dull
Bengallee nullas, we shall be better able to judge of Kasia scenery
than those, who keeping the highway are so apt to speak disparagingly
of the beauty of these hills. For two or three miles the path lies in a
narrow gorge. Rocks or woody steeps rise so directly from the water
as to leave but a narrow footing. You see by the constantly recurring
rapids, how quickly you are ascending. Sometimes, however, you find
a broad reach of deep, still water, swarming with the black backs of
large fish. In an angle of the rock is perhaps a Kasia fish-trap. An en-
closure of bamboos and matting has its narrow entrance fitted with a
trap-door, the fisher scatters his bait within, and sits concealed in a
little hut, watching till the fish swarm below. He then slips his cord,
the door runs down, and he proceeds to land his victims at leisure.
Issuing from the defile the river branches on the left, from which flows
the smaller stream, (the Wa-lingdeki,) opens the magnificent valley
of Mausmai. It is of a horse-shoe form; two-thirds up its steep sides
still runs the clear precipice of some eight hundred feet in height, with
its even crest, seeming to bar all access to the upper regions. Over
it, side by side, with an unbroken fall leap five or six cascades. Through
the great height, the white waters seem to descend with a slow, waver-
ing motion. The path through the valley is shaded by groves of the
orange and citron, the jack and the betel-palm, mixed with stately
forest trees, many of them entwined with pawn, and here or there a
huge India rubber tree or banyan. In their shade the pine-apple grows
1844. ] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 613
in profusion ; all seem like the uncultivated gifts of the Creator ; but
here and there water-pipes of hollowed betel trunks, carrying a stream
for several hundred yards along the hill side, shew that they are not
altogether untended. After many ups and downs, we arrive again at the
river which divides the valley. The bridge by which we cross is worthy
of description, as I believe no account of any thing similar has yet been
published.
On the top of a huge boulder by the river side, grows a large India
rubber tree, clasping the stone in its multitude of roots. Two or three
of the long fibres, whilst still easily pliable, have been stretched across
the stream, and their free ends fastened on the other bank. There
they have struck firmly into the earth, and now form a living bridge
of great, and yearly increasing strength. Two great roots run directly
one over the other, and the secondary shoots from the upper have been
bound round, and grown into the lower, so that the former affords at
once a hand-rail and suspending chain, the latter a footway. Other
roots have been laced and twisted into a sort of ladder as an ascent from
the bank to the bridge. The greatest thickness of the upper root is a
foot, from which it tapers to six or eight inches. The length of the
bridge is above eighty feet, and its height about twenty above the water
in the dry season.
This bridge was constructed by the people of the village of Ringhot,
and forms their communication with Cherra during the rains; the
present generation say, it was made by their grandfathers. This was
the first and most remarkable bridge of the kind that I saw in the
Kasia Hills, and I supposed it to be unique, perhaps half accidental.
But, I afterwards found it to be an instance of a regular practice, and
saw such bridges in every stage, from that of two slender fibres hung
across the stream, to such as I have tried to describe above, and there
are not less than half a dozen within as many miles of Cherra. One*
I measured ninety feet in clear span. They were generally composed
of the roots of two opposite trees, (apparently planted for the pur-
pose), bound together in the middle.
On the Wa-lingtia, or larger branch of the river, whose course we have
traced, are several other remarkable bridges. One on the suspension
* Shewn in Plate I.
614 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
principle, across a precipitous gorge on the road between Cherra and
Tringhai, is composed of long rattans stretched between two trees, at
a height of forty feet above the river in the dry season. Yet this
bridge, when I visited it, was impassable from damage done by the last
year’s floods. The footway was a bundle of small canes lashed to-
gether, and connected with two larger rattans forming hand-rails, but
these so low and so far apart, that it must be difficult to grasp both
together. I could not estimate the length of this bridge much under
two hundred feet between the points of suspension. The Hill Kasias
are afraid to trust themselves on it, but the Wars, or men of the
vallies, cross it drunk or sober, light or laden, with indifference and
security. Still further up the river, and near the little village of Nong-
priang, immediately under Cherra, is another specimen of Kasia engi-
neering and ingenuity,—a bridge of about eighty feet span, composed
entirely of strong bamboos bent into a semicircular arch, affording a sound
footing, and firm rails for the hand.
But to return to our tour of the valley of Mausmai. Quitting the
river we commence ascending, by a steep and rugged path, one of the
narrow spurs that descend from the foot of the precipice which girds
the valley, at a point where it is much diminished in elevation. Soon
leaving behind us the region of pine-apples and betel nuts, two hours
hard climbing brings us to the foot of the cliff, here broken in four
steps of twenty to thirty feet each in height, which we ascend by as
many bamboo ladders. ‘These are somewhat ricketty, and at times
exhibit a woful hiatus among the rungs. From the summit of the
ladders a half hour brings us to the table land within two miles of
Cherra Poonjee. This table land, covered with naked undulating hills,
and at intervals of a few miles interrupted by deep and sudden vallies, is
the general characteristic of the country as far north as the Barapani ;
a distance of fifty miles. Beyond this, the region towards Assam sinks
into a tract of low hills covered with dense jungle, and abounding in
elephants and malaria. On the east the Jaintia country presents great
tracts of pasturage, dotted with clumps of fir, and in parts a park-like
forest scenery of stately oaks and firs form a noble foreground to the
distant view of the snowy mountains seen rising behind the black
Bootan hills, far beyond the valley of Assam. To the westward of Cherra,
the Kasia country may be considered to extend between forty and fifty
Hale 1.
i AA i
1 | yy
ZB 2 Te . ~ Ye
eee 2 a Fils
Sesedery pore
. wy ee
ee ted aed yi are mM. Le or Ys
Gee etd ohh at
aia es fooee oe
-
r
5
i
wet
ay
¢ agte
-~ tga mp? oe:
en ak Lape ewe’.
» ef
-..
‘t
4
z
aa ;
cota cutee
. -
1844, ] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 615
miles, being separated, according to common report, from the Garrows
by a dense and unpeopled jungle.
A traveller from the south first meets the fir tree in the ravine of the
Roga Pani, eighteen miles north of Cherra, but there weak and stunted.
The greater part of the country north of this is sprinkled with firs in
natural clumps, and sometimes (in the vicinity of iron works) in artifi-
cial plantations. In the descent to the Bara Pani the tree attains its
utmost height, but in the woodlands of Jaintia, it is found in greatest
girth and beauty; not as a tall mast, but gnarled like the oak, and
spreading like the cedar, as we have seen some of the Patriarchs of the
Highland forests. On the route from Cherra to Assam the oak is poor
and scrubby, scarcely recognizable save by its fruit; but to the east-
ward, though a near inspection shews a difference in the leaf, it has in
character, colour and outline, perfectly the aspect of the English
oak.
In the deep vallies of the south the vegetation is most abundant and
various. Among the most conspicuous species are, the great India
rubber tree scattered here and there in the stony bottoms; the rattan
winding from trunk to trunk and shooting his pointed head above all
his neighbours; higher up the stately sago palm with its branching
arms; and in some shady damp nook, shut out from sun and wind, the
tree fern with its graceful coronet. Of bamboos there are whole forests,
and a difficult matter it is to force a path through their thick basket-
work, Of this most useful plant the Kasias discriminate seven species
by name. The cowslip, polyanthus, honeysuckle and ivy, with many
other plants near akin to old familiar friends, abound in different parts
of the higher hills, and the common English rag-weed (or ben-weed of
Scotland,) not the least fertile in home associations, is plentiful at
Cherra.
The most remarkable phenomenon of any kind in the country is un-
doubtedly the quantity of rain which falls at Cherra. On a certain
occasion thirty inches of rain is said to have fallen at Genoa in 24 hours,
and the statement has been doubted ; but no one who has measured the
amount of rain in the Kasia Hills, can doubt the possibility at least of
such a quantity. It is with some hesitation that I write it, but the
unexceptionable mode of measurement, and the many times that I have
seen my friend (still resident at Cherra,) who registered the fall, take
616 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
these remarkable gauges, leave me no room to doubt. In the month of
August 1841, during five successive days, thirty inches of rain in the
24 hours fell at Cherra; and the total fall in the month of August
was 264 inches; or, that there may be no mistake, twenty-two feet of
rain. The gauge was simply a large glass jar, having a funnel fitted
with projecting eaves ; and the water was measured morning and even-
ing with a cylinder three inches in depth, of equal diameter with the
funnel.
During the heavy rains above-mentioned, the proportion of the fall by
night to that by day, was generally about 18 to 12.
The formation of the limestone rocks near Cherra gives rise toa
curious phenomenon in the disappearance of streams in their hollows.
Sometimes a river vanishes in a cleft beneath a high cliff, sometimes
falls headlong into a deep circular hollow and is lost to view, reminding
one of the gardens of Cambalu,
‘* Where Alp the sacred river ran
By caverns measureless to man
Down to a sunless sea.””
There are at least four such instances in the immediate neighbour-
hood of Cherra.
Caves are common, as might be expected. In that a little to the
east of Pundua, at a trifling height above the plains, in company with
two friends from Cherra, I penetrated 1300 paces, without fatigue or
difficulty, and others have I believe gone much further. We were
compelled to retreat only by a deficiency of oil. Here, says the tradi- —
tion, a great army entered, bound for the invasion of China, and were ©
heard of no more.
Standing on one of the highest points in the station at Cherra, about
sunset, I have seen my shadow cast on a distant bank of white fog, that
filled the valley to the eastward, an appearance resembling that of the —
fe. eo Soe
celebrated giants of the Hartz, and the Stockhorn. The figure was —
surrounded by a circular iris. The heavy fogs that fill the large valley
to the east of Cherra, render this a common phenomenon at sunset. It
has since been pointed out to me that any one may witness this
on a small scale, in going through the grass at sunrise on a dewy
Plate ie
Grow of hasia Monuments &e
AY. from rearians Skelctees
lessees t ontes LAE 21% 2 Lamah genre
}
i 7
“a a
=v ~
a]
er mo) a
aa
1844.] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 617
morning.* Each will see a faint halo surrounding the shadow of his
own head.
Another curious appearance at evening, I first observed at Cherra,
though I have often since seen it, during the present rainy season, in
the Upper Provinces ; namely, the distinct imitation of a sunset in the
East, so far as shewn in long white rays diverging apparently from a
point exactly opposite to the setting sun’s position.
During the rains of 1842, when the whole Sylhet country below us
had the appearance of a sea, several of the dwellers at Cherra were much
struck by the appearance of innumerable lights on the surface of the
distant plains ; far too many to be accounted for by any theory of vil-
lages, and fishing boats. The natives said at once that it was ‘“ Shai-
tan,’ nor were any of the numerous suggestions on the subject, more
plausible.
The thunder-storms, in the months of March and April, last for
many hours, and are tremendous indeed, but I do not know that they
are more so in the hills than below. Several of the houses in the little
stations have been struck by lightning, and during a residence of 18
months there was one fatal accident. In a still afternoon, whilst black
clouds were sailing up, and for several minutes before the storm reach-
ed us, I have heard, as the prophet did on Carmel, ‘“‘ the sound of abun-
dance of rain,’ a peculiar rustling noise from the rain quarter. It
might possibly have been the fall of the heavy drops on the leaves of
the jungle, but I once again in a still cloudy day heard the same rustling
sound, somewhat like the flight of many birds, directly over my tent, and
the Kasias said immediately that rain was coming, but no rain fell.
A most peculiar and striking aspect is thrown over almost every scene
in the upper parts of the country, by the various remarkable monu-
mental stones} which are scattered on every wayside. These are of
several kinds, but almost all of them recall strongly those mysterious,
solitary or clustered monuments of unknown origin, so long the puzzle
and delight of antiquaries, which abound in our native country, and are
seen here and there in all parts of Europe and Western Asia. The
* Most observable in riding across a field of green wheat soon after sunrise.—Eps.
7 See Plate If. The illustration is an imaginary group of details from various
sketches. It shews a greater variety; but by no means so great a number of monuments
as many real scenes exhibit.
618 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
most common kind in the Kasia country is composed of erect, oblong
pillars, sometimes almost quite unhewn, in other instances carefully
squared and planted a few feet apart. The number composing one
monument is never under three, and runs as high as thirteen ; generally
it is odd, but not always so. The highest pillar is in the middle (some-
times crowned with a circular disk), and to right and left they gradual-
ly diminish. In front of these is what English antiquaries call a
cromlech, a large flat stone resting on short rough pillars. These form
the ordinary roadside resting place of the weary traveller. The blocks
are sometimes of great size. The tallest of a thick cluster of pillars in
the market place of Murteng in the Jaintia country, rising through the
branches of a huge old tree, measured 27 feet in height above the
ground. A flat table stone, or cromlech near the village of Sailankot,
elevated five feet from the earth, measured thirty-two feet by fifteen, and
two feet in thickness.
In other instances the monument is a square sarcophagus, composed
of four large slabs, resting on their edges and well fitted together, and
roofed in by a fifth placed horizontally. In Bell’s Circassia, may be
seen a drawing of an ancient monument existing in that country,
which is an exact representation of a thousand such in the Kasia Hills ;
and nearly as exact a description of them, though referring to relics
on the eastern bank of Jordan, may be read in Irby and Mangles’s
Syrian Travels. The sarcophagus is often found in the form of a large
slab accurately circular, resting on the heads of many little rough
pillars, closely planted together, through whose chinks you may descry
certain earthen pots containing the ashes of the family. Belonging
to the village of Ringhot, in the valley of Mausmai, deep in the forest,
is a great collection of such circular cineraries, so close that one may
step from slab to slab for many yards. Rarely, you may see a simple
cairn, or a pyramid some twenty feet in height, and sometimes one
formed in diminishing stories like the common notion of the Tower of
Babel, or like the Pyramid of Saccara in Egypt. But the last is pro-
bably rather a burning place, than a monument, or at least a combina-
tion of the two.
The upright pillars are merely cenotaphs, and if the Kasias are asked
why their fathers went to such expense in erecting them, the universal
answer is, ‘‘ To preserve their name,” Yet to few indeed among the
1844. | Notes on the Kassia Hills, and People. 619
thousands can they attach any name. Many of the villages however
seem to derive their appellations from such erections, as may be seen
from the number commencing with mau, which signifies a stone; e. g.
mausmai, the stone of the oath, mau-inlu, the stone of ‘salt, mau-flong,
the grassy stone, maumlu, the upturned stone, and a score more;
mausmai, the oath stone, suggests that these pillars were also erected
in memory of notable compacts. On asking Umang, a faithful and
intelligent servant, the origin of the name, his answer was a striking
illustration of many passages in the Old Testament, ‘‘ There was war,”
said he, ‘‘ between Cherra and mausmai, and when they made peace
and swore to it, they erected a stone as a witness ;” (Sakhi ke waste,
was his expression). Genesis XXXI. 45, ‘“‘and Jacob took a stone and
set it up for a pillar.” Genesis XXXI. 47, ‘‘and Laban called it Jegar-
sahadutha : but Jacob called it Galeed [both signifying the heap of wit-
ness}. Genesis XXXI. 51, “and Laban said to Jacob, Behold this
heap, and behold this pillar which I have cast betwixt me and thee.
This heap is a witness, and this pillar is a witness, that I will not pass
over this heap to thee, and that thou shalt not pass over this heap and
this pillar to me to do me harm, &c.”
See also Joshua XXIV. 26. The name of maumli, the salt-stone;
is probably of kindred meaning, as the act of eating salt from a sword
point is said to be the Kasia form of adjuration.
These large stones are also frequently formed into bridges for the
passage of brooks, and most picturesque they often are; there is at
Nurteng a bridge of this kind, consisting of one stone thirty feet in
length.
It is stated by Pemberton, that Kai is the real name of the people,
and Kasia the title bestowed on them by the Bengallees. But the truth
is the reverse of this. ‘ Kasi’ is the only name which they acknowledge
as that of their country and race. The same language, with no sub-
stantial difference, appears to prevail in all their villages, though there
are considerable differences of accent, &c. especially between the hill
and valleymen. It abounds in nasal sounds, and is spoken with a pe-
culiar jerking tone, which has a singular effect to a stranger. In the
Coptic language, it is said (Edin. Cabinet Library, Egypt, page 377)
“genders and cases are expressed by prefixed syllables, and not by
terminations like the languages of Greece and Rome.” This is exactly
2-5
620 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152,
true ; of the Kasia tongue, genders, cases, numbers, tenses and all gram-
matical changes, are made by prefixing certain syllables. The mas-
culine prefix is u, the feminine ka, and the plural At. Thus u-myau,
a tom-cat, has his feminine ka-myau, a tabby, and the plural ki-mayu,
cats of both genders. This prefix cannot I think be considered an ar-
ticle, as it is attached to adjectives and pronouns as well as nouns, e. g.
“ y-tt u-kokardng ;” u-bakhrao ustm, that Hornbill (is) a large bird, where
the demonstrative, the adjective, and both nouns have the prefix, It is
rather the representative of the terminations of Latin, German, &c. most
of which wear and tear have rubbed from our English tongue.
It is a curious fact, that the people in the broken Hindustani in
which they converse with us, universally use the future instead of the
past tense. Thus to take a very common case, where the ambiguous
word ‘‘ Kal’ adds to the puzzle; ‘‘ Kal ham jaiga,” from a Kasia signi-
fies, not ‘I will go to-morrow,’ but, ‘I went yesterday.’ I never could
break my servants of this blunder.
A great proportion of the proper names of men are quaint mono-
syllables, as Tess, Bep, Mang, Sor, Mir, Bi, reminding one irresistibly
of Sir Walter’s Saxon Hig, the son of Snel. But these are generally
euphonized by the prefix into Utess, Ubeh, Usor, &c. They also address
each other by the names of their children, as Pabobon, father of
Bobon! Pahaimon, father of Haimon! The salutation at meeting is
singular, ‘‘ Kublé! oh God.” It has been supposed that this is a pro-
fane deification of the person addressed. But this scarcely seems agree-
able to the blunt character of the people, and I never could ascertain
what they meant by it. It is probably an elliptical expression, the li-
teral signification of which is forgotten, corresponding to adieu, or like
good bye, the derivation of which (God be with you) no one thinks of
in using it. They have regular numerals on a decimal scale up to hun-
dreds, but their word for a thousand (chi-hajér) seems clearly borrowed
from ‘ hazar.’
In the people perhaps the first thing that strikes a stranger, is their
extreme addiction to chewing pawn, and their utter disregard of the
traces which its use leaves on their teeth and lips. Indeed they pride
themselves on this, saying that ‘‘ Dogs and Bengalees have white
teeth.’’ Every man wears round his neck a thick woollen cord which
suspends a fine net of pineapple fibre, a clasp knife, and a pawn-box
1844. ] Notes on the Kasia Hiils, and People. 621
with sometimes a comb; a little globular silver-box containing lime to
smear the pawn, lies in the net which serves as a pocket, and contains
as rare a medley as any school-boy’s. A traveller arriving at Cherra has
asked what were those numerous stains of blood on the road; the inno-
cent traces of Kasia expectoration. Distances are often estimated by
the number of pawns that will be consumed on the road. But an
answer to the question, ‘‘ How far ?” once given me by a Kasia.with a
load on his back, left far behind this and all other vague estimates, ex-
cept perhaps a Bengallee “‘ Bank pani.” He said it was ‘‘ arsin leth,” or
two goings ; perhaps as far as he could carry his burden with one rest.
_ The characteristic dress of the people is a short sleeveless shirt of
thick cotton cloth, either of the natural colour (unbleached), or striped
gaily with blue and red, and always excessively dirty. It has a deep
fringe below, and is ornamented on the breast and back with lines of a
sort of diamond pattern embroidery, from the edges of which hang cer-
tain mystic threads, to the length of which they attach some supersti-
tious importance in purchasing the garment. The shirt closely resem-
bles one figured in Wilkinson’s ancient Egyptians, vol, III. p. 345.
Over this a few wear a short coatee of cotton or broad cloth, and many
wrap a large mantle striped or chequed with broad reddish lines.
The latter is their most picturesque costume. Some have a strong
penchant for articles of European dress, and their potato merchants ge-
nerally bring a small invoice of these from Calcutta on their return
voyage. I was once entertained by the prime minister of a Raja to the
westward, whose sole habiliment, save a cloth round his loins, was a
new olive green frock coat (with a velvet collar, if I mistake not). As
he threw back the flaps, thrust his thumbs in the armholes, and strut-
ted about, it was not easy to preserve politeness to my host. A very
large turban covers the head of the better class ; others wear a greasy
cap with flaps over the ears, or go bareheaded. ‘The fore part of the
head is shaven, and the back hair gathered in a clump on the crown.
Chiefs, or the heads of villages generally have a neck-lace of large gilt
beads, like our native officers. The women are generally wrapt in a
shapeless mantle of striped cotton cloth, with its upper corners tied
in a knot across the breast.
The men are seldom tall, generally well made, and shew great
strength of limb ; of leg in particular. Such doric columns as support
622 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
a good fourth-part of the Kasia peasantry, are rarely seen in England.
By help of these good props many of the coal porters will carry two
maunds from the mine to Seria ghat, a distance of 11 miles. In this
muscular developement, they exhibit a remarkable contrast to some
other hill tribes of India. Their features can rarely be called hand-
some, yet there is often a strong attraction in the frank and manly
good humour of their broad Tartar faces, flat noses, thick lips and angu-
lar eyes. The children are sometimes very good looking, but beauty in
women seldom rises beyond a buxom comeliness, and the open mouth
discloses a den of horrors. The females have a full or preponderant
share, in out-of-door labour of all sorts. It isa lively scene every morn-
ing, when numbers of men, women and children hie to the jungle to cut
wood, or forage for a part of the household, almost as important here
as in Ireland,—the pigs. Nothing is here of the phlegm or dull loquacity
of the natives of the plains. All are full of life and spirits, whistling, sing-
ing, screaming, chasing one another, and in short, skylarking in all ways.
They dislike early hours, and it is difficult to get them abroad betimes
even on extraordinary occasions. They have great powers of industry,
but are somewhat capricious in exerting it. Frank and independent in
manner, and in spirit too, they have much more manifestly a conscience
to distinguish between right and wrong, than any of their neighbours
below. Whether they always act up to it is another question, but there
were those among my Kasia servants, of whose right feeling, truthful-
ness, attachment, and strict uprightness according to their light, I
shall ever have a pleasing remembrance. They are fond of money, and
of trading, and are neither wanting in courage, nor given to quarrelling.
They are apt scholars, and of late have shewn a considerable desire
for instruction. The heads of a large village near Cherra invited my
good friend, Mr. Jones, Missionary at the station, to reside with them,
offering to build him a house, if he would do so. During a tour
of part of the hills, in which I had the pleasure of accompanying him
in 1842, the people listened to his discourse with decorum, and appa-
rently with attention and interest.
The common food of the people in the vicinity of the plains is rice:
in the interior rice, millet, maize, with kuchu, and some other roots
and grains peculiar to themselves, Dried fish is a universal article
of diet, and is brought from below in vast quantities. Those in the
1844.) Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 623
neighbourhood of the British settlement are by no means gross feeders.
But I once saw labourers who were at work in the garden, carry off a
dead leopard to feast on, with great glee; and in some of the northern
villages, a species of caterpillar is eaten, and sold in the markets.
They all enjoy flesh occasionally, especially pork ; there is always hot roast
pork for sale in some corner of the bazar on market day. Some individuals
and families have a superstitious objection to different kinds of. food,
and will not allow such to be brought into their houses. This has a re-
markable parallel among a race of Negroes of South Eastern Africa, as
the following passage (quoted in the Edinburgh Review for January
1837) from Captain Owen’s Narrative, willshew. ‘‘ It is prohibited in
many families to eat certain animals’ flesh, such as in some beef, in
others elephants, others hippopotamus. It is said that if any family
transgress this rule, and eat of the forbidden flesh their teeth will drop
out,” &c. From millet, they make large quantities of spirits, of which Jam
sorry to say there is a great consumption at all the bazars; and on the
evening of Cherra market-day, one may see many riotous parties stag-
gering to the verge of the valley, where in that state they descend
the ladders before described, without fear or accident; for the peo-
ple of the vallies are more addicted to drunkenness than those of the
table land. This millet forms the principal grain cultivation in the
vallies near Cherra Poonjee. In the end of the cold weather large tracts
of the jungle are burnt, and the seed scattered on the stony slopes.
The ground gives one or two crops, and then a new tract is prepared
in like manner. Under this process the woods in the neighbourhood of
Cherra are becoming rapidly thinned.
The Kasias are utterly unacquainted with any art of weaving, nearly
all the usual articles of their dress, peculiar as they are, are made for
them by other tribes bordering on the Assam valley. They manufac-
ture a small quantity of caoutchouc, which they use principally for
smearing baskets in which to keep honey, &c. By the way, the caout-
chouc tree answers better than the Banyan to the well known description
in Milton (or rather in his authority, Pliny) of the Indian fig, The for-
mer can much more reasonably lay claim, to leaves “ broad as Amazo-
nian targe” than any which
‘¢ To Indian known
In Malabar or Deccan spreads her arms.’’
624 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
The honey is abundant and of unequalled flavour. A hollowed block
of wood forms the hive.
As is the case with some European nations, the houses of the people
are by no means so dirty as their persons. Generally they are dry, sub-
stantial thatched cottages, built of a double wall of broad planks placed
vertically in the ground, and with a good boarded floor raised three feet
or more from the earth. As they have rarely anything like a window,
one sees nothing at first entering, and rarely escapes a bruised head
from a collision with one of the massive low beams. The fire is always
burning on an earthen hearth in the centre. There is no chimney, but
one soon gets accustomed to wood smoke. On a swinging frame over
the fire is piled the firewood to dry; the veranda, or space between the
two walls, is partly stored with lumber, and partly affords shelter to the
fowls, calves and pigs, which last are carefully tended, and attain enor-
mous obesity. The people are unacquainted with the saw, and the large
planks (in some of the chief houses more than two feet in breadth) of
which their dwellings are built, are tediously and wastefully cut from
the tree with an adge.
They use milk in no shape, and it is an article which a traveller mak-
ing long marches in the country, must learn to do without. Nor are
their cattle, whether goats or oxen, though numerous, applied to any
useful purpose in their life time, being kept only for slaughter, and espe-
cially for sacrifice. Man is the only bearer of burdens. Their husbandry
is confined to the hoe, and their grain is thrashed with the flail. All
loads the people carry on the back, supported by a belt across the
forehead, and in the rains they and their burdens are protected by um-
brellas, in the shape of a large hooded shell of matting, which covers the
head and the whole of the back. Dogs they are fond of, and always crop
the ears and tail. Wild dogs hunting in packs, are commonly reported
to exist in some of the vallies; and from the descriptions given me of
wild oxen called “ U-blé massi,” or the cattle of God, existing in the
neighbourhood of the Bara Pani, I have little doubt that the Gour will
be found in those jungles. ‘The worst ‘feature in the manners of the
people, and one likely to be a serious obstacle to the missionary, is the
laxity of their marriages ; indeed divorce is so frequent that their unions
can hardly be honoured with the name of marriage. The husband does
not take his bride to his own home, but enters her household, or visits
1844.] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 625
it occasionally ; he seems merely entertained to continue the family to
which his wife belongs. Separation is signified by the exchange of five
cowries, and the children abide with the mother. There are, however,
instances of more honourable and lasting unions. In consequence
of this loose system, we find that generally there is little or no attach-
ment between a grown-up son and his father, as probably the latter has
long left his first family, and perhaps others in the interval ; whilst the af-
fection between mother and son is very strong, and all the child’s at-
tachment rests with his mother’s kin. A Kasia if asked after his father
will often tell you that he is dead, meaning only that all connection be-
tween them has ceased. I remember once in walking with U-mung
above mentioned, he exchanged salutations with a comely lass, younger
than himself. On my asking, he said she was his ‘ Chota ma,’ his
father’s present wife.
Immediately connected with this system, and we may suppose origi-
nating in it, is their strange (though not unique) law of succession.
The son has no claim to succeed his father, whether it be in the chief-
ship or in private property. The sister’s son has the inheritance. And
the Raja’s neglected offspring may be a common peasant or labourer,
whilst he sees his cousin cherished, as the heir of his father’s authority
and wealth.
The greatest festivities of the people are funereal; either at the burn-
ing of the dead, or when a Khasia collects the ashes of his family, and
erects a monument in their honor. On great occasions of this kind they
hold a public dance for several successive days. The numerous perform-
ers are recompensed by an ample feast of pork and whisky. The dance is
performed either with fans or swords. In the former, the men dance round
and round a circle in the market place, or other open space, somewhat
monotonously, attitudinizing and brandishing fans. They are all clad
in the most brilliant finery that they possess, or can hire; richly
embroidered outer shirts of broadcloth, silken turbans and dhoties, large
bangles, heavy silver chains, and gold necklaces with plumes of down
or peacock’s feathers, and ornamental quivers. In the centre are the
village maidens, they form in twos and threes, and set to one another
with a comical pas of exceeding simplicity, which seems to be per-
formed by raising the heels, and twisting from side to side, on the fore
part of both feet, which never leave the ground, Their eyes are
626 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
demurely cast to the earth, or on their own finery, and never raised for
a moment. They too are loaded with silver chains, tassels, and armlets,
and all wear on the head a peculiar circlet of silver, having a tall spear
head ornament rising behind. ‘They are swaddled in a long petticoat,
as tight as the clothing of a mummy, with an upper garment like a
handkerchief passing tight under the right arm, and tied in a knot on
the left shoulder. Waist they exhibit none, the figure being a perfect
parallelogram. In the sword dance, the men accompanied by music
and musquetry, dance and bound, clashing sword and shield, and utter-
ing in chorus a chaunt, at first seemingly distant and sepulchral, but
gradually becoming louder and louder, till it bursts into a tremendous
unearthly howl; then sinking to a doleful chaunt, again and again
rising to wake the echoes. The sword, a strange weapon, is composed
of one piece of the coarsest iron, about four feet long, of which one
third is handle, the rest blade. The latter has its edge slightly convex,
and the back drawn to a peak like the old Turkish scymitar. The
handle has two guards, and is grasped at the lower, the hilt passing
between the two middle fingers. Yet with this uncouth weapon, so
uncouthly held, I have seen a goat in sacrifice cleanly beheaded at
a blow.
The village children have a curious gymnastic amusement. The
trunk of a young tree, by a cut in the centre is fixed on a pivot at the
top of a post about four feet high. Two urchins seizing opposite ends
of the pole, run round in the same direction till they have got a proper
impetus, and then whirl rapidly, in turn leaping and descending in a
very light and graceful manner. The children also spin a regular peg-
top, and it is indigenous, not an importation. Another of their recrea-
tions is an old acquaintance also, which we are surprised to meet with
in the far East. A very tall thick bamboo is planted in the ground
and well oiled. A silver ornament, or a few rupees, placed at the top,
reward the successful climber.
But their favourite amusement in the cold weather is archery. In
the trial of skill each village has from time immemorial its established
competitor, and with this alone is the contest carried on. ‘The Toxo-
philite meeting is held at each village on alternate market days. The
target is pitched at about sixty yards. It is made of an oblong piece of
bark, about three feet and a half high by one broad. Four or five
1844.) Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 627
persons generally shoot at once, they draw the arrow to the ear, and
the attitudes are often very striking, though to say the truth, they are
no Robin Hoods. The bow, the bowstring, the arrow, and the quiver
are all made from various species of the all-useful bamboo. When all
have shot, the arrows in the target are taken out, and the villagers
crowd round the umpire as he distributes them. As each arrow is
recognized, the party to which its owner belongs dance and leap about,
fencing with their bows, spinning them high in air, and shouting together
in a wild cadence. The villager whose arrows are in a minority pays a
trifling forfeit of a few cowries.
They shew no very particular courtesy of bearing towards their
Rajas. Indeed the latter do not seem to have much power. They have
the right of calling on all to bear arms, or send a contribution in case
of war; what public revenue they have is derived from fines, and in
some cases from trifling dues paid in kind by frequenters of the markets.
The chief is the judge, and when he calls for the attendance of any
party as criminal, defendant, or witness, he sends as a summons a
piece of pork; the pig being probably charged in the loser’s bill of
costs. Fining is almost universal as a punishment. Occasionally
however a man’s whole goods are confiscated, whilst he and his family
become the slaves of the Raja; and in some rare cases of murder, the
criminal is given over to the friends of the slain, for them to wreak their
vengeance. The water ordeal used to be a common mode of decision.
The opponents with much ceremony plunged their heads under water
on opposite sides of a consecrated pool, and he had the right who remained
longest under water. I have been told that it was lawful to use the
services of practised attornies in this mode of trial; so that long-winded
lawyers have as decided a preference in these regions as they may have
elsewhere. The last case of this ordeal, between parties belonging to
~Cherra Poonjee, occurred five or six years ago, and was fatal to both
plaintiff and defendant.
The Kasias have a name for a Supreme, or at least for a chief god,
but as usual they principally regard inferior spirits. These are sup-
posed to reside on the tops of certain hills, or in rocky dells, and in
groves on the high land, to which they are believed to descend at night.
Temples and idols they have none, except in certain villages of Jaintia,
where Kali and her Brahmins haye unfortunately effected a lodgment,
4Q
628 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
probably under the patronage of the Ex-Raja, whose devotion to the
bloody goddess cost him his kingdom.
The people are much addicted to consulting auspices of different
kinds, but especially by the breaking of eggs. Indeed this latter super-
stition is so prominent, and has got such a fast hold of the people’s
minds, that it would seem to be the principal part of their religious
practice. On all occasions of doubt it is resorted to, and they will
spend whole days in dashing eggs upon a board, with much wild
chaunting and wilder gestures, in search of a decisive or a favourable
augury. They also constantly sacrifice goats, pigs and oxen to propi-
tiate the spirits. A Kasia from a distant western village, at whose house
I had once been a guest, having come on business to Cherra and paid
me a visit, he was regaled with a glass of brandy; before drinking it,
he dipped his finger four times in the glass, filliping a drop successively
over each shoulder, and down by his right and left side; on being
asked his meaning, he said it was “‘ for the name of God.”
A very curious superstition regards the boa, or some other large
snake. It is believed, that, if he takes up his abode with any man,
great wealth will accrue to the household; and that there are evil
minded men who go about in search of whom they may slay, and cut-
ting off the nose, lips, ears and hair of their victims, with these propi-
tiate the serpent, and prevail on him to be their guest. And it is difficult
to persuade a Kasia to go into the jungle alone, generally for fear of
meeting with one of those villains, who are supposed to hide in all soli-
tary spots looking out for prey. The way in which the serpent is
believed to bring wealth to his votary, is after the manner of the prophet’s
blessing on the widow. Whatever he may sell from “‘ basket or store,
kail or potatoes,” his stock diminishes not. One would hope to find his
ill-gotten treasure turning to “ slate stones,” as wizard’s gold was wont,
but we hear nothing of this.
Their astronomical notions are the rudest of the rude. The changes
of the moon are thus accounted for. The moon (who is male, and the
sun female, as they were in England in Saxon times) every month falls
in love with his wife’s mother, and she repelling his addresses, throws
ashes in his face, For the stars generally, in days of old there was a
great tree; up this climbed a great multitude, and when they were
fairly among the branches, another multitude came and hewed the tree.
1844. ] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 629
Wherefore (said the narrator) all the multitude remained above, where
they form a great bazar, and are the stars we see. The group of the
Pleiads is the only one they name, and it is called “‘ the Henman.” Is
it not called “the chickens” in Italy? They have names for twelve
months, as follows, but their application seems somewhat vague.
“$
Naiwien, Ujilia,
Ukla-lankét, U-naitung,
Urampang, U-nailar,
Ulabér, U-nailir,
Uyaiyong, U-risau,
Ujamang, Naupra,
Smaller intervals are reckoned by village market days, which are held
every fourth day, a greater and a less alternately. They have no weeks.
Some of the local traditions are interesting. The following is a
parallel to the banquet of Atreus. One of the finest water falls near
Cherra, in the deep valley of Maumlu, is called Kano Likai, or Likai’s
leap. The origin of the name was thus related to me. Once on a time
a man of foreign race came to the hills, married a woman named Likai,
and settled with his wife in a village north of Maumli. They had two
children, a boy anda girl. One day the woman betook herself to the
forest as usual to cut fire-wood, in her absence the father killed his two
little children, and cooked them ; on his wife’s return, he invited her to
feast on what he had prepared, and she did so; he then disclosed what
she had eaten. Then said Likai, ‘‘It-is no longer good to remain in
this world,” and hurrying to the adjoining precipice leapt over.
Another rock in the same neighbourhood, has its name from a crime
which occurred during a severe famine. Two brothers sat upon its
verge conversing. One had just procured a supply of rice, the other
was destitute. The latter thought within himself, “‘ here is abundant
food, my wife and children are perishing for want,” and pushing his
brother from his seat, seized his plunder, and hurried home.
On the road from Cherra to Jaintia is a singular ravine, some 600
yards in length, and 80 feet in depth, with sides remarkably even, and
regularly parallel. ‘The far end is closed by around knoll. This, it is
said, was the archery ground of three heroes of old, Ramha, Nonorrop,
630 Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. [No. 152.
and Pangnorrop. Lasked if there were giants then in old times? The
good man answered, that he could not speak as to their height, but
they were ‘‘ Bara mota wala,” exceeding stout.
The Kasias have also their maid of Arc, or black Agnes. She was
the wife of Ula. Ula was a great warrior at the court of the Raja
of Linkardyem, and the Raja married his sister.
Now in those days there were but twelve households in Cherra, and
the Raja of Linkardyem, making war on the Raja of Cherra, drove him
with his people to the woods, where they eat leather, and the rind of
certain fruits. But the Raja of Linkardyem was a savage, and abused
his wife, the sister of the brave Ula. For he placed her on a frame of
bamboos, and lighted a fire beneath; and so, being roasted, she died.
So Ula was wroth, and he went to the Raja of Cherra, and said,
‘‘Make me a great man, and I will avenge thee on thine enemy.” So
he of Cherra agreed ; and Ula having cut off the hedd of the Raja of
Linkardyem, brought it to him of Cherra, and so became first counsellor
of the Raja. One day as Ula was going forth on his avocations, with
others of the village, he said to his wife ‘‘ Clothe thyself with my arms,
and garments.” Meantime the new Rajah of Linkardyem came against
Cherra with a mighty host of four thousand men. Now the village
of Cherra was well girt with palisades and ditches, and the wife of Ula
went forth to the barriers in her husband’s arms and clothing, and the
other women doing likewise went with her, and when the army of Lin-
kardyem beheld the arms and the shield, they shouted in terror ‘ Ula!
Ula!’ and turned their backs in flight; for great was their fear of
Ula. And the wives of Cherra, and the men who remained, went forth
with the wife of Ula, and chased the Linkardyemians, and smote them
sorely.
From these twelve households come the twelve tribes which now exist
in Cherra, My informant was of the house of Ula. I tell these tales
as they were told.
About forty miles west of Cherra, not far from Laour in the Silhet
district, a river debouches from the mountains, marked in Capt. Fisher’s
map as the Jadukotta river. It is a wide shallow stream in the plains,
but from where you enter the hills in ascending, it is naturally dammed
back so as to present for nearly ten miles a splendid river of the first
class, with still, deep, and clear waters. Under one of the bold preci-
1844. ] Notes on the Kasia Hills, and People. 631
pices which spring right from the water, to a height of many hundred
feet, is a curiously arched cavity strongly resembling an upturned boat,
and which the people name Basbanya’s ship. Who Basbanya might
have been, I could not learn, except that he was one of the “ Deota
Log.
the river. About thirty skiffs forming a circle dropped their large net,
and each holding a cord from it, diverged in all directions. When
2
Resting under this vault, we witnessed the mode of fishing in
they had reached the end of their tether, they again began to converge,
smiting the water with their oars, beating with sticks on the gunnels,
and howling like a hundred jackalls. Gradually they came on, making
the hills ring, and hauling on their lines till they were formed round
the net again. Then the result began to appear; as the net gradually
contracted, the whole circle became alive with fish, and at least one
boat was heavily laden with the spoil. The river must be inexhausti-
ble in its supplies, for this operation is repeated many times a day by
several similar companies, besides smaller parties. Passing on, we
reached about 6 or 7 miles above the plains, the largest boulder I have
ever seen, standing into, and overhanging the water. It bears the
name of Raoul, and at a height of ten or twelve feet above the water
leyel is an old and worn Persian inscription in large letters. I was then
unacquainted with the Persian character, and the copy taken was rough
and probably incorrect, for none of my acquaintance could decypher
more than a word or two. It was lent to one of them for the purpose,
and has never been returned. Perchance it was the record of some
Mussulman adventurer, during the early days of their Indian history,
seeking an El] Dorado in these wildernesses.
On a little sandy beach where a tributary joined the main stream,
were a few huts, the scene of a bustling bazar of exchange between the
Bengallees and the Hill people. In the river’s course above this all was
impenetrable and uninhabited thicket. Far beyond, said the Kasias,
dwell a strange race, who eat men and snakes :—an obscure rumour,
probably of the Garrows, whose territory could not be far distant.
KuRNAUL,
September 4th, 1844.
632
Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. cob Aer may let By Captain
Newsoup, F. RK. S.
The following sketch of Cazvini’s ‘‘ Wonders of the Creation,” consists
of a number of notes thrown together for private reference, while look-
ing over a MS. copy, in Persian and Arabic, of this curious compila-
tion (illustrated with pictures,) in possession of the son of the late
Nawab of Kurnool. |
Being engaged in some researches with the mineral resources of S.
India, my principal object was information as to sites, (hitherto un-
known to Europeans,) of ores, gems or valuable minerals in India, and any
thing that might afford the means of judging of the amount of produce
anciently yielded by those extensive excavations, in its diamond, copper
and lead districts, which are seen at the present day entirely neglected,
and half choked by vegetation and rubbish.
Little, it must be confessed, on this head has been elicited from diving
into the pages of the Ajatb-al-Mukhlukat. It mentions mines of tutiya,
L.3,3 blue vitriol, on the coast of Hindustan; but the precise site is not’
specified : I am not aware of the existence of any such mines at the pre-
sent day in India. It is exported from Pegu, and used by Hindus as an
escharotic loadstone, al-makndtis, yesblaals colour red, with black
lines, he states to be brought from India. It has the property, he adds,
of attracting iron, hence vessels that sail to the land of the loadstone,
are built without iron nails.
I have found large masses of magnetic iron ore with polarity in the
neighbourhood of Hospeti, Kittovo, and the Baba Booden mountains,
with dark red and black stripes, as described ; and have little doubt that
it exists largely in the highly ferriferous granites and hypogene rocks
of S. India. ‘The idea of the rocks on the coast of India attracting ves-
sels by magnetic forces, may have arisen from the observation of the
effects of the powerful surf in washing vessels ashore; and that of the
vessels without nails, from the Massula boats, which are constructed of
planks sewn together with coir. Diamonds, lead, copper, and iron are
not mentioned as exports from India. The best sword blades are
stated to be brought thence.
Diamonds are said, as well as rubies, to be found at the foot of Gebel
Serendib, in Ceylon,
1844.) Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. 638
That Ceylon produces rubies is a.well known fact, but I am not
aware that the diamond has ever been found there, or that there is
any geological formation on the island equivalant to the diamond
conglomerate of India, or the Cascalhao of Brazil. If obtained from
Ceylon in the time of Cazvini, it was probably imported from India by
the Singhalese from gem merchants.
Among other productions of India are enumerated the bezoar stone,
(padzahr, ok or expeller of poison,) from the stomachs of sheep.
Eagle stones, (haja-al-akab __slixS} > found in eagle’s nests. The
author states them to be like tamarinds, and to give a sound when
shaken ; but when broken, are foundempty. The eagles bring them
from India.
The astronomical part of the work is evidently compiled from the
Arabian authors, whose systems were founded on those of Hipparchus
and Ptolemy ; and the compiler has fallen into the error of the latter in
stating the precession of the equinoxes to be as 1° per century, instead of
following the Arab prince Allategnius, who brought it as near the truth
as 1° per 66 years.
His natural history is chiefly derived from the works of Aristotle, Dios-
corides, Sheikh ur Reio; and his geography from Ptolemy and Abur
Rihan.
In these departments more especially, the author has gravely enu-
merated many travellers’ tales and incredible absurdities ; but we should be
sorry to reject the whole on account of defects, from which even the
works of the great father of history, Herodotus himself, are by no
means free.
The experience of after-times often demonstrates the truth of state-
ments entirely disbelieved, and ridiculed on their first promulgation.
Witness those of the slandered and magnanimous Bruce. Even in the
‘most marvellous traditions of the various races of the earth, we frequent-
ly find clues to valuable truths.
The wonderful tales of griffins, hippogriffs, dragons, and other
monsters of old, probably originated in ancient traditions of strange
animals now extinct, the fossilized dishonored skeletons of which, in the
present day, convince us of the fact, which we should have other-
wise ridiculed; namely, that the world once swarmed with such
monsters.
634 Notice of the Ajaib-dt-Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
One of the last descriptions in the A4jaib-al-Mukhlukat, is, that of a
strange creature seen on the coast of Arabia Felix, (Yemen,) the legs
and lower parts of which were those of a woman, but separating from
the hip into two distinct human bodies, with two heads and two pair of
arms. These two bodies lived, ate, and drank amicably together, but
sometimes they quarrelled. After a space, one of the bodies died, and
the traveller who relates the story, states, he was informed that after the
lifeless trunk had been cut off, the other trunk survived and went its
way.
The sequel of this story is a little marvellous; and the whole tale
would have been thought excessively Munchausenish by any person
who had not seen or read authenticated accounts of the Siamese
twins.
The mermaid I have little doubt has its origin in the exaggerated
accounts of the form and habits of that singular inhabitant of the
Malayan seas, the Dugong; Gog and Magog, and a host of other
strange beings described by Cazvini, had their origin in the exaggerated
accounts of travellers. Anticipating some scepticism on the part of his
readers, Cazvini gravely premonishes them that all things are possible
to God.
In describing the wonders of the creation, like the writers of the
Bridgewater Treatises, he piously cails attention to the wisdom and
beneficence of God in the displayed harmonious design of his works ;
and labours to impress on his readers, that the heavens and their starry
host ; the earth and encompassing ocean ; and all that therein is,
men, angels, genii and animals, were created by God for the manifesta-
tion of his glory and greatness.
The work was evidently intended as a popular exposition of the
sciences and natural history, rather than as a class book for students in
the many branches on which it touches.
The geological theories of mutual and periodical changes of sea and
land ; the poles ; the successive destruction and reproduction of different
races of animals ; the entombment of organic remains ; the degradation
of mountains by watery action; the transport of their debris into the
ocean again to become mountains when its bed becomes dry land; the
origin of tides ; springs ; earthquakes ; halos, &c. are curious and worthy
of perusal.
1844. | Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. 635
Cazvini wrote in the 13th century. His work is divided into two
mukdlehs, or discourses. ‘The first treats of sublime or heavenly things,
(Alwiat <+s\yghe), and contains thirteen nazrs, sub-divided into
chapters. The first eight nazrs describe the arrangement of the
heavens, the sun, moon, their eclipses, &c.; the planets, their move-
ments and periods of revolution ; their retrograding and becoming sta-
tionary.
The ninth nazr comprises an account of the fixed stars, constellations,
&c. The tenth nazr treats of the zodiacal signs; and the eleventh of
the empyrean heavens, the primum mobile—Falek-i- Afla’k S \3}EKN3
In the twelfth nazr, we find a description of the lunar mansions; the
north and south poles; the zodiacal signs ; angels; genii and devils, &c. ;
and in the thirteenth, one of the divisions of time among different na-
tions ; the four seasons, &c.
The second mukdleh treats of lower, or sublunary things, (Siflidt,
collin) and is divided into five nazrs, subdivided into chapters.
They treat of the elements; falling stars; air; clouds; rain; the
winds; halos, (halah, sl) thunder and lightning; water compris-
ing the ocean; its ebb and flow; the seven seas; the earth and its
divisions ; earthquakes ; mountains ; plains ; streams ; springs and wells ;
things compounded of the elements such as minerals; meteoric stones,
vegetables, animals, man, angels, genii, ghouls, devils, beasts, birds,
and reptiles ; concluding with an account of strange animals,
Summary of the First Mukdleh.
I shall now proceed to a summary of the contents of the lst mukdleh,
scattering a few remarks here and there, as they occurred to me during
perusal.
The universe is considered to be an assemblage of spheres or orbits,
(Aflak, _S 43)) concentrically arranged ‘“‘like the coats of an onion,”
(shy 2 yen ws” Hamchun Kasher-i-piyaz), and similarly conti-
guous.
The author gives an illustrative diagram of the mundane system, of
which the subjoined is an exact copy. The concentric red lines are to
represent the orbits in which the sun, planets and fixed stars are sup-
posed to revolve round the earth.
4R
636 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhiukat. [No. 152
The Empyreal Heavens.
1 Zodiac. yt 5 The Sun. ©
rod
4 &
2 Saturn. A < 6 Venus.
7 "
3 Jupiter. 8 \ 7 Mercury.
4 Mars. (4) 8 The Moon.
9 The Earth.
The earth is supposed to constitute the motionless nucleus, (the centrum
mundi of the Aristotelians,) around which the sun, moon, and planets
revolve in the following order of proximity :—
The Moon, a os si pes] Al-kamr.
Mercury, ae ue aw 8 y las Uttarid.
Venus, .. “£ 43 -+ Byedy Tohrah.
The Sun, ole ae -+ (aes Shems.
Mars, .)...<% oe a 6 EE yo Marnikh.
Jupiter, .. 4 Ate os 5: yatiwo Mushtari.
Saturn, Ay or are Ja} Tuhal.
Inclusive of all is the orbit of orbits, the Falek-i- Afla’k, in which the
fixed stars are set as jewels in a ring, and revolve eternally with it from
East to West.*
The author, after slightly noticing the proper motions of the planets,
or ‘‘ wandering stars” and fixed stars, proceeds to give a description of
the moon, and of its diurnal and monthly revolutions round the earth.
* This is the theory of Aratus, Hipparchus, and after them of Ptolemy; it conveys
the impression of a belief in the solidity of the spheres.
1844.] Notice of the Ajatb-al-Mukhlukat. 637
He represents the moon as being the least of all the luminaries of
heaven, and its orbit as being nearest to the earth; its substance, natu-
rally dark, receiving light from the sun, (an opinion, according to Plato,
anterior to Anaxagoras 500 years before Christ,) in regularly varying
phases, according to its distance or proximity. From performing its
revolution from West to East round the sun in a shorter time than any
other planet, it has been called the Pazk-i-falek, KAS Kans the courier
of the sphere, who performs his course in 28 days’ journies, or manzi/es,
Syn On the 29th the moon is veiled (,xiw.0 mustater,) being
below the sun’s light, or in conjunction: this sometimes occurs on the
28th, when the month is said to be nakis, (yas deficient. From this
time it begins to increase its distance from the sun, and daily to receive
more of its light. When it arrives in opposition, the whole of the
moon’s face nearest the earth becomes illumined, and is termed badr,
ym in contradistinction to halal, .\\\@ new moon. Asit approaches the
sun, it receives less of its light. At the conjunction (mukdran, |, ysbiz-o )
of the sun and moon, the dark side is turned towards the earth, and the
light side towards Mercury.
Eclipses of the Moon.
The author explains these phenomena by the supposition of the
earth’s coming between the sun and the full moon, when near its as-
cending or descending node; when the earth’s shadow is consequently
thrown on the moon.
Moon’s influence on Tides.
The bi-diurnal ebb and flow of the ocean are ascribed to the moon’s
revolution round the earth. The flow is at its maximum when the
moon arrives opposite the axis of the earth, (7. e. when it comes upon
the meridian,) and begins to ebb immediately it has passed this point.
The ebb is at its maximum when the moon is in the horizon.
The bi-monthly rises and falls of the ocean (spring and neap tides,)
are said to be owing to the conjunctions and opposition of the sun and
moon.
Moon’s influence on Animals and Vegetation.
During the moon’s increase, animals are supposed to be stronger ; the
temperament of man, the secretion of juices more active ; beasts more
eager in pursuit of prey ; fishes in better condition; growth of vegetation
638 Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
quicker, and the production of fruit in greater abundance and of superior
flavour and colour; gems are generated, grow, and acquire brilliance
during the days of the moon’s increase. A person who falls sick
during the increase, will have greater strength to resist the progress of
his disorder than during the wane of the moon.
When much exposed to its rays he then becomes sleepy and indolent,
and subject to colds, vertigos, &c. The flesh of animals falls into
rapid decomposition.
The Milky-way, Surj-al- Asma, anlar BI yaw the Saddle of the Heavens.
The milky way is called by some, the Mother of Stars, from the
countless myriads it contains.*
Here follows a brief description of the computed size and revolutions
of the planets, sun, and solar eclipses.
Fixed Stars.
The fixed stars, the author states, are innumerable; 1022 have been
described, (the number given by Ptolemy, besides the stars Adeneba, Al-
gardi, and Almuren, though Hipparchus gives a catalogue of 1081,) 970
of this number are grouped into 48 figures or constellations, 20 of which
are in the Northern hemisphere ; 16 in the Southern; and 12 in the
Zodiac. (In the Gatasterismi of Eratosthenes, 250 years B. C. are the
names of 44 constellations.)
The fixed stars move from W. to E., advancing about one degree per
century, and performing their revolution like the sun, in 36,000 years.
The axis of their orbit is similar to that of the Zodiac. The Zodiac is
divided into 12 signs, (the names of which, like those of the Hindoos,
correspond with those of the Greeks,) viz.
Sex) Al Hamal, .. Kove
5) Ath Thour, -. TdAvpog
ereolgkl} At Tawamin, .. Advpoc
wlb y SI As Sartan, me Kaoxwoc
ows} Al Assad, -. Aswy
* Democritius was the first to propound what the telescope of Galileo has prov-
ed ; viz. that the galaxy was a congeries of minute stars. Up to his time it was thought
by some that this singular track on the heavens was a forsaken path of the sun, a fiery
exhalation or zone, the earth’s shadow, &c.
1844. } Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. 639
Vos Neta, ).. oli .. TlapQevoc
oS ye0)] Al Mizan, .. “vyoc
paix) Al Akrab, he ZKopTio¢
Uegitl,s Zu-al-kous, .. Togorne
5s) Al Zadi, .. .. Atyokepwe
isl. Musakib-al-ma, .. Yodooyooc
eral Al Makin, .. Ty@ue
The sun is supposed to traverse the 12 signs of the Zodiac in 365
days.
After the description of the constellations and their principal stars, fol-
lows a notice of the Falek-i- Buruj and the Falek-al- Afidk.
Angels, Geniis and Devils.
The author supposes angels to be beings endowed with life, reason
and wisdom ; geniis free from darkness, lusts, sin, and impurity, amon&
whom exists not the distinction of sex, beings created from fire express-
ly for the praise and glorification of the Almighty ; of various forms and
power, whose sole delight is in divine adoration; and whom God made
to tenant the skies, in order that his power and goodness might be
everywhere manifest; in the heavens as well as on earth, in the regions
of air, and among the depths of the sea.
Genii and devils are supposed to be allied to the angels, but imper-
fect, (vide p. 665.)
Of the angels that minister to the Almighty, four are constantly em-
ployed in interceding for mankind and created beings: the first has the
form of a man ; the second that of a bull; the third, that of a lion; and
the fourth that of an eagle.
_ Another angel presides over the motions of the spheres and stars ;
the elements; the animal, vegetable, and mineral world; and over all
things below the moon’s orbit. His strength, excellence, and size are
incomparable, and he possesses power to arrest and stop the revolution
of the universe.
Among the principal angels, the author enumerates Ist, Israfil, who
will sound the trump at the great day of resurrection, and whose wings
reach from East to West, from heaven to earth. 2nd, Gabriel, the
640 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
spirit of the faithful the holy spirit, who has charge of all
Writes >)
created things. 3rd, Michael, who has charge of heavenly bodies, the
actions and powers of things that have breath, and the angel-tenanted
sea of the 7th paradise. 4th, Jzrazl, the angel of death, the place of
repose of action ; the place of immersion of souls and bodies, whose feet
are on earth, and whose head touches the firmament.
The. author, after narrating conversations between the prophets
Abraham and Solomon with the angel of death, proceeds to describe the
seven angels that have separate charge of the angels, the seventh hea-
vens, the guardian angels, two of whom are constantly on the right and
left of every mortal, to record his good and evil actions,* the two
angels Harut and Marut, imprisoned till the day of judgment by the
Almighty in a well in Babylon, for having, when subjected under a
fleshly form to similar temptations, committed sins for which the angels
denounced mankind.
Division of Time.
The measurement of time hinges upon the revolution of the heavenly
bodies. Time is divided into karans, w yy3, or cycles; karans into years;
years into months; months into days and nights; days and nights
into hours ; hours into minutes ; and minutes into seconds.
Human life is made up of time ; a space to be passed by each travel-
ler ; of which every year is a journey ; every month a bdrid ; every week
a parasang ; every day a mile.
The day is shortest when the sun enters in Jadi, (Capricorn), and
longest when it appears in Sartan. (Cancer). When the sun enters
Hamal and Mizan, (Aries and Libra,) at the time of the vernal and
autumnal equinowes, the days and nights are equal.
The day is the space between sunrise and sunset; and the night
between sunset and sunrise.
* “We created man, and we know what his soul whispereth within him: and we
are nearer unto him than his jugular vein. When the two angels deputed to take ac-
count of a man’s behaviour, take account thereof; one sitting on the right hand, and
the other on the left, he uttereth not a word; but there is with him a watcher ready to note
it. And the agony of death, shall come in truth. Thus oh man is what thou soughtest to
avoid. And the trumpet shall sound: this will be the day which hath been threatened,
and every soul shall come.’’—WSale’s Koran, p. 382.
1844. ] Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. 641
The Week.
The month is divided into four portions, consisting each of seven days.
Sunday, (Yum-al-ahadi, poate o2) is the first day of the week.
It is kept holy by the Nazarenes. Jesus, blessings upon Him, first
commanded his followers to keep holy the Friday ; but the latter being
unwilling that their holyday should precede that of the Jews; viz
Saturday, Sunday was fixed on.
The second day is Monday, Yum-al-ithnin, werd o>? the day of
the flight to Medina.
The third, Tuesday, Yum-ath-thaltha, \X\iSI @92 is the day on which
Cain murdered Abel.
The fourth, Wednesday, Yum-al-arba, Fey e>2
The fifth, Thursday, Yum-al-khamis, (ww em eae
Friday, the Mahomedan sabbath, the day of assembly, xe ess
Yum-al-juma, the author has placed first in his list, though it is evident
Sunday was originally, among the Arabs, the first day in the week, and
Saturday, (As-sadt, eens) the seventh, or sabbath of the Jews), the
last.*
Dion Cassius states, that the Egyptians consecrated the seven days
of the week to the seven planets, Eic, rove aorépac rove émra Tove
mAavnTac wvopacpévove Tac npépac avakeoQar KateotTn UmO
aLyUTTUWY, and it is certain, that a hebdomadary division of the month
prevailed at a period of the most remote antiquity among the nations
of the earth, the days of which he distinguished by the names of the
sun, moon, and planets. Among the Chaldeans, the Egyptians, the
Arabians, prior to Mahomed, the Hindoos, the Greeks, and the ancient
nations of Northern Europe. These hebdomadary period all com-
* It may be remarked, that the author assigns no reason for the division of the month
into weeks. AA division of time, not dependent on any movement or epoch of the
heavenly bodies, but evidently of divine origin, the earliest and most authentic ac-
count of which is found in the books of Genesis and Exodus, wherein Moses declares
that the creation of the world was accomplished in 6 days, and that the Almighty
rested on the 7th day, and blessed it, and commanded that it should be kept holy asa
day of rest by mankind; a circumstance to which the Mahomedan author briefly
adverts, without explaining why Mussulman do not adhere to this precept of the
Pentateuch.
642 Notice of the Ajatb-al-Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
mence with the day of the sun; and the order of succession of the
names is precisely similar ; a coincidence, striking and remarkable.
The natural binary division of the month into the light and dark
periods, or rather of the moon’s wane and increase of 15 days each, the
kista and suklu pukshums of the Hindoos, is not mentioned by the au-
thor.
I have asked many Brahmans versed in astronomy, and well acquaint-
ed with the principles on which their sages have founded their divisions
of time, why the week alone should not have been based on the move-
ments or conjunctions of any of the celestial bodies. They have been
generally, what is nautically termed, taken aback at the question, but
said, their attention had not been called to it before. After consulting
their books, they acknowledged that the week coincides with no revolu-
tion or conjunction of the stars or planets, and that it is of divine ori-
gin, instituted by the Supreme Being in everlasting commemoration of
the days on which he successively created the sun, moon and five planets,
This may be regarded as an indication that Sabianism, from the Arabic
As-Saba, Faxwoo the seven, prevailed among the Hindoos prior to the
introduction of Brahmanism and Buddhism.
Months.
After briefly noticing the months of the Turks, Copts, Zenjs and
Hindoos, the author details those of the Arabs, Rumis and Persians.
Those of the Arabs consist of 30 and 29 days alternately, and their
year of 12 lunations, or 354 days.
Arab Months.
Names. Days. Names. Days.
Brought over, .. 177
Mohurrum, ze a 30 Rajab, Se aye -.
Sniler, . 2 See ye 29 Sraban, ia ae .. oe
Rubai-al-awal, .. oy 30 Ramzan, .. nas oe
Rubai-us-sani, .. i 29 Shawal, ae a8 o. 88
Jamadi-al-awal, .. lye 30 Za’l-kadr, .. ye ee
Jamadi-us-sani, .. wa 29 Zu'l-hadj; .. de -
Carried over, 177 Total, .. 354
1844. ] Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. 643
Rumi Months.*
Days.
Days. Brought over, 182
Tisrin I, oe 31 Nisan, A, a4 30
mL, io 30 Ayar, BS a ol
Kanun, I. 2% 31 Hanzan, .. Pe 30
a th]: af 31 Pamuz, @ Se ol
Sevat, a senk 28 Ab, Le die 31
Azar, re es 31 Elul, yt a 3
Carried over, 182 Dotals sa) 05
Persian Months.
The Persian months consist of 30 days each, giving to the year 360
days ; but 5 days are annually added to the month Adan, which nearly
completes the solar year. The month of Fernurdin commences the
Persian year about the time of the autumnal equinox.
Names and order of the Persian months :—
1. Fernurdin. 7. Mahar.
2. Ardibihist. 8. Aban.
3. Khurdad. 9. Azur
4, Tir. 10; Dy.
5. Murdad. 11. Bahman.
6. Shahryur. 12. Isfandarmas.
Besides the division of the month into weeks, like other Mahomedan
countries, the Persians have a separate name for each of the 30 days
composing the month.
The author enters into a description of the months and of remarkable
feast days among the Mahomedans and Persians.
* The names of the Rumi months are identical with those of the Syrians, who
as well as the Greeks, adopted the era of Seleucus Nicator, dating 311 years and four
months before Christ. The Syrian Greeks began their year in the month Elul, or
September, and other Syrians in Pishrin 1, or October: the Jews about the autumnal
equinox. ‘the Hindee solar months commence in September with Aswini.
4s
644 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. (No. 152.
The four Seasons.
The period of the vernal and autumnal equinoxes, and those of the
sun’s entrance into hamal and sartan, (Aries and Cancer,) divide the
year into four parts.
The first called (rubdi, Ee ) or spring, extends from the vernal
equinox until the sum has completed its northerly course, and is on the
point of returning towards the equator. The summer, (sai, eeBinrd)
commences at this period, and lasts till the autumnal equinox, when
autumn begins, and continues till the sun has attained its utmost south-
erly declination. The winter, (shita, Ls ) now sets in, and terminates
at the vernal equinox. .
The Cycles of the Prophets.
Some uwlimas have declared, that God, once in a thousand years, in
order to manifest his divine power and glory, has sent a prophet among
mankind.
In the first 1000 years appeared Abu'l-basher, (the father of mankind,)
Adam. In the 2nd, Abuna-noh, Noah, the Shaikh of the prophets; and
Abraham, the beloved of God, Khalil Allah, in the third. In the 4th
millennium appeared Moses, who spoke with God, Kalm Allah. In the
5th, Solomon, the son of David. In the 6th Jsa, Jesus, the Spirit of God,
Ruh Allah; and in the 7th, Mahomed, the Seal, or last of the prophets,
To this succeeds a curious story of the prophet Khizrs appearing to
a king, and telling him of the changes the world had undergone. That
the sea was formerly dry land, and dry land sea, and that races of
strange animals, no longer existing, have been swept from the earth’s
surface in succession.
2d Mukdleh, or Discourse on Sublunary Things.
Al Makalieh ath thanich fias sifliat, rl baw 2 xsl) aillaell
The elements, Al andsir, polkas] '
The elements are supposed to be four in number; viz. fire, air,
water and earth, (then thought to be simple bodies,) of which every
thing else is composed,
1844. ] Notice of the Ajatb-al-Mukhlukat. 645
Fire.
The nature of fire is heat: its proper place in the creation is below
the moon’s orbit, above the region of air: fire being the lightest of the
elements.
Air and Water.
Air being lighter than water, and heavier than fire, occupies the in-
termediate space.
Earth.
Earth being the heaviest of the elements, lies lowest near the lines of
contact; each element is thought to partake of the character of the
element to which it approaches. Fire is blended with the air as in the
simoom. Air becomes water, as inrain. Water is converted into air,
as in vapour ; and water into earth as in petrifying springs.
Phenomena of the region of Fire and Air, Meteors and Falling Stars.
Meteors and falling stars are considered as exhalations that have
risen from the earth, and become ignited on reaching the region of fire ;
as the smoke of a recently extinguished lamp is ignited, on reaching the
flame of another lamp placed above it.*
Division of the Atmosphere.
The air is divided into three regions. The highest nearest the region
of fire, is extremely hot, and is called ether, (ather,) a)
The second is intensely cold: the third, which is nearest the earth,
has a more moderate temperature, and is subdivided into warm, cold,
and temperate.
Clouds and Rain, (Sahab-wa-al-mair, phe Hh fee)
Clouds are supposed to be water raised in vapour by the sun’s heat ;
and rain and mist, the result of their condensation in the middle, or
cold region of air.
* It is curious that the uses of oil gas should have remained so long latent, after
this early discovery of its inflammable nature.
646 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
The Winds, (Ar Riah, cyys!)
The winds are produced by the sun, and the revolution of the spheres.
The North wind is cold, because it comes from the North pole; and
the South wind is warm, because it passes over the equator.
Thunder and Lightning, (Arradwa-al-bark, Sywlgrc yS)
From the jagged and broken appearance of clouds in a thunder
storm, it is thought that thunder and lightning are the result of the
shock of the collision by which the clouds are thus broken in their
rapid descent after condension in the middle region of air.
The lightning is seen before the thunder is heard, although it is said
that both are simultaneous. The reason of this is, that the sound of the
thunder is dependent on the undulations of the air, (mowkuf bar, tama-
wuj,al-haw-a, Jy < z 943 2 W55550) which are slower than sight.
When a person is beating clothes on a stone at a distance, we see the
cloth strike against the stone before we hear the noise.*
Halos, (Al-halah, asl ss hence our term halo,) are caused by the
reflection of the moon’s light on subtle polished particles floating in the
air, and veiling the moon.t
Rainbows, (Kous, une)
Rainbows occur when transparent particles of water are in the air
opposite the sun, the rays of which cause them.
Phenomena of the region of Water,(Karah-al-ma, \,3} 358 ) Convexity of
the surface of the Sea.
The surface of the ocean is assumed to be convex, because sailors
affirm, that in approaching a mountain from the sea, the top of the
* Anaximander, more than five centuries before Christ, ascribed the phenomena of
thunder and lightning to a similar cause ; and his pupil, Anaximenes we find, in an
approach to the discovery of electricity, comparing lightning to the flash produced,
in seas of warm latitudes, by the stroke of an oar.
t+ Halos have been lately considered as caused by the moon’s light, or frozen
shining particles floating in the air; while others suppose them occasioned by that
class of cloud called by meteorologists, ciyvo-stratus, which are formed in the lower
strata of the atmosphere.
1844. | Notice of the Ajatb-al- Mukhilukat. 647
mountain is first descried, and drawing nearer its centre and base, come
into view successively.
Saltness of the Sea.
Water is divided into two great classes ; viz. salt and fresh, the salt
is derived from the earth burnt by the sun, and driven by the winds into
the sea. Salt prevents the ocean from putrefaction, and creating a
pestilence in the world, which the ocean surrounds.
Subdivisions of the Salt Water.
The salt water is divided into seven seas, comprehended in the
surrounding ocean, Bahr-i-Mohit ; viz.
The sea of China, ee / Bahr Chin, we °g ace pst
4) Hind, ae Cane Hind, bay dS?
ay Persia, fe 33a Pars: ¥: ay ll yas?
+)“ Kolzam, ’ or k
Red Sea, \ » 41 Kolzum, -- 6 A ys?
Zenj, or Zan- ‘ :
* tiene t », al Zenj, ve ails
» Mughrib, or =)
Western sea, Paik: bees eiled et i: acces Kayes | pax?
x9 20), Khare, ies oes?
Seven other names are given to the seven seas; viz.
1. Bahr-i, sie is Kabis.
ne ,, ay Hf Hom.
ets. By: om Muzlin.
eee er oo Mirjos.
eg ae AS Sakin,
a ee a Baki,
see at ae Nitash.
The author having entered into a long description of the wonderful
inhabitants and natural productions of these seas and their different is-
lands, of which are given some curious paintings, proceeds to describe
the form and divisions of the earth.
The Earth, (Kurah-al-arz, | 52 SLES )
The earth is supposed to be divided into three parts; there is nothing
lower than the earth. Some say, it is striped like a sphere; others
648 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
like a shield or half a sphere. Most of the ancients are of opinion, that it
is a ball placed in the midst of the heavens, like the yolk of an egg
in the white. Some say the earth has nine sides: on each side men
stand with their feet to the earth, and their heads towards the sky.
Some say, it floats in the midst of the ocean.
Pythagoras om ) Feasve)) thinks the earth revolves, and that the
apparent motion of the heavenly bodies, from East to West, is caused by
the motion of the earth from West to East. But this can never be; for
if we liberate a pigeon in the air, it could never again return to us;
since the earth must revolve more rapidly than a pigeon can fly.*
The earth is divided into three parts; viz. Ist, the part above the
ocean ; 2nd, the part concealed by the ocean ; and 3rd, its centre or axis,
The surface is covered by vegetation and animals ; the interior is occu-
pied by ores, metals, &c. Only half of the heavens are visible at once :
but, if we move our position, on the earth’s surface, we see parts of the
heavens which were not visible from the place which we first occupied,
at the rate of one degree of the heaven’s surface for every 19 parasangs
we travel.t
After a quotation from Abu Bihan’s speculations on the earth’s
diameter and circumference, the author alludes to the fact of the Caliph
Mamun causing the measurement of a degree to be made, (this was
done, A. D. 814, in the sandy plains of Mesopotamia, between Palmyra
and the Euphrates,) by which 563 miles were fixed as the equivalent
of a degree of the heaven’s circumference.
Batolimus, (Ptolemy), he goes on to state, divided the night and day
into 24 equal portions by the rising and setting of the sun. Having
ascertained that the sun traverses 15° of its path in an hour of time,
(24 x 15°=360°,) he found, by observations of an eclipse of the sun at
two cities, (the distance between which was ascertained,) that a degree
of the sun’s path was equivalent to every 75 Arabian miles of the earth’s
surface, which being multiplied by 360 give 27,000 miles as the mea-
sure of the earth’s circumference, (24,912 geographical miles are its
true circumference.)
* This is the old objection of the Ptolemais to the Pythagorean or Copernican
system; they forgot that the atmosphere, in which their pigeon flies, partakes of the
motion of the earth, and carries the pigeon along with it, at an equal rate with the
objects on the earth’s surface.
+ Calculating the parasang at 3 miles, the terrestrial degree would be 57 miles.
1844.] Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. 649
The author observes, that when the sun rises on the Islands of Pros-
perity, (Jaadit) 2: s\xws the rwv pakapwy, or Fortunate Islands of
Plotemy, in the far west, he is rising on the inhabitants of China in the
extreme East. Hence the distance, he states, must be one-half of the
earth’s circumference, or 13,500 miles.*
The Divisions of the Globe.
Abu-r-rihan of Kharezm, divides the globe into the Northern and
Southern hemispheres, which are separated by the equator.
Another line, crossing the equator at right angles, and extending from
pole to pole, subdivides it into four quarters.
The Southern quarters are supposed to be occupied by water; and
the equator to be the austral limit of the habitable world.
Of the Northern hemisphere jth is land, and the remainder water.
The tracts near the North pole are uninhabited from the intense cold
which is occasioned by its distance from the equator.
Those parts are inhabited, where the maximum length of the days
and nights never exceed 16 hours.
The South-easterly parts of the North hemisphere are inhabited by
the Abyssinians, the Zenjs, (people of Zanguebar,) and the Nubians.
The S. W. tracts are bad, God knows.
The seven Climes, (Haft Akalim, esl) 8) the kAiwasa of the Greeks.
The habitable portion of the earth, (2. e. Northern hemisphere,) is
divided into seven climes, which are supposed to extend like zones, or
carpets, spread from East to West, between the equator and the North
pole. Their breadth from N. to 8. varies, and their length shortens,
* Eratosthenes of Cyrene, who determined the distance between the tropics, 47°
724 39", or = of the earth’s circumference, was the first to attempt the earth’s mea-
surement by observations of the sun’s meridian height. He found that, at the summer
Solstice, the sun was vertical at noon at Syene, while at Alexandria, at the same
time, it was the 50th part of a circumference from being vertical; hence he concluded,
neglecting the solar parallax, that the distance between these two cities comprehend-
ed a 50th part of the globe’s circumference. The distance between Alexandria and
Syene was then estimated at 5,000 stadia; which multiplied by 50, give 2,50,000
Stadia as the measure of the circumference, and divided by 360, 694 * stadia to a
degree.
This practical philosopher, who flourished nearly three centuries before Christ, wrote
a work on geography, which is unfortunately lost.
650 Notice of the Ajatb-al- Mukhlukat. [ No. 152.
conformably to the earth’s form, as they approach the pole. The length
of the Ist clime, that nearest the equator, is 3,000 parasangs, and its
breadth 150; while the length of that nearest the pole is only 1,500,
and its breadth, 75 parasangs.
Afridun, Alexander, Ardeshir, and other similar monarchs, have made
these climes the boundaries of their empires.
The leading principles on which this division of the North hemisphere
into climates is based, are the differences of temperature, and the maxi-
mum length of the days and nights. In the first clime, the maximum
length is from 124 to 123 hours.
Hours. Hours.
In the 2nd Clime from SE ‘e ay! 1332 to 1384
3, ord Ditto, ditto, te rh nbs 132 to 14
» 4th Ditto ditto, Re i . 142 to 14%
. Dt Ditto ditto, es Totes ag 142 to 15
» 6th Ditto ditto, hy 7 aa 15a 7ter’ 153
»» ft’ Ditto ditto, 2 152 to 16
It extends to 163 hours, cal which al is supposed to be deso-
late and uninhabitable.
Earthquakes, (Fiaz Zulazal, JV 55t8)
When vapour and steam are pent up in Jarge volumes in the bowels
of the earth, and are not condensed by cold into water, nor dissipated by
heat ; if the surface of the earth becomes heated, and they cannot
find vent, they cause the earth to tremble like the body of one affected
with fever, which shakes from the greenness of the corruption that is
within.
In the human body, however, there is a natural heat which becomes
inflamed, and dissipates or dissolves the noxious matter; but in the
earth, this species of heat does not exist.
These vapours sometimes burst through the surface of the earth, or
undermine it, which causes the engulfing of mountains and cities.*
* It has long been remarked, that among other signs of an approaching earthquake,
volcanos in the vicinity ceased to smoke. Anaxagoras (500 years B. C.) supposed
earthquakes to be caused by the pent-up air or vapour endeavouring to escape.
1844. | Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. 651
Formation of Mountains and Sand Dunes.
Mountains were originally formed of water and earth, hardened by
the heat of the sun into rock, like clay into brick. The earth was
drifted into heaps by the wind, and thus converted into stone.
Every 36,000 years the stars complete a revolution,* and a great
change takes place on the face of the globe. The North becomes South,
dry land becomes sea; and sea, dry land; mountains, plains; and
plains, mountains.
Mountains crumble by the solar heat into dust and sand, which are
carried by the winds into rivers, and by the rivers transported into the
bed of the ocean, and in lapse of time become piled up into hills; in
which, when the bed of the sea again becomes dry land, we see bones
and shells.
_ The reason of some rocks being piled up in layers, is, that they have
thus been deposited successively by water. Running water is conti-
nually transporting the earth of mountains and plains into lakes and
seas, in which it is accumulated in heaps, which become moun-
tains.
When left dry by the sea, their surface is first covered with grass,
and shortly becomes inhabited by animals.
Sometimes the water of the sea rises, and covers what was formerly
dry land.
The use of Mountains, (Fi-fuaid-al-jebal, Sloe toraty 52)
Mountains were created as the foundations of the earth, that it should
not be moved ; they serve as barriers to the land against the sea, and as
repositories of minerals. The streams and springs which run down
* On the theory of their advancing a degree East every century, they would com-
plete a great circle of 360° from W. to E. in 360 centuries. Ptolemy makes the pre-
cession at 36” per annum. Hipparchus, according to Le Gentil, 50".
T Geologists of the present day have hardly advanced further in their theories of the
formation of aqueous rocks, and the entombment of organic remains.
The Arabian author, however, cannot lay any fair claim to originality, as these ideas
are as old as Pythagoras, or at least the edition of them given by Ovid. ‘he theory of
the periodical catastrophe in which the world is supposed to be involved had its rise,
probably, with the Cosmogonists of Egypt, who believed that the world is successively
destroyed and re-produced at the return of each great year, ‘‘ when the sun, moon and
planets are in the same sign of the Zodiac, from which they commenced their course.”’
The length of the great year of the world, according to Orpheus, is 120,000 common
years, according to Cassander 360,000, vide Note, page 20,
47
652 Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat, [No. 152,
their sides, sustain animal and vegetable life ; their water is raised again
by evaporation into clouds, which recondensing in rain and snow on the
mountain tops, is collected in holes and caverns, and affords a constant
supply ; such is the origin of springs. Springs collect into rivers, which
terminate in the ocean after fertilising the tracts through which they
flow, and conducing to the prosperity of cities.
Volcanos, (Gebel-an-nar, stn)
There are some mountains which emit fire from their summit by
night, and smoke by day, (the reflection, probably, of the fire in the
crater on the smoke or vapour above, visible only at night,) such as
Gebel- Sikuliah, KdBuo Sac (the Sicilian mountain, Etna,) abounding :
in sulphur.
There are also mountains where a gentle breeze constantly blows,
as Gebel-Bamian, and others where a strong wind prevails, as Gebel-
Diawend, and the mountains of Ghour.
Remarkable Mountains.
Here follows an account in detail of some of the celebrated moun-
tains of the world, in which are noticed Gebel Dibawend, supposed to be
the highest mountain in the world, where Solomon imprisoned the
genil; and Ferzdur, the tyrant Zohak. A mine of red and yellow
sulphur is said to occur on it. It is situated near Rai.*
On mount Ararat, (Gebel-al-Jude, sage ae), the author states
that a mosque built by Noah is still standing, and that a few of the planks
of the ark were to be seen in the time of the accession of the Abbasides
(about a. v. 749.)+
* The ancient Bhage in Persia. Modern travellers have estimated the height of
Dibawend to be only 10,000 feet above the sea’s level; not so high as Etna.
¢ Berosus and Aldyenus both declare, there was suet a report in their time handed
down from the Chaldzans, and the relics of the ark, according to Epiphanius, were to
be seen here in his time. Sale quaintly adds—‘* if we may believe him.”
We are told that the emperor Heraclius went up from the town of Thamanin, and
saw the place of the ark. There was also formerly a famous monastery, called the
Monastery of the Ark upon some of these mountains, where the Nestorians used to cele-
brate a feast day on the spot where they supposed the ark rested ; but in the year of Christ
776, that monastery was destroyed by lightning, with the church and a numerous con-
gregation init, (Sale’s Koran, p. 167, Note.) ‘The height above the sea, of Ararat,
1844. ] Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. 653
Adam’s Peak in Ceylon, is represented as Gebel-as-Serendib, Jin
5 pal on the summit of which Adam alighted after his expulsion from
paradise ; and the prints of whose foot is said to be seen on the rock.
Mines of red rubies and of diamonds occur on this mountain. These
precious stones are washed down to the base by the rains and streams,
Serendib is famous for its wood aloes: the women perform suth.*
Gebel-al-Kerman.—The mountains of Karamania the author states,
produce a stone which when ignited, burns like firewood, (doubtless
coal or mineral bitumen.)
Gebel-al-Maknatis, yesbias! Jas The magnetic or loadstone moun-
tain is supposed to be situate near the mountains of Kolzum, (Red
Sea,) and is avoided by mariners, lest their ship be attacted by it,
(hence the story in Sinbad the sailor).
Among volcanos or fire mountains, Gedel-un-nar, are enumerated
those of Sicily and Dibawend ; and one named Kalsian, in the neigh-
bourhood of which no animal can exist, and birds even in flying over it
perish.
according to the Russian traveller Parrob, is 2700 toises = 17,260 feet, more than 700
feet higher than Dibawend.
The Armenians call Ararat, Massissensar, or Mountain of the Ark, and it is still be-
lieved that the petrified remains of the ark exist on the summit. In a Church at Nova
Schamachia, near the junction of the Aras with the Kur, a cross is exhibited, said to be
made out of a plank of the ark, bestowed by an angel on an Armenian monk, who was
struggling in vain to reach the top of the mountain. Ararat is stated to be of volcanic
formation: pumice and lava are seen on its sides, and warm springs gush forth at its
base, the existence therefore of the mines of sulphur, mentioned by Cazvini, is by no
means improbable.
* The Mahomedans believe that when Adam and Eve were ejected from paradise,
for eating of the forbidden fruit, Adam fell on Serendib; and Eve on the shores of the
Red Sea at Judda. After the lapse of two centuries, Adam was conducted to his wife
at Mount Ararat by the angel Gabriel, they subsequently returned to Ceylon, whence
the human race was propagated. Adam is supposed to be of such gigantic stature, that
while one foot rested on the mountain, the other was in the sea, and that the print is
70 cubits long. Knox, however, describes the print as being only about two feet long ;
and Moncony as two spans in length. The Buddhists of Ceylon, however, claim the
print as that of the foot of Buddha left when he ascended to heaven. They call the
mountain Hamalel : and the Portuguese have named it, Pico de Adam.
Itis 7420 feet high, and composed of granite and gneiss. Rubies are still found around
its base, though I am not aware, as before remarked, of the occurrence of the diamond
in Ceylon. Garnet, the cinnamon stone, sapphire, cat’s eye, and moon stone, are the
Only other gems of estimation which it produces. Iron, manganese and plumbago are
its chief mineral products,
654 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
He also mentions a volcano in Andalusia, and a hill in the same
country which emits inflammable air. Also the quicksilver and red
and yellow sulphur mines, and zunjafar of Al Baranis in Andalusia.*
_ Origin of Streams, (Fi-tawallud-al-anhar, be doly5 3)
Streams originate in reservoirs formed in the caves and hollows of
mountains by rain, and the snow which melt in the spring. Those
that come from the tops of the hills continue to flow perennially : but
those that are situated in the lower parts of the mountains are soon ex-
hausted. Their length and direction are various: some have a course
a thousand parasangs long; all have their sources among mountains,
and all terminate in the sea. Some of their water is raised in vapour by
the sun, moved by the wind, and again deposited on the mountain in
the form of rain and dew.
The author gives a brief account of some of the principal known
rivers, and among them describes the Nile. The increase of this famous
river in the hot season, when all other rivers were drying up, rendered
it one of the world’s wonders. .
The author attempts to explain the phenomenon by the supposition
of the winter rains which fall in Zanguebar, where the Nile he believes
rises, being so far distant from the embouchur, that summer arrived before
they could reach it. He calculates that the freshes are four months
in passing through the desolate tracts of the South; two months in Abys-
sinia and Nubia; and one month in the regions where Islam prevails.
He alludes to the absence of rain in Egypt; the Mekyas, whale
or Nilometer; the human sacrifice at the cutting of the Khaly ; and
the abolition of this abominable superstition by Amru and the Caliph
Omar. He mentions among the productions of the river the crocodiles,
and a species of fish that causes tremor to the person who seizes it.
The theory of the inundations of the Nile being caused by the
pressure of the Mediterranean raised by the northerly winds, and forcing
back the waters of the river on the lands in the interior ; and of the Nile
* Basalt occurs at Almagro, and the Sierra de Caldeirao presents volcanic products ;
but I am not aware of the existence of any active volcanos in Andalusia. In the
Sierra Morena, are mines of quicksilver, gold, silver, lead and copper; sulphur and
vitriol are also found in some parts of Andalusia.
1844.] Notice of the Ajaib-al-Mukhlukat. 655
falling when this pressure is taken off by the commencement of the
Southerly winds, is also alluded to.*
Among other rivers described by the author are the Euphrates, the
Oxus, the Indus, the Ganges. The latter is said by the Hindus to
flow from heaven: and when the great men of those regions die, their
remains are burned and the ashes thrown into the river, which convey
them to heaven.t Some of the water of the Ganges is conveyed daily
to the temple of Somnath, which is 200 parasangs distant. (Calculating
at the rate of three miles per parasang, Somnath is 600 miles distant
from the Ganges.)
The next fas/ treats of the origin of
Springs, (Fi-tawallud-al-Ayun, we S958)
which the author divides into sweet, azab, —_j J; saline, (maleh,
do); stinking, ( ic afan); sulphureous, (kilriti, en yas ); bitumin-
(ey
ous or napthiferous, (naphti, 425); and those producing borax, borak,
<3)92. These substances are supposed to be generated by heat, Among
the celebrated springs, the author enumerates the sulphur springs of
Bamian, the springs of Tiberias, &c. In the next fas/ on wells, those
of Zemzem in Arabia, (the well into which Joseph was cast.)
The succeeding chapters treat of the animal, vegetable and mineral
kingdoms, all compounds of the four elements. The author divides them
into two classes, nami, ols and ghair nami, ol byaé § viz. bodies having
* Some believed that the inundations were caused by the northerly winds driving
back the waters of the Nile themselves: others, that the clouds which traverse
Egypt, wafted over its surface by the North winds, were collected, and descend in tor-
rents down the steeps of Ethiopia into its channel.
The Nile, however, like all other rivers that rise near the equator, commences to
increase in the most Southerly portions of its course before the summer solstice.
Owing to the very slight inclination of its bed, in Egypt only two inches per mile,
a considerable ‘time elapses before the freshes from Abyssinia reach Lower Egypt, the
velocity of the stream rarely exceeding three miles per hour. At Thebes, in Upper
Egypt, on the 18th June 1840, I witnessed the first appearance of the great annual
inundation in the Nile; viz. a slight milky turbidness of the water. This phenomenon
is called by the Arabs Nuktah, y},25 which signifies a dot or a stain, but is also ap-
plied by the Egyptians to a dew, which is supposed to fall during the night of the
17th June, or the llth of the Coptic month Bauneh or Pyni. The commencement of
the rise of the Nile, though arbitrarily fixed by them to this day, is quite uncertain
to a week or two.
ft A little against the stream it must be confessed.
656 Notice of the Ajath- al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152.
the power of growth; and bodies not having the power of growth. Ani-
mals and vegetables form the first class, and minerals the latter. Ve-
getables again are distinguished from animals by wanting the powers of
motion and sensation: but all three are linked together by wonderful
and insensible gradations.
Minerals, (Fi-al- Madaniat, ctolas HxebI 35) are divided into three
classes ; viz. ores or metals, stones and oily-minerals.
Minerals were created before vegetables and animals.
lst Class—Metals, (Filizzan, wh yAs)
Metals are seven in number, viz. :—
1. Gold.—The particles of which are so close, that they cannot be
separated by fire.
2. Silver.—Allied to gold, but checked in its progress by cold, and
convertible into dust by fire.
3. Copper.—Allied to silver, but red, owing to the heat of its sulphur.
4, Iron.—Its blackness is owing to the heat of its sulphur. It is
the most useful of metals.
5. Tin.—Rub tin with salt and oil till the latter is black. This pre-
vents swords from rusting when rubbed on the blades.
6. Lead.—Its properties the
ments.
of gold, and breaking into frag.
7. Zinc.— shale ls Khar-sini, from China.
All the metals are supposed to be combinations of sulphur and quick-
silver in different proportions, acted upon by a force or stimulus, called
mineral heat, (Hararat-i-madan, x02 11>) electricity. The author
treats of their medicinal virtues.
2d Class—Stones, (Al-Ahujar, het 3})
Transparent stones are supposed to be formed from rain drops, and
opaque stones from water and earth, acted on by the sun and the Ha-
rarat-i-madan, ‘Their colours depend on the matrix, or on the planets.
Black is ascribed to Saturn ; green to Jupiter ; red to Mars; yellow to
the Sun ; blue to Venus ; variegated, Mercury ; white to the Moon,
1844.] Notice of the Ajaib-al Mukhlukat. 657
In the succeeding descriptive list of gems and minerals, in which
the author quotes the names of Aristotle, Galen, Dioscorides, and
Shaik-ar-Reis, we find mention of antimony, which he states to be got
principally from Ispahan. Tutiya, blue vitriol, mines of which are said
to occur on the coast of Hindustan; lapis lazuli, cinnabar, Hajar-as-
sinobar ; the eagle stone, Hajar-i Akab, __,\Rc ae the moon stone,
Hajar-al-kamr, pei es. Pearls stated to be drops of vernal rain con-
gealed in oyster shells. Red and white talc, Talc, (grb ; mother of pearl,
Sadef —30; cornelian, Akik, Coee. the best of which comes from
Yemen; amber, apes i the bezoar stone, Pad-zahor, os) le
India from the bellies .of goats and sheep. Kartasia, Lawl 235 a stone
» got in
found in the lower part of high mountains which at night shines,* and
has the appearance of fire.
The best turquoises, Firozeh, x 43 syed come from Korassan.t
The Taghi-tus, uapb, elle is described as a black stone with a smell
of pitch, (probably coal or mineral bitumen.)
The diamond, Almas, ywladt, is said to be the hardest of all things; but
frangible if struck with lead, and the fragments are triangular. The dia-
mond is found in the mountains of Serendib. In the valley (Wadi) of
Baid al Kamr, pea dare pieces of flesh are thrown into the valley
to which the diamonds adhere. The vultures pounce down on the
pieces of flesh and bring it up.{
The diamond is used by jewellers to bore other stones.
The loadstone, Maknatis, (wablide is found in India; a red stone
with black strips or lines, attracts iron. When a ship approaches the
land of the loadstone, if it contains iron, it is attracted and cannot be
‘Separated.
* I was informed by Mr. Fischer, that from the magnesite excavations dug near
the foot of the Salem mountains, emanates a phosphorical light which alarms the
superstitious Hindus; but it is not certain whether the light proceeds from the exha-
lations or from the mineral.
¢+ The turquois is a gem peculiar to Khorassan ; the best mines are near Nishapur
and Firozkoh. It occurs in veins in trap; its colour is owing to copper.
t The story of the vultures bringing up the diamond with the pieces of flesh, again
teminds one of the Arabian Nights, as also the notice of the loadstone.
658 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. (No. 152.
The ruby, Yakut (::, sly Rubies are of different colours; yellow, green
and blue, (the sapphire ?) but the best are red.
The ruby comes from the Southern cities near the equator. Its
beauty is increased by exposure to fire.
3rd Class.— Oily Minerals, (Duhniat, (2: sla aie) bit
Quicksilver, sulphur, bitumen, naptha, &c. are presumed to be pro-
duced by the warmth of the earth’s interior acting upon its juices.
Ambergris is thrown up by the sea. Some say it is the production of
a marine animal, or of a fountain in the sea; while others assert, that it
falls in dew on rocks in the sea.
Mumiyai, _ clayey is produced like mineral bitumen from the earth,
in the land f. Mosel and Persia. It is of a more precious nature than
pitch, and used extensively in medicine in spasmodic affections, palpita-
tions; and externally, mixed with other substances, for bruises and
fractures.* |
Plants, (An-nabat, : .\i5})
Here follows a description of plants, which are supposed to be be-
tween minerals and animals, and divisible into two great classes,
VIZ. :—
Ist. Those that possess high trunks, as trees.
2nd. Those which do not, as grasses.
Plants are supposed to be endowed with the powers of reproduction,
increase, digestion, retention, attraction, &c.
The descriptions are short and unsatisfactory, containing a number of
singular stories, many incredible, regarding the properties and medicinal
virtues of plants; but among which may be easily discerned the glim-
merings of a few useful truths. The Persian manuscript contains coloured
drawings of many of the trees, which bear but a remote resemblance
to nature. Among the trees are enumerated, ebony, oak, the camphor
tree, sandal wood, the almond, the orange, the lime, the citron, the
filbert, plaintain, cocoa, the palm, the date, the cypress, the balsam,
the apple, the mulberry, peach, fig, pomegranate, olive and quince,
* The Mum-i-Ayi, the Soap of Ayi, is a black bituminous substance that oozes from
a cavern in a hill called the Kop-i-Mumiyai, near the village of Ayi, not far from the
route from Sheraz to Darabgerd. Formerly the door of the cave was guarded, and
opened once a year, and the Mum that had collected during the year (in size not larger
than an orange) taken out and deposited in the Shah’s treasury. It is valued in
Persia at a much higher rate than its weight in gold.
1844. ] Notice of the Ajaib-al. Mukhlukat. 659
the sumach, sandarach, fir, jujube, pepper, vine, the clove, the cane,
apricot, rose, jasmin, &c.
In the second class we find the cotton plant, squills, saffron,
oldenlandia, sesame, coloquintida, endive, spinage, turnips, cucumber,
Egyptian and China beans, lentils, mustard, radish, onions, ginger,
the violet, wild rose, southernwood, sweet basil, the tulip, lily, nar-
cissus, &c. Like the minerals, the trees and shrubs are usually classed
alphabetically.
Animals, (Al-Hywan, Synz!)
Divided into seven classes; viz. man, genii, the horse, the ass, mule,
camel ; cows; sheep and deer, beasts of prey, birds, reptiles and insects.
The author states, that animals were created with limbs best adapted
to their wants : among animals man ranks first ; the author enters into
a dissertation on the faculties of man, the prophets, saints, &c. ; produc-
tion and generation of man ; his anatomical structure and physiology. He
supposes the difference of colour among the human tribes to be occa-
sioned by the sun; that the Arabs rank highest among the races of the
earth’s descendants of Ismail, whose residence is West of the second
clime. The religion of the Arabs was originally that of Abraham.*
They lapsed into idolatry; the worship of the stars, angels, &c. The
chief of Arabs, Omar Bindahi, is said to have been the introducer of idola-
try among these followers of Abraham, which he imported from the
land of Balka, (Balkh?), The Arabs according to the author, were the
most eloquent of the nations on earth.
The Persians.
The Persians are described as descendants of Tamiras, inhabiting
Tran in the 3rd clime, and rank next to the Arabs.
They were idolaters and adored the stars (Sabians,) till the time of
Gushtasp, son of Zohrab ; when instructed by Zoroaster, the descendant
of Manochehr Malek, they with their monarch, became worshippers of
fire,
* Abraham is said to have been originally an idolater, like his father Azer, the idol-
maker, and son-in-law of Nimrod; and worshipped the stars, moon, and planets; but
who afterwards, according to the Koran, directed his face to Him who created the
heavens and the earth, and overthrew idolatry.
4u
660 Notice of the Ajaib-al- Mukhlukat. [No. 152,
Famous Men of Persia.
Ist. Feridin the Just, the conqueror of the tyrant Zohak.*
2nd. Iskander (Alexander the Great,) son of Dara (Darius), son of
Bahman, whose prime minister was Aristotle; the conqueror of Greece,
Asia Minor, India and China. He died at the age of 32.
8rd. Noushirwan, son of Kobad, born in the time of the Prophet;
unrivalled for justice.
4th. Bahram Gour, son of Yezdijird, renowned for skill in archery.
5th. Rustam Zal, who witched the world with noble horsemanship.
6th. Jamasp, the astronomer, who wrote a book on the conjunctions
of the planets, foretold the advents of Jesus andthe Prophet, and the
decay of the religion of the Magi.
7th. Bazrchemher, son of Bakhtaghin, vizier of Noushirwan, the
introducer of the game of chess from India.
8th. Barid, celebrated as a musician in the service of Kusro Parviz.
9th. The sculptor of the statue of the horse Shabdez, so exquisitely
carved, that it is said to be the work of the genii.
10th. Ferhad, the sculptor, who excavated the canal of Kasr-i-Shirin,
ee d pale paced ; the cave of Shirin. He is said to have drawn the like-
ness of his mistress Shirin on the palace walls with such incom-
parable art, that all who gazed on it became mad (enamoured.) Shirin
(Irene,) was the beautiful wife of Kusro Parviz, and said by some to be
a Christian.
* The name of the Assyrian tyrant Zohak, is still held in detestation in Persia, and
the national banner was the apron of the blacksmith who slew him, till the Mahomedan
conquest.
¢ It may be remarked that the author, with other Persian writers, ascribes the origin
Of this almost universal and princely game to India and not to China; the Arabian and
Persian term for chess, Shatrunj, _3 {4% is evidently a corruption of the Sanscrit
name of the game Chatrang, (Ga aaa eee
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 673
called Koh-i-Kond. Kalag is situated at the base of a perpendicular
Kalag. called Rash-Koh, and is furnished with a small mountain
stream by means of which are cultivated cotton, juwaree, and fruits, to
a small extent, such as pomegranates, mulberries, grapes and peaches ;
date trees also thrive here ; the rest of the cultivation of Kharande-
pends on the rain.
The term Kalag is applied in Baloochisthan to any small village
Term Kalag. having a few huts and date trees, with a little water.
In the district of Kharan and Rukshan are twelve tukars, or divi-
sions, as follows: —
Kalogee Sirjapad. Hurako.
Toolazai. Hajeezai.
Toghapee. Eessazai.
Miskonee. Kulbodanee.
Jodan. Kandooree
Gazakee. Sujadpad-i-Dashlee.
Besides these, in the district of Kharan, are Sasolees and Halakzais.
Meer Azad Khan has in his pay, constantly kept up, a body of 60
horsemen, mounted on his own horses, and might, out of
the population of 3,000 men, collect 1,000 available in
time of war. He collects no revenue in ready money ; that in grain,
when the year is plentiful, may amount to 3,000 bags of wheat, barley
and juwaree, besides 400 pats, or packages of dates, each
package weighing about a Company’s maund. He never
over-exacts fines; he is not tributary to Kalat, but to Candahar, to
which place he ought yearly to send 18 camels, 13 of which he collects
from Kharan and 5 from Washuk. There are two tribes
Tribute. . ; A {
in Kharan, who neither pay a tithe of their lands or ca-
mels ; viz. Dagarees and Hijbarees. They are said to have been the
original lords of Kharan before Azad Khan seized it.
The deputy, or Joe Nishein of Meer Azad Khan is his brother,
Fateh Khan, a perfect idiot ; whereas the former is a tolerably informed
man fora Baloch. The ryots of Kalag however complain much of
his extortions. The fort is a small mud one, the walls be-
ing 160 yards in circumference, 5 in height, and | in thick-
ness, having two entrances in the East. There is one well inside, the
water of which is somewhat brackish.
Force.
Revenue.
Fort.
674 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 158.
A transit duty is levied here of 1 jooree or piece of coarse cotton
Duty. cloth per load, and a tax is levied of 2 joorees on every
camel purchased in the district, of which there are a great number,
and 1 Rupee Kashanee on every load of grain.
The buildings and firewood are both from the gaz or tamarisk.
The productions of Kharan are wheat and barley, which are reaped
in the beginning of June ; juwaree, which is reaped in the
middle of August; wool and ghee which are procurable
chiefly in the latter end of May. The grain is exported both to Kalat
and Panjgoor.
Ready money is scarcely known; every thing is bartered, and
from cloth is the only approximation to a common standard of
value.
Productions.
In Kharan there are five or six ironsmiths and one Hindoo, whose
Artisans, capital does not exceed 1,000 rupees,—a large one for
Balochisthan, however ; there are many carpenters, and in Kalag there
are 60 weavers.
The kasa of this place is a measure weighing 2-4 Company’s seer,
Wake and and the maund is somewhat more than 2 seers.
The imports to Kharan are joree cloth, suparee, telee, khesh and the
Imports. Other Shikarpoor cloth. Articles to a small amount,
adequate to the consumption of the district alone, as Kharan is not a
bunder or central mart.
The best season for a merchant to arrive at Kharan is at japad, or
spring, harvest time. The hire of a camel from Kalat is 5 Kashanee
Camelhire. rupees, and from Gwodar 10 rupees. This year great
profit was made by the export of grain to Panjgoor and Mukrdn,
where there is still a great dearth.
I remained five days at Kharan, and in the sixth I took my leave
of the Khan, when I presented him with a vial of attar
and an ivory fine tooth comb, which latter called forth
great admiration, and of course intended for the mistress, whose favor
nM Sos. ea often leads to the esteem of the master of the house,
ence. although the lordly Mahomedan would not like to con-
fess such influence even to himself. I also to-day hired a riding camel
to take me as far as the next stage for 3 joorees. On the 13th October
1838, being the 12th day after leaving Kalat, I left Kharan, and pro-
Leave
1844. | 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 675
ceeded ina West and W. S. W. direction for 5 kos to Band-i- Bijad,
over a level road, the cultivation on the preciricts of which
depends on the rain. At the stage are 5 or 6 gidons of
Baloochees, and a number of tamarisk trees.
14th October.—Proceeded in a S.W. and West direction 10 kos over
a level plain without water to Band-i-Kurreem
Khan, where there are no habitations, although there
appear to be a large number in the neighbourhood,
judging from the large number of cattle and sheep brought at mid-
day to be watered at the Band. I purchased one of the latter for one
_ jooree, the fleece of which must have weighed nearly 12 seers, whereas
the jooree was not worth more than 4 Kashanee rupee. The water
of this Band is not sufficient for the purposes of cultivation.
15th October.—Proceeded in a Westerly direction 4 kos, having on
my right a jungle of tamarisk, and on my left the desert; and 4 kos
further in a S. W. and S.S. W. direction over a desert plain to a
well called Choh-i-Jalai, the water of which is rather
brackish ; there are no habitations, and only a few
tamarisk trees, which with the kaghaz bush, forms food for camels.
From this stage to Washuk, there are two roads; on the one to the
right there is no water, whereas there is water in three places on the
one to the left; but without a very good guide, they are likely to be
missed, and then God have mercy on the poor traveller.
16th October.—Taking water with me, I proceeded inaS.S. W.
direction 6 kos, which appeared to men and animals 12, the road
being over an undulating plain of loose sand ; and spent the night in
this chol or waste, in which however, there are gaz and
kaghaz trees for the camels.
17th October.—Proceeded in a Southerly direction 2 kos to Washuk,
having travelled from Kharan in the day time, for the
purpose of seeing the road, whereas travellers invariably
perform the journey at night, from the dread of thirst.
To the North of Washuk is Kharan ; to the East Kal ; to the South
Rakshan ; and to the West Gormdel. To the im-
mediate west and east, it is bounded by hills, to the
north by waste and to the south by a ravine and hills. Wheat, barley
and juwaree are cultivated at Washuk by the rain, There is also a
4¥
Band-i-Bijad.
Band-i-Kurreem
han.
Choh-i-Jalai.
Chol.
Washuk.
Boundaries.
676 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
karez, that turns a small mill near the huts of Meer Kureem Khan
Halikzai. The inhabitants of Washuk do not exceed 800 male adults.
Of the five camels paid yearly to Kharan, the Halikzais furnish 3ds,
the nakeebs or serfs 3d, and the Kudhadonees id,
the fractions being collected in wheat. The Halikzais
do not pay a tithe of their lands, it having been remitted by the
ancestors of Azad Khan of Kharan, as “ the price of blood,” or khoon-
bha. The tithe of dates may amount to 400 pats or
packages. The principal men are Kureem Khan,
Alum Khan, Meer Sahadad, Ameer Khan, Juma Khan, Meer Bijad,
and Fukeer Mahommed. Meer Azad Khan yearly sends a deputy to
collect the revenue, but he does not, nor can he, hit them very tight.
There is a small insignificant tower in Washuk, and the inhabitants
store their grain in pits in the ground.
From Washuk to Jalk is an 8 days’ journey, and to Kal 7 days.
A tax is levied on strange merchants of 2 jorees for every camel
Duties. purchased, and they are numerous, and Kashanee import
Tribute.
Principal Men.
duty for every camel load of goods.
The inhabitants live in gidons in the summer, and in mud and mat
huts in the winter; they use for firewood the gaz, kanboor and
kaghaz ; and for building, the date stem.
The productions which form articles of export are ghee, wool, dates,
wheat, barley, and juwaree. Dates this year were with
great profit exported to Kharan, Nashky and Welat, on ac-
count of the dearness of grain at those places.
There are no resident Hindoo tradesmen here, but a few come
at the grain and date harvest time, which latter is
Exports.
Date Harvest.
called Hamen.
21st October.—Having hired a camel for two jorees to take me as
far as Panjgoor, made my preparations for starting. I found I was to
have the company of Kurreem Khan Halikzai, who on
hearing of the Shahghdsee’s intended visit to Panjgoor,
had been ordered to proceed to the latter place with 30 match-
lockmen to hold out the fort of Kharddbdédan, which belongs to
Muheem Khan Nowshervanee, uncle of Azad Khan, against the
Khalat troops, until letters could be received from Sardar Raham Dil
Khan of Candahar, who no doubt would write to Mehrab Khan, de-
Companion.
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. | 677
precating any hostile proceedings against a relation of his vassal Azad
Khan.
This day proceeded in a S. W. direction over a level road 10 kos to
Chok-i-Gazo, and again at 7 kos to the right, under the
same hill is another spring called Chakul-i-Kondai.
22nd October.—Started, and at 4 kos arrived at a rivulet bed, to the
right of which are two pools of water, called Shah Dost-aph ; here I
spent the heat of the day, and again starting proceeded another 4 kos,
where to the right in the hollow of a ravine is another pool, called
Mazar-aph, surrounded by tamarisk trees. Here I
spent the night, eating Kabab and listening to Baloch
lays, having purchased a sheep from a neighbouring hel for one
joree.
23rd Ociober.—After a ride of 5 kos arrived at a defile called Tang,
where we alighted under the shade of tamarisk trees, and cooked our
bread in the sand, first scraping a cavity under where the burning
logs had been, putting the bread in, covering it up, and again lighting
a fire over the place. The bread of course requires a little rubbing,
brushing and dusting after being taken out of this patent oven ; 2 kos
further came to a narrow Pass along the side of a mountain very dif-
ficult for a single unladen camel, it is called Mu-
radee Gwarjon. Here I was obliged to dismount,
as one false step of my camel! would have precipitated me, if on him,
into the abyss below. After passing this danger, I put up for the night
one kos further on. .
24th October.—Proceeded sometimes in S.W. and sometimes in a
W.S. W. direction, 10 kos, over a very difficult mountainous road, in
Chah-i-Sor.
Mazar-aph.
Muradee Gwarjon.
some places so narrow as scarcely to admit of a single camel passing ; on
the road, came on the Hadjee Kaur, or “ Dragon’s ra-
vine,” so called from a dragon that infested it, until Ma-
lik Dewar, a famous Baloch saint, whose tomb is at Washuk, converted
it by his curse into stone just as it was retiring into its cave. A green
colored stone is still pointed out with awe and reverence by the Ba-
lochees as the tip of the dragon’s tail. From the pools in this ravine we
filled our masheks, or water bags, as there was no water to be expected
at the stage which has not even a name, not being a fixed one. The
mat flag is plentiful in the Kaur.
Hajee Kaur.
678 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
25th October.—Proceeded in a 8. W. direction in the bed ofa kaur,
or ravine, 6 kos between hills to Panjgoor, which I should say bears
directs S. W. from Washuk. No forage for horses is to be procured on
the road.
The district of Panjgoor is bounded on the West by Tang and
Param; on the South by Balogatar; on the East by Grishk and
Boundariess Rakshan; and on the North by a part of the range called
by Pottinger, the Mach, or date tree mountains, which is known on
the Panjgoor side as Sobz-Koh, or green mountains.
The following are the villages of Panjgoor according to their size ;
Villages. viz. Eesai, Bunistan, Tasp, Khudabadan, Gormkon,
Washbood, Sordoo, Sori Kouron, Kalag, Damb and Eraf Chitkan and
Duzanaph. The Kouri Rakhshan runs through the valley of Panjgoor
Rakshan River. from East to West; but some of its water reach-
es the sea on account of the number of bunds thrown across it, and
canals drawn from it for the irrigation of the Dasht and Koochag, or
remote lands. The greater part of the cultivation depends on the rain,
which is owing to the ignorance, and partly to the apathy of the inha-
Gapabilitted 4 bitants, as water is to be found within 10 and 15
soil. kulach, or fathoms of the surface. Were it not for
this apathy of the cultivators, and short-sightedness of the government,
the cultivation might be doubled and trebled. The productions are
Productions. barley, wheat, beans, and peas, in the beginning of
summer; and rice, juwaree and dates in the beginning of autumn,
cultivated with the river water ; wheat and red juwaree are produced
Nature of Soil. | in the high lands where there is rain. The soil of
Panjgoor is a stiff loam.
In the village of Eesai are two karezes, one called Waramood and
the other Shakaruk, both commenced in the skirts of Sabz-Koh, and
Karez. terminated under the Rakhshan Kour. The gallery of the karez
isa very wideand high one, and seems a work of such incredible labour,
that the present degenerated men of Panjgoor believe it to be that of
giants or genli. Panjgoor is ruled by a deputy governor, or jode
nishan, on the partof Meer Mehrab Khan, who is a slave, by name
Mulla Peer Mahommed, who collects only half the revenue; the other
half belonging to the tribe of Gichkees, who according to popular belief,
became possessed of it in the following manner :—
eS eS
=. ne ©
——- Ts ll
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 679
The Gichkees are believed, and believe themselves to be a colony of
Gichkees. Sikhs, and this belief is supported by the fact, that they
are the only tribe in Baloochisthan that do not allow the razor to
touch their heads. Their reason for originally settling at Gichk was,
that they found the inhabitants very peaceable and unresisting. Soon
after their arrival, they commenced forays in the Panjgoor district, the
inhabitants of which place not able to resist them, laid a complaint
before their governor at Kech, who was a descendant of Cyrus, who
lent them a force with which they succeeded in nearly exterminating
the Sikhs. But the few that remained, took refuge among the Bra-
hoees, and got them to join forces to attack Kech ; to this they consent-
ed only on condition of having half of all the conquered districts,
which they enjoy to the present day. The Gichkees are fond of
surrounding the common bedstead, on which they carry their dead to
the grave, with a red silk cloth, which is divided between the grave-
digger and priest.
The governor on the part of the Gichkees is Meer Ahmed Gichkee,
Governor. gon of Meer Hasan, who was Meer Nusseer Khan’s son-
in-law.
The revenue in ready money amounts to 2,000 Kashanee rupees,
Revenue. six of which go to a Seetaranee ducat, and that in grain
may amount to 10,000 Panjgooree, or 500 Company’s maunds at the
tithe rate for the summer crop, and $rds of the same quantity for the
autumn crop. The revenue derived from dates also, at the tithe rate,
amounts to about 6,500 Company’s maunds. This fruit is so plentiful,
Exuberance of Dates. that cows, asses and camels are partly fed on it;
the very dogs get their share, and in winter horses are given date water
instead of the pure element. The Panjgoorees even declare that some
of them remember once when the Rakshan Kaur swelled to an extra-
ordinary degree, and carried away part of their date groves, that em-
bankments were made of purchase* of dates, to stop the devastation,
and divert the current. The Brahoees of the north soon get ill at Panj-
goor, whereas the Mukranees look upon it as their paradise ; snow some-
Quality of Water. times falls here. The river water is much superior
for drinking to that of the karezes, which is very indigestible.
The principal men of Panjgoor, with Meer Ahmed, are Mulla
Principal Men. Haibatim Kashanee, Mulla Boieeyan Ibrahim, Sher
* Sic, in MS,—parcels ?—Eps.
680 our through parts of Baloochisthan, in [ No. 1538.
Mahomed, Meer Zaly Keenazair, and Meer Ghulam Hussain Kam-
baranee, a man of superior talents and what is more, scarce, veracity °
Konda Noman and Meer Sala, Meer Shah Sevai, Meer Suzad and
Malik Deenar.
The men of Panjgoor are at enmity with the Nowsherwanees of
Kharan and Kooshan.
The principal fort of Panjgoor is that of Eesai, it is 1,200 paces in
Forte circumference, its walls in some places are 10 yards high, in
others 5, and in othersa man canrunup. There are three wells inside,
said to be of the time of the Kaiganee kings, which are not used. It
is a very old fort with a small one outside, to the west are the re-
mains of a half driven mining gallery. The ground on which the fort
is built, is of the stiff loam called in Baloochistan kurk.
From Panjgoor to Beloo is 15 days’ journey over a good road ; to
Roads. Kaldt 12 days for laden camels, via Gidur ; before ar-
riving at which latter place, there is a difficulty to be surmounted.
From Panjgoor to Kech 7 days, without habitations, except at Ban-
kada, the 5th stage. Grazing for camels being at all times plentiful, but
grass for horses depending on the rain.
To Ormara 15 days, and to Gwadar 12 days, via Ashap and Keel
Kour.
The domestic animals of Panjgoor are camels, sheep and goats in
Animals. plenty ; cattle, asses, and a few horses belonging to the
chiefs. ‘There are no buffaloes.
The wild animals are hogs, deer, foxes, horses, and jackals, which
latter are very troublesome.
The fruits of Panjgoor, besides dates, are pomegranates, grapes, figs,
Fruits. mulberries, lemons, limes, peaches and apples; some of
these just in sufficient quantity to swear by, as the Khajee, who when
asked “‘ Baghe daree,” have you a garden ? answered ‘‘ Bhale darum,”
yes, I have one.
The dates of Panjgoor, which last three months, that is, from their
Dates. first appearing to their disappearing from the trees, are ex-
ported in every direction. They consist of seventeen different kinds,
such as muza watee, kaloot, subzo rabaiee, dandaree, kuroch, satharo,
jawansor, kuraba, hush kuch, papo, washkouk, &c.
The Panjgoorees pride themselves much on their dates, and a far-
mer when they are ripe, will look up at the red and yellow clusters,
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 68}
and exclaim, “ Ah what a heavenly halo.” The vabazee dates liter-
ally mean “ godlike,” and the sabzo are called ‘‘ Protect like.’ They
have even verses in praise of this fruit.
The manner of fecundating the female date trees as given by Pottin-
ger, is quite correct, with the exception of one point, 2. e. no incision is
made in the core of the female tree, but a stalk of the male bunch is
inserted with its powder in the half-opened bud of the female, which
is then hid up for four or five days; the male flower does not lose its
qualities by being kept 4 or 5 days after being cut. The Balochees
cut the fresh male bud with the last year’s dates.
The trees are climbed with a strong stiff wisp of flags, tied to the
climber’s waist and the tree.
Dates are chiefly exported in two states ; lst, Khu ma, or dates ripen-
ed on the tree; 2d, chwwara, or dates plucked when beginning to
ripen, boiled and dried in the sun, chiefly of the kinds kaloot, sabzo,
and mazawatee. MHalf ripe dates called darupruch, especially of
the kinds doudaree, sabzo and washkouk are much esteemed for
immediate use; they are sometimes cut in halves and exported in
strings.
The natives build with the date stem, and use it as well as the
Wood. dried mat flag or persh, as firewood. The higher classes
Dwellings» jive in mud houses, and the poorer in huts of trellis-work
covered with mat flags.
This year was one of great scarcity, and the Hindoos sent for their
Scarcity. grain from Gwadaran, unheard-of reversion of things like
sending carraway seeds to Kirman.
Besides 25 small Hindoo resident traders, there are 20 blacksmiths,
12 carpenters, 10 shoe-makers, 7 goldsmiths, 4 hut makers,
and 500 weavers. Kalat merchants come at the autumn
harvest to purchase dates, bringing with them the articles exported
from Shikarpoor, while the merchants from Beloo bring Kashanee
rupees, and those from the bundur of Gwadar come at the
Artizans.
Merchants.
summer harvest to purchase ghee and wool for the Bom-
bay market, and bring with them Seetaranee ducats and Bombay gro-
eceries and cloths, The largest merchant of Panjgoor is Rahmoo, an
agent of Mayan Bhattya, son of Moola Keechee; and has not a larger
682 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
capital than 8,000 rupees employed in trade; a very rich man for
Panjgoor. i
At Panjgoor is manufactured a coarse cotton cloth-of two different é
breadths, both small, one called semox and the other chha-
mar. The weavers make comparatively little use of their
wool at home; they merely manufacture felt rugs, as their fabric
for the hot weather resembles bunting.
I bought some common shawls from Bombay, which I wanted 6
rupees Kashanee each for; the common remark made was, ‘‘ Why
should not the English be a rich nation? their merchants come
and buy a couple of hand-fulls of wool from us for a few needles
and gloves, work it into a fabric, and sell it to us for 6 and 7 rupees.”
Among the groceries exported from Bombay, the cloves and carda-
mums are not eaten, but worn in strings round the necks
of the women, and form two of the ingredients of a certain
cosmetic, that is very prevalent and fashionable in the country, on which
a great deal of money is spent; they also are put in akind of pomatum
made of sheep’s tail and fat, and colored with lemon leaf, with which
they smear their hair.
The following are the estimated yearly imports to Panjgoor:—
Manufacture.
Cosmetics.
Coverlids, .. . ) }
Telee Cloth,.. .. |
Japan ditto,.. .«.
Cotton Plaid, ... } 20 camel loads, ¢ From Kaldt and Kochee.
Lungee, aelOrae | |
Soosee Cloth,
Chintz, s asahuae dl J
Madder, 10 camel loads, )
Nor, .. 20 ditto ditto, |
Lead, .. 2. ditto ditto,
Salt petre, 5 ditto ditto, |
1 ditto ditto,
Coarse flowered Muslin, |
Checked ditto, .. .. t 1 ditto ditto,
Dimity and calico ditto, \
Silk Daryai and Mashroo, 100 pieces,
Groceries .. .. ~- 18 camel loads,
From Bombay, via the
seaport of Gwadar.
Pedlery,) 20.06 6 ..- | ditto ditto,
Silk Thread, £0 es maunds,
Handkerchiefs, .. -- 5 camel loads,
Pearl, Coral and Glass Beads, 500 rupees’
worth,
1844. ] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 683
The rupee current is the Kashanee rupee, the Seetaramee ducat,
and the Mahommedee rupee. The latter in accounts is reckoned as
4 of Kashanee and 3 of it is called Shaithan, which latter they have no
lower fraction.
They measure nothing, every thing is sold by weight; 1 Panjgoor
Weight. maund, 2 Company’s seers, and a fraction; 24 kejas |
maund, and the keja weighs 8 Kashanee rupees.
A merchant, sending an agent to Panjgoor, fixes the amount of
capital which he is to trade with, and the agent re-
ceives half the profits ; but should the agent himself require
an addition to the original amount, the merchant charges him interest
for the same, and deducts the amount from his half share of the profits.
The merchants from the sea ports seldom receive ready money for
their articles, but cloths or gudh of the kinds sermar and
chaimar, manufactured at Panjgoor, generally at the rate
of 20 cubits the rupee; with this and ducats, wool in large quantities
is alone purchasable.
The hire of a camel from Gwadar is one Seetaramee ducat.
The peculiarities in the appearance of the people of Panjgoor are,
Shee that the men seldom gird their loins or wear a turban,
eculiarities < EAs
in appearance. but a bag cap; and the women divide their hair into
two horns, which they stiffen with gum.
The Panjgoorees have peculiar habits ; for instance in summer, they
sleep quite naked, having thick curtains round their beds
as a double preventative against musquitoes and heat ; and
when they feel unwell, they are very anxious to procure raisins or apri-
cot kernels, which latter they consider a specific even in cases of dim-
ness of sight.
_There is a common custom, when a boy is circumcised, for his father
to proclaim to the assembled guests some grant of land or
chattels, instead of bequeathing it to him at his death ; and
before a boy puts on his wedding clothes, he is taken without the vil-
lage, and washed with soap in public, for the satisfaction of the bride’s
relations, with cold water even in the middle of winter.
A Balochanee will not give her daughter to an Affghan, for fear of her
heart breaking under the strict, decorous seclusion in which
she would be obliged to live, and the girl herself would
hold in detestation a shaven-headed youth, without a couple of long
locks for her to comb and oil. The Balochee also objects to eat horse-
flesh.
Agent.
Gudh.
Habits.
Customs.
Prejudice.
CZ
684 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 158.
The Balochees have a great prejudice to travelling. It is a common
thing to hear a mother wish a wayward son a journey to Kabul ; even
the pilgrimage to Makka is regarded with a feeling of shame, some-
thing approaching to that of being obliged to beg ; and the Baloch pil-
grim is much commisserated, and perhaps not a little despised, for fore-
going the pleasures of love-making and fighting, prominent character- .
istics of the innate disposition of a true Baloch.
The Baloch of Panjgoor differs in the pronunciation from the Ba-
Language. Jochky of Scindh. The former having the letter s for ch,
as the Panjgoorees call a mother mas instead of math. They also change
the kA into &; their dates they call Aoorma instead khoorma, and a
teacher ahmed instead of akhund. They moreover substitute g for
gh, as they call a razor zsfarag and not istaragh. They also change
Kh into &, as they call an uncle nako and not nakho.
Illness detained me at Panjgoor for nearly a month and a half, and
my resolution was nearly failing me. Indeed had I not accepted the
small advance of money from Major Leech at Kaldt, nothing would
have induced me to prosecute my journey. ‘The people of Panjgoor,
moreover, tried to alarm me, by their sketch of the character of the
chief of Koohag, which place I had been instructed to visit. How-
ever, I procured a letter of introduction from Meer Ghulam Hussein
Kamburanee, and hiring two matchlock-men, set out.
10th November, 1838.—Travelled in a westerly direction 8 kos, |
Bunsang. over a good level road to Bunsang, where I found
water, wood and fodder for the camels, but no habitations ; and next
morning starting at day-light, and proceeding ina W. N. W. direc-
tion over a tolerable good road 9 kos, arrived at Askan Koh, or Deer
Askan Koh. Mountain, a place without Seen oe having crossed
the Askan Kour, or Deer Rivulet.
12th November.—Eight kos over bad road in a W. N. W. direction,
Mashkad. brought me to the other side of the Kour, or river Mash-
kad, into which six streams are said to discharge themselves. Sudden
swells are so frequent, that it has received the appellation of “‘ Suwas
Bondi Zantalah, implying, that the man deserved to be a cuckold who
should be so foolish as to stop in the least, even to tie his shoe.
13th November.—Four kos over a difficult road ina N. W. by W.
Koohag. direction, brought me to Koohag, which I approached
;
Mi
;
ES Se ang eee eee ee
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul, 685
with fear and trembling. On my arrival I was immediately sum-
moned to the presence of Murad Khan Kausherwanee, the chief, who
is cousin of Azad Khan of Kharan; my companion reminding me
that I had been warned not to attempt the road. After salutations
had past, the Khan seemed on the point of asking me how I had been
so bold as to enter his territory with merchandize without his invi-
tation ; I therefore forestalled him by requesting a few words with him
in private; taking him on one side I told him that his cousin had ex-
pressed a wish to see his nuptials with his deceased brother Mahommed
Khan’s widow celebrated at Panjgoor. “ Ah Ahmed,” said he “ but
the lady does not fancy me.” I replied, ‘‘Can it be possible that |
Charm. you are not aware of the efficacy of my charms? I
will give you four if you will keep them secret, one adapted to each
of the four elements, one of which at least must suit the constitution
or disposition of the lady.” I at the same time delivered my letter of
introduction, which was a very strong one, and taking my leave, join-
ed my companions, who were astonished to see me return whole in
property, as the Khan had been previously heard to say, that the game
had come itself to the fowler. Koohag is bounded on the north by
the Koh-i-Segaham, beyond which is the district of Chagai, inhabited
Antimony. by Regees three stages distant. In this hill is produc-
ed a kind of inferior antimony, which is brought by the Regees with
the salt of Peer Kaisae to Panjgoor ; it is not used for the eyes, but for
camel and sheep sores.
There is little cultivation, but that of the date and nearly half the
land composes the estate of Meer Murad Khan, son of Muhim Khan,
brother of Meer Abbas Khan of Kharan. He has no retainers but his
own slaves, with whom he exacts a little revenue, 3,000 Panjgoor
maunds grain, 50 Co.’s maunds dates, and 400 rupees from his
neighbours, the inhabitants of Goruk and the Koh Baloch, who pay
it from being subject to his forays.
Some years back a detachment of Persians from Kirman, under one
Abul Kasam, laid siege to Koohag, but were obliged to retire, content-
Friends and Enemies. ing themselves with one blind camel as tribute.
Meer Murad Khan is on good terms with Mohummud Shah of Silb,
who is indeed his uncle, with Meer Gojigan of Dezak, and with his
cousin Meer Azad Khan of Kharan ; at the same time he is at enmity
686 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
with Meer Ahmed Auchkee and Mulla Haibalan Kashanee of Panj-
goor. His father Meer Muheem was such a tyrant, that he was styled
the Nadir of Mukran, and was said never to have been able to eat any
thing that was not stolen. There is another cub of the old wolf alive,
Fort. called Kadar Buksh. The fort of Koohag is 130 yards in
circumference, and 80 yards high, and with walls 2 guz thick.
The fort is full inside to half the height of the walls, and Baman
Baman. has one gate to the East. On the West are the remains
of an old mining gallery driven by the Persians, not with the inten-
Mine. tion, as might be supposed, of blowing up a bastion, but
of getting at the well inside, and then preventing the garrison draw-
ing water, and this according to the ideas of a Baloch, is the only use
of a mine.
The Shahghasee of Mehrab Khan once besieging Koohaghut, was
after a time obliged to return to Panjgoor on forage failing. The fort
stands on Kurk, which may be sand there, and not loam. I staid
four days at Koohag, and on the fifth, 18th November,
started and proceeded in W. N. W. direction over a tole-
rable road, with water on it 8 kos to the Kowr-i-Mashhed ; another road
ee to Julh is via Kuwarbastan, a small village to the N. W.
hed. of Koohag, situated at the foot of the Sujahan mountain.
At this stage there are no habitations, but plenty of fodder for camels,
Kurk
and firewood.
19th November.—Proceeded over a good road in a W. N. W. direc-
tion 8 kos to Ispandak, which belongs to Meer Jahangeer
Khan Nowsherwanee, uncle of Meer Azad Khan of Kha-
ran ; the place is pleasantly situated, and is well cultivated, consisting
of about 100 huts. I here exchanged 4b of black pepper for 2 large
fowls, for having which large quantity with me, they conferred on me
the title of Mulla Pepper. Luckily the chief was absent on a foray, but
notwithstanding this, the people managed during the night to steal a
donkey of mine. I intended to await the return of the Meer, in hopes
of recovering Mr. Long-ears; but the Mulla of the mosque I spent
the night in, told me, I might think myself fortunate in getting the
Short-ears, or camels, with their loads safe out of the place, which he
advised me leaving immediately, and for which advice may his store
increase.
Ispandak.
f 3, Ta
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 687
20th November.—Proceeded 5 kos in a N. N. W. direction over a
ee eal. level road to Dehag, and then 5 kos due North over a diffi-
lagan. cult road to Kallagan, which is a pretty place, but infested
by a set of very inquisitive and troublesome people, who levy a tax of
2 seers of grain on every camel load of merchandize. I had an attack
of fever at night, and next morning when preparing to start, was stop-
ped by a man, who was desirous of purchasing some of the madder I
had with me; I concluded a bargain with him, 2 Co’s. maunds for 2
ducats, while at the same time he had managed in examining the goods
to extract a skull cap, without my noticing him. I this day also dida
little business with the ladies, bartering needles for eggs, at the rate of
one of the former for two of the latter, and at night gave my hostess, the
Mulla of the mosque’s wife, some rice and meat to cook
for me, which she succeeded in boiling down to just one-
half, no doubt, good lady, with the best motives, and from a regard
for my health, as well as in consideration of my fever.
22d November.—Proceeded 7 kos in a due North direction, which
was a level road, part in a rivulet bed and part over a plain to Jalk a,
collection of 9 small forts or towers, surrounded with cul-
tivation, among which the fine papo date is conspicuous.
The chief of this place is Maddat Khan, who declares himself by
descent a Kuresh Seyud. The principal fort, which was once of some
consequence, was destroyed by a detachment of Nadir Shah’s army.
It has a ditch, and is 900 yards in circumference, its walls being 40
guz in height. After the time of Nadir Shah, this place paid a tribute
of 600 rupees to Candahar ; but they have now no head even among
themselves, who can enforce tribute of the 600 rupees.
Jalk or Jalak, which literally means “ desolated,” paid
400, and Kallagan 200 rupees. At this place are now to be seen traces
of a Persian garrison, there being outside the fort several domes orna-
mented with glass enamelling worked into figures.
The principal men next toMaddat Khan, are Rais Janbeg, Rais Jonoo,
and Rais Bhaieean ; these men would have no hesitation
in inviting Meer Gajeean of Dezak to Jalk, should Mad-
dat Khan attempt to assess them ; indeed they have already as a check,
put his brother Alam Khan in possession of one of the small forts of
Cookery.
Jalk.
Tribute.
Chiefs.
688 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
Jalk. The brother of Maddat Khan, Dilawar Khan, holds a fort of his
own, called Kohen Kalat.
One of the forts belongs to Meer Sulla Husarzai Regee, who is said
to be able to collect 1,000 men; he is at enmity with the Mahommud
Sonnee Brahoees.
Jalk is bounded on the East by the dry lands of Mashhed, and on
the other sides by hills.
From Jalk tothe shrine of Peer Kaisar isa 6 days’ journey for laden
camels, and from thence to Seishtan is 6 more over a sandy desert.
I remained 6 days at Jalk, when I disposed of some mushroo, and
on the 7th day, being the 29th November, started and pro-
ceeding ina due West direction over a tolerable road 5
kos, arrived at Singan, a small fort belonging to Kamal Khan Regee, a
great thief, but a good host ; the place is well cultivated by a running
stream, and supplies are plentiful.
30th November.—Eight kos in a due West direction over a good road
Nahoo. brought me to Nahoo, a small village, well supplied with
water, provisions and firewood, which latter I found very necessary,
as the place and weather were very cold. I put up in the mosque,
and was soon surrounded by questioners, who expressed their surprise
at seeing a person in my apparent circumstances proceeding on a
pilgrimage, as the generality of pilgrims begged their way. I explained
to them, that according to our law, the pilgrimage was only ordained
for persons in easy circumstances. They then seemed astonished at
my having come this road, as the road thence to the south was a very
difficult one, over which horsemen were obliged to lead their horses,
and which Mulla Haroon, the great saint of Dezak, of whom I shall
hereafter have occasion to speak, had named Peel Sarat, on account
Jak-i-Lukman. of its narrowness. They also mentioned a road to
the West on which 3 kos from Nahoo was a mountain Pass, or jak,
called Jak-i-Lukman, from the philosopher of that name, who cut the
road out of the mountain. To the north of Nahoo is a mountain
called Sufed Koh, in which the natives believe gold and silver to
exist, and on which they say in the spring is a bush which at night from
Singan.
a distance appears on fire, but on approaching it, the delusion vanishes. —
I wanted very much to visit the Jak-i-Lukman, as I fancied it might
1844. ] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 689
bear some mark of Alexander the Great, but snow fell at night, and
made me abandon the project. From Nahoo across the Jak-i-Lukman
to Gwasht is 10 kos, a place-of 80 houses, well cultivated, and inhabit-
ed by people who call themselves Kuresh, and where there is said to
be a slab with inscription on it. Thence 10 kos over a difficult moun-
tainous road to a stagein the hills without habitations, and from
that 8 kos to Gwasth, the first village in the Surhad district, over an
easy road, infested by thieves of the Domanee and Bambaree tribes.
3rd December.—Left Nahoo, and proceeded due South acress the
Peel-i-Surut, a very narrow and extremely difficult Pass, there being
springs both at the North and South side of the mountain 10 kos to
Dezak. the village of Mulla Haroon in the district of Dezak, in
which are situated seven villages ; viz. Shash-toonk, Tarjae, Reyyon,
Mulla Ahmed, Meer Gajion ; and the village of Mulla Haroon, which
is the largest in Dezak.
To the West of Dezak is Panjgoor, and to the South a mountain,
Boundaries. | beyond which is Sib; to the North is the mountain of
Puli-Surtat, which is the same as that of Sirjahan; which beyond
Dezak, turns to the North towards Southern.
The district is a fertile one, watered by Aarez, and the cotton pro-
duced here is famous throughout Mukrdn; it is of two
kinds, white and light brown.
The chief of the district is Meer Gajian, who claims descent from
es. Shah Nyamutulla-i-Walee, his retainers are Domanees, and he
is very popular in the district. When Abul Kasam invaded the
country in Futteh Ali Shah’s time, he levied 5 rupees on each Han-
jan, or water-right ofa day and night. Meer Gajion assesses the lands
at ath of the produce, and of the date produce he realises about
Brown Cotton.
150 Company’s maunds, besides 250 maunds of juwaree, and 150
maunds of cotton. The principal men of Dezak, besides Mulla Haroon
and Meer Gajian, are Khaleel Khan, Meer Rusheed,
Meer Ameen Noorulla, and Mulla Ahmed.
The forts of Dezak are like those of Balochisthan, of little conse-
quence. There are at least 1,000 cotton weavers at this place, and
the fabrics are exported in all directions; while wool, goats’ hair,
ghee and asafcetida are imported from Jushad. There are 100
Hindoo traders here, the principal of whom is an agent of Magon
Principal Men.
690 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [ No. 158.
Bhatya, of the port of Gwadur, who trades with a capital of 3,000
rupees. The mass of the inhabitants of Dezak are either weavers or
small traders. From Dezak to Surbad is a 6 days’ journey
for laden camels, over a good road. A taxis levied of two Com-
Duties. pany’s seers per load on merchandize, unless the merchant
puts up with Mulla Haroon, when he is exempted.
The animals of Dezak are the same as those of Panjgoor, and so are
the fruits and birds of the latter. The konk, partridge,
however is more plentiful. I saw two cypress trees at
Dezak and one at Kahoo; they are not to be seen at Panjgoor. The
Dezakees build with the date’s stem, and use it as well as the kauboon,
as firewood.
On arriving at Dezak, I proceeded direct to the village of Mulla
Haroon, and introduced myself as a merchant from Panjgoor, who
Saint. was desirous of becoming a disciple. The saint himself soon
made his appearance, and at the first glance I recognised him as one
of those “‘ san poachers,” so common in Arabia, Persia, and Hindus-
than. He appointed the second day for my initiation, and explained
to his disciples, that I had seen a vision of him while in Hindusthan,
and had then believed on him. I of course corroborated his statement.
On reaching my lodgings, 1 found an entertainment awaiting me,
which consisted of some bread and a mess of pottage, called
peegash, the receipt for making it is as follows. To one
ounce of sheep tail fat, add a gallon of water; boil and
throw in ith of bruised pomegranate seeds, 4 a handful of flour
and a little turmeric, and when this soup is on the groaning board be-
fore you in bowls, you may contemplate the little globules of fat floating
on the surface, and compare them to eight stars in the azure firma-
Roads.
Animals,
Peegash.
ment.
On the day appointed for the initiation, I repaired to the akhund’s
vested house, who after receiving me kindly, enquired whether
f I had performed my ablutions. In the fear of being ordered
to do so in cold water, I replied in the affirmative. He then sat him-
self on the ground, and ordered me to do the same immediately in
front of him; spreading over my head and his own a thick quilt, he
ordered me to sink my head on my chest, and shutting my eyes, to
look with my inward eyes into my heart, and repeat aloud the name
ti bin
“S89 ee we eee ree. --.
Sorte kee
1844. ] 1838 and 1839, oy Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 691
of God. This I continued to do for a full hour and a half, until my
neck was nearly broken, and until I was completely exhausted from
profuse perspiration, my confessor during this time being silent, and
buried, I strongly suspected in sound sleep; at last awaking and
perceiving my uneasiness, he removed the quilt, and telling me to hold
my head up, asked what I had seen! I replied he knew as well as I did,
and that it was not proper to reveal my stories ; he smiled and said, he
had great hopes of my becoming an adept. AsI had taken with mea
ducat, some sugar, and a piece of muslin for the saint, instead of peegash,
I that evening received an entertainment of coarse rice. The old gentle-
man whose neck has absolutely grown stiffin the position he constantly
keeps it in, was very anxious to see that the Dezakees did not impose
on me, or cheat me in purchasing my madder, and offered to become
my broker. I apologized and said, I could not trouble him with my
worldly concerns, and that I would only do so with regard to my
spiritual affairs; the truth is, I was afraid of his taking a fancy to
sundry articles among my goods. I sold my madder at the rate of
10 Dezak maunds the ducat, and discharged the two matchlockmen
I had brought with me from Panjgoor, giving them as part of their
hire, one of my camels, which had suffered much from the cold. On
taking leave of the Peev, he gave mea letter to Meer Mahommed Shah
of Sib, and tied his own turban round my head. I remained 12 days
at Dezak, having during this time despatched my manuscripts, for fear
of accidents, to Gwadar on the 18th.
16th December.—Started and proceeded due South across a moun-
tain Pass extending for 4 kos, the first and last 5 kos of which are over
a good road. This mountain can be turned both to the East and West,
and a good road thus procured the whole way. Sib is bounded on the
East by Dehsk ; on the West by Pas-i-Kok, inhabited by Bar-
hanzais and Badowzais, which latter are originally of the tribe
_ of the Seer of Sheeraz, who emigrated from that place in pursuit of the
Koords of Sarhad, with whom they had a blood feud, and who owe
them a blood debt ; on the North by the detached mountains ; on the
South by a mountain, on the other side of which are the villages of
Afshan and Erifshand.
The village of Sib is a small one, and has only been raised into im-
portance by the forays of its chief, Mahommed Shah, son of Shah
Da
Sib.
692 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
Saffer, who claims descent from the house of Saffareea. Next
Chief. in importance to him are Balooch Abder Ruman and Ba-
leeat. The cultivation of Sib is confined, and there are a few date
trees. The chief has two sons, Nadir Shah and Taimoor Shah. The
following are the places, tribes, chiefs and numbers that owe allegiance
to him :—
Place. Tribe. Headmen. Matchlockmen.
Gwasht, Kuresh, Mulla Mahomed, 100
Erifshan, Erifshanees, Kadar Buksh, 200
Force. Molatan, Molatanees, Mulla Meer, 400
Deban, Debanees, Badeen, 100
Pasi- Koh, Burhanzais, Khuda Buksh, 200
Sohran, Sohranees, Baiee-on, 200
Mahommed Shah is held in great dread throughout Mukrén,
Forays. | and he has even carried his forays into the district of
Ketch. He collects no revenue from Sib itself, which is nearly al]
his own hereditary estate. His revenue may amount to
5,000 maunds at 25 Company’s maunds of grain,* 200
packages of dates, 125 maunds of juwaree, 80 maunds of cotton, 5,000
Mahommadee rupees of which gold and ducat,t and 1,000 sheep, and
24 maunds of ghee. Besides these regular incomes, he forays to an ex-
tent, bringing home camels and prisoners, male and female, whom he
sells for slaves. The fort of Sib is 450 yards in circumference, built on
stony ground, and the citadel is an inner fort 120 yards ; the height of
the outer fort or paseel walls 8 guz, that of the meeree
walls 25 guz. The meeree is full to half the height of the
walls, the thickness of the remaining part of which may be 2 guz.
The people of Sib burn the édaranshok grass, with which when
green, they feed their horses and asses, &c.
On arriving at this place, Mahommed Shah was absent at Panjgoor,
on a visit to his son-in-law Mahommed Aly Khan. His
lady, a sister of Meer Maladad Gichkee of Panjgoor, whom
my father administered a charm to, when suffering from the small
pox, sent her nurse to me in the mehman khana, to apologise for her
not coming herself, as 40 days had not yet elapsed since her delivery.
Revenue.
Paseel.
Reception.
* Sic, in orig.—Eps. + Sic. in orig.—Eps.
1844.] 1888 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 693
Next day I entered myself, taking with me a piece of jamdanee and
one of mashroo for her son, as well as a little henna, a few raisins and
apricot kernels, for which in the evening I received a sheep roasted
whole, which was a very acceptable change from the peeyash, and
penance of Mulla Haroon, especially to the few poor Hajees who ac-
companied me from Dezak. On the sixth day after my arrival, I ex.
pressed a desire to be going, but my kind hostess, who had entertained
us every day, pressed me to stay, as Mahommed Shah was hourly ex-
pected, and would no doubt give me a horse or camel. I feigned great
indignation in being offered any thing unlawful, such as stolen property,
and asked her how she could expect me to accept such, knowing I had
lately become a disciple of Moolla Haroon, and was not then two stages
removed from the scene of my initiation. On this she presented me
with a Kesh of brown cotton grown on the family estate. In the
afternoon, Meer Mahommed Shah arrived with 30 horsemen from
Intercourse with Lanjgoor, dressed as a Persian, black sheep skin cap,
poNES wide trowsers, and tight sleeves. As this chief, next
to Azad Khan of Kharan, is of the greatest note in Mukran, I intend
dwelling at length on my intercourse with him.
In about an hour after his arrival, he called to see me in the mosque,
and enquired the news from Panjgoor which I gave him, and inform-
ing him, that I intended proceeding to Bampoor. He strongly advised
Feroz Meerza. me to desist, at least to delay my departure, as Feroz
Meerza, brother of Mahomad Shah, was expected from Narmeas to
invade the former place. To the delay I expressed myself inclined, as
I should then have the pleasure perhaps of fighting the infidel Per-
sians in his company, but in the mean time I expressed my intention
of visiting Sarhad, and then proceeding to Bampoor. He asked me if
it was true, thatin Bombay there were fire-arms that were used with-
out flint, priming or match, and on my assuring him of the fact, he
_ commissioned a pair of pistols of the same kind, which I was not to
forget to bring with me the next time I returned from Bombay.
He also expressed his admiration of a small straight English sword,
with a new scabbard that I had with me, and was much pleased with
a few ball cartridges that I gave him. He asked me a great deal
about British prowess by sea and land, their administration of justice,
and their feelings towards Mahomedans and their own religious insti-
694 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
tutions, all of which questions I answered fully and to his satisfaction,
as well as to that of several bye-standers, who immediately proposed
taking service. They had heard of the occupation of the Island of
Khaig (Karrack) by the English, and wanted to know why they did
not come to Bumpoor, and from thence invade Kirman, as they them-
selves would be happy to enlist and join the expedition for a pecunia-
ry consideration, and begged me to tell the officers at Karrack so.
23d December.—Having procured a guide from Mahommed Shah, I
left Sib, and proceeded 8 kos over a good level road ina N. W. direc-
Dolegeaban. tion to Dolegeaban, a place containing a few goat-hair
tents of Balooches and one well, where already, a shower of rain fell,
and the weather was very cold.
24th December.—Proceeding 5 kos in the same direction over a
Pas-i' Koh. good road, arrived at Pas-i-Koh, where I was lodged and
entertained by one Bejad, who had heard of the kind treatment I had
received from Mahommed Shah of Sib. These people do not at all
bear resemblance to Balochees, as they say themselves, they are origi-
nally from Shiraz.
25th December.—Proceeded in a N. W. direction 10 kos over a
Damanees. good level road to a few huts of Damanees or skirters,
(daman, meaning skirt of a hill.) This night rain fell heavily, and after-
wards snow, which latter with cold piercing wind killed my camel.
26th December.—Proceeded still in the same direction 8 kos over a
Stage. good road, sometimes on foot and sometimes mounted on a
Hospitality. bullock that I had hired for 2 rupees from three miser-
able tents of Balochees, the inmates of which seemed hardly to have the
wherewithal to subsist on, and yet they immediately put their pot on
Paste. the fire, and commenced boiling a few handsful of flour for
me ; this I declined partaking of, pleading their extreme poverty as an
excuse, but really not feeling inclined to paste my inward man. They
then advised me not to go to Turbad where there were thieves, who
would certainly annoy me; if for nothing else, yet merely for my
being a Sunnee.
27th December.—Travelled in a N. W. direction over a level road
Gwash. 6 kos to the village of Gwash, the first and principal one
in the district of Sarbad, which is bounded on the East by Gwash ;
on the West by Varmasheel; on the North by the village of
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 695
Zameen and Koh-i-Diptan ; and on the South, by the Damin Erindagan
and Koh-i- Beer.
The names of the villages of the district are, Zamin, Zamindan, Wafa-
bud, Zyadatee, Khoon-i-kaka, and Nagul, and on the other side of
Koh-i-Diptan, is a village called Sadoz, which is on the road to Hafsa-
drah ; the districts are well cultivated and watered.
The chief of Sarbad is Maddat Khan, Koord, originally from Per-
sia, and his dependents consist of Persians, Damanees and Bambarees.
He collects = th of the produce of the district, which may amount to
2,500 Company’s maunds a-year, of wheat and barley, of which they
reap two crops, besides presents of sheep and ghee.
There are no forts in the district, of any importance, the one of
Gwash being 200 paces in circumference, and 6 guz high.
I was informed that on one of the sides of the mountain of Diptan,
at a great height, was an artificial recess, containing two large
vases, which they had on several occasions tried to reach, but
without success, by fastening date stems one on the other. There is
also, they informed me, at the bottom of the same mountain a stone, on
which is an inscription which has never yet been decypher-
ed by the natives of the district, or by strangers. They
moreover assert, that silver is to be found there, and that a Loree
goldsmith was in the habit of paying yearly visits to the place, mak-
ing a present of several ducats to the chief of Sarbad for permission to
visit the mountain ; but on account of Maddut Khan’s father once rob-
bing him, he had never returned. I wanted very much to see these
wonders, but was prevented by the snow.
Maddut Khan encourages forays, and exacts = th of the plunder.
They are not much at the Hefladrah, and sell their booty, which
is sometimes valuable, consisting of Persian silks and Cash-
mere pashmeena, for a mere trifle in Sarbad and Dezak, on their
Diptan.
Inscription.
return.
From Sarbad to Regan, the following are the stages: Kalag, Asaroo,
Rodi Mahn, and Desert Regan, over a very difficult road.
The following are the animals of Sarbad, in the order of their mul-
tiplicity : goats, sheep, camels, asses, horses, cattle, wild
asses, wild goats said to furnish musk, wolves, jackals,
foxes, tigers. Leopards are also found in the hills.
Animals.
696 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
There is not a date to be seen, the fruits being pomegranates, wal-
nuts, apples, peaches, mulberries, apricots, almonds, Khujak
pears. The inhabitants build very little; when they do,
they generally use mulberry wood.
In the mountain of Beer, a great quantity of cardamums is pro.
duced, and about 20 camel loads are yearly gathered.
In the Diptan mountain are produced sulphur, sala-
moniac, and at the foot of the same mountain is a hot spring;
asafcetida is also plentifully produced. As the inhabitants of Sar-
bad are all thieves, as might be expected, there are no weavers or
resident traders, but at harvest-time Hindoos come from Dezak with
lead and saltpetre, which they exchange for ghee, wool, cardamums
and asafcetida, for transportation to the port of Gwadar. I spent three
days at Sarbad, during which I did not venture to visit Maddut
Khan.
31st December.—Started, and proceeded 8 kos over a good road toa
few tents of Damanees, where I reluctantly put up for the night; to-
wardse vening after having dined, I requested a place in the tent, as the
weather was very cold, which was refused me. I afterwards overheard
them making conjectures as to my wealth, which they all agreed must
be true, as I lived in what to them appeared a most extravagant style,
eating rice and ghee. They moreover learnt from my guide, that I had
been talking a great deal at Sarbad of mines and metals, and that I
must therefore, for both these reasons, be an alchymist. In
fact they determined on stealing my khoorjeen or saddle
bags during the night ; watching was useless, as it would only increase
their suspicions, in fact confirm them. I therefore had recourse to a lit-
tle conjuring that I had learnt in Hindusthan ; first I cook-
ed some dates and sprinkled a little tincture of bhang on
those intended to be distributed to my hosts. I then ignited three
pieces of camphor and set them floating in a basin, and having washed
my mouth well with akrkorah root and sal ammoniac, I held a bit of
ignited charcoal in it, jumping about and pretending to utter incanta-
tions; afterwards beginning to get tired, I gave instructions aloud in
Belochee to what my host supposed were two attendant sprites to take
care of my saddle-bags during the night, and blind and lame any
one that attempted to lay hands on them. My host began now to get
Fruits.
Productions.
Alchymist.
Conjuring.
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 697
really alarmed, and made most abject apologies for not having given
Effect. me a place in the tent before; I took advantage of this im-
pression, and insisted on their champooing me until I fell asleep. The
next morning on getting up, my hosts complained of a head-ache, not
being aware that they were intoxicated, and begged me for God’s sake
to blow on their temples. I called for some butter-milk, and writing
on a slip of paper what they thought was a charm, immersed it, and
ordered them to drink it off. After a short time they of course felt
cooled and refreshed, and brought me a sheep as a present, and insisted
. my being their guest for that night also.
2nd January, 1839.—After being stopped by my hosts to pray for
them I set out, and proceeding over a good road 8 kos, arrived at the
village of Erindagan, where I no sooner had arrived than
I was surrounded by a host of applicants for charms, for
which they paid liberally in fowls, rice, &c. &c.
I here felt diminution in the severity of the cold. As I was proceeding
next day on my journey, I was stopt by a man who entreated me first
to cast a devil out of his wife. The lady it appeared to me was mere-
ly trying the extent of her lord’s affection, and intended to judge of it
by the degree of solicitude (evinced for her recovery.) Fainting and
hysterics not being the fashion in Beloochistan, the ladies are obliged
to have recourse to devils. I immediately caused her to be held
down, and lighting a charm rolled up in rags, held it under her nose
until she fairly repented of her experiment, and until I had impressed
the spectator with a proper sense of my miraculous powers. I must give
the lady great credit, however, for the zest with which she kept up the
farce, speaking all the time as the devil within her, and at last swearing
by king Solomon, whom the natives suppose to have been omnipotent
over gins and evil spirits, that he (the devil) would never again enter
into the woman. I was so pestered during the day for charms, that I
determined on dropping a little of the Peerzada.
_ Erindagan contains about 50 huts, and the cultivation of wheat,
Cultivation, rice, barley, and juwaree is comparatively extensive.
4th January.—Proceeded 10 kos over a difficult and sometimes hilly
Erindagan.
Aptae road to Apta, a place well cultivated from running water,
containing 200 huts and groves of dates, and furnishing provisions in
plenty. The chief is Hussun Khan.
698 Tour through paris of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153,
Leaving Apta, I set off to the East to visit the fort of Mugas, the
strength of which I had heard much extolled. Having dressed or rather
undressed as a fuqueer. I spent this night in a sour or rivulet bed,
and starting the next day, still proceeded in the Kour to a few tents of
Beloochees, who on my entry hastened to set before me all they had ;
viz. coarse juwaree bread and fresh asafoetida.
6th January.— Having travelled 5 kos, arrived at Mugas, the far-
Magus. famed, and found a square tower 30 guz in height and sixty
paces in circumference. I was assured, however, that Abul Kasam
Khan had besieged this tower, but found his guns would take no effect
on it, it being baman for 20 guz. I here saw two of the finest
horses I had ever met with in Beloochistan, they belonged to the chief,
who is a Koord. I had taken the precaution of bringing a few needles
with me, and could with the greatest difficulty obtain flour for them,
the natives wanting them for love.
8th January.—Hiring a bullock to take me as far as Pahro for one
Companions. rupee, I started in company with two Magases, and
travelled till the afternoon in the same rivulet bed that I had come by,
and stopping, commenced cooking coarse bread. My companions re-
garded my preparation with longing eyes, at last not being able to con-
tain themselves, requested to be invited to my table. I expressed
my surprise at their not having brought bread with them, as this
was the first stage from their homes. They assured that they never
tasted bread beyond once a week or twice at most, living entirely on
dates. On going to sleep, I put some of the remaining bread
under my pillow. The temptation to treat themselves was too great,
and they stole it during the night, assuring me when I awoke, that
the thief must have been a Tolak jackall.
9th January.—After a journey of 6 kos returned to Apta, once
rather a good road the whole way, and purchased an ass, which ani-
mals are procurable very fine here, having an excellent quick amble;
every one, high and low, rides them.
llth January.—Proceeding 8 kos over a good level road to
Pahiah, where I found supplies plentiful; the chief is Ibrahim
Khan.
12th January.—Ten kos further over a level road without water,
through a jungle of kanhoor and tamarisk, brought me to Bampoor,
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 699
the direction being sometimes W. N. W., and sometimes due
west.
This district is bounded on the East by Pahiah; on the West by
Bampoor. Miskaton; on the N. N. W. by the hills of Bazman ; and on
the South by Sashar.
The following were formerly the feudal dependencies of Bampoor:
Dependencies: Pahrah, Apsor, Bazman, Ispuka, Sashar, Miskotan,
Erindogan and Damind. The district is a flat and very fertile one,
producing wheat, barley and juwaree, and being watered from no less
than 96 small canals, the harvest of Kolwa equals this—the seed of
Bampoor, and the harvest of the latter place, only equals the seed
of Narniasher. The land is allowed to be fallow for about two years,
not so much on account of the poorness of the soil, as on account
Cultivation. of the extent of the land, and comparative scarcity of cul-
tivation. Both sugar-cane and indigo might, it appeared to me, be
Chief. introduced with great advantage. The chief of Bampoor is
Mahommed Ally Khan, son of Mehrab Khan-i-Lung, or the lame, by
tribe a Narsee, from Nare, their original district, which is situated to-
wards Seisthan. He has a force constantly kept up of 500 men of his
own tribe, and 80 slaves of his own purchasing.
He collects his revenue at the rate of 300 Bampoor maunds per
Land tax. gooband, a space of land which takes 400 Bampoor maunds
to sow.
I estimated that each small canal watered 6 goobands, and that
Principal Men. the Bampoor maund equalled the Company’s seer. The
chiefs of Mahommed Ally’s own tribe had lately quarrelled with
him, and had gone over to Prince Temz Mirza, to invite him
to invade Bampoor. The principal men are, Siparsala, Meer
Gazhee, son of Kamhae Zaburdust Navee. The allies of Mahom-
Allies. med Ally, or Mahommed Shah of Sib, are his father-in-law,
Maddut Khan of Sarhad, Husen Khan of Aptar, Ibrahim Khan
of Pahiah, and Muheem Khan of Miskotan. His enemies are Sar-
Enemies, feraz Khan of Gik, Ghulam Khan of Sashar, Deen Mahom-
med of Kaseband, Imcheem Khan of Ispaka, and the Raises of
Oodeean, who are his mother’s brothers. Of the ninety-six
canals, eight are cultivated by the chief himself, and the rest by his
tribe ; from each cultivator, of which, at the harvest time, he requires
5B
700 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 1538.
thirty Bampoor maunds of flour, one sheep and three maunds of ghee.
Deputy. When Mahommed Ally is absent from Bampoor, one of his
slaves and Meer Gazhee act for him.
The fort of Bampoor is on an eminence, it is of mud, and the suburb
walls, which are insignificant, and those of the citadel, 140 paces.
The height of the latter wall is 15 guz and their thickness 3
guz. The citadel is full of loop-holes. There are three small dismounted
guns. There is also a sally-port to the West, while the principal gate
of the fort is to the East. There are three wells, one without the
suburbs, another near the mosque at the S. E. angle of the fort, anda
third also in the suburbs, and a fourth in the citadel, the water of
which is brackish.
From Bampoor to Gik is 40 kos, to Kassurkund and Ramiskh 6
days’ journey, to Sashu 2 days. There is a gun road, I was
told, direct to Nurmashee, as follows: Ist stage, Chah-i- Besahib ;
2nd, Chah-i-Talazore ; jackal well ; or 3rd Chah-i-Shor, or brackish
well; 4th Warzeen ; 5th Giranreg ; 6th Ah-goum; 7th Narinasher.
The animals of Bampoor are, first in number and consequence ; asses,
horses, camels, cattle, wool-goats, and sheep.
The inhabitants build with date stem, and burn the jungle trees
and bark. The produce of the district consists of wheat, barley, beans,
ghee, wool, juwaree and dates in small quantity, of which the ghee
and wool are exported tothe port of Chouhar, and the grain to Mukran,
where this year it was sold for treble its cost.
There are 5 weavers, 2 shoemakers, 10 blacksmiths, and 3 car-
penters, but no traders, with the exception of one Hindoo, who
is the Khan’s store-keeper, and trades with about 2,000 rupees on
his own account. There were formerly no less than 25 merchants
here.
The cost of bringing merchandize from Chouhar to Bampoor is 10
rupees the candy, and no taxes are levied.
There are no measures, nor hardly can there be said to be a money
currency ; the maund equals our Company’s seer, and the
medium of value is either slaves or copper. from Kirman and
not from Bombay, or grain. The Seetaramee ducat is valued at eight
nominal rupees, and Company’s seer of copper at 4rupees. When rupees
are found, they are of the coinage called Riali Futteh Aly Shaha.
Fort.
Road.
Currency.
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 701
When a merchant for instance brings Bombay goods from Chouhar,
he bargains in rupees, and then the purchaser asks him what
he will have his rupees in, wool or ghee, and accordingly he
receives the article he wishes at the rate of the Bampoor market for
the time. The merchants of Dezak on the other hand, receive for
their cloths, copper and slaves, which are not stolen, but are the
trophies of mid-day forays in the confines of Kirman, and those
brought from the neighbouring Belooch districts, who may at any time
refuse to acknowledge the Khan. The merchants of Mukran again,
for their cloths and ducats, receive grain.
On arriving at Bampoor, I put up in the mosque in the town
with several poor Hajees who had accompanied me from Dezak. In
the evening, according to the custom of the Khan, bread was brought
for us. As I wanted to form the acquaintance of the Khan under
favourable circumstances, I resolved on shewing eccentricities ; and ac-
cordingly returned my share of the dinner, saying, I made it a point
never to eat the bread of extortioners and rulers.
The next day Mahammed Ally held a court without the town, and
BC ot ta ordered musicians to be present; when seated and in the
midst of his entertainment, he despatched a slave of his by
name Zaburdust, to invite me. I refused to go, saying, that I was a
disciple of Mulla Haroon, and had vowed never to listen to profane
music. This had the desired effect, the Khan’s curiosity was excited to
the highest pitch, and in a quarter of an hour he alighted at the
___ mosque to pay me a visit in person. After salutations and com-
a pliments had passed, he said, he supposed I gained no object in
visiting him, I therefore had refused to come ; whereas he had objects to
gain, and had therefore come to see me. I expressed my anxiety to
know those objects. First, and he in reply ‘‘God had blessed me
with no more beard than what is composed of the few scattered
Requests: hairs you yourself perceive on my chin, and I am really
ashamed to show myself in public. I want some specific to make a
good beard grow ; secondly, according to my predestination, I have been
blessed with five wives, and live on good terms with them all, but
hitherto has been impossible for me* as you have seen a good deal
)
Barter.
* Sic in MS.—Ebs.
702 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
of the world, and must know much of human nature, pray give me the
result of your experience of womankind.”
The Khan seemed pleased with my company, and told the other Ha-
jees, that they might resume their journey, as he intended to make me
stay with him. He then took me into the fort, and lodged and enter-
tained me for several days. During which time he spoke much of the
expected advance of the Persians, and showed me his preparations, which
consisted of flooding a few yards of ditch in front of the gate. On
my rashly suggesting the propriety of mounting his guns on carriages,
he immediately insisted on my taking charge of the ordnance de-
partment, and becoming his Commandant of Artillery. I had thus
completely committed myself, and saw a great prospect of my being
prevented prosecuting my tour if I did not succeed in starting im-
mediately. I therefore expressed my intention of setting out for
Dangers of Route. Oodeean. To this he strongly objected, as the country
was very unquiet on account of the rumoured invasion
of the Sheeahs of Oodeean, who would certainly take me fora Belooch and
seize and sell me accordingly. I therefore pretended, that after receiv-
ing his advice, I had changed my plans and now intended proceeding to
Sdshar. I here parted with some of my mushroo to the wife of Mahom-
med Ally, for which with the greatest difficulty she paid me partly in
rupees that she had sent for all the way from Kirman to make a few
ornaments for herself of, and partly in old silver ornaments, which a gold-
smith was sent for to remove from the handle of a family battle axe.
I purchased a camel here for seven ducats, and proceeded to take
“peek leave of the Khan, who first forced me on riding a donkey, and
made me promise to send him the beard preparation by the
first opportunity. I had previously pleaded my inexperienced youth
and religious habits as an excuse for not taking upon myself to speak
on subjects relating to the fair sex. While at Bampoor, the
people often spoke of a gentleman who had come there
in the time of Mehrab Khan-i-Lung, and purchased horses which he
had paid for at Chouhar. He travelled with trunks and tents, took
Capt. Grant.
notes of the country, and was very fond of walking in the fields. They |
called him Gurand Sahib, (Capt. Grant,) and said he had been well
treated during his stay, and also, that for two or three years after his
departure, the people of Bampoor much dreaded an invasion.
1844.) 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 703
24th January.—Leaving Bampoor, travelled ina N. N. W. direc-
tion over a level sandy road, through a walk to a pool of water,
the inhabitants of the neighbourhood of which had fled from their
homes.
25th January.—Travelled a level road with a few ascents and
descents in a N. N. W. direction for 8 kos, when I arrived at
Bazman. On approaching the fort, I was called to from the walls,
and asked who I was; I replied ‘“‘a Hajee ;” then said they, ‘ you
had better get some other place, as if you come in here, you will be
seized with us.” I put up for the night outside the fort, and only
succeeded in ascertaining that Bazman is bounded on the East by
Erindagan ; on the West by a high mountain; on the North by Rodi-
maher ; and on the South by Miskotan. The chief is Shahbaz Khan,
Chief. by tribe a Koord. Mahommed Ally of Bampoor had sent
ammunition to the above chief, with which to hold out his fort, which
is a small one, against the Persians. In the neighbouring mountain I
was informed, that sulphur was to be found.
26th January.—Left Bazman, having procured a guide as far as
Oodeean, and travelled all night over a desert waste for 10 kos, where
I stopped, having no one with me but one servant, and the guide, which
on arriving, went for water to some distance, the position of which I
did not see.
27th January.—Travelled all night over the waste through a driz-
zling rain, and towards morning encountered a body of 13 men mount-
ed on horses and camels, who challenged me, and on my informing
them that I was a Hajee, they gave me the lie, and declared I must be
a Persian spy as I travelled by night ; my denying the charge with
oaths was of no avail. I was ordered to lay down my arms on pain
of receiving the contents of all their matchlocks ; my servant threw
down his gun, and the guide ran away.
The men immediately secured and obliged me to accompany the
Capture. party till the morning was far advanced, when they halted
and bound us; having searched my person, and secured some gold that
I had brought with me from Dezak, they retired to a short distance
and divided the spoil, consisting besides the gold, of the asses and their
loads. Leaving us bound they then separated ; seven taking the road
to Bazman and Giranrey, and six that to the Bampoor waste. After
remaining bound for some time, two men mounted on asses, seeming to
704 Tour through parts of Baloochisthan, in [No. 153.
have come from the Bampoor waste, made their appearance, one of
them took possession of my companion’s nephew of Baloch of Dezak,
and returned with him towards Bampoor, while the other insisted on
my preceding him bound, on foot. This 1 did until my feet were
blistered, and I began to limp, my captor urging me to go faster, and
telling me, that as nothing had fallen to his share but the
English sword, he intended selling me, and shortly after-
wards giving me a push, the brute precipitated me with my hands
tied behind me on my face among the stones. On recovering, I sat
Attempt at ecclai- doggedly down-and invited him to despatch me. At
SESH this proposal he laughed, and said, that he would do
nothing but sell me, as many better men than me of his tribe had
been sold by Belooches. I denied being a Baloch, and explained to
him that I was an Affghan, at this he appeared delighted, and said ‘‘ so
much the better; that scoundrel Futteh Khan of
Punoch is of your tribe and a Sunmnee, who sells so
many of us, saying it is lawful to rob an infidel Sheeah, and now
thank God, I have got hold of an infidel Swnnee in return, with
whose price I have no doubt I shall prosper.” He, however, dis-
mounted and put me on the ass, and we proceeded in this manner
not at all in one direction until sunset, when we arrived at his encamp-
ment, which I learnt was in the district of Rodbar. By this time I
was fairly exhausted with pain and thirst; conducting me into the
tents, he introduced me to his mother as a lazy knave, who could not
walk a mile, telling her, that he had got nothing of the spoil but my
worthless carcase, every thing of value having been carried off by the
Dashters.
The good woman seeing my beard besmeared with blood, was
Compassion. moved with compassion, and upbraided her son for his
ill treatment of me, reminding him, that I had no doubt “a mo-
ther,” and requested him to anoint my feet with ghee; this he
did with a very ill grace, reminding her all the time, that the man
who killed his uncle was one of us Affghans. The next morning on
awaking, my beard was so clotted with blood from the wound on my
chin, that I had recourse to a pair of scissors, and made my-
self as smooth as my friend Mahommed Ally of Bampoor. I
was confined to my bed sometime from fever, during which time
several offers were made for me. One man offered a lean camel, while
Separation.
Matters made worse.
Shave
ae ae ee
1844.] 1838 and 1839, by Hajee Abdun Nubee, of Kabul. 705
another offered three asses ; but my master would take no less than two
camels, at last they were offered, but fortunately for me
my master changed his mind, declaring he would be able
to get a good horse for me at Marmasher. This happened about the
beginning of the month Mohurrum. A few days afterwards, a man ar-
rived at the encampment, and gave out that the Persian friends under
the prince had actually made a move, having according to their custom
on setting out on an expedition, sacrificed a camel, and that Mirza Ally
Raza of Kirman had arrived at Jeeraft to lay in supplies.
I was delighted to hear this news, as I was acquainted with the
Meerza while in Persia, and I had hopes of being able to escape to the
Persian camp, should it enter Beloochistan.
The new comer then looking at me, and seeing my plight, advised
my master to release me, as ‘“‘God knows,” said he, “how soon you
yourself may be a Persian slave ;” which advice was not at all well re-
ceived, and my would-be benefactor got nothing but abuse, which
proved however most fortunate for me. For stung with the insult, he
took the first opportunity when I was not collecting
wood to suggest my escape, promising he would effect
it for ten ducats ; to this I immediately and gladly agreed, notwith-
standing I had my misgivings that he might sell me somewhere else.
He appointed the second night for the attempt, and showed me a tree
under which he would have a camel ready at dusk. On the day ap-
pointed, my master intended to have decamped for fear of the Persians,
but it being the tenth of the month, a day of mourning for all Sheeahs,
his departure was put off. On the day appointed, when
evening set in, I repaired with a trembling heart to the tree
of rendezvous, where I found the camel tied and my friend asleep. I
hastened to awaken him, and put myself on the camel behind him,
telling him to take me to Ramishk. On starting he took a road how-
ever direct north for a short distance, when arriving at his encamp-
ment, he left the camel.
I preured two asses on which he lost no time in mounting; having
refreshed ourselves with bread and milk ; and set out at a good quick
amble over a strong road, in what I calculated to bea S.S. W. direc-
tion till morning, when we branched off the road at a right angle up a
rivulet bed and dismounted, my deliverer returning on foot and effac-
Purchasers.
Friendly meant.
Escape.
706 Tour through parts of Balocchisthan, &c. [No. 153.
ing the prints of the asses’ hoofs. On the road I had frequently ex-
pressed my surprise at the rate our asses ambled, when
he explained to me, that they were of the Barre caste, that
is, across breed between the wild ass and the tame one, whoare generally
Jet loose in the jungles to graze. We were still in the district of Rod-
bar, and he informed me that the forts of the chiefs Suzad Khan and
Mirza Khan were due west from the stage ; here I went to sleep, while
my benefactor kept watch on a neighbouring eminence.
27th March.—In the evening we again mounted and proceeded all
night over an irregular and stony road through a waste,
and towards morning, we arrived within sight of Rameshk,
which place my guide, who gave me his name as Ally Maddat, refused
to enter for fear of his being recognized, which disclosure would entail
a feud he said between his people and those of my late master.
28th March.—In the evening again started and proceeded in a due
east direction 10 kos, over a road in parts level and in others
irregular, to Kutech, a place containing 100 huts, where I
would have had a fast, for my guide was afraid to enter the village,
had I not gone myself and begged a few scraps of coarse bread and a
handful of dates, on which we breakfasted.
29th March.—At noon we again started, and at sunset arrived at
Motarabad. Motarabad on a level good road. At this place, which isa
small one, Ally Maddat had a friend, from whom he procured a din-
ner of coarse bread and dates. At these two places to-
bacco is cultivated to some extent.
30th March.—Started for Punoch which was seven kos distant,
and on the road met a man mounted on the very identical ass that
Mahommed Ally of Bampoor had given me, and sitting on my saddle
bags. I stopped him, and made him return with me
to Punoch, in the mosque of which place I took up
my quarters. I had no difficulty in proving my right to the ass and
saddle bags, from which latter, however, all the articles of value had
been extracted. The man appeared to be very indignant at being sus-
pected of theft, and set out in a great hurry, promising to return with
the man from whom he had purchased the property; however I never
saw him again during my stay at Punoch. I was not able to see
Oodeean myself, for reasons detailed above, but while at Punoch, I
gained the following information regarding it from Futteh Khan and
Ally Maddat.
Barre asses.
Rameshk.
Kutech.
Tobacco.
Property recovered.
( To be continued. )
sO
707
Observations on the Flora of the Naga Hills, by Mr. J. W. MAstErs,
Communicated by the Government of India.
To Captain T. Bropin, Principal Assistant Commissioner of Assam.
Sitr,—I have the honor to forward a few observations on the Flora of
that part of the Naga hills, through which I had the honor to accom-
pany you and Mr. Sub-Assistant Bedford during the last month, with a
list of plants met with on the route. These observations, I fear, will be
found very meagre; partly on account of our hurried march, partly on
account of the nature of the country, and the season of the year; but
more especially on account of my own ignorance of the subject ; still
they may be interesting to some, as they will show that the 500 dif-
ferent species here enumerated are found growing on those hills. This
is but a small number for:so large a breadth of country ; but when we
consider that they were all gathered on the line of march, and in a
country inhabited by savages, where, had there been time, it would
have been neither prudent nor practicable to leave the road to go in
search of plants, 500 different species will be acknowledged to be as
many as any one individual could expect to gather in the short space
of one month. This number does not include all the different kinds of
plants which I saw, but it includes the greater part of those from
which I gathered specimens; and I here beg to observe, that I have
put down in the list, none but such as I actually saw, and from which
I brought away specimens. These specimens will serve for ex-
perienced Botanists to examine hereafter. Should you consider these
observations to be interesting to Government, may I beg the favor of
your forwarding a copy of them, should you have occasion to report on
that portion of the frontier.
I have the honor to be, &c.
(Signed) J. W. Masters.
Seebsagur, the 29th March, 1844.
Botanical Observations made in Upper Assam, during the month of
February 1844, while passing over that portion of the first ranges of
the Naga Hulls, lying between the Dikho and Dhunsiri Rivers.
The Flora of this portion of the hills resembles, in a great measure,
that of the more elevated parts of the plains, especially, as along the
uncultivated banks of rivers, and by the numerous little streamlets that
5
708 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
wind through the forests, we find forms similar to those found in the
ravines between the hills, while on the little hillocks near the foot of
the first range, and on the broken ground called khorkunee, we meet
with many plants that are common to the slopes. Still I met with
many plants which I have never seen in the plains, and some of those
which I have seen down here, are evidently not at home.
The Naga Bhe, Gordonia integrefolia, Roxb. is often seen in the
plains, but on the hills it is much more common, and grows to a larger
tree. I met with it in abundance on every hill.
The little ornamental flowering shrubs called by the natives Photihi
and Phootkola, (different species of Melastome,) in the deep ravines
with hills of 3000 feet of elevation on each side, assume the character
of small trees, with stems from eight to twelve feet high, and three or
four inches in diameter. As our route lay for the most part through
ground which had lately been under cultivation I did not meet with
so large a number of species as I had previously calculated upon.
Could I remain with safety on these hiils for three or four years, I
doubt not but I should reap a good harvest, but hurrying over them in
the manner we were compelled to do, very little could be done in
examining the Flora. I presume it would occupy an experienced
Botanist 10 years to explore the whole of the Naga Hills, from the
Booreedihing to the Dhunsiri, in a satisfactory manner; none of them
having been hitherto visited by any Botanist.
Leaving the banks of the Dikho on the 27th of January, at the spot
where in 1840 I collected some of the Namsang coal, and where
Mr. Landers subsequently collected a larger quantity on the part of
Government, we ascended the hills, passing over undulated ground
and low hills of various elevations. Arriving in the neighbourhood of the
coal measures, we passed up the bed of a very rugged water-course,
which though nearly dry now, must in the rains pour down its torrents
with a frightful velocity. Passing on to near the summit of the hill,
we encamped in a forest of bamboos, a little below the village of
Namsang.
While rising the hill, I observed the following plants : Mesua ferrea,
Careya arborea, Ficus elastica, F. scabrella, F. species ? Dillenia speciosa,
Chaulmoogra odorata, Emblica officinalis, Artocarpus integrifolius, A.
Chaplasha, Xanthochymus pictorius, Liristoma assamica, Guarea binecta
1844.] Flora of the Naga Hilts. 709
rifera, Calamus hostilis, Goldfussia two species, Pladera, a most delicate
interesting species; and in the village, on the very summit of the
sandstone rock, 2153 feet above the level of the sea, Beaumontia
grandiflora, and the common dwarf elder. All the Naga villages
are built on the very summit of the particular hills on which they are
situated, and this village of Namsang is situated on the highest point
of the Namsang Purbut ; it is thickly studded with houses and crowded
with inhabitants, having pigs and fowls in abundance. The men ap-
peared remarkably active and healthy, but the women and children,
(especially those who are necessarily more confined to the crowded
village) appear pale and sickly.
A reference to Mr. Bedford’s map of the route, will shew the situa-
tion of the villages visited, from our leaving Namsang on the 29th of
January to our quitting Sonareegong, and descending to the banks
of the Dyung on the 26th of February.
In the villages and the inhabitants, I observed comparatively but
little difference, save that from Namsang to Samsa, the houses are all
large, high pitched, and more or less supported by bamboo frame-
work ; while from Mickelai to Nowgong, the sites of the villages not
being so rocky, the houses are all low pitched, and seldom supported
by bamboo frame-work. All the houses are roomy, strongly built, well,
and often very neatly, thatched. The granaries, which are generally
situated in a detached part of the village, are all supported by bamboo
frame-work.
As the villages are all on the summit of the hills, where the naked
rocks frequently rise above the surface, there is very little spare
ground for gardens or cultivation of any kind in the villages; but on
every little spot on which a few inches of soil is found, attempts are
made at gardening. In these we found onions, mustard, tobacco,
sunn, and a few stocks of sugar cane. I found the mangoe tree in
almost every village, and some immensely large trees, as large as are
generally found in Bengal; besides these, a few plants of the guava,
peach, and plantain, with Tagetes patula, or the French marigold.
The cultivation of rice, millet, kuchoo, (Arum) pumpkins, ginger, cap-
sicums, cotton and vom is carried on at a distance from the village, on
the slopes of the hills, It appears to be the practice of the Nagas
710 Flora of the Naga Hills. , [ No. 153.
to cut down heavy tree jungle, burn the trees and scatter the ashes
over the ground, to cultivate this ground for two years, and then abandon
it for ten years. Often I believe it is under cultivation only one year,
and then abandoned for eight or ten, and this method agrees with the
habits of the Nagas, With the implements they use, and the nature of
the soil, the rapidity with which a body of Nagas will clear a large ex-
tent of dense forest is astonishing, and as they use no other implement
but the da, they are ill prepared for digging. This single implement,
the da, serves the Nagas to fell the forest, to dig the ground for
his rice, to cut the food for his dinner, and to take off the heads of his
enemies. The ground being prepared, the women put the rice and other
grain in with a dibble. After the Naga has cultivated a piece of
ground two years, and often one year only, he finds it so full of
weeds, especially of the composite: and labiate families, that it is
not worth his while to sow it again, and he clears fresh jungle accord-
ingly. The ground which I saw under cultivation two years ago, is
now completely overrun with weeds and grass, and fresh jungle has
been cleared in the neighbourhood for this year’s crop. _In the neigh-
bourhood of Nangta, Kangsing and Nowgong, large tracts of ground
were cleared ready for cultivation this season; some portions sown.
The village of Kangsing is pleasantly situated on the summit of a rock,
at an elevation of 2568 feet above the level of the sea, and command-
ing a fine view of the surrounding country. The houses were neatly
thatched with different kinds of palm leaves. The leaves most gene-
rally used by the Nagas for thatching are éoko pdt, Levistonia Assa-
raica, jengoo-pat, Calamus hostilis, hoosi-pvt, Melica latifolia and
Dr. Wallich’s palm, or Wallichia earyotoides ; the different kinds are
often fancifully intermingled, and bound on with a neat ridge of grass_
at the top.
At the village of Asimgia is a fine plant of the séngoch, or Caryota
urens, one or two of these are generally met with in each village, as
the soft hair in the sheaths of the leaves is used both by Nagas and
Assamese for tinder. By the summary of villages visited, given below,
it will be seen, that Lakhootee is the highest point to which we reached,
3700 feet, a considerable village. This peak is very conspicuous from
the plains.
1844.] Flora of the Naga Hills. 711
Summary of villages visited and elevations :—
Feet. Feet.
Namsang, Pn 21538 Akook, 4 :
Nangta, ... re 2868 Lakhoota, ae ca OTOUO
Kangsing, =- 2568 Khergong,
Nowgong, nae 2825 Sanagong,
Larayen, aes 2825 Nisang, ...
Santoong, one 3000 Bhidara, ...
Deka Hymung, .. Kahoong, fo ee
Boora Hymung, ... 2875 Duria,
Lassa, ... ‘ Rungagong, aa wee
Atringia, ame 2600 Kerngong, eee
Kolaburia, er Sunka,
Samsa, .. aes Tillogong, owe 6
Mickelai, ime Sonareegong, ... gee BO TEO
Mohom, ... - Nowgong, - ees
List of Planis seen and gathered during the Journey.
EXXo0GENZ.
OrvDER.— Ranunculacee.
1. Haravelia zeylanica, DeC. An oramental climbing plant, com-
mon in the plains. Rungagong.
2. Ranunculus (species.?) Samsa. I was much surprised by not find-
ing more of this family. I had calculated upon a considerable addition
to my Herbarium in plants of this tribe, but the above are the only
species I noticed, and those not frequently.
OrvEer.—Papaveracee.
3. Papaver somniferum, Linn. The common white poppy ; this I found
cultivated to a small extent in the last three or four villages, but did
not meet with a wild species. Kaboong.
Orprr.— Magnoliacee.
4. Liriodendron grandiflora, Roxb. Burrumtooli. An ornamental
flowering tree. Kangsing.
712 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
OrpDER.— Anonacee@.
5. Anona (species?) Leaves alternate, short petioled, elliptic, ferru-
ginous underneath. Mickelai.
6. Gualteria Badajamba, Wall. Sohohai.
7. Uvaria macrophylla, Roxb. An ornamental plant. Larayen.
8. Unona undulata, Roxb: Sohohai.
Orper.—Dilleniacee.
9. Dillenia speciosa, Thunb. Oh. A complete forest of this tree is
found on the banks of the Dyung, but it is but thinly scattered on the
hills. The fleshy scales of the fruit, ohtenga, are eaten as eagerly by
the Assamese, as apples are eaten in England. Namsang.
10. Delima sarmentosa, Linn. Ditto.
OrvDER.—Araliacee.
11. Aralia digitata, Roxb. A scandent plant common in the plains,
often found growing on fig trees. Kangsing, Namsang.
12. Aralia lucida, Wall. A very ornamental tree, with shining
leaves. Kangsing.
13. Panax species? Unarmed leaves, smooth, trifid or pennatifid,
an ornamental shrub. Kangsing.
14. Gastonia (species?) Large ornamental leaves, long petioled, pel-
tate, 7 or 8 partite, leaflets grossly serrulate. Lakhootee.
15. Gastonia (species?) Arboreous, armed leaves, long petioled, pel-
tate, leaflets 9, smooth, accuminating to both ends, peduncles terminal,
ferruginous, as long as the leaves. Larayen.
OrpEer — Vitacee.
16. Vitis latifolia, Roxb. Kangsing.
17. V. species. Ditto.
18. V. ditto. Ditto.
19. V. ditto. Kahung.
20. V. ditto. Nangta.
These are vine-like plants not in blossom,
21. Leea samburina, Roxb. Sohohai.
_ 22. L. species. Nangta.
1844. ] Flora of the Naga Hilts. 713
OrpDER.— Olawacee.
23. Olax scandens, Roxb. Leaves dotted, a large climbing orna-
mental plant. Kangsing.
OrprER.— Combretacee.
24, Combretum species. An ornamental plant. Kangsing.
25. C. pilosum, Roxb. Sohohai.
26. Terminalia paniculata, W. and A. A large ornametal timber
tree, Larayen.
27. T. chebula, Retz. or citima, Roxb. Hillika. A large timber
tree, common in the plains. Sohohai.
OrvDER.— Melastomacee.
28. Melastoma Malabrathricum, Linn. A very ornamental flower-
ing shrub common in the plains. Namsang.
29. M. erecta, Jack? Larayen.
30. M. glauca, Jack? A large and elegantly flowering plant, 10
feet high, leaves dotted. Sohohai.
31. M. cernua, Roxb. A very elegant species. Sohohai.
32. M. curva, Roxb.? Not in flower. Namsang.
33. M. gracilis, Jack. Not in blossom. Namsang.
34, M. alpestris, Jack? Ditto.
35. M. obvoluta, Jack? Ditto.
The Melastomez are very common in the plains, but they grow to
great perfection in the ravines in among the hills, as on the banks of the
Sohohai, Tookum Jewry, the Bontook, the Teroo, and Duria Panee.
Orpver.— Myrtaceae.
36. Careya arborea, Roxb. Namsang.
37. Syzygium jambolanum, DeC. Sonagong.
38. S. caryophyllum, Gavert. Larayen.
39, S. species. Ditto.
40. Psidium pyriferum, Lin. Moodhriam. Asringia.
This plant (the guava) though very common in the plains, and fre-
quently met with at the foot of the hills, I did not see very common in
the Naga villages. In the plains it is a common jungle plant.
714 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
OrvER.— Loranthacee.
41. Loranthus species, Rugoo Nulla. Kangsing.
42. L. globosus, Roxb. Ditto
OrpEer.— Cucurbitacee.
+3. Tricosanthes palmata, Larayen.
44, T. species. Not in flower, leaves deeply 5-lobed, lobes acumi-
nate, strongly marked with nerves and veins. Kamgsing.
45. Bryonia scabrella, Linn. Nowgong.
46. Cucurbita lagenaria, Linn. Mita Lao.
47. C. pepo, Linn. Komra, Lassa.
48. Luffa pentandria, Roxb. Doondool. Asringia.
Nos. 46 and 47 must be cultivated to a considerable extent, as I
saw large quantities of the fruit in all the villages, though it was not
the season for the plants.
OrvER.-— Begoniacee.
49. Begonia species. Dizcious, colored, every part hairy, stem pro-
cumbent, jointed, petioles from 12 to 18 inches long, leaves large,
cordate, unequal-sided, acuminate, pilose on both sides, male and fe-
male flowers on different plants, large and showy, sepals in the male,
two of which are small, two much larger, membraneous, the margin
white within side, slightly coloured, pink without, sepals in the female
4 or 5, when five, three are smaller, scarcely coloured, and less hairy
on the outside than the male ; an elegant large flowered species.
50. B. species. Not in flower, Petioles and nerves on the under-
surface of the leaf pilose, leaves unequal-sided, variously lobed, lobes
acuminate. Lassa.
51. B. species. Notin blossom, caulescent, leaves smooth, unequal- |
sided. Nangta.
52, B. species. Stem procumbent, leaves petioled, orbicular,
sprinkled with rust-coloured pores, often purple underneath, outer
sepals red, inner white, ligulate, stamens numerous; only one flower
seen, found growing on the sandstone rocks at Namsang. Elevation
2153 feet.
OrDER,— Cruciferae.
53. Sinapis dichotoma, Roxb. Samsa.
54, S. a small species found on the Namsang. The mustard ap-
pears to be but sparingly cultivated among the Nagas.
1844.] Flora of the Naga Hills. 715
OrvDER.— Capparidacee.
55. Gynandropsis pentaphylla, DeC. Hoorhooria. Namsang.
OrpEr.— Violacee.
56. Viola Patrinii. Flowers blue. Kangsing.
OrvER.—Flacourtiacee.
57. Flacourtia cataphracta, Linn. Punia/, Kangsing.
58. Chaulmoogra odorata, Roxb. Lemtem. Namsang.
ORDER. — Guttifere.
59. Mesua ferrea, Linn. Nahor. An eminently ornamental flower-
ing plant, yielding the most durable timber known in Assam, Namsang.
60. Xanthochymus pictorius, Roxb. Zapar. Namsang.
61. Garcinia pedunculata, Roxb. Bor tekara, An ornamental tree,
fruit eaten by Assamese. Namsang.
62. Garcinia, Kooji-tekara. Leaves opposite, short petioled, ellip-
tic, mucronate, shining on both sides, veins prominent, Mohom.
OrvDER.— Ternstromiacee.
63. Camellia, species, not in flower. The Heelkath of this part of
the district.
Misaphlap of Muttock. This plant is common on the hills, and
also in the plains, but I saw no tea between the Dikho and Dhunsiri
rivers, Deka Hymung.
OrpER.—Sapindacee.
64, Sapindus fruticosus, Roxb. Dyung.
65. S. emarginatus, Roxb. Samsa.
. 66. Schneideria serrata, DeC. Larayen.
67. Pierardia sapida, Roxb. Letihoo. Banks of the Sohohai.
68. Millingtonia pungens, Wall. Lassa.
69. M. species, Leaves crowded about the end of the branches, acu-
Minating to the base, mucronate at the apex. Boora Hymung.
OrvErR.— Zsculacee.
70. AEsculus species. Not in flower. Sohohai.
Orver.—Sterculiacee.
71. Sterculia alata, Roxb. Namsang.
72. S. villosa, Roxb. Oodal. Ditto
73. Kleinhovia bospita, Linn, Bhedam.
5 D
716 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
74. Abroma agusta, Linn. Larayen.
75. Bombax Malabarium. DeC. Hunool. Larayen.
76. Kydia calycina, Roxb. Lakhoota.
77. Pterospermum suberifolium, Lam. Kangsing.
78. P. lancezofolium, Roxb. Larayen.
79. P. acerifolium, Willd. Asringia.
80. P. species? Leaves alternate, short petioled, ovate, acuminate,
obscurely 3-nerved, quite entire, smooth above, ferruginous underneath.
Samsa. |
81. Buttneria aspera, Coleb. Ditto.
Orver.— Malvacee.
82. Hibiscus macrophyllus, Roxb. Larayen.
83. H. rosa—sinensis, Linn. Mohom.
84. Urena labiata, Linn. Ditto.
85. Gossypium Indicum, Linn. Ditto.
Onver.— Eleocarpacee.
86. Eleocarpus lucidus, Roxb. Akook.
87. KE. oblongus, Ejaert. Boora Hymung.
88. E. aristatus, Roxb.
89. E. ganitrus, Roxb. Roodrakh. Sonareegond.
OrverR.— Dipteracee.
90. Dipterocarpus alatus, Roxb. Mohom.
91. D. turbinatus, Gaert. Nangta.
92. D. species, Hoollung. Mohom.
93. D. species? Makai. Nangta.
These are trees of the first magnitude, growing to an immense
height, yielding more or Jess oil or resin, and excellent timber.
Orver.— Tiliacee.
94. Trumfetta oblonga, Wall. Nowgong.
95. T. trilocularis, Roxb. Larayen.
96. Grewia columnaris, Linn. Ditto.
Orver.— Lythracee.
97. Lagerstremia regina, Roxb. Hazar. Kamsing.
OrpER.— Meleacee.
98. Amoora rohitrika, W. and A. Boora Hymung.
99. Guaria binectinefera, Roxb. Bondur Demoora, Namsang.
1844.]
100.
101,
102,
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
11S.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
Flora of the Naga Hills.
Walsura robusta, Roxb. Mohom.
Cedrela toona, ditto, Poma. Lassa.
OrvDER.—Aurantiacee.
Bergera integerrima, Buch. Deka Hymung.
Triphasia trifoliata, DeC. Larayen.
Limonia species? Kaboong.
L. species. Dyung Banks.
Citrus decumana, Linn. Lakoota.
C. aurantium, ditto, Hoontora tenga. Villages common.
C. medica, Linn, ditto. Ditto.
C. acida, Roxb. ditto. Ditto.
OrpER.— Spondiacee.
Spondias mangifera, Pers. Amra. Kangsing.
OrvER.— Rhamnacee.
Zizyphus jujuba, Lam. Boghory. Namsang.
Z. species? Leaves distinctly 3-nerved, nerves feathered,
young parts ferruginous. Banks of the Dyung.
Z. species? Leaves obscurely 4 or 5-nerved, midrib and
interior side of the nerves not feathered. Kangsing.
Ceanothus asiaticus, Linn. Namsang.
OrvEr.—Luphorbiacee.
Croton tiglium, Linn. Konzbhi. Rungagong.
C. drupaceum, Roxb. Kangsing.
Ricinus communis, Linn. Namsang.
Andrachne trifoliate, Roxb. Uriam. Ditto.
Bradleia amosna, Wall. Kangsing.
Adelia nereifolia, Roxb. Dyung.
Emblica officinalis, Gaert. Amlooki, On every hill.
Euphorbia ligularia, Roxb. Kangsing.
Cluytia collina, Linn. Sohohai.
C, scandens, Roxb. Ditto.
Sapium sebiferum, Roxb. Kangsing.
OrveEr. — Celastracee.
Salacia longifolia, Wall. Kangsing.
S. species, leaves elliptic, remotely serrated, Sohohai.
718 Flora of the Naga Hills. LNo. 153.
128 S. species? smaller. Sonareegong.
129. Celastrus species? Sohohai.
130. C. species. Larayen.
OrpER.— Xanthorylacee.
131, Fagara Budringa, Roxb. Kalaburia.
132. Xanthoxylum species. Leaflets dotted. Larayen.
OrvpER.—Balsaminacee.
133. Impatiens species.—Herbaceous, perennial, stem procumbent,
rooting, branches marked with the cicatrices of fallen leaves. Leaves
crowded about the ends of the branches, alternate, petioled, acuminat-
ing to both ends,finely serrated, serratures bristle-pointed, sprinkled with
a few hairs on the upper surface, glandular towards the base and on
the petioles. Peduncles axillary, about two inches long with two
subulate bracteoles about the middle, one or two flowers large, spread-
ing, showy, bright rose-colored. Calyx spurred, lateral sepals similar,
cordate, acuminate, green, the other two dissimilar, one white, carinate
spurred, the other highly colored with a sharp green keel on the. other
side. Petals more or less united, inclining to one side. Found run-
ning over the rocks in the Deeria-panni.
134. Impatiens natans, Roxb. Jhanzy.
135. I. latifolia, Linn. Mohom.
Orver.— Oxalidacee.
136. Averrhoa carambola, Linn. Kordatenga. Namsang.
137. Oxalis. A small species. Larayen.
OrpeR.— Rosaceae.
138. Rosz chinensis. Roxb. Namsang.
139. Rubus rugosus. Linn. Kangsing.
140. R. Wallichiana, W. and A. This I first saw at Boora Hy-
mung, on a plant lately sown, the leaflets were retuse, but on several
others at Akook in blossom, they perfectly agree with Wight’s figure
and description. An ornamental plant.
141. R, hexagynus, Roxb. Sohohai.
1844. ] | Flora of the Naga Hills. 719
142. R. racemosus, ditto? Young plants densely clothed with glan-
dular hairs ; fruit cylindrical. Sohohai.
143. R. raszefolius, Roxb.? Petioles and peduncles sprinkled with
glandular hairs. I see none on the leaves. Santoong.
144. R. species. A large scandent shrub, armed with recurved
prickles. Leaves alternate, long petioled, trifoliate, leaflets smooth,
broadly ovate, sharply dentate. Sohohai.
145. R. species. Coloured, armed with numerous recurved prickles,
and densely clothed with brown hairs. Leaves alternate, simple, dis-
tinctly 5-nerved, distinctly 5-lobed, lobes acuminate, dentate, more or
less hispid on the nerves on both sides, armed with recurved prickles
on the under side, and clothed with white down between the nerves.
Lakhootee.
146. Fragaria Indica, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
147. Amygdalus Persica, Roxb. Amboghory. Deka Hymung.
Lakhootee.
OrDER.—Leguminose.
148. Dunbaria species? Not in blossom. Namsang.
149. Rohinia species. Kangsing.
150. R. candida, Roxb. Namsang.
151. Bauhinia piperifolia, Roxb. Not in flower, leaflets often sepa-
rated to the base. Sohohai.
152. B. corymbosa, Roxb. Kahoong.
153, B. acuminata, Willd. Namsang.
154. Dolichos scarabceoides, Roxb. Dyung.
155. D. lablab, ditto. Kangsing.
156. Crotalaria tetragona, ditto. Ditto.
157. C. species. Deka Hymung.
158. Uvaria picta, Desv. Nangta.
159, Flemingia stricta, Roxb. Lakhootee.
160. F. strobilifera, Br. Namsang,
161. Dalbergia frondosa, Roxb. Kangsing.’
162. D. robusta, ditto. Sonareegong.
163. D. dumosa, ditto. Larayen.
164. D. zeylanica, ditto. Ditto.
165. D. species scandent. Duriagong.
720 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
166. Entada pursetha, DeC. Kangsing.
167. Acacia amara, Willd. Sonareegong.
168. A. species. Not in flower. Kangsing.
169. A. stipulata, DeC. Akook.
17Oiges FIN Detris Bt Nangta,
171. Erythrina Indica, Linn. Kangsing.
172. E. stricta, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
173. Cassia glauca, Lam. Larayen. ,
174. Desmodium polycarpum, DeC. Bovra Hymung.
175. Mimosa elata, Roxb. Samsa.
OrpER— Anacardiacee.
176. Mangifera Indica, Linn. Am. Kangsing.
177. Holigarna racemosa, Roxb. Ditto.
178. Rhus vernix, Linn. Ahom Eitha, Larayen.
179. R. species. Kansging.
180. R. species. Larayen.
181. Buchanania angustifolia, Roxb. Namsang.
OrpEeR— Cupulifere.
182. Quercus species. Trunk erect, from fifty to eighty feet high,
and from two to four feet in diameter, bark rugged and rusty, leaves
alternate, long-petioled, acuminate, serrate, serratures tapering to a
fine point. Fruit sessile, cup clothed with scales. Asringia.
183. Q. fenestrata, Roxb. Ditto. .
184. Castanea species. A middling-sized tree, leaves alternate,
smooth, wood marked by 3 grooves. Namsang.
185. C. species. A large tree. Kangsing.
Orper—Betulacee.
186. Betula species? A large tree from sixty to eighty feet high
and three feet in diameter. Bark fragrant and peeling off. Leaves
generally in alternate pairs with a bud between them. This is the
principal tree at Larayen, found also at Lakootee and Deka Hymung.
Recognized by the Sipahees as the Puddum of Munnipoor.
Orver.— Urticacee.
187. Ficus lanceelata, Roxb. Jhanzy Banks.
188. F. Indica, Linn. Kangsing.
1844. | Flora of the Naga Hiils. 721
189. F. elastica, Roxb. Ditto.
190. F. benjamina, ditto. Ditto.
191. F. scabrella, ditto. Namsang.
192. F. scandens, ditto. Ditto.
193. F. excelsa, Vahl. Sohohai.
194. F. jewry, Griff. Ditto.
195. F. species. Leaves alternate, short-petioled, lanceolar, minute-
ly dotted. lLarayen.
196. F. species. A large tree, unequal-sided, dotted, tapering to
a fine point. Kangsing. :
197. F. hirsuta, Roxb. Mohom.
198. F. species. Leaves 3-nerved, 3-lobed. Kangsing.
199. F. species. Leaves linear. Lassa.
200. F. species. Leaves ovate, serrate, acuminate. Namsang.
201. F. religiosa, Linn. Lakhootee.
202. Urtica species. Leaves ovate, 3-nerved, distinctly dotted. Nam-
sang.
203. U. suffruticosa, Roxb. Asringia.
204. U. species. Leaves long, petioled, 3-nerved, dotted. Kangsing.
205. U. pulcherrima, B. Larayen.
206. Urtica penduliflora, Roxb. Larayen.
207. U. heterophylla, Roxb. Phossat. Lukhootee.
208. U. species. Leaves 3-nerved. Namsang.
209. U. species. Banks of the Jhanzy.
210. U. species. Leaves dotted, 3-nerved, rounded at the base.
Namsang.
211. Buchneria viminia. Ditto.
212, Artocarpus integrifolius, Linn. Ditto.
213. A. chaplasha, Roxb.? Sham. A first rate timber tree, com-
mon in the plains. The fruit is eagerly eaten by the Assamese. Mohom.
214. A. Lakoocha, Roxb. Deorsalli. Asringia.
215. Trophis aspera, Retz. Nowgong.
OrvEer.— Ulmacee.
216. Ulmus virgata, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
217. Celtis orientalis, Linn. Kangsing.
Orver —Myricacee.
218. Nageia putranjiva, Roxb. Kangsing.
722 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
OrpER.—Juglandacee.
219. Juglans pberococa, Roxb. Larayen.
OrvER.— Piperacee.
220. Piper betle, Linn. Pan. Namsang.
221. P. longum, Linn. Ditto.
222. P. rostratum, Roxb.? Nowgong.
OrvER.— Balsamacee.
223. Liquidambar, Jootooli. Larayen.
Orver.—FElegnacee.
224. Elegnus conforta, Roxb. Kangsing.
OrpvrR.— Aquilariacee.
225. Aquilaria agallocha, Roxb. Hansi. The bark of this tree was
formerly used for writing on, and often is so now by the Assamese ; they
also use it for bed mats. Good paper has been manufactured out of it.
A thin slip of the bark, about 4 inches in breadth and 18 inches in
length, is worn by the Namsangia Nagas, which hangs loosely, swinging
behind them as a substitute for breeches. They wear nothing before.
Nangta.
Orper.—Lauracee.
226. Laurus obtusifolius, Roxb. Larayen.
227. L. species, Fattt hoondu. Leaves 12 inches long and 6 broad.
Kangsing.
228. Tetranthera, Soom. Namsang.
229. T. species. Mohom.
230. T. species, Kangsing.
231. T. species. Ditto.
232. T. species, Mazan Roon. Kangsing.
OrDER.— Amarantacee.
233. Amarantus spinosus. Kangsing.
234. Celosia cristata, Roxb. Jhanzy.
235. Deeringia celasoides, Roxb. Larayen.
Orver.— Polygonacee.
236. Polygonum species. Leaves dotted. Kangsing.
237. P. fragrans, Boka pothar.
1844. | Flora of the Naga Hilts. 723
238. P. species. Stipules double, outer two lobes orbicular, leaves
short-petioled, oblong, acuminate, dotted. Kangsing.
239. P. species. Stipules double, outer 3 green, leaves alternate,
short-petioled, oblong, acuminate, cordate at the base, minutely
dotted. Flowers axillary and terminal, white, disk glandular, stamens
8, style 3-cleft, stigmas capitate, seed 3-angled, a scandent plant.
Kangsing.
240. P. species. Branches creeping, rooting, every part clothed
with glandular hairs, leaves cordate, dotted, flowers terminal, rose-co-
loured, disk glandular, stamens 8-style, 3-cleft. Kangsing.
241. Rumex species. Nowgong.
OrpeR.— Menispermacee.
242. Menispermum polycarpum, Roxb. Sohohai.
OrverR.— Vyrsinacee.
243. Myrsine species. Kangsing.
244, M. capitulata, Roxb. Ditto.
245. Ardisia floribunda, Wall. Jhanzy.
246. Baeobotrys nemoralis, Forst. Kangsing.
247. B. species. Mickelai.
OrvpER.—Ebenacee.
248. Diospyros racemosa, Roxb. Kangsing.
249. D. stricta, Roxb. Namsang.
250. D. chenum, Roxb. Samsa.
251. D. sapota, Roxb. Sohohai.
OrpER.—Convolvulacee.
252. Porana racemosa, Roxb. Kangsing.
253. Argyria strigosa. Mohom.
254. A. splendens, Swt. Tillo.
255. A. argentia. Tillo.
256. Convolvulus trifolis, Roxb. Simka.
257. C. pentagonus, Roxb. Sonaree.
OrvER.—Lobeliacee.
258. Lobelia robusta, Wall. Larayen.
724 Flora of the Naga Hilts. [ No. 153.
OrpvER.— Cinchonacee.
259. Randia longespina, DeC. Kangsing.
260, R. racemosa, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
261. Morinda angustifolia, Roxb. Kangsing.
262. Hedyotes scandens, Roxb. Larayen.
263. Mussaenda scandens. An extensive climbing plant. Larayen.
264. M. species. Ditto.
265. Ixora species. Not in flower. Namsang.
266. Coffea Bengalensis. Rungagong. This is common in the plains,
267. Nauclea parviflora, Roxb. Bhedaree.
268. N. cadamba, Roxb. Rogoo. Namsang.
269. Rondeletia paniculata, Roxb, Larayen.
270. Uncaria sessilifructus, Roxb. Mohom.
271. Parderia foetida, Linn. Lakhootee.
OrvER.— Sambucee.
272. Sambucus ebulus, Roxb. Namsang.
OrpDER.— Compositae.
273. Elephantopus scaber, Linn. Kolaburia.
274. Spilanthis armilla, Linn. Kaboong.
275. Gnaphalium strictum, Roxb. Namsing.
276. G. orixensis, Roxb. Mohom.
277. Conyza lucta, Wall.? Ditto.
278. C. balsamifera, Roxb. Ditto.
279. C. pennatifida, Buch. Lakhootee.
280. C. alata, Roxb. Mohom.
281. C species. Boora Hymung.
282. C. species. Larayen.
283. C. species. Asringia.
284. C. species. Mohom.
285. ? species. Larayen.
286. ? species. Samsa.
287. ? species. Mohom.
288. Centaurea species. Dyung B.
289. Pectis species. Larayen.
290. Tagetis patula, Roxb. Kangsing.
291. Sonchus species. Sohohai.
1844. ] Flora of the Naga Hilts. 725
292. S. orixensis, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
293. Artimelia grata, Wall. Larayen.
294. Bidens trifida, Buch. Namsang,
295. Conyza angustifolia, Roxb. Mohom.
296. Eupatorium species. Lakhootee.
297. E. species. Samsa.
298. E. species. Boora Hymung.
299. E. species. Namsang.
300. E. species. Akooki.
301. Siegisbeckia orientalis, Roxb. Nowgong.
302. Conyza species. Namsang. All the lands which had been under
cultivation during the last season were crowded with Composite, but I
did not succeed in getting specimens of all that I saw, and have not
sufficient data by me to determine the above in a satisfactory manner.
OrvEeR.—Plantaginacee.
303. Plantago species. Kangsing.
OrvER.— Cordiacee.
304, Cordia species. Leaves 3-cordate. Kangsing.
OrveR.—Labiate.
305. Ajuga repens, Roxb.? A showy plant, with beautiful blue
flowers. Akooks.
306. Mentha species. Leaves cordate, serrate. Nowgong.
307. M. paniculata, Roxb. Mohom.
308, M. species. Leaves elliptic. Ditto.
309. Salvia species. Every part clothed with odoriferous glands.
Nangta.
310, Ocymum sanctum, Linn. Lakhootee.
OrvpER.— Verbenacee.
311. Verbena officinalis, Linn. Mickelai,
312. Premna scandens, Roxb. Larayen.
313. P. grandiflora, Wall.? Mickelai.
$14. Clerodendron nutans, Wall. Samsa.
315. C. species. Kangsing.
316, C. imfortunatum, Linn. Sohohai.
726
Flora of the Naga Hills. LNo. 153.
317. C. viscosum? Calyx glandular. Kaboong.
318.
C. serratum, Don. Kangsing.
319. Callicarpa species. Arboreous from 30 to 40 feet high, bark
rough, all the young parts tomentose, leaves alternate, flowers terminal.
Larayen.
320.
321.
322,
323.
324,
325.
326.
327.
328.
329.
390.
331.
O02.
333.
334.
C. lanceolaria, Roxb. Sarmsa.
C. Reevesia? Mickelai.
OrpEr.— Bignonicee.
Bignonia cauliflora, Wall. ? Larayen.
B. suaveolens, Roxb. Namsang.
B. chelonoides, Roxb. Ditto.
B. Indica, Linn. Ditto.
OrpsrR.— Crytandacee.
Incarvillia parasitica, Roxb. Sohohai.
I. oblongifolia, Roxb. Mohom.
OrvDER.— Acanthacee.
Ruellia dependens, Roxb. Larayen.
R. latebrosa, Roxb. Booru Hymung,
Justicia speciosa, Roxb. Nangta.
J. thyrsiflora, Roxb. Kaboong.
J. parviflora, Wall.? Namsang.
J. Adhatoda, Roxb. Mickelai.
J. species. In habit like Adhatoda, with orange coloured flowers.
Mickelai.
330
336
337
338
339
J. Gendurussa, Linn. Namsang.
Eranthemum pulchellum, Roxb. Ditto.
Thunbergia grandiflora, Roxb. Ditto.
T. Wall. Kaboong.
Goldfussia species. Leaves unequally purple, underneath flowers
white, found in the ravines between Namsang and Nangta.
340. G. species. Not coloured, leaves unequally paired, flowers large,
of a lilac color. Nangta. |
341.
G. species. Flowers yellow. Namsang. | have not the character
of this genus to refer to, it is not in any book which I have access to
—-
1844. ] Flora of the Naga Hills. 727
at present, and the same remark applies to all the species given under
_ Justicia, as the greater part of them have been placed with other genera
by modern Botanists. I have no monograph of any single family of
plants by me here, so cannot avail myself of any of the late improve-
ments.
OrvER.— Scrophulariaceae.
342. Terronia, Roxb. Kangsing.
343. Buddleia Neemda, Buch. Nangta.
OrvpER.— Solanaceae.
344. Solanum Jacquinii, Willd. Nowgong.
345. S. Indicum, Linn. Ditto.
346. S. pubescens, Willd. Lakhootee.
347. S. species. Unarmed, leaves obovate. Mohom.
348. Nicotiana tabaccum, Linn. Ditto.
349. Capsicum frutescens, Roxb. Kangsing.
OrpEeR.— Gentianacea.
350. Exacum bicolor, Roxb. Sohohai.
351. Pladera virgata, Roxb.? Probably a new species, as Roxburgh
says his plant is erect; this is trailing, branches acutely 4-angled,
leaves opposite, short petioled, 3-nerved, smooth, calyx distinctly 4-
partite, 2 segments large, striped with pink, 2 smaller white, bearing
the longer stamen, which is twice the length of the other three, throat
of the corolla yellow. This is one of the most interesting plants I
met with, as it bears such a profusion of flowers, and accompanied us
at every step from the Dikho to the Dyung. I saw it on the summit
of every hill on both sides of the road, on every slope, and at the bottom
of every ravine.
OrpDER.— Apocynaceae.
352. Beaumontia grandiflora, Wall. This very elegant and powerful
climber I have not hitherto met with in the plains, and I saw but one
plant in our journey over the hills, and that was at an elevation of
2,153 feet. Namsang.
353, Echites macrophylla, Roxb. Sohohai.
728
354.
355.
356.
357.
398.
359.
360.
361,
362.
363.
364,
365.
366.
367.
368.
369.
370.
371.
372,
373.
374.
075.
376.
377.
378,
Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
E. acuminata, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
E. species. Not in flower. Ditto.
Nerium grandiflorum, Roxb. Ditto.
Ichnocarpus frutescens, H. R. Mohom.
OrvpER.— Oleacee.
Phillyrea robusta, Roxb. ? Larayen.
P. grandiflora, Wall. Samtoong.
Chondrospermum smilacifolium, Wall. Sohohai.
Chionanthus macrophyllus, Wall. Kangsing.
C. zeylanica, Linn. Kangsing.
C. dichotoma, Roxb. Ditto.
OrpDER.—Jasminacee.
Jasminum aristatum. Boora Hymung.
OrperR.—Lquisetacee.
Equisetum debilis, Roxb. Jhanzy.
ENDOGENA.
OrvDER.— Scitaminee.
Alinia species, Namsang.
A. allughas, Roxb, Ditto foot.
Hedychium angustifolium, Roxb. Ditto.
Zingiber species. Mohom.
Z. officinalis, Roxb.? Cultivated.
Costus speciosus, Roxb.? Namsang.
Phrynium dichotomum, Roxb. Ditto.
Canna Indica, Linn. Ditto.
Maranta species, Copat. Mickelai.
OrvEeR.— Musacee.
Musa sapientum, Linn. Namsang.
M. coccinea Andi. Nangta.
OrverR.—J/ridacee.
Iris species. Not in flower. Namsang.
Marica species. Ditto, Akook,
1844.]
379,
380.
381,
382.
383.
384,
385,
386,
387.
388.
389,
390,
391.
392.
393.
394,
395,
396.
397.
398.
399,
400.
401.
402.
403.
404.
405.
Flora of the Naga Hills.
OrvpER.— Orchidaceae.
? species. Namsang.
a's, Terrestrial, Akook.
ie Epiphite. Ditto.
Oe 5 Namsang.
Pe,, Terrestrial, Sohohai.
Cypripedium venustum. Namsang.
? species, Epiphite.
? Ditto, ditto. Nangta.
? Ditto, ditto. Namsang.
? Ditto, ditto. Kangsing.
Dendrobium Pieradii. Sohohai.
D. densiflorum, Wall.? Mohom.
Coellogzne* species. Kangsing.
OrpER.—FPalmacee.
Calamus, Ryding. Kangsing.
C, rotang, Roxb. Nowgong.
Areca gracilis, Roxb. Mohom.
Wallichia caryotoides, Roxb. Nangta.
Caryota urens, Roxb. Nowgong.
Livistonia assamica, Griff. Namsang.
OrpDER.— Commelinacee.
Anceilemaj species. JKangsing.
OrpvEeR.— Roxburghiacec.
Roxburghia viridiflora. Samsam.
OrvER.— Dioscoreacee.
Dioscorea species. Sohohai.
D. species. Kolaburia.
D. alata, Roxb. Boora Hymung.
Orprer.—Pandanacee.
Pandanus odoratissimus. Kangsing.
P. furcatus, Roxb. Ditto.
P. species, small. Sohohai.
* Soin MSS. ¢ Soin MSS.
729
730 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
OrverR.—Aracee.
406. Pothos officinalis, Roxb. Nangta.
407. P. scandens, Roxb. Sohohai.
408. P. caudata, Roxb. Kangsing.
409. Pothos laria, Roxb. Sohohai.
410. P. species. Leaves large oblong, with parallel. Kangsing.
411. Arum species. Small leaves, smooth,with dark ovate spots, found
growing on the rocks, Sohohai. Besides these, a large species of
Arum, Naya Kushoo, is cultivated to a great extent, and brought
down into the plains for sale. The root is globular. I have not seen
the plant.
OrpER.— Graminee.
412. Melia latifolia, Roxb. Koosepat. This is the principal plant
to be met with on all the slopes that have not been under cultivation
for three years. At great elevations it is less succulent than in the
plains, and acquires a firmer texture, that is, if the plants are identical.
There may be two or three different species,
413. Coix lachryma, Linn, Nangta.
414, P species. Langmai. Kangsing.
415. Saccharum officinarum, Linn. Ditto.
416. S. Sara, Roxb. Bora Hymung.
417. S. species. Puddumpuli. Kangsing.
418. Oryza sativa, Linn. Cultivated.
Bambusez. There is a vast variety of the Bamboo genus spread
all over the hills, especially in the ravines near the water-courses, and
they appear to have been not unfrequently planted in the neighbour-
hood of villages, in order to their yielding a ready supply. I am un-
able to give a correct specific name to those which I met with, but
here add the native name of seven species or varieties recognized by
the Assamese. |
419. Jattie Bank.—A strong useful bamboo, preferred for building
purposes.
420. Byulee B.—Very large and strong.
421. Bazal B.—A small straight rind used for mats, &c.
422. Boolooka B.—A large hollow rinds used for carrying water by
the Nagas,
1844.] Flora of the Naga Hilts. 731
423. Kankoo B,—Large and firm.
424. Watoot B.—Small.
425. Bhee B,—Reported to be poisonous.
ACROGENS.
Filices.
426 to 451. Of ferns I collected 26 species, among which is the
gigantic tree fern, but I have not sufficient data by me to determine
the genera and species.
Musci.
452 to 470. Of fungus only 6 species.
Miscellanee.
477? Arboreous. All the young parts densely covered wtih rusty
tomentz, leaves alternate, oblong, lanceolate, sharply serrate, smooth
above, clothed with ferruginous down, underneath, veins conspicuous,
parallel, anastomizing at or just within the margin. Larayen.
478. Rottlera tinctoria, Roxb. Nowgong.
479? Composite. A very large plant for this family, from 10 to
200 feet high, the trunk near the ground from 3 to 6 inches in diame-
ter, wood very hard and heavy. Leaves alternate, sessile or nearly
so, ovately lanceolate, acuminating most towards the base, remotely
dentate, smooth on the upper surface, a little downy underneath,
principal veins strong, parallel anastomizing near the margin, 18
inches long by 6 broad, flowers very numerous in large terminal
spreading panicles, found on every hill between the Dikho and Dyung
rivers,
COMPOSIT.
480. Tunglutty. Shrubby, many erect branches often springing from
the same, perennial root, every part woolly and fragrant. Leaves alter-
nate, petioled, acuminating to both ends, serrated, serratures ending
in a rigid point, downy on both sides, with 4 nearly opposite subulate
appendages to the petiole, very common in the plains, covering large
tracts of land. I frequently met with it on the hills, but not in
flower, Kangsing.
481. ? Composite. A small herbaceous, erect, branching in every
part, densely covered with odoriferous glands. Branches winged, wings
5 F
732 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 153.
broadly fringed. Leaves alternate, serrate, acuminating to both ends,
flowers axillary, and terminal, Larayen.
482. ? An ornamental tree with shining leaves; in appearance it
resembles Carallia lucida, Roxb., but I see no serratures on the leaves.
Kansing.
483. Gordonia integrifolia, Roxb. Nagabi. Kansing.
484.? A very ornamental climbing plant, with opposite acuminate
smooth leaves, and numerous white flowers. Namsang.
485. ? A most powerful climber, rnnning over the tops of the
highest trees. Leaves crowded near the ends of the branches, pe-
tioled, smooth, shining on both sides, cuneate, mucronate, 12 inches
long by 5 broad, very distinctly though minutely dotted, peduncles ter-
minal, all the parts of the flower more or less villous. Calyx 6-partite,
corolla none, stamens 9, style 1, disk glandular. Larayen.
486. ? Rom. Acanthaceae, A small shrub cultivated by the Nagas
for a good blue dye which it produces. The greater part of the cloth-
ing which we sawin use by men, women and children, had been dyed
by this plant, and the colour appeared to stand very well. Leaves op-
posite, short petioled, or sessile, often unequally paired, elliptic, asumi-
nate, remotely serrate, veins prominent, parallel, Flowers axillary and
terminal, lilac coloured, showy, calyx closely embraced by 2 small
ligulate bractes, 5-partite fully to the base. Corolla unequally 5-
partite. Stamens 4 didynamous, with the rudiment of a sterile fila-
ment; style one, stigma incurved, fringed, germ sprinkled with short,
glandular hairs, seeds hooked. Larayen.
387. ? Arboreous, bark rust-coloured. Leaves alternate, petioled,
oblong, serrated, nearly smooth above, with a few scales on the mid-
rib and veins, densely clothed with ferruginous down underneath, veins
parallel and sprinkled with woolly scales. Peduncles axillary, many
flowered, flowers rose-coloured. Sepals 5, petals 5, stamens numerous,
closely surrounding the germ; germ 5-celled, style 5-cleft. The style
is sometimes 6-cleft, and the germ 6-celled. Kangasing
488. ? An ornamental plant, probably a jasmine, Leaves oppo-
site, very thin, rounded at the base, tapering toa fine point. Kangsing.
489. Olax imbricata, Roxb. Kangsing.
490. ? An ornamental shrub, every part covered with soft pubes-
cence, leaves alternate, short petioled, oblong, finely serrated. Sohohai.
1844. | Flora of the Naga Hills. 733
491, ? Nagatinga. Arboreous. Leaves alternate, petioled, acu-
minate, serrate, smooth on both sides. Boora Hymung.
492. ? Arboreous, young parts softly tomentose, Leaves opposite,
long petioled, unequally paired, cordate, 3-nerved, a little rough above,
tomentose underneath. Larayen.
493. ? An elegant little annual plant about one foot high, with
white flowers, spotted within side like a foxglove. Herbaceous, erect,
leaves opposite, petioled, from elliptic to lanceolate, smooth above, pu-
bescent underneath on the veins and petiole; peduncles terminal, many
flowered, calyx 5-partite, segments acute, corolla tubular, 5-partite,
fertile stamens 2, anthers double, sterile filaments 2, shorter, germ su-
perior, style one, stigma exserted, 2-lobed. Namsang.
494. ? A completely glaucous climbing plant without stipules.
Leaves alternate petioled, oblong, quite entire, distinctly dotted, veins
anastomizing within the margin, Sohohai.
495. ? A pretty little herbaceous annual with yellow flowers, every
part villous, the hairs in the young plants. are often tipped with
glands, Leaves opposite petioled, oblong or lanceolate, distinctly
serrated. Flowers in axillary and terminal racemes. Calyx 5-parted,
segments nearly equal, corolla bilabiate, upper lip much smaller, entire
or slightly emarginate, lower lip somewhat 3-lobed, middle lobe pro-
jecting and emarginate, throat very hairy and spotted. Stamens 4-
didynamous, anthers double, distinct, style one, stigma obscurely 2-
lobed, capsule 2-celled, many-seeded. Sonareegong.
496. ? An extensive climber not in flower, every. part smooth, leaves
alternate, long petioled, undulate, cordate, 3-nerved, unequal-sided.
Larayen.
497. ? An ornamental tree, all the young parts softly tomentose.
Leaves alternate, numerous, small, oblong acuminate. Cascarea
species ?
498.? An ornamental tree, branches, petioles, and veins of the
leaves clothed with subulate scales, leaves alternate, cuneate serrate,
serratures subulate, veins parallel. Namsang.
499.? A large and elegant tree, not in flower. Leaves alternate,
short petioled, oblong acuminate, slightly waved, green and shining
above, glaucous underneath, 18 inches long by 5 broad, veins prominent
parallel, anastomizing just within the margin. Bhedavee.
734 Flora of the Naga Hills. [No. 158.
500, ? A small, but very ornamental shrub, with red and white
flowers ; every part covered with soft, hairy tomenta. Leaves opposite
petioled, lanceolate, serrate, white, with down underneath. Flowers in
crowded terminal racemes, or rather spikes, for the pedicles are scarcely
perceptible. Bractes scattered, coriaceous, about 3-flowered, calyx
tubular, 5-toothed, densely clothed with soft white down, corolla 5-par-
tite longer than the calyx. Stamens 4-didynamous, exserted, 4 times as
long as the calyx, Pestil bifid as long as the stamens, germ 4-lobed,
ripe seed not seen. Clerodendron species? Mohom.
In conclusion, I have to observe, that I have generally preferred
giving Roxburgh’s names, although I am aware that many of them
have been changed since his time. All the native names given in
italics are Assamese.
(Signed) J. W. Masters,
Sibsagore, 29th March, 1844.
Journal of Captain Herbert's Tour from Almorah ina N. W., W.,
and S. W. direction, through parts of the Province of Kemaon and
British Gurhwal, chiefly in the centre of the Hills, vide No. 66,
Indian Atlas. (Edited by J. H. Barren, Esq, C. S.)
1122 November, 1827.—Marched in the evening to Hawulbagh.
12th Nov.—Halted for Captain Manson to join.
13th Nov.—Halted for coolies, thinking these would prove a dif-
ficulty, deemed it advisable to detach him.
14th Nov.—Marched to Dharim Khola about six miles. Road
good, almost level, mica slate the whole way, no good examples of
strata. Temperature of the river 58, air 68, mean thermometer 48 ;
in the evening making arrangements for the coolies. Dharim Khola-
ghur is small but rather picturesque, with a pretty good share of level
ground ; it contains one other village.*
* The line of march from Hauwulbugh was up the Kosillariver. Dharim Kholais a
glen, which joins that of the Kosilla from the West.—J. H. Be
1844. ] Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. 735
15th Nov.—Marched to Kotlee three hours, road distance about
8 miles. On ascending from Dharim Khola, granite of the crumb-
ly type passing into gneiss. Road ascends to corner about 400 or
500 feet; descends to Bumunee-God under Majhera. Gneiss in-
clining to granite the whole way. No fixing the strata. Road up
Bumunee-God to Kehera-ka-rao. The gneiss to Kotlee. Road level
almost, and country beautiful; a valley falls in from the right,
East*.
16th Nov.—Muhurgaon ; the distance was shorter to-day owing to
the sepoy’s mistake, about two hours, five or six miles. The road
leads up the Cosillah at first along the side of the hill, then descending
to cross the river continues along a fine level piecet of some miles in
extent, and half a mile wide, the whole of it apparently carefully
cultivated. Ground preparing, for wheat has been sown in the cold
places. Three villages on a steep to right: Neera, Lowrap and Soomket,
three miles from camp. Tauna Suzowlee to left on the rise of the
hill, four miles from camp. Opposite Phuleea, a Joodish village ;
about four and half miles, a valley falls in from right. Turn up and
encamp at Muhurgaon. Scenery picturesque ; road generally level.
The rock at starting was gneiss, of an anomalous characier, having
apparently taken in clay slate as one of the ingredients. This rock
then extends from Dharim Khola, to the east and west; I suspect
it has considerable development, and will open out a new feature of
enquiry when properly pursued. Nos. 5 and 6, gneiss. No. 7, a cherty
rock, a sub-granular quartz rock. It succeeds the gneiss. It is very
abundant in this quarter, and forms imbedded nodules in the gneiss.
It is the rock at Mala, occurring there intermixed with clay slate.
Ah. 30m. 25,446 ; 66, 64, 65,70.33.
17th Nov.—Register thermometer at 33 (sp.) 34 (mercury) covered
with dew. Hoar frost in all the hollows ; road easy of ascent at first along
* This comes down from the Gunnanath ridge which divides the Kosilla, from
the Suttralee valley and the Chana Biloree valley on the Bagesurroad. At Gunna-
nath, Hustee Dull, the Goorkha chief, fellin battle with the English troops, 1815.—
J. H. B.
+ This is the Somesur valley on the Kosilla. There is a beautiful grove of deodar
pines in the middle of the valley, shading a pretty temple. The villages in this
vicinity are very fine, with some large white houses scattered here and there, nearly
all belonging to families of Joshee Brahmins, the dominant tribe in Kumaon.
¥
736 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. [No. 153.
side of hill, latterly more steep to Geera Cheena. Bar. at 10h, 24.48,
Th. 60.54. Then a steep and bad descent to camp. Splendid view of
peaks (snowy) from Pass. The following villages: Dhoom right bank ;
Bhurur ditto ; Chour left ; Nakot right ; Ujhura, Buseraree, Noukoora,
all together right bank. The valley begins to narrow here, and there
are no villages beyond. Our tent occupies the site of an augur, or
village of iron-founders, which was formerly nearly at the head of the
valley, and received its ores from a mine above the Khuree* copper
ore. At starting, No. 8, a reddish quartzose slate verging on clay
slate; No. 9, true clay slate, a thin layer ; No. 10, the quartz rock
under ; No. 1] limestone at Nakote, silicious, I believe. These are the
same rocks precisely as are found on the Suttralee road to Bageswur,
and there also they succeed gneiss, which is found extending nearly
from Jak Bhetoolee to Thakoolee ; also at Ramesur, on the Surjoo, the
same succession occurs, and in the Ramgunga. No good indications
of strata ; the covering of debris is thick on these hills, which are of the
rounded form; even the outline fails to detect the dip. The scenery
was picturesque—4 p. m. 25.148, 61.5, 56, 48.5; 64 max., 41 min. ;
sunset at aquarter to 3.f
18th Nov.—No. 1, 1753; No. 2, 1754; No. 8, 1755; No. 4?
16¢h Nov.—No. 5, straight laminar gneiss containing something be-
tween talcand mica, might be called argillaceous gneiss perhaps, as the
mica is like clay slate. No. 6, a better defined gneiss than the pre-
ceding, straight slaty, contains more felspar and perhaps chlorite.
No. 7, very fine granular brownish quartz rock, Muhurgaon.
17th Nov.—No. 8, quartz rock passing into clay slate, red slaty, com-
position granular. Beyond Muhurgaon No. 9 olive-colored fine earthy
clay slate, sub-schistose, Bhynsur. No. 10 quartz rock, reddish olive, a
layer or veins in preceding ditto. No. 11, blue limestone with white
veins, Nakote. No. 12, white compact dolomite? or silicious lime-
stone, Nakote.
18th Nov.—No. 13, 1765, large crystalline granular dolomite, Doba.
* The Khuree copper mine to East of Capt. Herbert’s route is passed on the road
from Almora to Bagesur.—The ores are very good, but the mine is not productive,
owing to the difficulty of working the soapstone rock, which is always falling in.
—J. H. B.
+ No miracle, but owing to the Western hills.—J. H, B.
1844. | Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. 737
No. 14, black tale slate. No. 15, 1767, granitic talcose quartz rock
above confluence with Gaomuttee river.*
Marched to Dangun, village on confluence of a stream with Gao-
muttee river ; rocks very little visible, at first small patches of dolomite
crystalline granular, intermixed with black potstone and black pot-
stone slate. Then a large tract of compact quartz rock, and latterly
of granitic structure, similar to what I have obtained in the Ramgun-
ga and at Punnae.t Thisis acurious rock, and well deserves a name.
The road was an easy descent the whole way. Very little cultiva-
tion, except at Doba and about half way below Jowkande. Here there
is a fine wide valley well cultivated. The Gaomuttee isa large stream,
even in this month it is about breast deep. We crossed it by a sunga.
Umsaree Kot-ka Gudhera is the name of the glen we came down from
Doba. The village is below Jowkande. Sunset at 4p.m. Ther. 79,
min. 57. Dry 9 cylind. 18. wet 27, 4 p. m. 26.878, 77.5, 72.5, 58.76,
max. 34 dew.
19th Nov.—Umtola and Kholee, two pretty white villages on
opposite sides of a glen that comes down parellel to that of Doba.
Mohot 14 hour on left bank, fine deep place in the river like a
small lake, about 2 or 300 yards long. Rock, which has been some-
thing of a gneiss, changes here toa hornblende or chlorite schist, a
compound rock. Path generally good, with easy ascent along left
bank. The rock is distinctly stratified in many places, generally the
strata are vertical. Here the dip to North at an angle of 56°. The
rock changes to the type No. 15, and continues all the way distinctly
stratified, dipping near 20° N. W., with a high angle (50°). Road passes
into a feeder of the Gaomuttee, and then back again over the side range
without ascent to the parent valley. A Jood village on right bank.
Encamp in bed of river about 31 miles beyond. Time 3 hours= 9
miles. One or two difficult rocky places.
The valley is as yet narrow, except here and there for about da
Tile or so, and then even of no great width. In some places the
* Great care should be taken in the Museum to compare Capt. Herbert’s descrip-
tions with his specimens, The mineral characteristics will at once shew to what
series his numbers on the specimens refer. No, 11 is also 1763, and ‘‘ Blue lime-
stone with white veins” will at once shew its difference from any other. No. 11 is
another series.—J. H. B.
t The fine valley of Punnae, on the Aluknunda between the Dhunpoor and the
Pokree copper mine mountains,-—J. H. B.
x
738 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §c. [No. 153. |
rocky banks almost meet. Features of this kind inevitably excite
the idea of the gradual development of a river’s course, and the pre-
vious formation of many lakes. 4 p. m. Bar. 26.476, 61; 59; 51,5,
max. 72. River 56.3. Tent 61.54. Outside 59. 51,5.
20th Nov.—Marched to Poorena, about 6 miles. At 35m.
Kunsaree, a deep pool in the river bed. Rock dipping S. E.
A little further, valley opens and presents a fine sloping surface of
some extent. The whole covered with jungle grass, with the excep-
tion of a few fields here and there; few villages visible. . Cross a
small stream near camp; gneiss dipping to N. direction, N. 80 E.
4 p. m. Bar. 26.286, 72, 67.5, 54. Byznath about 123 mile on the
Gaomuttee. The confluence of the Guroor close to this.
2ls¢ Nov.—Nowgaon. Road not so good to-day; to Nowgaon
about 6 or 7 miles. First part level, leaving Goamuttee valley and
following that of the Guroor, picturesque valley, the former looking
towards Runchoola; strange that such a fine valley should be so ill
cultivated, or rather uncultivated. Here and there a field in the
middle of the jungle grass, indicates perhaps the commencement of a
different state of things.*
Gurser Lillu, 2 villages. Puchunna to right 50 miles. Geonaee to
left 90. Babburtola right a little back. Rock a chloritic schist, dips
N. E. 20°.
Ghersun-ka-khola, ‘a
Kot-tulwaree. k -- 100 min” to right.
4p. m. Bar. 25.686, 66, 59, 50.
No. 16, 1768, a schist of an anomalous character, perhaps a gneiss.
Yellowish grey. Close to camp being like the rock near Ramgurh.t
No. 17. Talcose gneiss? the Punnae and Ramgunga rock.
No. 18. Chlorite or hornblende schist. .
No. 19. Talcose schist. No. 17, but with straight laminar structure.
20th Nov.—No. 20. Gneiss bluish.grey, approaching to mica slate.
» This valley, now called the Bijnath valley, is the largest in Kumaon, and al-
though 3,500 feet above the sea, no cultivators can remain in it on account of its
insalubrious climate. It was once thickly peopled, and at Kuthoor and on the Run-
choola ridge which stretches into the valley, was the seat of the ancient hill dynasty,
called the Kuthoor Rajahs, now quite extinct. Ruins of temples, cutcherries, chabou-
tras, &c. some of them beautifully carved, abound hereabouts.—J. H. B.
+t Ramgurh, between Almora and Bhamouree.
*
1844. | Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §c. 739
21st Nov.—No. 21. Olive green chlorite schist.
No. 22. Dark green ditto.
No. 23.* A vein of gneiss in preceding, a beautiful rock.
22d Nov.—To camp in jungle, owing to the stupidity of the sepoy
who went on. We had a hard day’s work of it, the ascent to the
Passt occupying 5 hours, the first few miles were easy with good road,
but the latter was for the rest of the way very bad, chiefly in the bed
of a torrent, Guroor-Gunga, which we crossed and recrossed about one
dozen times. Latterly, leaving its bed, the road ascends one of the
spurs thrown out by the high ridge, when it improves alittle. There
is, or was, a pool on the top of the ridge where we expected to find the
camp, but had to descend about a mile on the western side, where
I found breakfast prepared, but no ground or place fit for a tent.
After breakfast, went on 2 hours farther, the descent most steep, and in
many places even dangerous. At last, we came to a tolerably level
spot where was water, and where I pitched for the night. An extra-
ordinary feature in this descent was the deficiency of water even
where the ground was a little level. Barometer on the Pass, 22.82 ;
54, 49, 40, at 11 a.m.
The rocks, as the preceding days, anomalous, sometimes verging on
gneiss, sometimes on chlorite slate, but most generally quartz rocks,
all the fragments too, of which there are an immense number, both
on the ascent and descent, belong to the last named species. Very few
examples of strata, or indeed of the rock in situ at all. One on the
ascent was observed N. 60 E., (direction N. 30 W.), angle of incli-
nation 75. A wild bee’s nest was observed, which had been robbed
by a bear or other wild animal. The bee is of a different species
from the cultivated, much smaller, and marked with yellow rings.
It is said to be much more vicious ; the domestic bee seldom or ever
stinging, the other severely. The cells of the honeycomb were hexan-
gular. This is the third species of bee I have observed in these hills.
* This should be 1775.
+t This Pass is over the Bhutkot and Pinnath range of mountains, visible N. W.
from Almora, very high, from 9,200 feet to 7,500 feet above the sea.—J. H. B.
¢ It is somewhat strange that Dr. McClelland in his ‘‘ Enquiries into the Geology
of Kumaon,’’ blames the people for using only wild honey instead of domesticating
the bee. Nearly every house in the province has bee-hives, and the honey is excellent
im some places, and a profitable article of trade.—J. H. B. m=
~
0G
740 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, se. [No. 153.
237d Nov.—To Turrag-ka-tal. Our yesterday's march having
kept the people on their legs all day, and allowed but little time
for their meals; made a short one to-day to Turag-ka-tal, an open
spot in the bed of the feeder of the Ramgunga, which though now dry,
they say, in the rains becomes a lake. Distance about 5 miles, road
at first more steep, afterwards less so; a descent the whole way, and
mostly good, very little rock, the fragments always the talcose granular
quartz rock. Found the Englefield barometer out of order to-day, and
obliged to open the cistern. A large bubble of air had got 2 up the
tube, readjusted, but without boiling. It is evident that the Engle-
field barometer unless checked by another, is of no use.
3-45, p. m., 26.100; 64, 61, 49-5 sunset. Set watch at 12 by
Theodolite.
22nd Nov.—No. 24. A thin slaty gneiss, bluish grey, dirty.
No. 25. An almost compact fine grained quartz rock, contains most
probably felspar. This is the rock of which the dip was observed.
No. 26. Large grained talcose quartz rock, with very little appear-
ance of stratification. The Ramgunga and Punnaé rock.
23d Nov.) -4 5 { No. 27. A green (chloritic) gneiss, sublaminar.
24th ,, = = ,, 28. Limestone, Turag-ka-tal.
21h . 5 om », 29. Gneiss, straight laminar.
< ,, 90. Quartz rock.
26th ,, = 2a!» 3i.A tender mica slate passing into gneiss.
Pialamarke It certainly contains felspar, ascent
as O from Sohngaon.
» vs | ,, 32. A true gneiss, silvery mica, top of ridge.
3 = | | ,, 383. Ditto. |
42 2| ,, 34. A mica slate or gneiss, brown, Bed of
PY re yee ee | Benee Gunga, or Bino below Ooperara.
24th Nov.—To Bural near Doluree, along the level plain, which
in the rains becomes a lake, and therefore called Turag-ka-tal. It.
is almost shut in to the West, which is the direction of the glen, by a
low ridge of limestone which runs across the valley, leaving but
a narrow opening for the discharge of several streams, which even
at this season take their rise here. This ground though remarkably ~
even, is not I think quite level, having a fall to West, as proved by the
streams which have a considerable current. The whole length is
between two and three miles, and the breadth at the widest about a 4
1844.] Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. - 741
to 4. The soil appears excellent, and is partially brought into culti-
vation. In the rainy season the depth is said to be such, that some
tall trees, which are situate about the middle, are completely sub-
merged. ‘The extreme steepness of the mountains which surround
it, must carry down their supplies quicker than they can run off ;
and in this way has a deep and rugged glen been filled up with silt
and detritus; and converted into a fine level piece of ground ; doubt-
less the surface will continue to rise till the waters find a wider
outlet over the top of the limestone ridge already noticed, which is
not many feet above the present surface.
The descent from this ridge is considerable, the difference of level
between its top and the bottom of the glen being four or five times
what it is on the side of the lake, a proof that the latter has been
raised considerably. After descending, there is a good deal of level
ground, and the path is pretty good, with the exception of occasional
boggy places which are troublesome. The road after leading down
the glen, enters the bed of the Ramgunga* with such a straight
continuity of direction, that though I was on the look-out for the
meeting of the two vallies, I did not observe it, and was surprised to
find myself encamped on the bank of the latter river. A very exten-
sive piece of level ground occurs here, and it is well cultivated; a
fine valley appears EK. or S. E., very wide and very level, no rocks
were visible, but limestone more or less pure. A good deal of it was
seen in the bounding ridges to right, as indicated by the black and
yellow precipices.
25th Nov.—Sohngaon; road excellent to-day, level the whole
way, the march a short one, being Sunday, about 5 miles. Down
the Ramgunga, the bed of which is here a noble plain of many
miles in length, and upwards of 4a mile in breadth in some places.
Left the village of Nagadh to right in a little glen of | or 2 miles.
Crossed the river and ascended a larger glen, which though of some
extent, is said to lead back upon the Ramgunga, or rather upon the
* Care should be taken not to confound this Ramgunga which, rising in the cen-
tral hills, flows to Moradabad and Bareilly, with the Ramgunga which rises in the
snowy range and joins the Surjoo river at Ramesur, a few miles from the junction of
the latter with the Kalee river.—J. H. B.
742 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. [No. 153.
Kutsaree* stream. No rock visible, but one which seems to be a
gneiss of very flat laminar structure. In this glen appear some strata
dipping to W. N. W. at a low angle (30°) quartz rock. We have
in this valley a fine section of the bank, exhibiting distinctly the man-
ner in which these level pieces are formed. Three strata appear dis-
tinctly marked, perfectly parallel to the present surface. The lowest
consists chiefly of very coarse gravel. The second is a fine silt or
mud, with scarcely any gravel. The third, or uppermost, is like the
first, but the gravel rather smaller, and more earthy towards the top.
These three divisions are most distinctly marked.
26th Nov.—Camp above Jynta, ascent to lateral ridge, path good
and easy. Then along face of ridge with a view of the Ram-
gunga, and that most beautiful flat in its bed nearly 10 milest in
length, cultivated every inch of it. Opposite appears Nythana fort, it
bore 5° S. E. from the top of the ridge. Mica slate is the rock all
the way to the top of the ridge. A patch of the gneiss found near Al-
mora, and on the road from Doodra Hath to Palee then occurs. Day
cloudy. 4 p.m. 24.835, 65.5, 58, 50.
27th Nov.—To Goorja Chowra below Ooperara 33 hours, about
10 miles. On starting, accompanied by gneiss. Path good, oblique,
ascent along gentle slopes thinly covered with Cheer pines. Sum-
mit of the ridge,{ a fine level piece, picturesque spot for a house,
water close, with plenty of fine timber. Descend obliquely along
smooth grassy hills, excellent road winding round a glen. Pass a
village just established (last rains,) cross over a low ridge, and
come down upon Ooperara. This part not so picturesque, or path so
good. Every where gneiss. Descend from Ooperara to the Bino
path better gneiss, but of a different type, small grained, grey and ap-
proaching to mica slate. Encamp on bank of river, which here re-
* The Kutsaree valley, six miles long, and from half a mile to nearly a mile in
breadth, joins the Ramgunga from the north at Gunnai. It is beautifully cultivated,
and the surrounding mountains yield the best iron ore (chiefly red hematite, ) in
the province, and here are the most extensive iron mines.—J. H. B
+ This part of the Ramgunga valley is the richest portion of Kumaon, and forms
with other fertile tracks, the pergunnah of Palee.—J. H. B.
¢ This ridge is called Jowrasee and Doorga Dhee, and would be the finest position
for a large town in the whole hills.—J, H. B.
1844. | Capt. Herber?s Tour from Almorah, &c. 743
ceives another stream from East. Dheeghat* is below, about two or
three miles. Encamped there in my Sorenugur journey. This was
one of the most pleasant marches we have yet had. Cloudy all day,
and now I think threatening rain. 5 p. m. Bar. 26.595, 64.
28th Nov.t—To Paton, steep ascent of an hour and a quarter,
two patches of gneiss run down the hill, as indicated by huge blocks
scattered over the surface. Pass through Bhumoree. Khyldora nearly
opposite camp and a little above. The following is a sketch of this
river valley. (See plate No. I.)
After ascending to separating ridge between Beonee and Bino rivers,
the path leads along the summit nearly level. The whole of this
ridge, at the summit at least, is gneiss, occasionally passing into gra-
nite. Many of thase huge blocks curiously supported are observed,
similar to those at Dhee.{ This is an appearance I believe character-
istic of granite. Day excessively cloudy, and threatening. The sun
has not now been visible these three days; huge banks of clouds are
collecting towards the plains. It appeared to be snowing on the
Jowahir peaks, of which we had a glimpse this morning. 42 Pp. m. Bar,
24.512, 57.49, 40.5.
. 29th Nov.—Rained all day, a most miserable day.
30th Nov.—A good deal of rain on the night of the 29th.
lst Dec.—To Dyra, morning truly dismal. Towards 10 o’clock
a few gleams of sunshine, which tempted me to move for Dyra.
The road was tolerably good, being an easy and uniform ascent,
the time was four hours, about nine or ten miles. The rocks I
think gneiss; the specimens 1 and 2 are hardly doubtful. They are
small grained, grey structure, sub-schistose. No. 3 is a kind of gra-
nite containing schorl. No. 4a semi-transparent quartz rock. In a
small patch of mica slate, remarkably tender, containing veins of
quartz ; the Jatter though possessing all the aspect of the hardest spe-
eimens, yet broke between the fingers.
* Dhee Ghat, a fine valley below the junction of the Bino and Beonee rivers,
tributaries to the Ramgunga,—J. H. B.
+ Captain Herbert here enters British Gurhwal, and leaves Kumaon Proper.—
J. H. B.
¢ Dhee-Dhoora, a remarkable spot between Almora and Lohooghat.—J. H. B.
744 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. [No. 1538.
This village is small, rice is not grown, the elevation being too
great. Wheat* sown in October and cut in May. At Paton ri¢e
is grown. At Almora they sow wheat latter end of November.
Half way it began to bail and rain, and continued to the village near-
ly. Eneamped on a delightful grassy and level spot above the village ;
very cold.
24d Dec.—Last night to my astonishment heard the Almora
gun, distance is upwards of 40 miles. I had doubts on the subject
till this morning at day-break, when I heard. it again.
Lovely morning, not a cloud visible. Hoar frost on the ground, and
tent all stiff with it. ‘Temperature at 8a. m. 41.5 moist, 35.5 glass
in shade 35. Bar. at 104 a. m. 23.005 ; 55, 44.5, 37.4 moist ; in tent
53.47.
At 12 started for Marora. Steep ascent at first, with snow, to good
sized temple—Binsur. No account when built, a figure of the bull in
front, and iron bells hung about his neck as offerings ; trees Deodar, all
male that I saw, and kursoo oaks; rocks, gneiss the whole ridge from
temple level; after two hours descent begins. Here observed barome-
ter, 2 p.m. 22.13, 54, 41.5, 37. Much snow, and descent very bad ;
two hours of it to stream with an intermediate small ascent. At
stream fine Rons trees or Roons, also Neegalas ;t hemp} sown here, and
on the ascent to Dyra, which requires apparently a cold climate, was now
cut. From river easier descent, wheat fields two inches above ground.
Cross Sanee, a little below the confluence of the stream followed on two
planks, goodish stream ; road. up its bed to Sarkot. (High Pass higher
than that crossed, by name Doodoo-ke-jolee. (B.) Sarkot a large village
with 60 houses.) Small ascent to Murora, village of 50 houses. Many
sheep and goats—former little fellows black, with short tails and curly
horns ; unwilling to sell ; hemp soaking; arrived at 5 much fatigued,
five hours on road. Gneiss the whole way, in some places so soft and
earthy, as to be like the brown tender mica slate of Almora; here
* In all elevated places wheat is sown very early, in order that the young plant
may be strong before the frost and snow begin. In one day’s march, young green
wheat and rice can be often seen.—J. H. B.
+ Ningalas, Hill bamboo, only found on high mountains.—J. H. B.
+ Great quantities of fine hemp are grown in Gurhwal by the lower caste of Khus-
sias. The Kumaonees have a prejudice against growing it.—J. H. B.
1844. } Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. 745
huge blocks of a hard and porphyritic type, like what I observed on
the road to Mason. I]h. 40m. a. m. Barometer 24.070, 61.55, 45.5.
3d Dec.— Halted.
SPECIMENS.
28th Nov.—No. 35, 1787, gneiss well defined, summit of ridge
dividing Bino from Beonee.
lst Dec.—No. 36, 1788, a brownish grey gneiss of a fine grain, pass-
ing into quartz rock. _
No. 37, 1789, ditto less like quartz rock, more like mica slate.
No. 38, 1790, an amorphous granite gneiss, containing schorl disse-
minated light buff. |
No. 39, 1791, pure haloidal (milk) quartz.
2d Dec.—No. 40, 1792, reddish-brown gneiss, summit of ridge.
4th Dec. —Murora to Bugwaree 3 hours; 5 p. m. barometer 24.422,
62,54, 44. High peak bears 93 N. E., road very bad to-day at start-
ing, and for some miles leading up and down through and over huge
block of gneiss, scattered about in every possible variety of confu-
sion.
At two hours descent to bed of stream here called Seons* as well
as Sanee, receives the Nana-gad from the west. Brasee village left
bank, Goree right bank, then gradual ascent toBhugwaree. Encamp
south of it about half or three-quarters of a mile.
Cloudy again; gneiss the whole way, but very seldom visible in
situ, never in strata. Huge scattered blocks, sometimes tender like
mica slate.
5th Dec.—Bhugwaree to Gunguon three hours or more. The
road to-day was a general descent, but very uneven, continual ups
and downs. We have come down, however, about 1000 feet alto-
gether.
At 3 an hour ran 58S. E. At13 Kunyoor. At 2. Descent to bed
of Seons or Sanee, rather of its feeder, just above confluence. A very
* Sanee river rises at Doodoo-ke-tolea mountains, and after receiving the Chip-
pula from Chippulgat, joins the Ganges under the name of Nyar river, 30 miles
above Hurdwar,—J. H. B.
746 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, &c. [No.. 153.
pretty spot. The whole descent from Kunyoor* was pretty. The
path then ascends again and continues alongside of mountain, then
descends to cross the river knee-deep, and again crosses close to camp,
which is on a fine grassy level with the river close by our door.
Splendid pools for bathing, six to eight feet deep, and 40 or 50 feet
long. The tributary stream is that crossed in the Sreenuggur trip on
the march from Kunyoor.
Rocks to-day at starting, gneiss, more or less well defined. At
Kunyoor perfect, with much granite, also probably veins. The latter
contains schorl ; much of the granite was so soft, that it might be dug
with a spade. On descending from Kunyoor, the mica slate with
garnets were found near Aeén, which is also on the border of a gneiss
district. Latterly approach towards chloritic and argillacious schist ;
no good examples of strata any where, as usual the more perfect gneiss
district covered with huge blocks so characteristic of this rock. A cloudy
day.
5 p.m. Bar. 25. 315, 62, 52, 48.
6th Dec.— Halted, strong hoar frost during the night. Ghursaree,
Punna, Kolinda Godee-gad and Babta.
7th Dec.—Hoar frost from Bindhelee to Jawaee, 31 hours, road
very uneven and baddish, ascend to ridge and descend to Ghursaree
1 hour, Punna, opposite high, ascend to Kolinda lh. 45m. and to
ridge 2 hours, wind and descend to Godee-gad, join Seons 23 hours.
In river bed to village, latterly small ascent.
The rocks to-day schists and quartz rock, being the same series,
and accordingly every variety of compound between their extremes is
found. The schist is sometimes inclining to chlorite schist, some-
times to argillaceous, but I think always inclining to the character of
magnesian, indicating the presence of talc rather than mica as the
schistose constituent. Near the village, a nucleus of greenstone des-
quamating in crusts, just like the granite at Dhee in the neighbourhood
of the amorphous mass strata of the same rock, with more or less
contamination of quartz. The views suggested by these facts, full of
interest, require development.
* Kunyoor is three quarters of the way from Almora to Sreenuggur, and was once
a Thanna and Tuseeldaree. The Senior Assistant Commissioner in Gurhwal has a
bungalow here, and the roads in its neighbourhood in every direction are now excel-
lent,—J. H. B.
1844,] Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §e. 747
SPECIMENS.
4th Dec.—No. 41. Perfect gneiss grey, contains garnet and schorl.
Murora to
5th Dec.—No. 42. Small grained dark grey gneiss.
No. 43. Small, oscillating towards mica slate.
» 44. Large grained granite, Kunyoor.
», 45. Small grained ditto.
» 46. Schist, taleose? or micaceous, like the rock at Aeena.
7th Dec.—No. 47. Talco-quartz, argillaceous schist, greenish grey.
No. 48. Talco-quartz, greenish grey.
» 49. A curious quartz rock. |
», 00. Still better defined talcose schist, bluish grey.
» 51. 1803, [1752*] Greenstone, amorphous, desquamating in
crusts.
», 52. 1804. A greywacke sub-schistose, micaceous, argillaceous
quartz rock, (greenish.)
» 9d. 1805. Ditto, grey light.
», 54. 1806. Argillaceous quartz rock, dark-bluish.
8th Dec.—4m. 10h. 25.775, 66.5, 61.51. A short march to-day
owing to mistake.
Quartz rock of various types, 2. é. more or less impregnated with
the green constituent, direction 300 S. E. dip. to E., passed through
Sookhaeé. Encamped at Muteeala. Usal-gad and Meets Seons from
East.
9th Dec.—4 vp. mM. 25.857, 68, 65, 55. Partially cloudy, a short
march of 23 hours, cross Usal-Gad at starting, along river side,
ascend to Pass above Lachee village in lateral glen, (EK. side.) Descend
passing through village, come down glen, and enter valley of the
Sanee again. Down the same passing Hurkandee, which is on the
right bank. Encamp at Bhungar and Nowgaon, latter left bank,
former opposite.
Rocks to-day fine greywacke slate and quartz rock, passing into
greywacke with every possible mixture of these rocks. Direction
whenever observable, North and South, strata nearly vertical, but
a* I do not know what the No. 1752 refers to, the series No, 1 of this Tour is 1753,
vide subsequent note, sheet 7 ; 1572 must be added to all Nos. of this series ~ J. H. B.
fad
oH
748 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §c, [No. 153.
dipping to W. A plant here used as a furkaree, bears black berries,
sown.
10th Dec.—Nowgaon to Chundolee. Descend and cross river
along flat to Bhungar about 15 miles, fine peepul tree. Above Now-
goan Seeonsee, | hour to Sera. Bhakund-Purind; one and quarter —
to Munjee. Above is Chundolee, opposite Domgla, large village, road
generally level, except last place steep ascent. River takes turn here.
Rocks, quartz rock, passing into greywacke. Therm. 64° to 39° cover.
ed with dew.
11zh Dec.—Chundolee to Syndhar, gentle ascent up side of hill,
oblique, 3 an hour. Usoor Gurhee* to right high up, 50 miles to
Neelee, 65 to Myla, latterly ascending. Ascend Pass, descend to
stream and ascend to Kylmar. Descend again and ascend to Syndhar
which is in a lateral glen, and away from the Sanee. Rocks more
inclining to greywacke slate latterly. A good deal of very red earth
here; houses painted. Hills remarkably bare. 5. p. m. 25.535, 64.5.
56.52. soon after 52.2, 51. Opposite Neelee is Choundool.
12th Dec.—Thermometer min. 41, general fog. Up glen good
road and easy ascent, one hour to breakfast, as it was stated Soon-
kolee, the first village, was a long way, and no water procurable
beyond this point.
Rocks, the argillaceous quartz rock and greywacke slate, the red-
dish type; fog still in valley at 10 a.m. Air 52, moist 50, in the
shade of a tree 49 46.
Another observation gave in the tree shade 52.5, 48.5, and in the
sun 66.5, 56. Here the point of deposition must have been the same,
as the thermometers were kept nearly in the same spot.
After breakfast proceeded one hour ascent to Pass. Bar. at 12 ora
little after, 23.935, 53, 52, 45. Lungoort bearing by needle 275° 54’.
Depression, STU ie 1 -. 15.20
R. Bae oc imetiEe ey gtk, SST) RANE
10.50
* Usoor Gurhee, one of the numerous hill forts with which this frontier of Kumaon
and Gurhwal is studded. Joonia Gurh, Gunnea Gurh, Goojroo, &c. &c.—J. H. B.
¢ Lungoor fort, a conspicuous place in the South of Gurhwal, not far from the plains
at source of Kohriver. Here the Gurhwal Raja held out for some years against the
Goorkhalee invaders of his country.—J. H. B. |
1844, | Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §e. 749
A remarkable isolated spreading hill, 295°. A high hill with broad
top 324° 43’— 122° E. + 44°—17—steep descent from Pass, afterwards
easier. One hour to Nowgaon. Soonkolee about ? mile further, total
3 hours, and good road. From the Pass down greywacke slate,
with frequently a talcose aspect on the laminar planes, remarkable for
splitting in the direction of the lamina, and for breaking with a sort of
cleavage across them.
13th Dec.—Ther. to 58° at 1 vp. w., 5 p.m. 25.255, 61.5, 57. 56.5 52.
Cloudy. Nowgaon to Lireea on the left bank of Muchlad, 2} hours,
about 7 miles, road good. Ascend and descend several times, passing
by Musmoor and Poktar, latter up a nulla, which falls into Much-
lad. Rocks greywacke slate, olive bluish, &c., much of the red colour.
Cloudy and I fear snow. Present dip=47, so far good. Hill uncom-
monly bare round.
14th Dec.—Ther. 4] minimum. Heavy dew, steep descent to cross
Muchlad, a middling stream. A very crabbed ascent, wind round
glen to right and descend a little to Khergoan.
Greywackes late the whole way, some appearances indicating the
passage of this slate into chlorite slate and talc slate. Another pecu-
liarity is the nodules of quartz or amorphous masses, also veins of
every shape and size.* It has often struck me, that quartz is the
granite of the clay slate and greywacke formations.
15th Dec.—Cloudy with partial gleams, time of marching 24 hours.
Descend to stream and ascend, wind round to Kande village on hill.
Descend to stream, steep ascent, and wind round to right to Dang,
part of Binjolee. 4— Bar. 25.665, 66.59, 51.5.
Occasionally cloudy, rocks to-day the same greywacke slate, very
smooth and shining lamin. Often breaks into prismatic fragments ;
here the slaty structure predominates, and I think excellent roof
slate might be found, perhaps even writing slate and an inferior whet
slate.
16th Dec.—Ther. min. 44. Cloudy morning, a long, and fatiguing
march to Chamasee village on flat banks of Sanee. Steep descent, 3h.
40m. time of march, rocks same as yesterday. Bar. 24.27, 715, 69.5,
67.5, 59.5.
* I have certainly seen slate rocks very much disturbed in the neighbourhood of
quartz yeins.—J. H. B.
750 Capt. Herbert's Tour from Almorah, §c. [No. 158.
Cloudy, crossed one ridge and round glen, cross a second and descend ;
mango trees here, good road. Ther. max. 73.5, min. 50, dew 61.8,
cloudy. ;
17th Dec.—Thermometer 50, dew. Cloudy. Choumasoo to Bud
Kholoo, time 23 hours, level along river bank for two miles through
cultivation, one mile to Oaklet, cross river four times, and Chia
here close by village, once.
Barometer at the confluence of Chippula and Sanee, 9 a. m. 28.16,
62.5, 60.3, 56.5, river 58. Latterly road much obstructed by round
stones and jungle rock. The greywacke slate continues, but chang-
ing a little in character. There are the greenish grey beds too which
distinguish the junction of this formation and the sandstone. The
rocks are in fact exactly like what we have above the Buleea,* and
also above Bar,t color purple-blue, more rarely olive, cloudy day ;
the max. 72.5. The Chippula is much smaller than the Nyar, the —
latter is getting a great body; a road goes to Lungoor from Choumasoo
by Koolharoo.
SPECIMENS.
10th Dec.—No. 55, 1807. A greenish sub-schistose, scaly grey. —
wacke slate, less of quartz than the preceding; breaks with a hackly —
transverse fracture, (structure, bladed ?)
11th Dec.—No. 56, 1808. An undoubted quartz rock, bluish grey,
contains little mica.
No. 57, 1809. > wis f Ln j wly> sls Cs?
She5 nail x2A3 wre! Lsta= slio
% | iad | a oral
In the year a. vp. 1735, Nadir Shah sent Sooleeman Yeesawul,
(stick-bearer,) from Cabul, at the head of a mission to Mahomed Shah
of Delhi. On the fifth day Sooleeman and his party reached Jullala-
bad. Abaidoolah, the son of Meer Abas of Kooner, whose power ex-
tended over the whole of Nungnihar, desired Sooleeman to be slain,
and he was killed with much cruelty. Nadir Shah on hearing of the
treatment that Sooleeman had met with, immediately left Cabul with
his army and marched to Gundummuk, via Chareekur, Nepal and
Tugon, thence he sent on to Jullalabad, sirdars Jillayer and Vyaz with
the vanguard. Abaidoolah evacuated Jullalabad and fled to Kooner ;
he was pursued by the sirdars, he fled to Swat, many of his followers
were slain, and his sister and women made prisoners and brought to
Nadir Shah.
The monarch with his main army went from Gundummuk (where
* The translation of the inscription is as follows :—
Under the orders of Shah Jahan, Ihtamam Khan laid, this (stone)
On the face of the field of antiquity as the foundation of prosperity and wealth.
As long as the signs of the Firmament shall remain extant
Let not the fairness of this Fort be doomed to suffer from the pressure of destruction.
I was searching within my mind the Eva of this foundation.
A divine voice struck my ear, saying, the foundation of good Omen,
_ The numerical value of the letters composing the words, (the foundation of good
| omen, ) Jb er sl » added up make the date of the building A, H, 1054, cor-
| . . © ”
responding with A. D. 1638.— Eps.
|
:
|
876 Geographical Notice of the Valley of Jullalabad. [No. 1565.
he describes the water to be good, and the air delightful,) to Behar ;
thence to Jullalabad, where he remained only 31 days; his sirdars
meanwhile having captured Kooner and Bajore, he proceeded via
Chara to Peshawur, where Nasir Khan, the governor, submitted with-
out making any defence.
To enumerate all the important events which have taken place in
this district since that period would take up too much space. I will
only briefly allude to a few of them. |
On the 10th of Sept. 1801, Shooja-ool- Moolk marched from Pesha-
A. D. 1801. wur to attack Cabul. At Heshkan he found Mahmood’s
force, consisting of three thousand men, drawn up, the Soorkhrood be-
ing in their front. Elphinstone thus describes the battle. “ Shooja
had at this time at least 10,000 men, but they were Burdooranees, and
though accustomed to the battles of their clans, they were strangers to
discipline and to regular warfare. Shooja’s armies were at first victo-
rious, but his Burdooranee troops eager to profit by the confusion,
quitted their lines as soon as they thought the victory decided and
began to plunder the royal treasures, which Shooja had imprudently
brought into the field. Futteh Khan seized this opportunity and
charging at the head of his Baurikzyes completed the confusion in
Shooja’s army. The battle was now decided, and Shooja escaped
with some difficulty to the Khyber.”
In the year A. D. 1809, June 29th, Shah Shooja sustained another
defeat at Neemla when opposed to Mahmood Shah and his Minister —
Futteh Khan, Akram Khan, Shah Shooja’s Prime Minister, was slain
in this battle, Shah Shooja fled over the mountains South of the
Khybur Pass to Hisaruk. ‘
On Zuman Shah’s defeat near Sireeasp, he fled to the Jullalabad
valley, and stopped at Mollah Ashik’s fort, which is on the Chipreeal
rivulet, about 14 miles from the town of Jullalabad, near the Soofaid
Koh ; “ the Moollah received them hospitably, but took means to
prevent their escape, and sent off a messenger to Mahmood Shah.
Shah Zuman during. his confinement, secured the Koh-i-Noor with
some other jewels in the wall of his apartment, which were afterwards
found on Shooja’s accession.” (Elphinstone) The poor monarch was
blinded on his road to Cabul, by piercing his eyes with a lancet.
On Shah Shooja being restored to his throne, the first step he took
-”
1844. ] Geographical Notice of ihe Valley of Jullalabad. 877
was to release his brother Shah Zuman, and soon after Moollah Ashik
who had betrayed him, was apprehended and suffered the punishment
of his perfidy and ingratitude.
When the Baurikzye Khans gained the ascendency over the Doo-
ranee monarchs, Azeem Khan placed his nephew Nuwab Zuman Khan
in the government of Nungnihar, and from the time of Azeem Khan’s
death 1823, until the year 1824, the Nuwab enjoyed the entire go-
vernment collections of the province. Dost Mahomed insisted upon a
portion of them being made over to him; this the Nuwab refused.
The Ameer collected a force and marched against him, and on his
approach the Nuwab withdrew his guns to Kameh, and there took up
a position near Abdoor Ruman’s Fort; negociations took place between
the contending parties, the Nuwab having made some slight sacrifice
of his interests ; Dost Mahomed returned to Cabool.
The Nuwab then commenced fortifying the town of Jullalabad, the
old fortifications being nearly ona level with the ground ; a great num-
ber of people were collected for the purpose; the work advanced ra-
pidly, but ere a month had elapsed, the Ameer was again on his
march to Juljlalabad, and the fort was still incomplete; the Nuwab,
however, determined to defend it. After three days resistance a
mine was sprung, the town was taken by assault, and it was given up
to plunder. The Nuwab was taken prisoner and displaced from
power, and Sooltanpoor and the transit duties of Cabool were made
over to him for his maintenance. Dost Mahomed’s brother, Ameer
Mahomed, remained a short time in charge of the province; he was
succeeded by the Ameer’s son Mahomed Afzool, who was recalled
after a few months, and succeeded by his younger brother Akbar ; he
continued in charge until the arrival in 1839 of the British Troops.
Meerza Aga Jan, a Kuzzilbash, was then on the part of the Shah
appointed governor.
There are topes and extensive ruins to be found scattered over the
valley, which if explored attentively by learned antiquarians would
no doubt reward them for their labours.
There are now no perfect buildings of any size, beauty, or antiquity
in the valley,
The royal gardens of Char Bagh, Baghwanee, Bala Bagh, Neemla,
and Gundummuk, laid out by Sooltan Babur and Alee Murdan, and
6 B
878 Geographical Notice of the Valley of Jullalabad. (No. 155.
renewed by Timoor Shah and Shah Zuman, during the Baurikzye
rule were quite neglected.
The Gundummuk garden has been quite destroyed ; the fine old
plane trees were cut down by sirdar Mahomed Akbar’s order, to build
the fort of Futtung, at the confluence of the Soorkhrood and Gun-
dummuk rivers. The fort would be found strong against Afghan
troops without artillery.
There is a Zearut at Char Bagh, to which Moosulmans and Hindoos
go to pray. The former suppose it to be the tomb of Shah Fyz-oollah-
Wullee, the cup-bearer of Mahomed the prophet ; the Hindoos, on the
other hand, imagine it to be the resting place of Hajee Ruttun, a
fuqueer of great sanctity and note. There is also a large Hindoo
temple in the town of Jullalabad, inhabited by a supposed descendant
of Ruttun. Hindoos in great numbers come from Peshawur and
other places to make him offerings, which are said to amount to the
large sum of 40,000 rupees annually.
In the neighbourhood of Jullalabad, there is also Shah Murdan’s
Zearut, held sacred under the supposition that Allee, the son-in-law of
Mahomed, rested there, and in the temple is exhibited a large black
stone, shewing an impression of the hand of Allee. A garden is attach-
ed to the Zearut, where a fair is held every Thursday, to which crowds
from the town and camp resort. Nazir Hussan, formerly in the service
of Nuwab Zuman Khan, is now expending his money on the Zearut
and garden. The Zearut was originally raised by Abdoola Khan
Khafir, in the reign of Timoor Shah.
Of late years the following persons filled the office of governor of
Jullalabad.
Governors. In whose reign.
Abdool Khan Khafir, .. -e Timoor Shah.
Meer Dad Khan, (Isaukzye,) .. Ditto.
Ghunnee Khan, .. of ie Ditto,
Gool Mahomed Khan, (Gurdeezye,) Zuman Shah.
Causim Khan, (Moghul,) “al Ditto.
Baba Khan, (Afshar,) .. me Ditto.
Meer Alee Khan, .. Wi Be) Ditto,
Gholam Alee, af an 5 Ditto.
Shurreef Khan, .. «ff ... Shah Shooja.
1844.]
Ibrahim Khan, (Jumsheeree, )
Shehur Dil Khan, (Baurikzye,) ..
Shukoor Khan, (ditto,)
Geographical Notice of the Valley of Jullalabad.
Moghul Khan, i
Nuwab Zuman Khan,
Ameer Mahomed Khan, ..
Mahomed Afzool, ..
Mahomed Akbar, ..
Meer Aga Jan, ..
Os OD
Routes from Jullalabad to Dukka.
Huzarnow, ..
Dukka,
.« Mahmood Shah.
Mahomed Azeem Khan.
Ditto.
Ditto.
Ditto.
-« Dost Mahomed.
Ditto.
Ditto.
-- Shah Shooja.
Names of stages.
Summer Kheil, “is
Buttee Kote, e
ee
Summer Kheil,
Char Deh,
Busawul,
Dukka,
From Jullalabad to Soorkhab.
Futtihabad,
ae 2e
Sufaidsung, .. +
Soorkhab,
Sooltanpoor, .. ee
Futtihabad,
Neemlah,
Gundummuk,
Soorkhab,
ee
Miles.
oy 7
Aa cs!
10
9
39s
- 7
gh)
879
880 Geographical Notice of the Valley of Jullalabad. [No. 155,
Weights, Measures, &c.
The Jand revenue in kind is collected in Tabreez weight, and the
money taxes in the nominal Tabreez (Khaan) rupee.
Tabreez Weight.
24 Charuks,.... 9.6) 1 Mun-i-Tabreez.
100 Mun.-i-Tabreez, vr 1 Kharwa-i-Tabreez.
1 Kharwa-i-Tabreez, .. 10 Maunds Hindoostanee.
100 Kharwa-i-Tabreez, .. 1000 Maunds Hindoostanee.
Coin Table.
10° Shaheed? oe. 0X so. ahs ] rupee Khawa.
20 Rupee Khawa, .. .. 1) Tooman Tabreez.
1 Tooman Tabreez, .. Cos. Rs. 14.9.4,
100 Toomans-i-Tabreez, .. Ditto, ],458-5-.4.
1000 Toomans-i-Tabreez, .. Ditto, 14,583-5-4.,
An account of a remarkable Aerolite, which fell at the village of
Manicgaon, near Eidulabad in Khandeesh. Communicated, with
a specimen, to the Asiatic Society, by Cartain JAMES ABzorTT, B.A.
late Resident Nimaur.
A Chemical Examination of the above Aerolite, and Remarks, by
Henry Pippineron, Curator Geological and Mineralogical De-
partment of the Museum of Economic Geology.
At the Meeting of October, 1844, Captain Abbott communicated to
the Society the following documents, with two small specimens of the
Aerolite.
Cartan J. Aspott, Artillery Dum Dum, to the Secretary Asiatic
Society, Calcuiia,
Dum Dum, Sept. 16th, 1844.
Sir,—In July 1843, I received at Mundlaisir, from the Komarder
(or Native Collector) at Asseer, a report of the fall, in that part of the
country, of a meteoric stone, together with a few grains, said to be
particles of the same. I immediately dispatched a Karkoon to the
spot, to ascertain the truth or falsity of the statement, and to colleet
Ss. ee
— se ee, a
:
1844, } Fall of a Meteorie Stone in Khaundes. 881
specimens of the supposed Aerolite. These accompany my letter.
They differ so much from the structure of every reputed Aerolite
I have previously met with, that I should be inclined to doubt the
veracity of the reporters, could I discover any other reason for ques-
tioning it. I have never heard any other instance of an Aerolite in
that neighbourhood. The fact is implicitly credited in the neigh-
bourhood of Ejidulabad, where it is said to have occurred. These
specimens appear to me to resemble masses of friable rock of the quartz
family, which I have met with in Malwa. But it is evident that
a mass of texture so loose could never have borne unshattered, the
propelling agency of fire, nor has any volcano existed within the me-
mory of man in Nimaur or Mahiswah, nor I believe in Khaundes, al-
though fable declares Oojyne to have been buried beneath a shower of
mud, and Mahiswah to have been destroyed by the mischievous ma-
lice of a demon. The depositions of the observers I have translated
and appended. The spot was beyond my district, or I would my-
self have visited it. It is probable that the collector of Khaundes
may have reported it to the Bombay Society.
This report, and the note upon granite in the Nurbudda, were pre-
pared many months ago, but restricted leisure, and many concurring
events, prevented their being forwarded.
J. AsBorr, Capt. Arty.
Fall of a Meteoric Stone in Khaundes.
Deposition taken by a Karkoon, despatched from Asseer by Capt.
James Abbott, to collect information upon the subject.
Oonkar, Puttail, and Ghubbahjee, Chowdry, of village Maniegaon,
purgunnah Eidulabad, Tuppeh Sowdah, Illaquh Dhooliah in Khaun-
des, depose as follows.
Taken July 26th 1844.
On Mittee Asarr, Soodie Teej, Goraur ké din.
We were in our house. At 34 o'clock p. m., whether from heaven
or elsewhere, a prodigious ball (ghybee golah) fell. The noise it
made was very great, it might be heard twenty miles round. We
heard it with our own ears, and in fear and trembling ran outside to
look, so running out, we found that it had fallen outside the village
882 Fall of a Meteoric Stone in Khaundes. [ No, 155.
on the Southern aspect, and that in falling it had been shattered to
pieces, some of which had been scattered far. We put our hands
upon that which lay together, it felt cool; shortly after it became
rather warm. When first we saw it, the pieces were black ; after a
day’s interval the color changed to blue, and now the fragments are
white.
Question. When the ball fell, was any flash perceptible, or was the
heaven darkened? Who saw it fall? How large was it? And who
heard the noise at the distance of 20 miles?
Answer. We saw nothing. When the ball fell, we heard the noise,
and ran to see what had caused it. The spot on which it fell was
hollowed by the shock, a span and half in diameter and three fingers
breadth in depth. The ball was about the size of a kedgeree pot
(ghurrah, i. e. about ten inches in diameter); the people of Eedu-
labad and of other parts heard the noise in the clouds, at least so they
say. The ball being shattered, people came and carried away the
pieces. The remainder was sent to the Sowdah Komardar, and by
him to Dhooliah. What remains | give you.
True and literal translation. J. Apport, Capi.
Mundlaisir, August, 1843. Pol. Asst. in Nimaur.
Note.—A few grains of this Aerolite were first sent me by letter
from Asseer. [I despatched a Karkoon immediately to the spot to
make enquiries, and collect as much of the fragments as possible,
supposing that he should have cause to believe the report well founded.
The greater part of what he collected accompanies this report. It
agrees exactly with the grains first sent me. J. ABBorT.
At Captain Abbott’s suggestion, the Collector of Khandeish, J. Bell,
Esq. Bomb. C. S. was written to, and he has kindly forwarded us a
few small fragments more, with the following letter and deposition.
To W. W. Beuu, Esq. Collector of Khandeish.
Sir,— With reference to your Mahratta Yad of the 5th ultimo, with
enclosure from the Secretary to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, request-
ing me to transmit any information along with specimens procurable
of an Aerolite that fell in the month of July, 1843, in the vicinity
1844. ] Fall of a Meteoric Stone in Khaundes. 883
of the village of Manegaum of this talooka, I have the honor to
transmit translation of a deposition given before me, by a couple of
individuals who were spectators of the fall of the Aerolite in question,
along with five small specimens of the same, all that I have been able
to procure after much search ; these however I trust will be sufficient
to indicate the nature of the Meteorolite.
I beg to return your enclosure, and to remain, Sir,
Your most obedient servant,
Camp, Circuit at Rawere, C. InvERARItY, Acig. lst Assist. Col.
Talooka Jaoda, January \st, 1845
Translation of a deposition given in Mahratta, by Goba Wullud
Nagojee Chowdrie, and Hunmunta ud Dama Naik Solie, inhabitants
of the village of Manegaum, Pergunnah Edulabad, turaf Jaoda, of the
Khandesh Collectorate, who were spectators of the fall of an Aerolite
in the vicinity of their village, in the month of July 1843.
On the day the Aerolite fell we were both seated, about 3 o'clock
of the afternoon, on the outskirts of the village, in a shed belonging
to Ranoo Patel. There was at the time no rain, but heavy clouds
towards the Northward; there had been several claps of thunder for
about two hours previously, and some lightning. Suddenly, while we
were seated in the shed, several heavy claps of thunder occurred in
quick succession, accompanied with lightning, on which we both went
out to look around us, when in the middle of a heavy clap, we saw a
_ stone fall to the ground in a slanting direction from North to South,
preceded by a flash of lightning. It fell about fifty paces distant from
us; on going up to it we found that it had indented itself some four or
five inches in the ground; it was broken in pieces, and as far as we
could judge, appeared to be about fifteen inches long and five in
diameter, of an oblong shape, somewhat similar to the chouthe grain
measure ; it was of a black vitreous colour outside, and of a greyish
yellow inside ; it was then ofa mouldy* texture, and hardened to the
consistence of the present specimens afterwards. Only one stone
fell. No rain had fallen for eight days previously, nor did it, until four
days after the fall of the stone. It had been warm all day before, but
* Soin MSS. Perhaps muddy, i. e. soft, earthy texture was meant ?—H. P.
884 Fall of a Meteoric Stone in Khaundes. [No. 155.
not much more so than usual. From midday until the time the stone
fell, (3 Pp. m.) it was very cloudy towards the northward ; after its fall,
the thunder ceased, and the clouds cleared away. No stone of a similar
description had ever fallen near our village before. ‘The pieces of
the stone were immediately after carried off by the country people.
Our village is situated on the banks of the small river the Poorna ;
there are no hills in its vicinity, the nearest being three coss (or 6
miles) off. The above is a true statement, dated at Rawere, talooka
Jaoda, on the 17th December, 1844.
(Signed.) Gogna up NAGosEE CHOWDRIE.
» HuNMUNTA UD DAMA NAIk.
True translation of the deposition given before me on the above date,
C. J. Inverarnity, Actg. lst Assist. Col.
CHEMICAL EXAMINATION.
The specimens were referred to me for examination, of which this
is my report.
The specimens are mainly composed of an earthy greyish white,
pulverulent mass, slightly tinged with a bluish grey in some parts. It
is excessively friable, and both crumbles and soils the fingers even
when most delicately handled. In the earthy mass are thickly im-
bedded light, greenish, glassy particles of olivine, single and in nests,
resembling green mica or felspar ; the appearance in some parts being
almost that of an earthy variety of Lepidolite. On the side of one
piece of Captain Abbott’s specimens, isa bright black crust, thickly but
minutely mammillated. When this is touched with the file it leaves
a rusty mark, but gives no metallic trace. This crust is exceedingly
thin, and splinters off, and in one place a mass of the olivine in it is
melted to a green bead. It is too fragile, and our specimens too small,
to attempt obtaining sparks from it. ‘Twoof Mr. Bell’s fragments also
have small portions of crusts yet adhering to them.
Internally and by the magnifier, a few bright white metallic points
are discoverable, and in one or two places small nests of it ; there are also
a few of a brown kind. We have one fragment of an Aerolite which
fell in 1808, at Moradabad, which is pulverulent, but not so much so
as the present specimen by a great deal. The present specimen is in
this respect almost unique, as the only one I now recollect to have
1844.] Fall of a Meteorie Stone in Khaundes. 885
read of as very pulverulent, is the one from Benares, mentioned in
the Philosophical Transactions.
The Aerolite of Moradabad is studded over with rusty specks from
the oxidation of the iron. All our other Aerolites are of a compact
texture. I may note here, that we now possess in our collection, 10 spe-
cimens, comprising six varieties of Aerolites, and four of Meteoric
Iron from Siberia, Brazil and India. One of the Society’s Aerolites
is also well entitled to be called Meteoric Iron, as it consists mainly
of that metal, (and no doubt Nickel) rather than an Aerolite, by which
we usually designate the more earthy looking stones.
The magnetism of the Kandes Aerolite is no where apparent ex-
cept at the patch of pyrites (Magnetic Pyrites?) on the piece which
has the crust, but here it is strong and distinct.
From its extreme friability I have not ventured to take its specific
gravity, which is about 4 or 4.5, I judge, for it might crumble to pieces
in the water, and is too rough and tender to admit of varnishing.
Specific gravity however is an indication of no value in these hetero-
geneous compounds.
The green crystals, when examined separately, affect a somewhat
rhomboidal or cubical form, but none are clearly defined. Their color
is a bright, clear, and very light grass-green.
List of Meteorolites in the Collection of the Asiatic Society, 1st January, 1845.
1. Fell at Moradabad 1808, Captain Herring. One piece of this is rather friable.
3 pieces.
2. Dr. Tytler’s Aerolite at Allahabad, 3 large pieces,
3. Aerolite fell about 40 miles to the West of Umbala, between the Jumna and
Punja, 1822-3. Obtained by Captain Murray ; given by Mr. J. Bird to Mr. Cracroft,
4. Fell at Bitour and Shapoor, 75 miles N.W. of Allahabad, 30th November 1822.
5. Fell at Mow Ghazeepore, February 1827, R. Barlow.
6. Fell at Manegaon in Kandeish, July 1843, Captain J. Abbott, B. A. and J. Bell,
Esq. Bombay C. 8. Collector of Khandeish.
Meteoric Iron, or stones having u large proportion of it.
1. Meteoric stone containing Iron and Nickel, fell at Panganoor in 1811. Mr,
Ross of Cuddahpah.
2, Meteoric iron, Siberia, Pallas.
3. Ditto ditto Sergipe Brazil, Mornay and Wollaston.
4, Lightning stone of Nepal, not examined, but may be Meteoric.
6c
886 Fall of a Meteorie Stone in Khaundes. [No. 155,
Buiowpire EXAMINATION.
The grass-green crystals above described: Per se infusible, but
take a rusty brown appearance, as of semi-fusion or oxidation, on the
exterior, remaining still translucent, On Platina Wire, with borax
and phosphate of soda, fuses at first in part only (a lump remaining),
giving a light clear olive glass; adding more of the flux it-finally dis-
solves with various shades of olive and grass-green according to the
proportions-of assay and flux. A minute crystal in Mur. acid does
not soften, gelatinise, or colour it by several days digestion. These are
doubtless Meteoric olivine.
The white friable part, taken as free as possible from the.grey specks
and entirely so from the green crystals. In the forceps slightly
oxidates to a rusty appearance at the outer part, but does not fuse.
On Platina wire and with Seda. Fuses to a dirty olive coloured
bead, which in the reducing flame gives metallic iron with some
earthy residuum. With Nitrate of Cobalt only a dull rusty colour.
Hence the absence of Alumina, except perhaps in very minute pro-
portion.
The metallic looking vein was assayed in various manners for
Nickel, but no trace of it could be elicited, the vein being apparently
pure pyrites. Nickel may nevertheless exist, though in small propor-
tions, and we cannot venture on consuming more of these precious frag-
ments, since the fused crust, the olivine, and the white matrix are
chemical evidence enough of meteoric origin of the stone.
The whole of the dust which had collected in the paper, being care-
fully collected, was assayed both by the blowpipe and va humida for
Chromium, but no traces were detected. As said of Nickel however
above, so also of this substance: it may exist in minute proportion,
though not detectable in such extremely small assays.
Eee i
887
A few Notes on the subject of the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee:
By J. H. Barren, Lsq., Civil Service.
Previous to the reign of the Emperor Akbar, that is, to the latter
Deficiency of records half of the 16th century, the history of Kumaon
concerning the Turaee. iy connection with its lowland possessions, and
also, of the Hill Raj of that name itself, is but imperfectly known.
Even to a still later period, tradition, confirmed by documentary
evidence and the voice of general testimony in the neighbouring dis-
tricts, takes the place, within the province itself, of all authentic
written records on which reliance can be placed. The few Puthan
- families of respectability now settled in the Turaee are, like their
whole race in Rohilcund, but a recently introduced colony. From
them, therefore, it would be vain to look for any details connecting
the series of events even in their own villages. The Shoksa and
Tharoo tribes, although permanent occupants in the whole jungle
tract lying along the base of the Sub-[imalayan mountains between
the Ganges and the Gunduek, are not, and never have been, permanent
residents at any one spot; nor are they possessed of sufficient intel-
ligence to know the tale of their own chosen region, or be able to
recount the revolutions which have occurred on the scene of their
migrations. Of the other tribes inhabiting the present villages or
clearings in the Turaee, it is not probable that many families can trace
their settlement in that dismal wilderness, beyond the third, or utmost
fourth generation preceding them. Rajah Sheo Raj Sing, the princi-
pal personage of the Turaee pergunnahs, does not owe his present
position in that tract of talooqdar, or manager, or farmer, or zemin-
dar, (or whatever, under existing arrangements may be his proper
designation, ) to any direct descent from the Kumaon Rajahs, or to any
long possession continued from their time to his own. Before his
grandfather Lall Sing, accompanied by Mahundra Chund the represen-
tative, at least by immediate birthright, of the royal race of Kumaon,
descended with their families to the plains, and became, by favour of
the Nuwab Wuzeer, connected to the latter history of the Turaee,
intestine disturbances had begun to destroy the semblance even of a
888 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
central government in Kumaon, and the state records, such as they
were, became scattered among the various kamdars, to whom they had
been officially entrusted ; and who only preserved such portions of
them as might tend to prove their own importance, or that of their
several families. During the troubles consequent on the Ghoorka
invasion in the year 1790 a.p., the regular traces of past times be-
came more and more obliterated; and when the last relics of the
Chund Rajahs abandoned their native hills, and took refuge at Az-
poory in the plains, nearly the only place where they still possessed
any thing like a property in the land, they took down with them no
weighty burden of state records, and left but few behind. Afterwards
at Roodurpoor, one chief scene of their exile, a fire occurred, which is
stated to have consumed many family documents; while at Almora
any dufter or record office that existed, may be supposed to have
commenced its collections only from the accession of the Ghoor-
khalee Government. Under these circumstances, it is not a matter of
wonder, that neither the British authorities in the hills, deriving their
information from kanoongoes, and other usual depositaries of such
knowledge, nor, the descendants of the Hill Rajahs in the persons of
Sheo Raj Sing above named, or his cousin of the elder branch Per-
taub Sing, now residing at Almora as pensioner of the English Govern-
ment, should be able to furnish exact data, for an historic nar-
rative.
2. Using such means as I have in my power, I proceed to draw a
Turaee during the Ku- short and rough sketch of the successive revolu-
maon Raj, Kuttoora
Dynasty, Chund Dy-
Bee Rees and, whenever possible, of its successive condi-
tions, in the hope, that such a description, however imperfect, may be
found if not useful as evidence, at least acceptable as part of a picture,
at a time when the attention of those in authority has been strongly
drawn to the present state of the tract described.
3. The dynasty called Kuétoora is the earliest known to have reign-
ed in Kumaon. The Rajahs of its line are said
to have been of the Soorwj-Bunsee origin, and
they have been clothed by the imagination of the paharees with almost
divine attributes, while the extension of their authority to Delhie and
Kanovj in the plains, and from Mundee to Siceim in the hills, is con-
tions to which the country has been subjected,
Kuttoora Dynasty.
1844. | the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 889
fidently assumed as a matter of fact. The whole race* appear to have
become utterly extinct, but, at what time and in what manner, no one
can tell, and in fact their whole history is lost in the greatest obscurity.
Within the present provinces of Kumaon and Ghurwal, Josheemuth
near Budrinath, and ‘Kuétoor not far to the North of Almorah in the
now almost desolate valley of Byjnat, are celebrated as the principal
seats of their power. ‘The ruins still existing in the latter place, and
at Dwara Hath, some miles to the westward, are pointed out as relics
of the Kuttoor Raj, as are also the low carved stone pillars called
Brih-Kumbh,f placed at intervals of a few miles, so frequent in the
eastern parts of the district, and which are said to have marked the
halts or encampments in the royal progresses. Some of these ruins,
especially the chubootras and wells, are not without beauty, at least
in their carving, and the great number of small temples even now
standing, each as it were dedicated to a separate idol, and the quantity
of idol images themselves, which have been found in their precincts,
shew that the Kuttoora Rajas were devout worshippers of the whole
Hindoo Pantheon. The shape of the buildings, and the character
of the sculptures, are said to be similar to the architectural features
observed in the South of India, but, I believe, that the same forms
are quite common in Bundlecund and on the banks of the Nurbudda.
From the account above given, it will at once be seen, that the dy-
nasty of which we are speaking, was of lowland origin, and that
no signs of an aboriginal extraction are visible in its remains. As,
before the Mahomedan conquest of India, the rulers of a region so
illustrious in the Shastras as the Himalaya mountains, being also
by their position masters of the sacred rites at the various sources
of the Ganges, may be supposed to have held rank equal with, if not
superior to, the Rajahs of Kutéatr, or country between the mountains
and the Ganges now called Rohileund; and, as after the establish-
ment of the Mahomedan empire in Hindostan, the Kumaon Rajahs
were found in hereditary possession of the Turaee by a tenure quite
independent of any grant from lowland potentates, 1 see no reason
* At least that tribe of the Kuthoora Surwj-bunsees which reigned in Kumaon,
+ Thisis Bhakha for Brihstumbh. q
TERA
890 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
for doubting that the Turaee throughout its whole extent formed an
integral part of the Kuthoora Kumaon Raj. That it also formed an
important part, may be assumed from the almost absolute necessity
still existing, that a large portion of plain country should, if not
attached to the hills, at least be available for the annual resort of
the Paharees and their cattle ; (an occupancy which under native rulers
could hardly be maintained without an actual right of property
in the soil, and actual separate possession thereof by the hill powers ;)
and from analogies drawn from the late and existing feeling in Nepaul
in regard to the tract at its base. Beyond this, all is conjecture re-
garding those ancient times; and the question whether Sumbhul and
Bareilly were then subject to Kuthoor, may be left for discussion
between the Paharees and the Desees, when they meet annually at
their now common pasture grounds, and need not engage the too
jealous attention (as at one time it was feared it might,) of British
functionaries.
4. The Kuttooras in Kumaon were, we are told, succeeded for
Khussia Raj. Some time (13 or 14 generations) by a Khussia Raj,
that is, by numerous petty chiefs among the mountaineers themselves,
each governing his own small territory, and fighting with his neigh-
bours. The many small forts scattered throughout the province,
in situations where such defences would be useless to a Government
holding undivided authority over the whole tract, would seem to prove
the truth of this traditional history.
5. On emerging at last, from this confusion, we find the earliest
Chund Dynasty, name of the Chund dynasty in Som Chund, a Chun-
drabunsee Rajpoot, who is narrated to have come from the village of
Joosee in the province of Allahabad, (Trans-Doab,) and to have esta-
blished his power and a capital at Chumpawut,* at or about the year
1100 Saka, corresponding to 1235 Sumbut, and 1178 a.p. The
Joshee (Jyotishee) Brahmins who have subsequently been such influ-
ential members of the hill community, accompanied the first of the
Chunds to Kumaon. It would be quite out of place to register in
this report, the list of Rajahs who followed Som Chund. Some per-
* Also called Kalee Kumaon, from its vicinity to the Kalee river.
1844.] the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 891
sons, indeed, are found who deny the continuity of the dynasty alto-
gether;* but, be that as it may, the historian of the Zuraee has
almost nothing to tell concerning any of the line previous to the 44th
generation. Aoodur Chund, son and successor of Rajah Kullean Chund,
(who removed the capital from Chumpawut to Almorah, and built
that city in 1620 St. or 1563 a.p.,) was a contemporary of the
Emperor Akbar, and, in the course of his reign of 28 years, made
frequent visitations to the Turraee, and, not to leave himself without
record in the land, became the founder of Roodurpoor.
6. But, what is meant by the Turaee in Akbar’s time? To what
Roodur Chund—Extent extent of lowland dominion did Roodur Chund
pas ie succeed? Although an hereditary, was the
Turaee an undisturbed possession of Kumaon in preceding times?
On a reference to co-temporaneous history, we find that the year
1194 a. pD., is the date generally fixed for the conquest of Kanow
by the arms of Kutb-ud-Deen, the Lieutenant of Shahab-ud-Deen,
and, also, that 1195 a.p., saw him extend his victories across the
Ganges to Budayoon. It is, I think, extremely probable, that an
incorrect tradition may have anticipated the commencement of the
Chund dynasty in Kumaon by sixteen years; and that, in the great
revolution which transferred the empire of the Gangetic plain as far
as Benares from the Rahtores to their Mahommedan victors, when
the dispersion of numerous powerful Hindoo tribes took place every-
where, among them the earliest Chund and his followers found their
way to Kumaon. But, whether the elevation of this race in the
hills preceded or followed the fall of the Kanouj kingdom, the shock
of that fall may well be supposed to have reached to the foot of
the Himalya, and hardly to have been arrested at Budayoon, and
the lower parts of Kuttair. The rule of the hill powers, whether
Khussia or Chund, if it had survived at all the decadence of the
* It seems a matter of universal tradition that between the 8th and 9th succes-
sion of Chunds, a second Khussia Raj intervened ; and also, that until the 11th of
the line, by name Lutchmee Chund, some representatives of the old Kuttoora dy-
nasty possessed a limited power at Kuttoor itself ; but that in the reign of this
Rajah, they were subdued by violence, or absorbed among the mass, or otherwise
disappeared, and ‘‘ the land knew them no more,”
892 A few Notes on the subject of [No, 155.
Kuttoora line, and the breaking up of that Aaj into petty chiefships,
must have been rudely shaken at this period. Even allowing, that
subsequently, some kind of authority over this tract was regained, as
the Chund Rajahs became, one after the other, more and more
firmly seated on their mountain throne, the authority must have been
one exercised under permission on account of tribute yielded to
others, or, at best, under neglect or contempt on account of its in-
trinsic insignificance.
The Puharrees, indeed, while boasting of their ancient boundary
on the south as Gunga-wdar, or, not short of the Ganges, almost
unanimously allow, that at one time, the possessions of their ancestors
in the plains were woefully circumscribed, if not altogether lost; and
that it was not without difficulty that Udhian Chund, the 30th of his
line, attained by some means or other an honorable and determinate
position in the Des for himself and successors. To continue, then,
the story, and answer the remaining questions placed at the head of
this paragraph, Roodur Chund found himself the lord of the Muhals
or Pergunnahs named below :—
1, Suhujgeer, now called Juspoor.
2. Casheepoor or Kotah, ....+++- Casheepoor.
Dei MMOQUAIA, castekie leye-ojare pate \aiere ) nen LOS PONEs
4. Guddurpoora, ....es+.e0e- ee Guddurpoor.
5. Roodurpoor.
z Boksar,..«. LS tale ea
Te DIURSHCE, oc enk sce wectaceses . NOTRE
8. Piiatoe Bitheree.
9. ry @@eeeteeneteesve see @éteoe Surbna
This whole tract, which is exclusive of the Upper Bhabur nearer
the hills, (of which I shall have to speak hereafter, ) was called Choura-
see Mal, and Noulukhia Mal, ‘mal being, then as now, the hill term
for the low country. The former name was derived from the size of
the territory, which was reckoned at 84 coss in length,—the latter name
from the real or nominal revenue of the territory; viz., nine dacs. The
boundaries on the west were the Peera or Peela Nuddee at Ratpoor
1844. | the Kumaon and Rohilcund Turaee. 893
between Juspoor and the Ramgunga; on the north the Ookhur
Bhoomee, or, region of no water,—(now the bun or forest;) on the
south the higher ground of the regular plains according to certain old
known limits of the Pergunnahs; and on the east the Surjoo or Sardah
river near Poorunpoor, The reign of Roodur Chund was not entirely
without troubles, for during Akdar’s minority, the Imperial officers at-
tempted to resume the territory, and sent a force for that purpose. The
young Rajah, however, made a successful resistance, and afterwards
proceeded to Delhi, where he obtained favor at the Court of the Em-
peror, and distinguished himself in some expedition against MNagor.
The final result of this step was his obtaining a sunnud,* for the
Chowrasee Mal+ Pergunnahs, and his return to the hills with enhanced
power.
7. In the time of his immediate successor, Lutchmee Chund, (still
in the reign of Akbar,) the royal armies appear
Successors of Roodur i Pe :
Chund to Bag Bahadoor to have revisited the Turaee, and their places of
ain encampment are still pointed out at Tandah,
and more especially at Peepulhutta, where there is a mango grove
called the Badshahee Bagh. Fourth in descent from Roodur Chund,
we find Tremul Chund, Rajah of Kumaon, between the years 1625 and
1638 a.p....During part of this period, the Turaee is stated to have
attained a high degree of prosperity, and to have actually yielded nine
laks of rupees from various sources of revenue to the hill treasury ;
but, before the death of Zremul Chund, the prosperity of the tract
excited the envy of its neighbours, and encroachments began to be
made by the Kuttair Hindoos, not disallowed by their Mogul rulers.
His successor, Baz Bahadoor Chund, finding himself in danger of
total dispossession from these fertile lowlands, repaired to Delhi, and
imitating the conduct of his ancestor, entered into the military service
of the Emperor, Shah Jehan. He accompanied the Imperial expedi-
tion against Candahar and Cabul. A fortunate opportunity occurred,
and the division which the Rajah commanded was able to gain some
important advantage. Consequently, on the return of the royal armies
* Not now existent at Almorah.
+ Some persons incorrectly consider this word as an abbreviation of the Persian
word Muhal.
6 D
894 A few Notes on the subject of LNo. 155,
to Delhi, Baz Bahadoor Chund was honored by many signal marks
of favor, but not content with obtaining empty titles, he adhered to the
original object of his visit, and procured the full recognition of his
right to the Chourasee Mal, together with an order, addressed to the
Viceroy of the Sooba, for effectual assistance against the Kuttair
chiefs. Through the aid of Nuwab Roostum Khan,* he succeeded in
expelling his enemies from the Turaee, and he afterwards caused the
town of Bazpoor to be built, and to bear his name. It issaid that “ every
beegah and biswansee” was cultivated at this time, and that the
construction and repairs of bridges, bunds and water-courses was dili-
cently cared for by the officers of government. These functionaries
resided at Roodurpoor in the plains, and at Barokheree and Kotah on
the spurs of the lowest range during the hot months. Casheepoor
was not then a place of any importance, and the Puharrees, (I know
not how correctly, ) even place the foundation of the present town and
gardens at a period more recent than the Rajas hitherto named. At
Kotah and Barokheree and elsewhere in the lower hills are remains of
forts and residences, and mango groves, which go far to shew, that the
climate at those sites was not in former times so insalubrious as at
present, when few men in power would confine their retreat from the
Turaee heats to such low elevations in the mountains as these. Kotah,
indeed, is stated to have been the capital for all the western portion
of the Chourasee Mal, and to have given its name to the lower Per-
gunnahs, and not only, as now, to the near submontane region. The
good fortune of Baz Bahadoor Chund followed him to the end,
He wrested the dominion of the Bhoée passes from his Northern
Tartar neighbours ;—he associated his name with universal prospe-
rity in the minds of his Kumaonee subjects ;—and he died, after a
rule of forty years, in the year 1678 a.p., during the reign of Au-
rungzebe.
8. If I were writing a connected history of Kumaon, the five succes-
Padi Gantt wel th th sions of Rajahs between Baz Bahadoor Chund
time.of the Rohillas. and Kullean Chund, would afford me ample ma-
terial, both for narrative and comment: for during this period the
prosperity of our hill principality having attained its culminating
* The founder of Moradabad.
~~ s,s,
— se
1844. | the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 895
point,* began rapidly to decline, and the descent to ruin was marked
by civil war with its disastrous accompaniments of royal assassinations
and popular anarchy—a fitting prelude to the foreign invasions which
followed in due course. But the important epochs in the history of |
the Kumaon Zwurace need alone occupy our present attention, and
passing over the half-century to which I have alluded, I arrive in the
year 1653 Saka, or 1731 a.p., at the accession of Rajah Kullian
Chund. The Rohilla chief, Adi Mahommed, at or soon after this pe-
riod, succeeded his converter and adopter Daood Khan in the power-
ful position acquired by the latter ;—the splendours of Budayoon, the
old capital of the Szrcar, had begun to pale before the display of
upstart military importance at Aonla ;—and in short, Kuttair was fast
becoming Rohilcund.t In the earlier part of his rule, Kudlean Chund
had to contend against the aggressions of Nuwab Munsoor Ali Khan,{
who attempted toattach Surbnaand Bilhereeto the neighbouring (Trans-
Sardah) Chuckladarship in Oudh;§ but, by a successful appeal to the
Emperor Mahommed Shah, the nominal integrity of his Turaee posses-
sions was preserved to the Kumaon Rajah. During his latter years he
suffered from a far more terrible enemy ; but let me here snatch from
oblivion an important record of the times immediately preceding the
invasion of Kumaon by the Rohillas, which has fortunately survived the
ruin of that zera.
* Oodeotchund, the immediate successor of Baz Bahadoor Chund and Juggut Chund,
the third in descent, bear a high name in Pahurree history. In the time of the latter,
nine lacs are again mentioned as the revenue of the Turaee ; but after this epoch,
the intestine disturbances became utterly destructive of all prosperity, both in High-
lands and Lowlands.
f Bars SAT BL) SH wR Sz
Bras Al CTH AAT |) TAT SraAl STS
Waise se aise kuree dekho Prubhooka tat!
Aonle ko Raja bhoyo—Bakolee ko Jat.
This popular distich concerning the sudden rise of Ali Mahommed is well known
in Kumaon.
t Afterwards called Sufter Jung.
§ Seebdeo Joshee, the Prime Minister of Kullean Chund, was wounded in a fight with
the Chuckladar Tejoo Gor, and was taken prisoner, but subsequently released.
,
‘porrad yey) yo ‘1oded pure oxejdieddoo uo y30q ‘spnuuns snoreutnu sessossod soreypy) PUNN LUYSTY JULpUedsap SITY *punyo}0ap0Q
jo juvArES ayVUNIIOF pue Zuratmyy oy} se [eOUIWT oUIeU stq Jopuer [[ys ‘arg Aq payuerd yoroy pue auodoaysvy 1v9U S@A0IS OSuURW snoreWNU
pur ‘avodyynuoag jo ‘e8e[ta ay} pur *y2DU0AG paljeo sear ysOUIaYS7D JO UOS at], *a8eullis|id ooputzy plo Jo aoejd ve sem aaqaqy aawralog jo [dure oy)
ory Ut ‘gose][IA # JO a}1S oY} UO ‘asodaaysng yuasoid 94} JO JopuNo} [val 9} 9q 0} pres st ‘puny Looppyng zg JO SUIT) oY} Ut ‘yqpuaaysDy 19eq)ey
=pursd SIE] *aalDYp/) punuvwuiag SEM JWOTII}IS SIG} JO OUIT, OY} 4v [eioues Ul DPT aaspunoyD ey pue o1odaayse, jo Iepjsasyny, ay .—-azoqy
1SB'Sa'F 10Z'3 =, BOG «=| LEST «= -000*SS | S86 | $266 | 000O8T | OODO'SLT |°°°° TROL
— ewes | ren meme | es rr | es | ED mes | ene aa =
——— —————————— ome ee GS Ss PE
ee a y es CE
90L°6L 00¢ OST | GLI 000°sez | 802 | SLo‘r 000'0Z 000°SZ . | Ss “4 ea
996°F'T 000° | 16% | gs Qoo‘or | s0g | OS4'% | 000°09 000‘0¢ | Axeqyt.g exodan poo
681'83G 100°T 10g | std 000‘06 | PL4rF | 00g°S 000‘00'T | 000‘00'T [°° °° ‘227 ‘adodaayseyy
‘saadny | -saadny | ‘sy | ‘soodny | ‘saedny | ‘sy | ‘saedny | -‘soodny ‘soodny
:
|
|
|
A few Notes on the subject of
AD mY
gS a a —~ SS by
S Ss) 2 Sigs S < S
S) =e ~ Ss & ~ S$ SI ~
> SS; RS] SS [Conc FB!) Vs e ==
S$ S8s | FS & 3 |-yaaey)| &s = SS S 8 ‘youunbiag fo aunn
S aes | § = Ss Sy a a
Ss <9 S a8 ida 28 S S
ee Sis >a $ Na
=~ ssa : P : & = >
Re es = _— w '
"UODUNY 0))17 onpunwuniog youunbiag aajooboyy eayng qnbiny vznow fo juvjiqvyur wou pun ‘aaviny, ay}
fo savpjaasyay, sausof ay) fo quvpuaosap ‘aaLvypy) pununuysry hg paysiusnf ‘av FPL] pup “ngqungy \OR\ % bur
-puodsas.09 ‘vyvg ggQ| vak ay7 sof uonuny fo syouunbwag (sap-ypnw ) saunyy ay ue soysynig anuaaay Jo 2190,
896
1844, ] the Kumaon and Rohilicund Turaee. 897
All the reports made by the Kumaon canongoes and other ‘natives
belonging to the province, concur in fixing the nominal revenue of
the Chourasee Mal Pergunnahs in the year 1744 a.p. (or one hun-
dred years ago) at about the same sum as that named in the preceding
statement ; viz. somewhat more than 4 lacs of rupees, inclusive of all
items. But, at the time of the Rohilla irruption in that year, the ac-
tual collections had dwindled to less than two lacs,* and as the whole
lowland country, of which we are speaking, was virtually held in mi-
litary assignment by the mercenary troops of the Rajah, known (from
the place of their origin in the west) as Nuggurkotia Sepahees, it may
be doubted whether in the time of Kullean Chund, at least previous
to the expulsion of the Rohillas from Kumaon, any treasure ever as-
cended to Almorah at all. The present Peshkar of the Huzoor Tuh-
seel, Kishna Nund Joshee of Guillee, has found among his ancestral
papers a long list of villages, and of their respective rugbas, the ab-
stract of which I give below. It refers to an early year of Kullean
Chund, 1657 Saka, or 1735 a.p.; but it unfortunately does not con-
tain any information as to the proportion of waste to cultivated land.t
It may, however, be found interesting, as shewing the number of vil-
lages standing on the rent roll at that time, and as affording data for
comparison with the state of affairs in 1835 a.p., a date which (I
know not how correctly,) I have heard mentioned, as that in which under
British rule, Terrai matters were at their worst, and from which a renas-
cent order of things may be assumed to have commenced.
Pergunnahs. No. of Villages. Total Beegahs.
Boksar, (Roodurpoor, Kilpoory,) .... 247 7,90,950
Bukshee, (Nanukmutta,) .. seid ad 3,83,300
Chinkee, (Surbna-Bilheree, ) ee Ak 3, 15,400
Casheepoor, ... a a he 4,86,800
Suhujgeer, (Juspoor,) Sh i 1,58,400
Moondia, (Bazpoor, ) wos ww 81 2,838,500
Guddurpoora, mies ae pepe ie « 3,31,200
Grand Total 869 27,04,550
* Only 40,000 rupees are mentioned in some of the records, but it is doubtful
whether these referred to the whole or a part of the Turraee.
+ Kishna Nund Udkaree also possesses very old lists of Terrai villages and their
beegahs ; but no account of cultivation or of ploughs. All these lists can be copied out
mouzahwar if necessary, either in Hindee or Persian characters, and forwarded to
H, H, the Lieut, Governor,
898 A few Notes on the sulyect of [No. 155.
In the years 1666-7 Saka, 1744-8 aA.p., the Rohillas twice invaded
Kumaon, under their two leaders Nujeeb Khan and Peinda Khan.
Though their stay was short,* its ill results to the province are well
and bitterly remembered, and its mischievous, though religiously zeal-
ous character is still attested by the noseless idols and trunkless
elephants of some of the Kumaon temples, The first irruption was
only arrested in the very heart of the hills at Ghyr-Mandee,} near the
sources of the Ramgunga. Here the Rajahof Ghurwal, Pruteep
Sah, checked the further progress of the Rohillas, and turned them
back by a bribe of three lacs of rupees to their leaders; and, thus,
the holy land, which owned his Kumaon neighbour and himself as its
princes and guardian, was relieved from its first contamination by
Mahommedan contact.
The second invasion, caused by the discontent of Ali Mahommed at
the small spoil brought down to him, was stayed at the very entrance
of the hills at Barokheri Pass (between Bhamouree and Bheem Tal,)
where the Rohilla force was routed by the minister, Seebdev Joshee
and his highlanders, who had seen too much of such visitors in the
former year to allow them again to surmount the Gaghur, It is gene-
rally believed, that the Rohillas were incited to both attacks by some
domestic traitors of the Rotela tribe, one of whom, by name Himmut
Sing, had been put to death by the Kumaon Rajah for rebellious con-
duct. The complete expulsion of these predatory foreigners from the
open plain of the Terrai was found too difficult a task for the Puharree
arms; and, hence, recourse was had to other means. Kullean Chund
himself repaired to the camp of the Emperor, then pitched at Sum-
* Those who object to the hill people of Almorah as being unaccountably and
foolishly scrupulous on the subject of kine killing, forget that Benares, Muthra,
and other Hindoo localities have been for centuries under direct Mahommedan rule,
whereas Kumaon never had one of ‘* the faithful’ as its immediate lord. The only
Mussulmans formerly known within the hills were certain families of Shikarries and cooks
—who received favor at the hands of the Rajahs, the former for killing game, and for
ridding the country of wild beasts,the latter for preparing suitable food for any Ma-
hommedan guest of rank. The Rajah of Bhurtpoor still entertains a similar class of
purveyors.
¢ Near this spotis the beautiful country residence of the Kumaon Commis-
sioner, which is highly convenient, as being on the borders of both districts, Ku-
maon and Gurwal.
1844.] the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee, 899
bhul*, and implored for aid against his enemies. At that time (1747
A.D.), the extraordinary power obtained by the Rohillas had greatly
alarmed the imperial Government, already sufficiently weakened by the
Mahrattas and by Nadir Shah, and very strong efforts had been made
to reduce them, attended with considerable success. Twenty-two
descendants of the old Kuttair Rajahs are said to have been present
in camp, headed by the chief of Thakoordwara,t all clamorous for pro-
tection. The Kumaon Rajah did not sue in vain, and the result of
his visit to Sumbhul was a renewal of his sunnuds for the Chowrasee
Mal, and the abandonment of the territory by the Rohillas, with the
exception of the Eastern tract at Surbna and Bilheree, besides sundry
marks of imperial favor. Soon after his return to the hills, he died,
and the year of his death (1748 a.p.) also saw the decease of the
Emperor Mahommed Shah and the adventurer Ali Mahommed.
9. The history of Rohileund between the years 1748 and 1774
A.D. is well known. The constant conflicts
Reign in Kumaon of Deep between the Soobahdar of Oudh, Safter Jung
Racaeaguaieowtit’ of Ho. and the Rohilla chiefs, attended occasionally
Be SBN owed eo les of with no small disgrace to the arms ofthe former,
Oudhin 1774 a.p. (and through him to those of his master the
Emperor Ahmed Shah,) terminated in the utter
discomfiture for a short period of the latter, by the introduction of the
Mahrattas and Jdés into the disputed territory as the formidable allies
of the Wuzeer. Then followed, as might be expected, the usurping
occupation of Rohilewund by those very allies themselves, and the at-
traction to that fertile quarter of their swarming countrymen from the
Deccan. The revolutions which dethroned and blinded Ahmed Shah ;
which first exalted and then brought down to death his puppet succes-
sor, Alumgeer II; which linked together in the bands of temporary
amity the regicide and self-elected Wuzeer Ghazee-ud-Deen, and
many of the Mahratta leaders,—the advance of Ahmed Shah Doo-
ranee, and the repetition at Delhi of some of the horrors enacted under
Nadir Shah ; and afterwards, on the departure of the Addallees from
Hindoosthan, the overwhelming height to which the flood of Mahratta
* I believe that the Sote then derived its name of Yar Wufadar, when the pucka
bridge was built forthe army, the Emperor having called it, ‘* Yar Wufadar dul
tumun Sote ”’
+ Whose family is now, I believe extinct.
900 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
dominion attained ; these events accumulating on each other, involv-
ed the whole of Upper India in anarchy and confusion, and completed
the destruction of the Mogul empire. As affecting Hindoosthan in
general, they caused the minds of all men to be fixed on one great
- question, till the decision of which there could only exist two great
parties ; viz. Who shall be masters, the Mahratias or the Affghans ? As
affecting Rohileund in particular, the crisis of affairs united together
by one common interest, the ruler of Oudh, then Shoojah-ud-Dowla,
and the Rohilla chiefs, Hafiz Re hmut Khan, Nujeeb-ud-Dowla, and
all the minor leaders of the clan ; and for a brief period, the chivalry
both of Oudh and Rohileund was engaged in a common cause. The
battle of Paneeput might very probably have ended in a different
manner, if the Dooranee Shah had not been thus assisted, and if he
had not found on his side in that bloody field Affghans of the Hin-
doosthanee colony, as brave and undegenerate as his own Abdallees,
fresh from the rugged passes of Affghanistan. Who on the evening of
the 6th January 1761 a.p. contemplating that great battle field, and re-
flecting on its results, could have guessed or believed that the fate of
India had really already been decided not five years before on an ob-
scure swamp in Bengal? or, have foreseen, that in regard to the scep-
tre of Hindoosthan, the slaughter of that day had been a fruitless
sacrifice; that the Affghans almost from that very hour would be
strangers to the soil; that the Mahrattas, then supposed to be an
almost annihilated power, would again contest the throne of India
with foreigners, but, of a still more distant origin and still more
distinctive race; or, that, finally, peace and plenty would smile on
that very plain, invited to the land, neither by Mahommedan nor
Hindoo, but by the Christians of a Western Atlantic isle! Yet,
to Rohilcund at least, (whereto my tale must return,) far different
from peace and plenty were to be the intermediate gifts of the English
race. When Hajiz Rehmut Khan flushed with his share of victory,
returned to his own country, it may be assumed, that, even if no higher
aspirations for the good of his subjects expanded his breast, he still
fondly hoped that the good fortune of his race and family would hence-
forth be permanent ; that his last battle had been fought, and that he
might be allowed to end his days in quiet and happiness. Alas! the
lapse of thirteen short years, not all ill-spent, we may hope, brought to
1844. | the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 901
his door a totally unexpected enemy in purchased alliance with the
ancient hunters of his line. If then at Kutterah on the 23d April 1774,
the victorious English general turned away in sadness from the corpse
of the gallant Hafiz Rehmut Khan, and reviewed with pain and disgust
the results of his own triumph, the civil narrator of this tragical revo-
lution, however indignant at the gross misrepresentations and false
colouring of facts, which both in the senate and the library have as-
sociated the early English name in Rohilcund with altogether unredeem-
able shame, and the extinguished rule of the Rohillas with every fancied
virtue, may be excused for pausing one moment in his task, and yielding
the tribute of his deep regrets over the bier of the Rohilla chief. But
I must not travel further from my record. What was the effect of
all the above named revolutions on the circumstances of the Terrai ?
The reign of Rajah Deep Chund in Kumaon, after lasting nearly thirty
years, ended in his murder in 1697 Saka, or 1775 a.p. He was,
therefore, almost from first to last, a contemporary of Hafiz Rehmut
Khan, and the catastrophes of the Rohilcund and Kumaon principalities
occurred within a year of each other ;—or, if nothing but the crowning
success of the Goorkhas in 1791 a.p. can be considered as the conclusion
of the Kumaon raj, the year of Deep Chund’s violent death at the hands
of Mohun* Sing, his spuriously descended cousin, may be recorded as
commencing the fifth act of the hill tragedy. During the first. six-
teen years of his reign, Deep Chund enjoyed the advice and aid of the
wise minister or Bukshee, Seeb-dev Joshee, to whose care the dying lips
of Kullean Chund had entrusted the youthful prince. The trust appears
to have been well fulfilled, and during this period the management of
the Terrai occupied a large share of the Bukshee’s attention. Forts were
built at Roodurpoor and Casheepoor, as outposts to watch the Rohillas,
* As some mistakes are often made as to the relative position by birth of Pertaub
Chund at Almorah and Sheoraj Sing at Casheepoor, I give their immediate genea-
logy :—
Huree Sing.
Fig REM E TRT STS OCTETS em
| |
1. 2.
Mohun Chund, Lall Sing,
Mahendra Sing, Goorman Sing,
Pertab Sing, Sheoxaj Sing,
copy
x
902 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
and to guard the property, then far from inconsiderable, at both those
places. At the former place, Hurree Ram Joshee, a Kumaonee and cou-
sin of Seeb-dev, and at the latter place Sree Ram Doss, a native (I be-
lieve) of Bazpoor, acted as the agents of the Kumaon government. The
son of Sree Ram Doss, Nundram by name, is celebrated in Kumaon his-
tory, as the traitor, who in conjunction with his brother Hurgovind, for
selfish purposes, ceded the possession of the Terrai to the Nawab Asoph
ud-Dowla, after murdering Hureeram Joshee’s son, Munooruth, and
thus obtaining power over Roodurpoor and the Eastern Pergunnahs.
The nephew of Nundram, and son of Hurgovind, Seeb Lall, is the
person whom in 1210 Fuslee, the English found in power in the Terrai,
and with whom the first settlement of that tract was made. We have
now all the dramatis persone on the stage, before the curtain drops
on the scene, at the close of Kumaonese influence in the Terrai. Dur-
ing Seebdeo’s administration, the Rohillas did not disturb in any
great degree the tranquillity of the Kumaon lowlands. Their
chiefs, during the frequent flights which they made to the foot of the
hills when they had encountered any disasters below in conflicts with the
Wuzeer’s forces, formed an acquaintance with the hill Rajah and his Mi-
nisters, which in some cases ripened into friendship. Deep Chund and
Hafiz Rehmut Khan exchanged turbans, and Seebdeo’s son, Hurack-
deo Joshee, who afterwards became so conspicuous a political charac-
ter at the period of the war between the British and Nepalese, enjoyed
a place of trust in the immediate household of Nujeeb-ud-Dowla. At
the battle of Paneeput, Hurree Ram Joshee is said to have distinguish-
ed himself conspicuously amongst the levies brought to that place from
the Rohilcund territory, and to have carried back to Kumaon an ele-
phant and other plunder of the Mahrattas to the extent of some thousand
rupees, which the Rohilla chiefs accorded in return for the aid or good-
will of the Kumaon Rajah at that great crisis. |
10. The Terrai remained in a state of (comparatively speaking) fair
Conclusion of Deep Prosperity during that portion of Deep Chund’s
Chund’s reign.—Troubles
of that period.—Effects of Teign, in which the hill territory was undistracted
events, both in hills and fy internal commotions. Up to the death of Seeb-
plains, on the state of the : y
Yerral.—Andsummary of deo Joshee in 1686 Saka, corresponding to 1764
events antecedent to the : :
final separation of the low- A.D., these commotions had been very partial
x Bhabur from the hill sagt ; ‘ aa
aly 2a and trifling in Kwmaon, while at the same time
"vy
1844. ] the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 903
the plains of Hindoostan, including Rohilcund, were the scene of con-
stant disturbances and change. The Terrai became filled with emi-
grants from the lower country, who had fled from the extra-taxation, and
the multiplied masters, which the wars of that period had created. This
was the first great recent emigration into the Terrai. The next exten-
sive influx of lowlanders occurred immediately after the accession of the
Nawab Vuzeer, as above related, to the sovereignty of Rohilcund, and
continued till the tyranny of the new reign had somewhat over-past, and
till (after the second Rohilla war with Fyzoollah Khan, who himself
brought large numbers of people to the jungle, where his entrenchments
were formed, ) the lower districts became again fit for the habitation of
peaceful and industrious people. Thus, at first, tolerable good govern-
ment at one place, and intolerably bad government at another, contri-
buted to the occupancy of the waste lands of the Kumaon Bhabur, by
natives of other districts; and a few years subsequently, the Ghoor-
kallee invasion of Kumaon, and the civil wars which preceded that
event, drove down numerous mountaineers to the same quarter, and
made Casheepoor, Rooderpoor, Kilpoory, and other frontier towns and
villages the emigrant settlements of numerous individuals, whose poli-
tical importance or wealth rendered them peculiarly obnoxious to the
evil of a revolution, and whose stay on the hills had become incompatible
with their safety. We may, I think, date at this period the planting
of the numerous mangoe groves* in the Terrai, which at this day so
frequently surprise the sportsman, in spots where wild beasts occupy
the place of human inhabitants, and swamps lie over the site of
villages. f
The death of Seebdeo by violence in a military emeute at Cashee-
poor, occurred as above recorded in 1686 Saka, or 1764 a.p., and
from that time I much doubt whether the dependency to the hill state
of Kumaon of the whole Terrai (except a slip of forest at the very base
of the hills,) did not cease and determine. While that minister sur-
* There are other groves of older date no doubt, as there are ancient wells,
and chubootras, remains of aqueducts and the like; but the existing groves for the
most part do not appear older than 60 or 80 years.
+ Some Puthan families were great benefactors of the Turai for a short time, and
the large gools and gardens which bear the name of Jungee Khan and others, attest
their former influence, especially in Bazpoor and the western Pergunnahs.
904 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
vived, the rent roll of the Chowrassie Mal Pergunnahs is recorded to
have been as follows; but, there is strong reason to believe, that
both in the time of Shoojah-ud-Dowla and in that of his predecessor
Suftur Jung, the South-Eastern extremity of the Kumaon Bhabur had
fallen into the hands of the Vuzeer or the Rohillas, and that the Ku-
maon Rajah was merely considered in that quarter, nominal Zemin-
dar or Jagheerdar.
Pergunnahs at present attached to Zillah Moradabad.
Jasspoor, ted Bas .. 50,1388 0 0
Casheepoor, ... a sea. 95j648 105 O
Bajpoor, 7: vee .. 565,664 0 O
—_-—— 2,001,440 0 0
+ Pergunnahs now attached to Zillah Bareilly.
Roodurpoor, ... ia: das Ti (252073, 05.0
Gudderpoor, ... = .. 45,654 0 0O
Kilpoory, va bof «» 40,000 0 O
Bilheeree,
Bindara, : 75,910 0 O
Nanukmutta,
Surbna, ww st so 025,000: 0: O
2,58,771 0 0
Total Rupees 4,60,211 0 0
Of this total sum, Rs. 1,382,000 were estimated as the Rajah’s share,
supposing the sovereignty of the Kumaon ruler in this tract to have
been a reality ; or proprietary profits, supposing him to be entitled on-
ly to the name of Zemindar. Out of this royal share or revenue, (the
greater part of which was collected in kind,) the military assignments
* It is also highly probable, that some portion of this amount was collected on
account of kdtbdns, or timber duties, in the forest lying to the north of the Chowrasee
Mal, and still included in Kumaon.
1844.) the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 905
to the Nuggur Kotias and others were paid, and Rs. 40,000 are (I be-
lieve with complete truth,) mentioned as forming the highest amount
remitted to Deep Chund’s treasury at Almorah.* In the earlier times
of the Terrai, the Rajah dealt more directly with the cultivators of the
soil, and the intervening tenures, religious, mafee, military, and the
like, did not exist; hence, the large amounts recorded as revenue.
In regard to the cultivators, the Rajah’s share was considered to be a
sixth of the produce; but, this fact would militate greatly against
the stories handed down of the Nowluckia Mal. Fifty-four lacs worth of
produce in the narrow slip of the Chowrassie Mal, would indeed have
entitled it toa high rank among the many so-called gardens of India.
The remaining portion of the rental enumerated in the state-
ment was collected for the benefit of some few Brahmin Mafeedars and
some hill temples ; but principally at that period by the headmen
among the hereditary Chokedars of the Terrai, who had been gradual-
ly introduced into the territory from the time of Baz Bahadoor Chund’s
visit to Delhi. In the south-eastern extremity of the Bhabur,
the race of Burwaicks, and in the same direction nearer the
hills, the Jooteals, and in the Western Pergunnahs the Mewattees and
Heirees (Mussulmans,) were the guardians, but in fact, the possessors of
the soil ; and asystem of “ black mail” was thus introduced, the evil effects
of which remain to this day, and which during its continuance, rendered
‘the sub-montane tract the general safe resort of the banditti, at the
‘same time that it gave protection to a portion of the community; that
is, those who could afford to pay the insurance fees thereof; and saved
others from outrage and plunder only by making them connivers,
through shelter and concealment, with the worst of criminals. Hur-
rukdeb* Joshee and Jyekishen Joshee succeeded their father as Minis-
‘ters, and soon after both Casheepoor and Roodurpoor were plundered
by predatory bands of Pathdns, who are stated to have found a large
quantity of booty at those places, owing to the temporary inhabitancy
thereat, of the earlier emigrants of whom I have spoken.
* The direct lineal descendant of this personage, called by Mr. Fraser ‘the
Earl Warwick, or king-maker of Kumaon,”’ is, 1 am sorry to say, living in very
reduced circumstances, and without a pension at Almorah, while others, with smaller
claims are provided for.
906 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
The years between 1764 and 1775 a.p. formed a period of trou-
ble and distress in Kumaon, which, however, has its parallel in every
native state, and the natural consequences of which were the final
foreign invasion which took place 16 years afterwards in 1791, and the
intermediate visitations of mercenary troops brought into the province
by the partizans of the several factions. A summary of events for
this period exists in the Agent’s office at Almorah, and is contained in
a report dated 20th October, 1814, by Mr. W. Fraser, who appears
to have received his chief information from MHurruck-deb Joshee.
The following extract is made from the report,* explaining, quite suf-
ficently for the present purpose, the revolutions of that period within
the hills.
FEixtract.
“The eldest son of Seebdeo Joshee, Jyekishen, succeeded him
‘in his office and situation as prime minister and viceroy, in which
‘‘ place he continued for two years and a half, when a son was born to
“ Deep-Chund the Rajah. On this event the mother of the boy con-
“‘ sidering that in consequence of having a son, she had some claim on
“the regency, intrigued with Hafiz Rehmut Khan of Rampoor,
“through Jodha Sing of Kuthere, to whose son the daughter of the
‘‘Rajah was betrothed, and who was a favourite servant of Hafiz
‘¢ Rehmut Khan, to set aside the authority and viceroyalty of Jyekishen,
“who retaining his office, should obey the command of the Rannee.
“ Through the interest of Jodha Sing, Hafiz Rehmut was prevailed
“upon to speak to Jyekishen, and he in disgust and disappointment
“resigned all his situations and retired from the government. The
‘‘Rannee then bestowed the situation of Bukshee, or head of the
‘army upon Mohun Sing, the post of prime minister upon Kishen
‘‘ Sing, the Rajah’s bastard brother, and the viceroyaity on Purmanund,
“a paramour of her own. Jodha Sing gained the management of
‘* Casheepoor, a large Pergunna. About a year after this, the Rannee
“deprived Mohun Sing of his appointment and insignia of his office,
“bestowing them upon her favourite paramour. Mohun Sing fled to
“the Rohillas, and through the assistance of Doondee Khan of Bis-
* Evidently a translation.
Se eae
1844. ] the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 907
“ soulee, who was jealous of the power and influence Hafiz Rehmut
‘‘ Khan exercised in Kumaon, gathered a body of troops and Rohillas,
“attacked the capital of Almorah, defeated the Rannee’s troops, and
“eight months after his expulsion, obtained possession of the Rajah’s
‘and Rannee’s persons, and established himself in the government. One
“of his first acts was to put to death Purmanund, his first enemy,
“‘and about two years afterwards, during which time he continued
“quite paramount, he put the Rannee to death. When this act was
“known, Hafiz Rehmut Khan again sent an army with Kishen Sing,
“the brother of the Rajah, who had fled when the Rannee was
“killed, expelled Mohun Sing, and put authority into the hands of
“Kishen Sing, who with the assistance of Jyekishen, and the old
“respectable officers of the government, carried on business for
“four or five years. Mohun Sing had fled to the camp of Zabeta
** Khan, and subsequently to that of Shooja-ood-Dowlah. Kishun Sing,
“the viceroy of the Rajah, fell into bad hands, and paying attention
‘to favourites, dishonoured many of the old respectable servants of
“the government. ‘These people considering that Mohun Sing, al-
“ though expelled, would not desist from disturbance and intrigue, agreed
“to call him, and put the government into his hands, to be exercised in
*“‘ the name of the Rajah, and with the assistance and advice of Jyekishen.
** Mohun Sing being thus placed in power, in the course of the second
“‘year put the Rajah and all his family into confinement, treacherously
“murdered Jyekishen,* and established himself firmly in the go-
“vernment. This usurpation seemed bad in the eyes of the Ra-
“jahs of Ghurwal and Dotie. They leagued with the discontented
‘** people of Kumaon ; the injured family of Jyekishen, one of the oldest
‘and most respectable of the high officers of Kumaon, collected a
“large force, defeated and expelled the usurper, and established Purdoo-
“mun Sah, the second son of Lulut Sah, the then Rajah of Ghurwal,
“upon the rajship. Purdoomun Sah reigned 9 years, proped by the old
“officers of the state, amongst whom the most noted was Jeeanund,
“ Gudadhur and Huruckdeo, of the family of Seo Dev and Jyekishen :
* At that time Nundram and others had possessed themselves of the Terrai nearly
to the foot of the hills, and Mohun Sing invited Jyekishen to his camp near Chokum,
(some miles above Chilkeea,) to arrange for a common defence of the Terrai against
the lowlanders, Jyekishen fell into the trap, came to camp, and was assassinated.—
908 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
‘‘ after this lapse of time, Lulut Sah, the Rajah of Sreenugur dying, the
‘‘ brothers, Jykurut Sah who had succeeded to the rajship of Ghurwal
‘‘on the death of his father, Lulut Sah, and Purdoomun Sah who had
“been set up in Kumaon, quarrelled. Jykurut Sah was desirous of es-
*‘tablishing Mohun Sing in Kumaon to the prejudice of his brother,
“having been bribed by him; and Purdoomun Sah was naturally
‘anxious to expel his elder brother and establish his younger and full
‘‘brother Puracram Sah at Sreenuggur. In the mean time, Jykurut
‘Sah died ; and Purdoomun Sah leaving Kumaon against the will of
‘¢all, went to take possession of Ghurwal. He wished indeed to leave
“his younger brother Puracram Sah in Kumaon, but he was equally
‘desirous of seizing upon Ghurwal; this strife continuing, both left
‘“¢ Kumaon in the charge of Hurruckdeo, and (shortly after uniting with
‘“¢ Mohun Sing) fixed him there. Hurruckdeo being driven out, collected
“an army in the districts of Casheepoor and Roodurpoor, again attacked
‘‘Mohun Sing, took him prisoner and placed him in confinement, and
‘in retributive justice for the murder of the late Rajah and all his family,
‘had him put to death.* He did not continue many months in pos-
‘session of the country, when Lal Sing, the brother of Mohun Sing,
“‘ receiving the assistance of Fyzoollah Khan of Rampoor entered Kuma-
‘¢on, and drove Hurruck and his party to the frontier of Ghurwal, where
“ receiving assistance from Purdoomun Sah, he repelled the invading Ro-
‘‘hillas, and regained possession of Almorah, the capital. Puracram
‘“ Sah, however, always unsteady and unreasonable, took the part of
“ Lall Sing ; and Hurruckdeo deprived of his assistance, retired with
“honor to Sreenugur, Lall Sing did not however reign long. A year,
“ ora year anda half after, the Goorkha power invaded the country, when
“ all the discontented people, and particularly the family of Jyekishen and
‘“‘ Hurruckdeo took refuge with them and rejoiced in Lall Sing’s final
“ expulsion.” f
* Mohun Sing was beheaded in the temple called Narain-ke- Than, two miles to the
North of Almorah, on the hill now called ‘‘ Mount Browne.’’—
+ This report must throughout be taken cum grano, for though true in regard to the
main facts, there is throughout a strong bias against the family of Mohun Sing and
Lall Sing, and an equally strong partiality towards the great rival family of the
Joshees. There is also one omission; viz. that Hurruk Dev at one time set up a nomi-
nal Rajah, a near relation of Deep Chund, and called him Seeb Chund, after-
wards degrading him, and there is one exaggeration; viz. that Mohun Sing gaye up
|
1844. ] the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 909
The murder of Monoruth Joshee, the agent of the Kumaon govern-
ment at Roodurpoor, by Nundram of Casheepoor, an event previously
glanced at, combined with the treacherous murder of Jyekishen Joshee
by Mohun Sing, as narrated in the above extract, placed the whole
power over the Bhabur tract at the disposal of Nundram and his
family, and he took the best steps for securing his position, making
terms with the Nawab Vuzeer, then Asoph-ud-Dowlah, and by becom-
ing Jjaradar of the territory under that ruler. After two or three
weak and ineffectual struggles in the field with the Ghoorkas,
Mahender Sing and his brother Lall Sing were finally obliged to
abandon the hills, and settled at Azlpoory in the Terraz, under the
protection of the Nawab Vuzeer, obtaining thereby a guarantee for
the retention, by the family, on some doubtful kind of tenure of some
portion of the tract, over which their ancestors of the Kumaon Raj had
ruled, and which as far as any actual Jagheer was concerned, was subse-
quently exchanged for the grant of Chachhett, which is situated in a more
Southerly direcetion. Between 1791 and 1802, when the cession of Ro-
hileund to the British government took place, the Ghoorkas were too
much occupied within the hills to bestow much attention to the old low-
land territories of Kumaon ; but they obtained for sometime possession
of AKi/poory, and they were afterwards driven out by the forces under
Ata Beg and Sunbhonath sent from Bareilly, aid having been implored
by Mahender Sing and Lall Sing who had been forced to fly to Luknow,*
and the danger on its northern frontier in Rohileund having become a
source of deep anxiety to the Oudh durbar. Casheepoor then became the
principal residence of the exiled family ; but Atoodurpoor was also often
visited, and from their statements, it would appear, at that time to have
been a flourishing place. Pertaub Sing, indeed, informs me, that even
until so late a period as 1815, when the march of the British troops to
Almorah to Rohilla rule, whereas this was not exactly the case ; as Mohun Sing employ-
ed mercenary Rohilla troops who occupied at times the capital, so also did Lall Sing,
and so did Hurruckdeo, and afterwards the British; but in all these visitations the
Brahmins governed both Almorah and the province, and the Rohillas never even had
a mosque for their prayers. Hurruckdeo’s rescue of Almorah was thus, after all, not
sO very great an act of patriotism, as the report would appear to make it.
* Hurruckdeo about this time (1797 a.p.)was in attendance on Mr. Cherry at Luk-
now and Benares, and endeavoured to interest the British authorities in favour of the
Hill Rajahs against the Goorkas.
6 F
910 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155,
the hills, combined with other visitations, more especially banditti,
harassed the inhabitants by requisitions and losses of all kinds, that
place* could boast of 1,200 Brinjarries with their equipage, 200
hackeries and their owners, 200 weavers, and 700 families of choo-
mars, koormees, lohars, &c., in addition to a large agricultural po-
pulation, and the numerous occasional followers of his father and uncle,
with other exiles from the hills.
11. I have thus brought to a conclusion the history of Kumaon,
chiefly in connexion with its dependencies in
The Government of the the Jower Terrai, otherwise called Bhabur,
Nawab Vuzeer, and of the
British. Reflections there- Mymnes, and Mél by the Puharrees, and I be-
on and on the state of the
country, with allusions to lieve that, however unimportant, the information
that part of the Bhabur : :
still included in Kumaon thus given, is for the most part new. Knowing
he acs et little, I can tell little of the further history of
the Terrai, and it would be presumptuous in me to intrude on ground
which belongs to the Plains authorities.| The abstract ofall the intel-
ligence acquired by me on this subject, may however be briefly re-
corded. The rule of the Nawab Vuzeer in the Mal Pergunnahs was,
on the whole, beneficial, but, chiefly in a negative point of view. The
bad government of districts, naturally more adapted for culture and
habitation, drove large colonies of people from the south to a region
where the background of the forest and the hills could always afford
a shelter against open oppression; where the nature of the climate
was not such as to invite thereto the oppressors in whose hand a whole
fertile and salubrious land had fallen; and, where, also, on this very
account, the rulers, who did exist, found it their interest to conciliate
and attract all new-comers. The management of the territory in
question by Nundram and Seeb Lall is generally well spoken of, except
in the matter of police; but, even in this latter respect, the misman-
agement was not more injurious to society, than the state of affairs in
regard to the forest-banditti became in times not far distant from
our own. I believe that it may be confidently stated, that at the
commencement of the British rule in Rohilcund, there existed in
* Roodurpoor was partly ruined by the establishment of the Hill Mundee of
Huldwanee, 20 miles nearer the hills, and then completely, by the swamp caused by
the Nawab of Rampoor’s Bund.
7 Not only present, but past.
rie
1844. | the Kumaon and Rohileund Turaee. 911
the Terrai a greater number of inhabited spots than there existed
30 years afterwards in the same tract; that more, and more careful,
cultivation was visible in every direction; that the prairie, if not the
forest, had retreated to a greater distance; that the gools or canals
of irrigation were more frequent and better made; that more atten-
tion was paid to the construction and management of the bunds
on the several streams; and that, finally, on account of all these cir-
cumstances, the naturally bad climate, now again deteriorated, had
somewhat improved. While recording this statement, I must not
omit to add, that I myself possess no positive separate proofs that
my assertions are correct; but that I write under the influence of
almost universal oral testimony, supported, nevertheless, by this
circumstance; viz., that the revenue statistics of the tract under dis-
cussion, shew a descending scale in regard to the income of the state, a
product which under general rules, bears an approximately regular
proportion to the amount of prosperity in a country. Nor, must I omit
the fact, that the Boksa and Tharoo tribes are extremely migratory
in their habits, and are peculiar in requiring at their several locations
more land for their periodical tillage, than they can shew under culti-
vation at one time, or in one year. To these tribes, is in a great mea-
sure now left the occupation of the Terrai territory, so that now for
every deserted village, there may be perhaps found a corresponding
newly cultivated one, within the same area; and large spaces of waste
may intervene, where under the present system, no room for contem-
poraneous cultivation is supposed to exist; the periodical waste or
fallow, also, in that peculiar climate, presenting as wild and jungly an
appearance as the untouched prairie. In the times, on the contrary,
which I have advantageously compared with our own, the fickle and
unthrifty races whom I have named, were not the sole occupants of
the soil, and the number of contemporaneous settlements was therefore
greater, and the extent of land required for each was less. I, there-
fore, come round in due course to the next fact, (the obverse of that
first stated,) that, as bad government in the ordinarily habitable parts
of the country introduced an extraordinary number of ploughs into
the borders of the forest tract, so, the accession of the British rule, by
affording a good government to Rohilcund, re-attracted the agricultu-
ral resources to that quarter, and proportionately reduced the means
912 A few Notes on the subject of [No. 155.
of tillage in the Terrai. Such is my general position; but, local cir-
cumstances also added to the deterioration; and amongst these, an
allusion on my part is all that is necessary or proper to the hasty and
perfunctory mode of settlement adopted in the earlier years of the
British rule, to the disputes in and out of court, concerning Zemin-
darry rights between Seeb Lall and Lall Sing ; and again between the
latter and his elder brother Mahendra Sing’s family ; to the continued
bad police management ; and, perhaps more than all, to the neglect
and difference of the English revenue officers, who were scared away
from the tract by the bad reputation of its climate, and only occasion-
ally attracted thither by its facilities for sport.
In fact, the sum of the whole matter is, in my opinion, this: that
even long neglect in other quarters can by a change of system, be
speedily remedied ; but, that in the peculiar region of which we are
treating, a very brief period of neglect or bad management is sufficient
to ruin the country. Its physical character has been well described
by others, but more especially and directly in the recent Irrigation Re-
port of Captain Jones, and incidentally in the lately discovered and pub-
lished Geological Report by the late Captain Herbert.* Under the base
of the hills, surface irrigation from the several streams that issue
therefrom, can be carried on without difficulty to a certain distance
on either side of them by means of water-courses taken off at different
levels, this distance or point of non-irrigation being determined by
the slope of the country, and the absorbing or retaining qualities of
the soil, and consequently by the time of disappearance of water in the
severalrivers. Hence, in the Upper Bhabur, so long as an agricultural
population can be found, extensive patches of fine cultivation} will
always exist; but, at wide intervals, and with but a short prolonga-
tion to the Southward. Then, succeeds the okhur bhoomee, or dry
region of forest and prairie, beneath the rich mould and enormous
beds of gravel of which, at an hitherto undiscoverable depth, flows the
drainage of the lower mountains ; the point of re-appearance of water
* Journal Asiatic Society, Vol. XI, the map published with Vol. XIII.
¢ The superficial soil in the Bhabur when well irrigated, supplies admirable crops
of wheat, mustard and the like ; but is said to be too light for sugar-cane, cotton and
other staples ; my own opinion is, that every thing could be produced, if the cultivators
were permanent and of an industrious race, instead of being only hybernating Puhar-
reCeS.
1844.] the Kumaon and Rohilcund Turaee. 913
in the river beds, and the rushing out of the numerous springs being
determined by the thinning out of the porous gravelly detritus, and
the approach of the clay, or impervious stratum to the surface, thus :
N e°
Ss, Sandstone Hills.
cof reappearance of water
m
f=} ~~
‘3 8 Irrigate®
& Turai. < Waterless Forest. X cultivat'®
SSS ee Se
SS SSS po
x
Clay. Point of disappearance
P of water.
The Lower Bhabur, or special Terrai, succeeds, and reflection and
Lower Terrai- observation both shew, that if left to itself, this region
must become one of swamps and malaria, and only partial cultivation ;
whereas, if carefully watched, its evils of climate may be vastly
amended, and its agriculture be only limited by its amount of popula-
tion. A careful guidance of the waters from their several sources
would prevent the formation of the swamps on the lower edge of the
forest. The rapid slope of the country causes the streams to push
along the superficial gravel mixed with trees and vegetable mould, and
thus to form at last an obstruction a-head of themselves. This causes
numerous windings of the streams, and at every corner a back water
swamp is produced, which would have had no existence, if the current
had been carefully conducted, or if the obstructions in its course had been
removed, or an opening through them been made. In the same manner
the proper placing of the several bunds on the streams, and a proper
attention to outlets of canals thus formed, would prevent the evils now
arising from embankments which enrich one village, or set of villages,
at the expense of the whole neighbourhood; and from water-escapes,
which irregularly flood all the adjacent lands, and create grass koon-
duls and swamps for tigers, deer, and hogs, while they drive out the
human inhabitant.
These are common illustrations, and are sufficient to prove my argu-
ment for the absolute necessity of official and even scientific attention
being paid to the physical character of the Lower Terrai, the addition-
al benefits of a good revenue management, and a good police being,
914 Kummaon and Rohileund Turaee. [No, 155.
at the present period assumed. | trust that the force of this argument
will not be weakened by its not being original. The improvement of
the forest-tract can be effected by the cutting of broad roads through
it to the several points of access to the hills, and by extension of the
Puharree clearings at its northern edge by a better and more economical
distribution of the available means of irrigation. But, it still remains a
matter for science to determine, whether except in the case of large
rivers, (for instance the Ramgunga and Kosillah,) which on account of
their volume and force escape absorption into the gravel, any canals
can be taken off from common streams, at their exit from the mountains,
and carried continuously through the forest. If they can, I would be
content to sacrifice some portion of the partial cultivation carried on by
the Hillmen at the immediate foot of the hills, by means of their numer-
ous separate water-courses. If they cannot be made so as to bring a
large and continuous portion of the forest and prairie into cultivation,
I am hardly prepared to recommend much interference with the pre-
sent system of irrigation in the Upper Bhabur, however wasteful, in the
mere attempt to prolong a mile or two further the Puharree cultiva-
tion, and to add to the number of villages, paying almost nothing to
the State, while they decrease the pasture grounds required by the
herdsmen, both of the plains and the hills, at that very portion of the
forest where the means of supplying water to the cattle alone exists.* —
As, however, the subject of the Kumaon Bhabur as distinct from the
Rohileund Terrai will form the subject of a separate report in the
ordinary course of my official duties, and, as the upper tract is quite
prosperous enough not to require any immediate special remedies, I
here drop my pen.
Almorah, 9th October, 1844. J. H. Barren,
Senior Assistant Commissioner, Kumaon Proper.
* The forest here alluded to, is almost utterly useless for timber, though its pasture
grounds are admirable. All the valuable timber is now confined to the foot of the hills
and to the lower range, and the sissoo islands in the river beds. This is a fact little
known, but quite true.
ee
or
The Osteology of the Elephant. From the India Sporting Review.
I am induced to take the following subject for my first essay in the
pages of the India Sporting Review, (to which be length of days and
unrivalled success,) by the simple fact, that of the engravings pro-
duced in Europe, affecting to be faithful representations of
‘¢ The huge earth-shaking beast,
The beast that hath between his eyes
The Serpent for a hand’’—
Scarce one in the dozen does not outrage nature most unmercifully ;
of course I include under this head neither add illustrations of Zoo-
logy, nor the productions of artists, professional or amateur, resident
in India: though in several lithographs after the latter, which have
fallen under my inspection, I could point out errors, probably not
existing in their original drawings while many of the former are
radically wrong. The prevailing absurdity in the engravings I al-
lude to, is giving the elephant hocks ! ! ! the perpetrators of which
would appear to have adopted the idea (and selected their model
accordingly) of the elderly Scotch lady in ‘ The Last of the Lairds.’
who exclaims, while admiring a painting of a tiger-hunt—‘“‘ Eek!
Sirs! wha’d ha’e thought it?—that y’r eelephant, after a, shauld be
naithing mair than a muckle pig wi a langer snoot,”—a deprecatory
comparison truly of the animal on which Milton has deservedly
bestowed the epithet “ half-reasoning.” Leaving his mental capacity
in such excellent hands, I proceed to the object I have in view, a
delineation of his bodily peculiarities, and of the machinery by which
such a mass of living flesh and blood performs it’s functions.
It is well known that the sculptor or painter who should attempt
the human form, without adequate knowledge of the osseous frame-
work and its muscular clothing, would produce but a sorry resem-
blance of the paragon of animals! In like manner, ignorance of the
internal structure of the elephant, so unlike that of all other quad-
rupeds, has doubtless caused these numerous false drawings of it’s
external appearance, and which I presume to think the annexed out-
lines will serve to rectify. The design of the first was sketched
|
916 The Osteology of the Elephant. [No. 155.
some years ago for my own guidance, and shortly afterwards com-
pared (in doing which I had the assistance of a sporting friend, no
other than our own Asmodeus) with the articulated specimen in the
Museum of the Asiatic Society. In the same apartment were skele-
tons of other mammalia—the Rhinoceros Indicus, Felis Tigris, Felis
Leopardus, Sus Scropha, &c., and while viewed in Juxta-position
with these, a casual observer might imagine the elephant deficient in
the number of bones usually forming the legs. Not so, the compara-
tive anatomist who detects the same plan regularly followed through-
out all the class, varied only by the elongation, or otherwise, and
arrangement of the carpal and metacarpal, tarsal and metatarsal
bones, as also of the digital phalanges. The posterior extremities of
our subject (due allowance being made for great difference in length
and size) seem to approach more nearly to the inferior ones of the
human skeleton than those of any other quadruped. The Vertical
position of the sacrum adds to this similitude, while the lateral power
bestowed by the articulation of the thigh and knee joints, is visible
externally—as a favorite position of the animal, while tethered and at
rest, is supporting the weight of his hinder quarters on one leg, while
the other is thrown in a stand at ease manner across it, one foot
resting carelessly upon the other.
Plate \. The head, excepting the lower jaw, is drawn in section,
showing the situation of the brain and it’s defences ; also, the process
of dentition, in which one, the foremost, grinder is seen to be super-
annuated and gradually disappearing; the next, the centre one, in
present use, and the third decending to take the place of the last in
due course. This singular system of decay and reproduction is said
to occur eight times in the life of the individual.*
* I have now before me the skull of an elephant which died here about a year
ago;—it presents the peculiarity of having no grinder on the right side of the lower
jaw; whether this was a natural defect or the result of an accident is not known. If
the latter, it must have happened many years ago, as the alveolus is entirely ossified
over, a slight hollow alone appearing, while the corresponding grinder above, instead
of having the usual jaggy polished under-surface, showing the arrangement of enamel
and bony substance, is rounded and covered with the opaque cortical matter. Its
predecessor, which is much reduced, and was attached to the head by only a single
root, is also rounded below, but is slightly polished, with some of tha enamel ap-
pearing,
A . 1 r ’, Mes
MELE. CROTVE
= a9 ay ie 2
Ro wet is
20
i
o 7
. F
ro ry
eo
?
A
a>
,
CORE is
) 2 ot ore ba,
: : ree?) ee g
; ” ie but te woe tue)
re oh ;
ne r Ne ¥
’
*
j j
— J
:
<
+
¢ : id
.
-
>
‘
’
'
>
ba 4
Cpred by HM Smath.
1844.] The Osteology of the Elephant. 917
a. Cavity of the brain.
B. Space occupied by bony cells, between
the outer, and
. the inner tablets of the Skull.
. Opening of the nostrils.
. Alveolus of the tusk.
Old molar in a state of diminution and decay.
- Perfect molar.
. Embryo molar, progressing forwards and downwards.
K. Inferior maxillary.
Cervical vertebrae, 7 in number.
. The ribs—19 on each flank.
. Bones of the Sacrum.
. The caudal vertebre, 24, in number.
The Sternum.
. The clavicles. (?)
. The Scapula.
. Theshumerus.
. The ulna.
. The radius.
. The Carpus, comprising 7 bones.
. The metacarpus, and interior digital phalanges, five in each foot.
. The femur.
. The tibia.
. The fibula.
. The tarsus.
. The metatarsus and posterior digital phalanges, four in each foot.
18. The patella.
Pilate II, Fig 1. An elephant descending a bank of too acute an
angle to allow of his walking down it laterally, which, were he to
attempt doing, his huge body, soon exceeding the centre of gravity,
would certainly topple over. His first manoeuvre is to kneel down
close to the edge of the declivity, having his chest upon the ground ;
one fore leg is then carefully passed a short way down the slope, and
if there is no natural projection adapted for firm footing, a step is
speedily kicked out of, or pressed into the soil, according to the state
of dryness or moisture it may be in. This point gained, the other
6G
&
em ee wy
OOW ST TR wD =
tft he
noe ©
—
or p> Co
ft he
ao.
918 The Osteology of the Elephant. [No. 155.
fore leg is also brought down, and performs the same work a little in
advance of the first, which is now at liberty to move still lower—
when, first one and then the other hind leg is cautiously slid over the
side, and the hind feet in turn occupy the resting-places made, used,
and left by the fore ones; and so on, the course not being direct from
top to bottom, but sideways, until the level be regained. This is
done at more than an angle of 45, while the animal has the weight
of a howdah, it’s occupant, his attendant and sporting apparatus,
adding to the difficulty of the performance ; and that in a much less
space of time than would readily be imagined.
Plate II. Fig. 2. Represents the reverse of fig 1., viz., an elephant
ascending a similarly steep bank by the same process, except the
kneeling down at the commencement.
I had some idea of adding a third drawing, that of a complete figure
of the elephant, undefaced by lines, dots, figures, or letters; but as
I purpose sending you a series of Tiger-hunting Scenes, you and your
subscribers (should my attempts be thought worthy of being submit-
ted to the engraver or lithographer) will have specimens enow of the
Elephas Indicus ere the Review be much older.
Dacca, Dec. 1844. J.G. F.
P. S.—Since writing the above, I have received a Zoological work,
which fully bears me out in the strictures with which I commenced
this paper. It is lettered ‘‘ Naturalist’s Library. Mammalia, Vol.
V., Elephants, &c.”” Many of the volumes of this work are well got
up, and contain tolerably faithful illustrations of the letter-press: but
here, again, the elephant meets with his usual misrepresentation:
Imprimis,—The title-page presents us with a vignette purporting to
be ‘“ The elephant of India, caparisoned,” and behold a ‘ monstrum
horrendum, informe ingens,’ with hocks of course whose forebears,
after their kind, never saw the inside of the Ark, I’m very certain.
But making some allowance for a vignette, turn we to the body of
the book, and next find Plate II., “ Elephant of India,”—differing
from the vignette ‘tis true, but not a whit nearer to nature ;—hocks
again, line of the belly horizontal, more mounds on his back than the
Bactrian camel’s, and length enough from proboscis to tail for an
elephant and three-quarters. Plate III. ‘‘ Elephant of India, capa-
risoned for hunting.” Very faulty, but a visible improvement on
1844. The Osteology of the Elephant. 919
the foregoing:—and why? The plate is a pictorial plagiarism on one
of Captain Mundy’s “ Pencil Sketches,” which has however under-
gone the change which Sheridan somewhere says is effected by li-
terary appropriators on their pilfered ideas, ‘“‘they treat them, as
gipsies do stolen children, disfigure them, that they may pass for their
own.” Here we have the ankle joints so prominent, and placed so
high up the legs, as to assume all the appearance of hocks—the tail
absurdly short, and the under outline of the body perfectly straight,
whereas it should descend rapidly from the elbow joint of the fore
leg to the knee of the hind one.
QUERIES RESPECTING THE Human Race, fo be addressed to Tra-
velilers and others. Drawn up by a Committee of the British
Association for the Advancement of Science, appointed in 1839,
and circulated by the Ethnographical Society of London.
[The Editors have thought this paper of so much importance that they have lost no
time in re-printing it, as pointing out to so many residents in India a kind of know-
ledge which they may so easily acquire and communicate, and which offers so many
points of interest to every thinking mind. The more savage races of India from the
Veddas of Ceylon to the Goands and the races of the Terraes, with the Singphos and
Kariens of our Eastern Frontiers, to say nothing of the Coles, Dhangurs, Sontals and
Goomsoor tribes, and many others, all offer fields of research, from which, undoubtedly,
many scientific laurels are to be gathered, and eventually much useful knowledge
and many humane results may arise.—Eps. |
At the meeting of the British Association held at Birmingham,
Dr. Prichard read a paper “ On the Extinction of some varieties of
the Human Race.” He pointed out instances in which this extine-
tion had already taken place to a great extent, and showed that
many races now existing are likely, at no distant period, to be anni-
hilated. He pointed out the irretrievable loss which science must
sustain, if so large a portion of the human race, counting by tribes
instead of individuals, is suffered to perish, before many interesting
questions of a psychological, physiological and philological character, as
well as many historical facts in relation to them, have been inves-
tigated. Whence he argued that science, as well as humanity, is
interested in the efforts which are made to reseue them, and to pre-
serve from oblivion many important details connected with them.
At the suggestion of the Natural Historical Section, to which Dr.
Prichard’s paper was read, the Association voted the sum of £5 to be
920 Queries respecting the Human Race. [No. 155.
expended in printing a set of queries to be addressed to those who
may travel or reside in parts of the globe inhabited by the threatened
races. A Committee was likewise appointed by the same Section to
prepare a list of such questions. The following pages, to which the
attention of travellers and others is earnestly invited, have, in conse-
quence, been produced. It is right to observe, that whilst these ques-
tions have been in preparation, the Ethnographical Society of Paris
has printed a set of questions on the same subject for the use of
travellers.* It has been gratifying to perceive the general similarity
between the questions proposed by the French savans who compose
that Society, and those which had been already prepared by the Com-
mittee; but the Committee is bound to acknowledge the assistance
which, in the completion of its task, it has derived from the compre-
hensive character and general arrangement of the Ethnographical So-
ciety’s list. The following queries might have been considerably ex-
tended, and much might have been added to explain the reasons and
motives on which some of them are founded. Such additions would,
however, have inconveniently extended these pages, and, in part,
have defeated their object. The Committee has only further to ex-
press its desire that the Association may continue its support to the
interesting subject of Ethnography, and that their fellow-members
will aid in bringing these queries under the notice of those who may
have it in their power to obtain replies. Britain, in her extensive
colonial possessions and commerce, and in the number and intelligence
of her naval officers, possesses unrivalled facilities for the elucidation
of the whole subject; and it would bea stain on her character, as well
as a loss to humanity, were she to allow herself to be left behind by
other nations in this inquiry.
It will be desirable, before giving direct answers to the questions
proposed in the following list, that the traveller should offer, in his
own terms, a description of the particular group of human beings,
which he may have in view in drawing up his list of answers, seeing
that the replies, however accurate and replete with useful information,
may fail in some particulars to give a complete idea of the people to
whom they relate.
* Reprinted Jour. As. Soc. vol. x. p. 171,
1844.) Queries respecting the Human Race. 921
Physical Characters.
1. State the general stature of the people, and confirm this by some
actual measurements. Measurement may be applied to absolute
height, and also to proportions, to be referred to in subsequent queries.
The weight of individuals, when ascertainable, and extreme cases, as
well as the average, will be interesting. What may be the relative
differences in stature and dimensions, between males and females?
2. Is there any prevailing disproportion between different parts of
the body? as, for example, in the size of the head, the deficient or
excessive development of upper or lower extremities.
3. What is the prevailing complexion? This should be accurately
defined, if possible by illustrative and intelligent example, such as by
comparison with those whose colour is well known. The colour of
the hair should be stated, and its character, whether fine or coarse,
straight, curled, or woolly. The colour and character of the eyes should
likewise be described. Is there, independently of want of cleanli-
ness, any perceptible peculiarity of odour ?
_ 4. The head is so important as distinctive of race, that particular
attention must be paid to it. Is it round or elongated in either direc-
tion, and what is the shape of the face, broad, oval, lozenge-shaped,
or of any other marked form? It will contribute to facilitate the
understanding of other descriptions, to have sketches of several typi-
cal specimens. A profile, and also a front view should be given. In
the profile, particularly notice the height and angle of the forehead, the
situation of the meatus auditorius, and the form of the posterior part of
the head. It will also be desirable to depict the external ear, so as
to convey the form and proportion of its several parts. The form of
the head may be minutely and accurately described by employing
the divisions and terms introduced by craniologists, and the corres-
ponding development of moral and intellectual character should in
conjunction be faithfully stated. So much of the neck should be
given with the profile as to show the setting on of the head. The ad-
vance or recession of the chin, and the character of the lips and nose,
may likewise be given in profile. The front view should exhibit the
width of forehead, temples, and cheek-bones, the direction of the eyes,
and the width between them: the dimensions of the mouth. When
922 Queries respecting the Human Race. [ No. 155.
skulls can be collected or examined, it would be desirable to give a
view in another direction, which may even be done, though with less
accuracy, from the living subject. It should be taken by looking
down upon the head from above, so as to give an idea of the contour
of the forehead, and the width of the skull across from one parietal
protuberance to the other.
5. State whether the bones of the skull are thick, thin, heavy, or
light. Is it common to find the frontal bone divided by a middle
suture or not? Note the form of the outer orbitar process, which
sometimes forms part of a broad scalene triangle, with the vertex
downwards. How are the frontal sinuses developed? Observe whe-
ther the ossa triquetra are frequent, or otherwise ; whether there be
frequent separation of the upper part of the os occipitis ; the relative
situation of the foramen magnum. In regard to the bones of the face,
notice the position of the ossa nasi and unguis; the former sometimes
meet nearly or quite on the same plane, whilst, in others, they meet
at an angle. The former character is strongly marked in many Afri-
can skulls. State the form of the jaw-bone, shape of the chin, and
observe the angle of the jaw, the position and character of the teeth,
and their mode of wear; and if they have any practice of modifying
their form or appearance, let this be stated. ‘The malar bones have
already been noticed, but they may require a more minute descrip-
tion.
6. When the opportunity can be found, observe the number of lum-
bar vertebre, since an additional one is said to be common in some
tribes.
7. Give the length of the sternum as compared with the whole
trunk ; and also some idea of the relative proportion between the chest
and the abdomen.
8. What is the character of the pelvis in both sexes, and what is the
form of the foot ?
9. The form of the scapula will also deserve attention, more especi-
ally as regards its breadth and strength ; and the strength or weak-
ness of the clavicle should be noticed in connection with it.
10. The internal organs, and blood-vessels will with greater diffi-
culty be subjected to examination ; but it may be well here to remark,
that varieties in these may prevail locally in connection with race.
1844 ] Queries respecting the Human Race. 923
N.B.—Peculiarities may exist, which cannot be anticipated in
queries, but which the observer will do well to notice amongst his an-
swers to anatomical questions.
11. Where a district obviously possesses two or more varieties of
the human race, note the typical characters of each in their most
distinct form, and indicate to what known groups or families they may
belong: give some idea of the proportion of each, and state the result
of their intermixture on physical and moral character. When it can
be ascertained, state how long intermixture has existed, and of which
the physical characters tend to predominate. It is to be observed,
that this question does not so much refer to the numerical strength or
political ascendency of any of the types, but to the greater or less
physical resemblance which the offspring may bear to the parents,
and what are the characters which they may appear to derive from
each: whether there is a marked difference arising from the father or
the mother belonging to one of the types in preference to another ; also
whether the mixed form resulting from such intermarriage is known
to possess a permanent character, or after a certain number of gene-
rations to incline to one or other of its component types.
12, Any observation connected with these intermarriages, relating
to health, longevity, physical and intellectual character, will be parti-
cularly interesting, as bringing light on a field hitherto but little sys-
tematically investigated. Even when the people appear to be nearly
or quite free from intermixture, their habits, in respect of intermar-
riage within larger or smaller circles, and the corresponding physical
characters of the people, will be very interesting.
13. Do the natives speak a language already known to philologists,
and if so, state what it is; and notice whether it exhibit any dialectic
peculiarities, as well as the modifications of pronunciation and ac-
centuation which it may offer. State also the extent to which this
dialect may be used, if limits can be ascertained.
14, If the language be little if at all known, endeavour to obtain
a vocabulary as extensive as circumstances will allow, and at least
consisting of the numerals, the most common and important sub-
stantives*, the pronouns in all persons and numbers, adjectives ex-
pressive of the commonest qualities, and, if possible, a few verbs
* The names of mountains, lakes, rivers, islands, &c.
924 Queries respecting the Human Race. [No. 155.
varied in time and person. The vocabulary should be tested by the
interrogation of different natives, and more than one person should
be engaged in taking it down from their mouths, to avoid, as far as
may be, errors arising from peculiarities of utterance or defect of hear-
ing. It is likewise of importance that the system of orthography be
duly indicated and strictly adhered to.
15. Endeavour to take down some piece of native composition,
such as the ordinary phrases employed in conversation, and any other
piece of prose which may be attainable; and specimens of metrical
composition if such exist. Though these would be of comparatively
little use without translation, yet independently of this some im-
portance is to be attached to the metrical compositions if they have
a national character and are widely diffused; and, in this case, it
might be possible to express some of their airs in musical characters.
A specimen of known composition translated into their language, may
also be given, such as the first chapter of Genesis, the fifteenth chap-
ter of Luke’s Gospel, and the Lord’s Prayer.
16. Endeavour to ascertain whether the language is extensively
spoken or understood, and whether there are different languages
spoken by men having similar physical characters obviously connecting
them as a race, or if differing somewhat in this respect, inhabiting a
particular geographical tract. When such groups are said to possess
different languages, endeavour, as far as possible, to ascertain their
number, the sources whence each is derived, and the languages to
which it is allied ; and also the circumstances, geographical or politi-
cal, which may account for these distinctions.
[For further information connected with the investigation of lan-
guages, reference is made to a short essay on this subject read to the
Philological Society of London. ]
17. Are there any ceremonies connected with the birth of a child?
Is there any difference whether the child be male or female?
18. Does infanticide occur to any considerable extent, and if it
does, to what causes is it to be referred, want of affection, deficient
subsistence, or superstition ?
19. Are children exposed, and from what causes, whether super-
stition, want of subsistence or other difficulties, or from deformity,
general infirmity, or other causes of aversion?
1844. ] Queries respecting the Human Race. 925
20. What is the practice as to dressing and cradling children, and
are there any circumstances connected with it calculated to modify
their form; for example, to compress the forehead, as amongst the
western Americans; to flatten the occiput, as amongst most Ame-
ricans, by the flat straight board to which the child is attached ; to
occasion the lateral distortion of the head, by allowing it to remain
too long in one position on the hand of the nurse, as amongst the
inhabitants of the South Seas ?
21. Are there any methods adopted, by which other parts of the
body may be affected, such as the turning in of the toes, as amongst
the North Americans; the modification of the whole foot, as amongst
the Chinese?
22. How are the children educated, what are they taught, and are
any methods adopted to modify their character, such as to implant
courage, impatience of control, endurance of pain and privation, or, on
the contrary, submission, and to what authorities, cowardice, artifice.
23. Is there any thing remarkable amongst the sports and amuse-
ments of children, or in their infantile songs or tales ?
24. At what age does puberty take place?
25. What is the ordinary size of families, and are there any large
ones?
26. Are births of more than one child common? What is the pro-
portion of the sexes at birth and among adults?
27. Are the children easily reared ?
28. Is there any remarkable deficiency or perfection in any of the
senses? It is stated, that in some races sight is remarkably keen,
both for near and distant objects.
29. To what age do the females continue to bear children? and for
what period are they in the habit of suckling them ?
30. What is the menstrual period, and what the time of utero-
gestation P
31. Are there any ceremonies connected with any particular period
of life ?
32. Is chastity cultivated, or is it remarkably defective, and are
there any classes amongst the people of either sex by whom it is re-
markably cultivated, or the reverse, either generally or on particular
occasions.
6H °
926 Queries respecting the Human Race. [No. 155.
35. Are there any superstitions connected With this subject ?
34. What are the ceremonies and practices connected with mar-
riage ?
35. Is polygamy permitted and practised, and to what extent?
36. Is divorce tolerated, or frequent ?
37. How are widows treated ?
38. What is the prevailing food of the people? Is it chiefly animal
or vegetable, and whence is it derived in the two kingdoms? Do
they trust to what the bounty of nature provides, or have they means
of modifying or controlling production, either in the cultivation of ve-
getables, or the rearing of animals? Describe their modes of cooking,
and state the kinds of condiment which may be employed. Do they
reject any kinds of aliment from scruple, or an idea of uncleanness ?
Have they in use any kind of fermented or other form of exhilarating
liquor, and, if so, how is it obtained? What number of meals do
they make ? and what is their capacity for temporary or sustained
=
exertion ?
39. Describe the kind of dress worn by the people, and the mate-
rials employed in its formation. What are the differences in the
usages of the sexes in this respect? Are there special dresses used for
great occasions? and, if so, describe these, and their modes of orna-
ment. Does any practice of tattooing, piercing, or otherwise modify-
ing the person for the sake of ornament, prevail amongst the people?
N.B. Such modifications not to be blended with other modifications,
used as signs of mourning, &c.
40. Have the people any prevailing characteristic or remarkable
modes of amusement, such as dances and games exhibiting agility,
strength or skill?
41. Are games of chance known to the people, and is there a strong
passion for them ?
42. Do the people appear to be long or short-lived? If any cases
of extreme old age can be ascertained, please to state them. Such
cases may sometimes be successfully ascertained by reference to known
everits, as the previous visits of Europeans to the country. Is there a
marked difference between the sexes in respect of longevity ?
43. What is the general treatment of the sick? Are they cared
for, or neglected? Are any diseases dreaded as contagious, and how
1844.) Queries respecting the Human Race. 927
are such treated? Is there any medical treatment adopted? Are
there any superstitious or magical practices connected with the treat-
ment of the sick? What are the most prevailing forms of disease,
whence derived, and to what extent? Is there any endemic affection,
such as goitre, pelagra, plica, or the like? With what circumstances,
situations, and habits do they appear to be connected, and to what are
they referred by the people themselves ?
44. Where there are inferior animals associated with man, do they
exhibit any corresponding liability to, or exemption from disease ?
45. Do entozoa prevail, and of what kind ?
46. What is the method adopted for the disposal of the dead? Is
it generally adhered to, or subject to variation ?
47. Are any implements, articles of clothing, or food, deposited with
the dead ?
48. Is there any subsequent visitation of the dead, whether they are
disposed of separately, or in conjunction with other bodies?
49. What is the received idea respecting a future state? Does this
bear the character of transmigration, invisible existence about their
accustomed haunts, or removal to a distant abode ?
Buildings and Monuments.
50. What are the kinds of habitations in use among the people?
Are they permanent or fixed? Do they consist of a single apart-
ment, or of several? Are the dwellings collected into villages or
towns, or are they scattered, and nearly or quite single? If the for-
mer, describe any arrangement of them in streets or otherwise which
may be employed.
51. Have any monuments been raised by the present inhabitants
or their predecessors, and more especially such as relate to religion or
war? State their character, materials, and construction. If they are
still in use amongst the people, state this object, even if they should
be of the simplest construction, and be little more than mounds or
tumuli. If these monuments are no longer in use, collect, as far as
possible, the ideas and traditions of the natives regarding them, and
if possible, have them exafnined by excavation or otherwise, taking
care to deface and disturb them as little as possible.
928 Queries respecting the Human Race. LNo. 155.
52. In these researches be on the look out for the remains of the
skeletons of man or other animals, and, if discovered, let them be pre-
served for comparison with those still in existence.
Works of Art.
53. Let works of art, in metal, bone, or other materials, be
likewise sought and preserved, and their similarity to, or difference
from implements at present in use amongst the people of the district,
or elsewhere, be noted.
54. When a people display their ingenuity by the extent or variety
of their works of art, it will not only be desirable to describe what
these are, but also the materials of which they are constructed, the
modes in which these materials are obtained, the preparation which
they undergo when any is required, and the instruments by which
they are wrought. Such particulars will not only throw light on the
character and origin of the people, but will, directly or indirectly,
influence the commercial relations which may be profitably entered
into when commerce alone is looked to. When colonization is con-
templated, the facts contained in the replies to these queries will point
out the mutual advantages which might be obtained by preserving, in-
stead of annihilating, the aboriginal population.
Domestic Animals.
Are there any domestic animals in the possession of the people? Of
what species are they? Whence do they appear to have been derived,
and to what variety do they belong? Have they degenerated or
become otherwise modified? To what uses are they applied ?
Government and Laws.
55. What is the form of Government? Does it assume a monar-
chical or democratic character, or does it rest with the priests?
_ 56. Are the chiefs, whether of Jimited or absolute power, elective
or hereditary ?
27. Is there any division of clans or castes?
58. What are the privileges enjoyed by or withheld from these?
59. What care is taken to keep them distinct, and with what effect
on the physical and moral character of each ?
1844.] Queries respecting the Human Race. 929
60. What laws exist among the people? How are they preserved ?
Are they generally known, or confided to the memory of a chosen set
of persons? What are their opinions and regulations in reference to
property, and especially the occupation and possession of the soil?
Does the practice of hiring labourers exist among them?
61. Have they any knowledge or tradition of a legislator, to whom
the formation of laws is ascribed ?
62. Do they rescind, add to, or modify their laws? and how?
63. Are they careful in the observance of them?
64. What are their modes of enfocring obedience, and of proving
and punishing delinquency?
65. How are judges constituted? Do their trials take place at
stated periods, and in public?
66. How do they keep prisoners in custody, and treat them?
67. What are the crimes taken cognizance of by the laws? Is there
gradation or commutation of punishment?
Geography and Statistics.
68. Briefly state the geographical limits and character of the region
inhabited by the people to whom the replies relate.
69. State approximatively the number of inhabitants. As this is
an important, but very difficult question, it may not be amiss to point
out the modes in which the numbers may be ascertained. The people
themselves may state their number with more or less accuracy, but it
should be known whether they refer to all ranks and ages, or merely
comprehend adult males, who may be mustered for war, or other
general purposes requiring their combination. In this case state the
apparent proportion between adult males and other members of fami-
lies. The number of habitations in a particular settlement may be
counted, and some idea of the average numbers of a family be given.
Where the people inhabit the water-side, the number and dimensions
of their craft may be taken, and some idea of the proportion between
the number of these and of the individuals belonging to them, may be
formed. In drawing conclusions from observations of this kind, it
will be necessary to have due regard to the different degrees of density
or rarity in which, from various causes, population may be placed.
930 Queries respecting the Human Race. [No. 155.
70. Has the number of inhabitants sensibly varied, and within
what period?
7\. If it have diminished, state the causes; such as sickness,
starvation, war, and emigration. When these causes require ex-
planation, please to give it. If the inhabitants are on the in-
crease, is this the result of the easy and favourable circumstances of the
people causing an excess of births over deaths; or is it to be
assigned to any cause tending to bring accessions from other quarters ?
State whether such causes are of long standing, or recent.
72. Is the population generally living in a manner to which they
have been long accustomed, or have new relations with other people,
and consequently new customs and practices, been introduced ?
73. If the people, being uncivilized, have come under the influence
of the civilized state, to what people the latter belong, how they are
regarded, and what is the kind of influence they are producing.*
State the points of their good influence, if any, and those of an opposite
character, as the introduction of diseases, vices, wars, want of indepen-
dence, &c.
74. Is there any tendency to the union of races ? how is it exhibited,
and to what extent ?
Social Relations.
75. What kind of relationship, by written treaty or otherwise, sub-
sists between the nation and other nations, civilized or not? Have
they any intercourse by sea with other countries? Do any of them
understand any European language? Or are there interpreters, by
whom they can communicate with them?
76. Are they peaceable, or addicted to war? Have they any forms
of declaring war, or making peace? What is their mode of warfare,
either by sea or land? their weapons and strategy ? What do they do
with the slain, and with prisoners? Have they any mode of comme-
morating victories by monuments, hieroglyphics, or preservation of in-
dividual trophies, and of what kind? Have they any national poems,
sagas, or traditions respecting their origin and history ? Where Euro-
* This question will comprise the existence of missions—the success or the want of
it from causes connected with missionaries themselves or others.
1844.] Queries respecting the Human Race. 931
peans have introduced fire-arms, ascertain the modes of warfare which
have given place to them.
State whatever particulars respecting their origin and history are
derived, either from traditions among themselves or from other
sources.
Religion, Superstitions, §c.
77. Are the people addicted to religious observances, or generally re.
gardless of them ?
78. Do they adopt the idea of one great and presiding Spirit, or are
they polytheists ?
79. If polytheism exist, what are the names, attributes, and fables
connected with their deities, and what are the modes in which devo-
tions is paid to each ? Are any parts of the body held sacred, or the
reverse ? Do they offer sacrifices, and are they of an expiatory charac-
ter, or mere gifts?
80. Have they any sacred days or periods? fixed or moveable feasts,
or religious ceremonies of any kind, or any form of thanksgiving or
other observance connected with seasons ?
81. Have they any order of priests, and if so, are they hereditary,
elective, or determined by any particular circumstance ?
82. Is the religion of the people similar to that of any other people,
neighbouring or remote? If different, are they widely so, or dependent
on particular modifications, and of what kind ?
83. In what light do they regard the religion and deities of neigh-
bouring tribes ?
84. Is there any idea of an inferior order of spirits and imaginary
beings,—such as ghosts, fairies, brownies, and goblins; and how are
they described ?
85. Have they any notions of magic, witchcraft, or second sight ?
86. What ideas are entertained respecting the heavenly bodies?
Have they any distinction of stars, or constellations? and if so, what
names do they give them, and what do these names signify ?
87. Are they in any manner observed with reference to the division
of the year, and how?
932 Queries respecting the Human Race. [No. 155.
88. If time is not divided by observations of those bodies, what
other mode is adopted ? and do observances connected with them rest
with the priests or chiefs ?
89. When the traveller, by personal acquaintance with the language,
or by means of competent assistance from interpreters, can freely
converse with the people, it will be desirable that he should form some
idea of their amount of intelligence, their tone of mind with regard to
social relations, as respects freedom, independence, or subserviency,
and their recognition of moral obligations, and any other psychological
character which observation may detect ; and more especially such as
may contribute to an estimation of the probable results of efforts to
develope and improve the character.
Ricup. Kine, M. D.
a
27 Sackville St.
a“
JOURNAL
QF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY.
“On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas,” by B.H. Hovason, Esq. :
with some additions and annotations,—a Synopsis of the Indian Pari,—
and of the Indian Fringillide, By E. Buytu, Curator of the Asiatic
Society’s Museum.
LEIOTRICHAN.
Leiothrix, Swainson.—Bill short, strong, more or less conic, the culmen
and gonys equally curved before the nares, and the tomia scarpt: tip of
upper mandible strongly inclined over the lower, with salient notch [?],
but not Lanian [or Shrike-like] ; of the lower obtuse, entire, and straight.
Nares distinctly fossed, advanced, implumose, lateral ; the aperture more
or less lunated by the more or less hardened and scale-like tect. Rictus
moderate, furnished with long but feeble bristles: nares also furnished
with hairs. Wings short, round, firm, bowed, with five primaries gra-
dated, the sixth and seventh equal and longest. Legs and feet very strong ;
tarse a third longer than middle toe and nail, and nearly or quite smooth :
toes medial, unequal, depressed, the anterior basally connected, the
outer more so and longer; the hind large and broad, alone exceeding the
inner digit, and with its nail the outer, but not equal to the central toe
and nail. Nails strong, compressed, falcate; hind largest. ‘Tail short,
lyrate, mucronate,
Type Leiothrix furcatus ? (Swainson, or rather sinensis, being the
No. 156. No. 72, New Series. 61
934 On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. [No. 156.
Tanagra sinensis, Gmelin, founded on la Mesange de Nankin of Sonnerat,
which is referred to Parus by Temminck, p. c. 287, fig. 1, a figure which is
cited by Mr. Swainson, who assigns ‘‘ India” as the habitat ; and deduc-
ing his generic diagnosis from the present species, that systematist writes
—‘‘ Tail moderate, deeply forked,” this being a feature unnoticed in
Sonnerat’s description, which evidently refers to the species under con-
sideration, wherein the form of the tail may be compared to that of
a female black Grouse (Tetrao tetriz), but having its central pair of
feathers a third shorter than the rest.] ZL. calipyga, Mihi [being also
Bahila calipyga, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 88; subg. Calipyga, Lbid.,
J. A. S., X. 29.] Above and flanks sordid vernal green [or olive-
green, tinged with yellow on the crown] ; below gamboge-yellow [the
belly yellowish white] ; outer margin and base of the primaries the
same ; centrals [i. e. secondaries] edged with sanguine; rest of alars and
caudals black. Baill coral-red: legs fleshy-brown. Female with the
caudals green like the back, and the central alars not edged with san-
guine. Length six inches and a half, the bill five-eighths of an inch ; wing
two inches and nine-sixteenths ; tail two and one-third; tarse to sole
an inch and one-sixteenth ; central toe and nail three-quarters of an inch ;
hind-toe five-eighths : weight about 1 oz. Hab. central and north-
ern hilly regions [of Nepal]; feeds equally on grass-seeds, and
upon insects and their larve and pupez. [The foregoing description
of this bird refers to the newly moulted plumage, for as the fea-
thers become old the colours fade very considerably, the green of
the upper parts changing to plain grey, the yellow of the throat
and breast to a dull buffy hue, and the yellowish tinge of the abdo-
minal region disappears altogether. Analogous losses of colour occur,
to a greater or less extent, in the other species, but particularly
in the next; and in like manner the bright yellow on the wings of
Garrulax chrysopterus and certain allied species, fades to whitish-grey,
and the Cissa sinensis (v. Kitta venatorius, Gray), which at first is of a
beautiful and deep sea-green, becomes gradually of a pale verditer-blue,
while the sanguine hue bordering its large wing-feathers changes to
dull leaden-grey ; the same being more or less observable in all the
various forms (so common on the Himalaya) which have wing-markings
of the same general character as those of Leiothrix, Garrulax (v. Lan-
thocincla), &c.] |
1844.] On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. 935
SUBGENERA ?
Fringilliparus, Mihi, [Mesia, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 34; and
since Philocalyz, H., J. A. S., X. 29.] Bill longer, wings longer [cer-
tainly not in proportion, nor even quite so long], not bowed, more
acuminate, with but four primaries graduated, the two next being equal
and longest. Tail medial, broad, firm, even, with the tips of the feathers
nearly squared. [N. B. With several specimens both of this and the pre-
ceding type before me, I can perceive no character whatever that should
entitle them to separation, and do not even recognise the distinctions of
form indicated by Mr. Hodgson, their chief diversity consisting in the
shape of the tail, which in the present species is scarcely truncated,
and has the outermost feathers a little shorter than the rest. ]
Type, F. argentauris, Mihi. [Mesia argentauris, Hodg., Ind. Rev. 1838,
p. 88.] Body slaty, paler below, and smeared green above; [in new
plumage, tinged with green on the upper parts, the nape dark golden-
fulvous, throat and breast bright gamboge having a cast of red, and
under-parts deeply tinged with yellow :] cap black, enveloping the sil-
very ears: [feathers at] base of bill yellow, and the outer margin of
primaries and lateral caudals the same: upper and lower tail-coverts
and base of wings [i. e. a large patch at the base of the primaries and
secondaries,] sanguine: legs and bill pale fleshy-yellow. Female with
the tail-coverts yellow [fading to fulvous or tawny]. Length seven in-
ches to seven and a quarter; of bill three-quarters of an inch; wing
three and one-sixteenth; tail two and three-quarters to three inches ;
tarse an inch and one-sixteenth; central toe and nail thirteen-six-
teenths ; hind-toe ten-sixteenths.
Toropus, Mihi. [Siva, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 88 ; and since He-
miparus, Ibid, J. A. S., X. 29.) Bill various, more slender and Meru-
line, or shorter and more Parian; wings short; feet as in Zosterops
or Jora, with short anteal toes, but tarse high as in the last. Tail more
or less elongated, and gradated from sides and centre as in Parus;
broad, firm, and obtusely tipped, or narrow and frail and wedge-tipped.
Types. I. strigula, cyanouroptera, and nipalensis.
I. strigula; [Siva strigula, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 89; and
figured as Muscicapa (Siva, Hodg.,) strigula by M. Adolphe Delessert, in
the 2d. or Zoological part of his Souvenirs d’un Voyage dans l'Inde, p, 24,
936 On the Letotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. (No. 156.
and pl. VIII.*] Length six inches and a half, bill five-eighths of an
inch ; tail two inches and seven-eighths ; wing two and three-quarters ;
tarse an inch and one-sixteenth; central toe and nail eleven-sixteenths ;
the hind three-sixteenths. Head with a full crest of sordid gamboge ;
body above slaty smeared with green ; below gamboge more or less di-
* In the same work are figured and described, or only described :—
1. As Chloropsis curvirostris, Swainson, (‘‘ Menag.,’’) the Phyllornis Hardwickii,
v. Chl. Hardwickii, Jardine and Selby, v. chrysogaster, McClelland and Horsfield, v.
cyanopterus, Hodgson, v. auriventris, Guérin, (Magasin de Zoologie, 1840, Ois., pl.
17).
2. As Cypselus (Chatura, Hodgson,) nudipes, Hodgson, J. A. S., V. 779, the
Pallene macropterus, v. Ch. macroptera, Swainson, Zool. Iil., v. leuwconotus, Mag.
de Zool., 1840, Ois. pl. 20. (Is this identical with the Australian species—P. cauda-
cuta, (Lath. ), to which, according to Mr. Strickland (Ann. and Mag. N. H. 1843, p.
337), must be referred ‘‘ Chetura australis, Stephens, Hirundo fusca, Stephens, and
Ch. macroptera, Swainson’’ ?
3. As Francolinus Hardwickii, Gray, the Perdiz lunulosa, Valenciennes, v. Fr.
nivosus, Mag. de Zool., 1840, Ois. pl. 18; if indeed this be not also the Cingalese,
Perdiz bicalcaratus of Pennant, which I greatly suspect. The form, to which P.
spadiceus also belongs, I regard as constituting a very distinct genus— Galloperdiz,
Nobis.
4. As Crateropus Lafresnayii, Ad. Deless., the Garrulax cachinnans, or Cr.
cachinnans, Jerdon, Madr. Ji. 1839, p. 255, with figure ; having been, it would ap-
pear, also named Delesserti by M. de la Fresnaye.
5. As Cr. griseiceps, Rev. Zool. 1840, p. 101, the Cr. Delesserti, Jerdon, Madr.
Jl. 1839, p. 256.
6. As Muscicapa rufula, de la Fresnaye, the Sazicola nigrorufa, Jerdon, Madr.
Jl. 1839, p. 366.
7. As Pica bottanensis, Ad. Deless., Rev. Zool. 1840, p. 400, the P. megaloptera,
Blyth, J. A. S., XI, 193 (1842).
And the following new species are given :—
1. Turdus (Merula) nigropileus, de la Fresnaye; a Neilgherry species distinct
from T. simillimus, Jerdon, and which has since been likewise obtained by that natu-
ralist: allusion being made in the description to the two Himalayan Blackbirds, 7.
pecilopterus, Vig., and J. collaris, Sorel, Rev. Zool. 1840, p. 2, which latter is
doubtless the T. albocinctus, Royle, Ill. Him. Bot. (1839), termed albicollis on that
author’s plate, which name belongs to another species.
2. Prinia fiaviventris, (Ad. Deless.,) described as an Orthotomus, and previously
in Rev. Zool. 1840, p. 101.
In the class of mammalia, the Gaour, Bos gaurus, v. Bibos cavifrons, Hodgson, is
figured as Bibos frontalis, (Lambert, ) which name, however, refers to the Gayal of the
trans- Brahmapooter territories, B. gaveus of Colebrooke, v. B. sylhetanus, F. Cuv.,
which is a very different animal : and the Wild Dog of the Neilgherries is erroneously
referred to Canis primevus, Hodgson, which latter I shewed to M. Delessert, and he
at once acknowledged their distinctness, as may be likewise seen by comparing M.
Delessert’s figure with that of the Himalayan animal in As. Res. xviii, pt. ii, 236. The
only other Indian quadruped figured is a small Neilgherry squirrel, Sc. Delesseriti,
Gervais, which is nearly allied to Sc. McClellandii common at Darjeeling, and Se,
insignis of Java,—E. B.
1844. ] On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. 937
luted; alars and caudals black, passing marginally and laterally into
yellow ; edge of central alars fiery ; outer web of tertials blue-grey ; chin
orange ; throat barred black from a black moustache, large and irregular
in shape : legs and bill sordid bluish-grey. Sexes alike. Distinguished
by its guasi-Parian bill, its crest, and broad composed caudals [also
conspicuously by its barred throat]. It passes into the next form or
Proparus, yet retains the notch on the bill vaguely.
I, cyanouropterus. [Siva cyanouroptera, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p.
88 ; Letothrix lepida, McClelland and Horsfield, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1839,
p. 162.] Length six inches and a quarter; bill eleven-sixteenths of an
inch ; tail two inches and a half; wing two and seven-sixteenths;
tarse seven-eighths ; central toe and nail ten-sixteenths; hind eight-
tenths of an inch. Lutescent-brown, passing to blue-grey towards the
head; crown and visible part of closed alars and tail cobalt-blue ; ter-
tials and tail tipped white, the outer caudals white internally ; legs
fleshy ; bill dusky yellow; sexes alike. Remarkable for its long,
straight, and Thrush-like bill; no crest; tail like the last. [The un-
der-parts are much lighter-coloured than the back, and have a faint lake
tinge ; rump rufescent; and forehead streaked with black. Inhabits also
the hill ranges of Assam. ]
I. nipalensis. [Siva nipalensis, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 89.]
Length five inches and five-eighths to five and seven-eighths ; bill
five-eighths ; tail two inches and a half; wing two and a quarter ; tarse
fifteen-sixteenths ; central toe and nail five-eighths; hind half an inch.
‘Above olivaceous-brown, below [faintly] lutescent ; head [cap and nape]
slaty, with dull black long superciliary lines:’ legs and bill sordid
fleshy or horn. In form like strigula as to bill and crest, but distin-
guished for its narrow, rounded, and somewhat rigid tail: with it leads
to Proparus. [This species and the next are also remarkable for the
uniform brown colouring of their wings, all the rest having the wings
more or less variegated. It likewise inhabits Arracan.
Siva occipitalis, Blyth. Length about five inches, of wing two and a
half, and tail two inches; bill to gape nine-sixteenths, and tarse seven-
eighths of an inch. Colour-dull brownish olive-green above, the shafts
of the dorsal and scapulary feathers pale ; below much lighter and rufes-
cent, the throat whitish, the feathers of the fore-neck having dark shafts ;
crown, nape, and lower tail-coyerts, ferruginous-brown, which also tinges
%
938 On the Leivtrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. [No. 156.
the flanks : coronal feathers considerably elongated ; and the occiput be-
neath the crest, white ; bill black, and legs yellowish-brown. Inhabits
Darjeeling. ]
Proparus, Mihi. [not Proparus, Hodgson, J. A. S., X. p. 29, which
refers to the next group, or Certhiparus, Hodgson, hodié.] Bill quite
Parian and entire, but the nostrils are implumose and furnished with
an arched scale. Head crested. Wings short, bowed, with four quills
gradated, and the three next longest. Tail narrow and cuneate as in
the last. Tarse elevate and strong. Anteal digits not shortened : hind
lengthened, and with its great nail (which is equal to the digit,) much
exceeding the laterals, and nearing the middle toe and nail: nails large
but moderately curved. [In asecond species referred to this division
by Mr. Hodgson, but received subsequently to the present paper, Pr.
chrysotis, H., the tarse is longer and more slender, and the hind claw
less developed, but greatly exceeding the others. ]
Type Pr. vinipectus, Mihi. [Siva vinipectus, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838,
p- 89.] Length four inches and three-quarters ; bill seven-sixteenths of
an inch; tail under two inches ; wing two inches and one-eighth ; tarse
fifteen-sixteenths ; central toe and nail eleven-sixteenths; hind ten-
sixteenths. Above brown, passing into rusty on the rump and outer
webs of the alars next the body, and of the caudals [towards their
base], both of which are dusky-black externally, and the primaries
have hoary edges. Below albescent, sordid towards the vent; wine-
tinted on the breast; a white and a black line above each eye. Legs
and bill fleshy-brown. Distinguished by its perfectly Parian bill, with-
out trace of notch, and by its longer but less falcate nails.
[Pr. chrysotis, Hodgson. Partakes of the aspect of Orites (Parus, L.,)
caudatus. Upper parts and throat ash-grey, tinged with yellow on the
rump ; ear-coverts silvery, with a faint lutescent cast ; under-parts bright
yellow ; a longitudinal streak of rich orange-yellow on the wing, formed
by the margins of the secondaries ; and the outer and graduated primaries
narrowly edged with yellow ; imner edge of the tertiaries margined with
white, and secondaries having a white spot at tip; bill dusky-plumbe-
ous ; and legs pale. Length about four inches and a half; of wing two
inches ; and the middle tail-feathers the same; tail much graduated :
bill to gape barely half an inch; tarse thirteen-sixteenths ; hind toe
and claw nine-sixteenths].
1844. On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. 939
Certhiparus, Mihi. [Olim Minla, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 42;
changed to Proparus, H., J. A. S., X. 29, which latter name is now
transferred to the preceding group.] Bill somewhat lengthened, slen-
der, and inclining to arch, but the tip of the upper mandible strongly
notched ; base depressed ; rictus moderate and nearly smooth. Nares
large, advanced, tenuirostral; the aperture lunately lineated by a large
and soft incumbent membrane: tongue simple, forked. Wings round,
acuminate ; fifth longest, the first and second much, the third and fourth
less, gradated, Tail medial or short, and round with ovoid tips, the
webs of which are open and harsh. Tarse equal only to mid-toe and
nail : toes medial, compressed, very unequal, and basally much con-
nected ; the hind very large and alone exceeding the outer fore, but not
broad, nor its nail so long as the digit: nails much curved and com-
pressed.
Types zgnitinctus and castaniceps, Mihi.
C. ignitinctus. [Minla ignitincta, Hodgson, Ind. Rev. 1838, p. 32;
Leiothrix ornata, McClelland and Horsfield, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1839, p.
162.] Head and neck black and white in broad alternate masses; the
crown, and a line through the eye from the bill, black; and a broad
superciliary space, with the throat, white: mantle luteous-olive merged
{in the male ?] in vinous across the upper back : body below yellow [or
yellowish ;] alars and caudals black; prime alars and caudals margined
and tipped crimson; the rest white-edged: legs horn-yellow; bill
black above, horn below. Female less in size and duller-hued. Length five
inches and a quarter ; bill ten-sixteenths of an inch; tail two inches and
a quarter ; wing two and five-eighths ; tarse thirteen-sixteenths; central
toe and nail three-fourths of an inch; hind ten-sixteenths. [Occurs
also in Assam. |
C. castaniceps. [Minla castaniceps, Hodgson, Ind. Rev, 1838,p.33.] Above
olive, with a bright chesnut cap streaked with white; below lutescent :
ears and moustache black; centre of alars margined with rusty ; outer
primaries with hoary : legs fleshy ; bill dusky-horn. Length five inches ;
bill nine-sixteenths of an inch; tail an inch and thirteen-sixteenths ;
the wing two anda quarter ; tarse seven-eighths of an inch; central
toe and nail eight-sixteenths, the hind nine-sixteenths of an inch.
Somewhat deviates by its straighter bill and shorter narrower tail with
wedged tips, but has the guasi-Certhian feet with large compressed
940 On the Leiotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. _[No. 156.
thumb exceeding the outer fore, and with its nail nearing the central.
{It is by no means nearly allied to the preceding species. |
The curious will find all these birds carefully described, long ago,
in the ‘India Journal of Science’ ; but the subject is worth recurring to,
and is attempted to be treated now so as to shew more accurately the
curious gradation of form. In this rich accession to the Leiotrichane
of Swainson, we have great means of illustrating that family, which
seems to be a singular combination of Parus with the long-legged
Finches on the one hand, and the Certhians on the other. The
structure and habits, on the whole, are nearer to Parus, into which
genus our vinipectus passes almost absolutely. Others remind us by
their short toes of Zora, Zosterops, and the clinging Brachypodans ; while
the Certhian structure is represented very fully in the bill and feet of
ignitinctus, and less palpably yet distinctly so in its tail; and the tails
of vinipectus aforesaid, as well as of nipalensis, are of the scansorial
model;
Leiothriz as a genus may embrace the whole; but I think the quasi-
Finch—argentauris, the quasi-loran or short-toed, and the quasi-
Certhian,—forms, deserve at least subgeneric separation. Indeed how
could one define them in a single genus? All these birds are foresters,
and more or less gregarious : their food consists almost equally of hard
grass-seeds and small grains (wherein they resemble the Finches), and
of hard and soft, perfect and imperfect, insects (wherein they agree
with Parus ;*) and the character of the stomach and intestines is of a
mixt type, between the typical Finches and the Tits.
They creep and climb among foliage and large flowers, and the Finch-
like ones perch on the standing stalks of large grasses and small grains,
just like the Carduelines. These (Philocalyxz) are the greatest seed-
eaters, and the Certhipari the least so, the latter being admirable
climbers. ‘They make half pensile semi-globular nests, well compacted,
and placed at a moderate height on umbrageous trees or large shrubs
in the forests, and are all confined to the northern and central hilly
regions [of Nepal], being very rare in the southern hilly region, and
wholly unknown to the plains. The thick-billed Finches and Tits have
* The true Pari devour oleaginous seeds with avidity ; piercing a hole, for exam-
ple, in the husk of a hemp-seed, and thus extracting the kernel: and I have remarked
that P, ater and P, palustris of Europe are very partial to sunflower-seeds.—E. 5B,
1844. ] On the Letotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. 941
mostly the same location; but some of both of these are found in the
lower hills and plains, especially of the Finches, as the Toot or Rosy
Finch [Erythrospiza erythrina], which, by the way, seems to me a distinct
type leading from Pyrrhula to Linota.* The Gandums or Buntings
are likewise found in the plains ; though there the European [forms of]
Finches are properly represented by the Weavers, and the Amadines,—the
Bayas [Ploceus,v. Euplectes, Sw.], Lauls (Esti‘elda amandava], Moonias
[Amadina, v. Lonchura, Sykes, v. Munia, Hodgson], &c. of Indian
speech.
Emberizé are commonly hill birds, and Pari almost, or quite, exclu-
sively so. I have four species of the former and twelve of the latter
genus !
May, 1848.
P. §.—Adopting Swainson’s views, one might justify the above divi-
sion of our Leiotrichane birds by shewing that they form a circle analo-
gous to the various tribes of the Insessores, thus :—
Genera and subg. of Leio-
Tribes of Insess, Analogical characters. reieHaiie:
Wings and feet perfect.
Conirostres. Pacdvdtione: Fringilliparus. [Mesia.]
Dentirost Wings rounded. Insects | Leiothriz. [olim Bahila,
entirostres. chiefly. H.]
Fissirostres. Feet imperfect. Hemiparus. [Siva.}
; Bill slender, curved, large : F
Tenuirostres. UA Spatial 5 \ Certhiparus, [Minla.]
Rasores, or Scan- § Bill entire, short; tail ri-
sores. gid; hallux enlarged. \ ata
At least it will be allowed to be pretty evident that Certhiparus is
the analogue of Mniotilta, and Hemiparus of Zosterops ; but as Swainson
has made these respectively the scansorial and suctorial types, the above
distribution is probably in fault, and in fact is but a hasty glance of the
subject in ¢his view, which is purely theoretical and perhaps unsound.
[The decidedly Leiotrichane genus Péeruthius is here omitted altogether,
though composed of two Himalayan and Nepalese species, viz. Pt.
rufiventer, nobis, J. A. S. XI, 183, and XII, 854, and Pt. erythropterus,
v. Lanius erythropterus, Vigors, and of Gould’s ‘Century,’ noticed also
in XI, 183.]
* This bird is perfectly true to the form of the American Purple Finch of Wilson,
which is the type of Erythrospiza, Bonap.: the group consisting of Linnets with tumid
bills, in which respect alone they appear to me to approximate to the Bullfinches,—
E. B.
6k
942 On the Letotrichane Birds of the Subhemalayas. _[LNo. 156.
The Leiothriz signata, McClelland and Horsfield, Proc. Zool. Soc.
1839, p. 162, is identical with Siphya auricularis, (Hodg.) Blyth, J. A.
S. XII, 940, and must accordingly now range as S. signata.
Another Himalayan bird referred to the Leiotrichane by Mr. G. R.
Gray, in the 2d edition of his ‘ List of the genera of Birds’ (p. 45), is
Sylviparus modestus, Burton, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1835, p. 154;* but I
suspect the identity of this with a species sent as a Parus by Mr.
Hodgson, and which does not appear to me to differ in any marked
degree from Parus, further than in its style of colouring, and in having
a shorter tail, The generic diagnosis supplied by Mr. Burton accords
with the species in question, except that the expression “‘ rostrum bre-
vissimum” conveys the idea of a still shorter bill than occurs in the
bird before me, of which I draw up the following description :—
Sylviparus modestus (?), Burton, loc. cit. ; Parus seriophrys, Hodgson,
MS. Length about three inches and five-eighths, of which the tail mea-
sures an inch and three-eighths; wing two inches and one-eighth ;
bill to gape three-eighths ; tarse nine-sixteenths of an inch. (S. mo-
destus is stated to measure four inches, of which the tail occupies an
inch and a quarter; and tarse half an inch.) Colour that of the
Phylloscopus group, or olive-green above, paler and dingy below; the
base of the primaries externally edged with yellowish-white: head dis-
tinctly crested. Nepal.
Of the remaining eleven species of Parus alluded to by Mr. Hodgson,
four are figured in Gould’s ‘ Century of Himalayan Birds,’ viz.
P. monticolus, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 22.
2 wanthogenys, Ibid, p. 28.
,, melanolophus, Ibid.
» erythrocephalus, Ibid,
* Other species described at the same time were Athene (v. Noctua) Brodiei = Ath.
tubiger, (Hodgson,) As. Res. XIX, 175, and J. A. 8. XI, 163; Phenicura McGregorii=
Niltava fuligiventer, H., Ind. Rev. 1837, p- 650 ; Sylvia? castuneo-coronata = Tesia
flaviventer, H., J. A. S. 1837, p. 101 ; Sylvia Burkii = Culicipeta Burkii, Nobis, J. A.
S. xii, 968, v. Muscicapa bilineata, Lesson, v. Cryptolopha auricapilla, Sw. ( Menag.) ;
fEgitalus flammiceps, probably a Stachyris, J, A. S. XIII, 379; and Picumnus innomina-
tus =Vivia nipalensis, H., J. A. S, V1,107,and XII, 1005. To Tesia cyaniventer, H.,
must be referred Suzicola? olivea, McClelland and Horsfield, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1839,
p- 161 ; and there is an Abyssinian species of this group figured as Troglodytes micru-
rus, by Ruppell.
1844.] On the Letotrichane Birds of the Subhemaiayas. 948
Others are described by Mr. Hodgson in the ‘ India Review’ for
1838, p. 37: viz.
P. atriceps, Horsfield, v. P. nipalensis, H., which, with P. vantho-
genys and P. melanolophus, extends into the hill regions of Southern
India, the present species likewise occurring in the Malay countries.
P., sultaneus, Hodgson, v. Melanochlora flavocristata and M. su-
matrana, Lesson and La Fresnaye, vide J. A. S. XII. 955: a remarkable
species which also extends into the Malay countries.
And the following may now be added :—
P. dichrous, Hodgson. Length about five inches; of wing two and a
quarter, and tail an inch and seven-eighths; bill to forehead under
three-eighths of an inch; tarse three-quarters of an inch. Upper-parts
uniform brownish-grey, the occiput adorned with a slightly recurved
crest of unpointed feathers, nearly an inch long; entire under-parts
dull rufescent-brown, the forehead and cheeks tinged with the same:
bill dusky ; and feet lead-coloured. Nepal.
P. emodius, Hodgson. Very closely allied to P. ater, but the bill
decidedly more slender and compressed ; the black also descends more
upon the breast, and spreads laterally, circumscribing the sides of the
neck ; and the back is less tinged with olivaceous, while the belly would
appear to be more rufescent, than in its European representative. Nepal.
P. iouschistos, Hodgson. Length about four inches and a quarter, of
which the tail measures two inches, and has its outer three feathers gra-
duated, and the middle pair a quarter of an inch shorter than the next ;
wing two inches and one-eighth ; bill to forehead, through the feathers,
three-eighths of an inch; tarse five-eighths. Colour ashy above, tinged
with olive, the winglet and coverts of the primaries black ; a very broad
black streak over each eye (as in Orites caudatus), and the central line of
the head, with the sides of the head and entire under-parts, clear red-
dish-isabelline; graduated outer tail-feathers more or less tipped and edged
externally with whitish ;: bill black ; and feet pale brown. Nepal.
The last species, with P. erythrocephalus, should perhaps be rather
arranged in Orites vel Mecistura, but P. iouschistos has a longer and
more Parus-like bill, and both serve to ‘connect Orites with Parus by
an easy gradation. ‘The European Orites caudatus differs much in habit
from the true Pari, being exclusively insectivorous, and also never plac-
ing its foot upon its food while picking it to pieces with the bill in the
944 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. [No. 156.
Jay-like or Crow-like manner continually resorted to by the true Pari ;
and it is likewise celebrated for its beautifully constructed large domed
nest, which is placed in a forked branch, whereas the Pari nidificate in
holes and cavities: but I remember M. Audubon telling me, that he had
discovered some cases of intermediate habit even in this particular, one or
two North American species constructing a regular domed nest with
inside a suitable cavity in a tree; and the same is not unlikely to be the
case with these two Himalayan species.
The above ten species of Himalayan Pari (apud Hodgson,) are all
which I am acquainted with at present; but there is a ‘“‘ P. (?) minu-
tus,’ Jerdon, of Southern India, described by the latter naturalist,
which appears to have the plumage of Sylviparus, but of which ‘“ the
bill is larger, and less robust, than in the Tits, in general approaching
that of Agithalus.” Madras Journal, XI, 8. (Non vidi.)
I was next about to endeavour to indicate Mr. Hodgson’s four Em-
berize; but as I dislike giving isolated notices, I will venture to offer
a general
Synopsis oF INDIAN FRINGILLIDZ,—
Which will afford the opportunity of making known several new
species discovered by Mr. Hodgson, and be far more acceptable to the
Ornithologist than an indiscriminate medley of previously undescribed
species.
To begin with the genus Ploceus (v. Euplectes, Sw.), three species of
which are common in Bengal and respectively more or less so in other
parts of India.
1. Pl. philippinus (?); thus marked with doubt because there is
reason to suspect its distinctness from its representative in the Philip-
pine Islands, or Lowxia philippina, Lin., founded on the Grosbec des
Philippines of Brisson, or Toucnam-courvi of Buffon (Ors. III, 462):
the latter author refers to Brisson for a description of the male; but
in his notice of the Baglafecht of Abyssinia (Pl. baglafecht, Vieillot,
Lowia phillippina, var, Lath.), he alludes to a black spot on each side of
the head of the Philippine species, which certainly does not apply to the
1844.] Synopsis of Indian Fringillidee. 945
Indian bird under consideration (some notice of which occurs in J. 4. S.
XI, 872). Pl. philippinus is included among the birds of Sumatra by
Sir S. Raffles, and among those of Java by Dr. Horsfield; but in a
recent communication Mr. H. E. Strickland informs me, that ‘the
Fringilla philippina of Dr. Horsfield’s catalogue is not the true philip-
pina, but I have not yet decided,” he adds, ‘“‘ what it.is.” Hence I
suspect that the Javanese bird will prove to be the original philippina,
rather than the allied Indian species, which latter has always been so
designated, and is probably thus alluded to by Mr. Strickland as the
‘true philippina.” Should it require a name, it might be termed Pl.
baya. It extends its range throughout India, and is the only species
of the genus which Mr, Hodgson has forwarded from Nepal.*
2. Pl. manyar ; Fringilla manyar, Horsf., Lin. Tr. XIII, 160, apud
Strickland in epistold: Huplectes flaviceps, Swainson, Menag., and pro-
bably Ploceus flaviceps, Cuv., Par. Mus.,as mentioned in Lesson’s Traiéé ;
(nec Pl. flaviceps, Sw., which now ranks as Hyphantiornis stictonotus,
(A. Smith) G. R. Gray;) Huplectes striatus, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 878,
and XII, 181 (dis); and probably Coccothraustes chrysocephala,
Vieillot, which is referred to the next species in the Dict. Class. W.
India, Bengal, Assam and Malay countries. Constructs a non-pensile
nest among reeds, with an incipient tubular entrance; as I am
informed is also very commonly the case with the preceding species,
when resorting to similar localities.
3. Pl. bengalensis; Loxia bengalensis, Lin. (founded on the Yellow-
headed Indian Sparrow of Edwards): L. regina, Bodd.; Euplectes
albirostris, Sw. Menang.—Bengal ; less common in S. India.
Next to the Baya or Weaver group (so largely developed in Africa)
may be arranged the Sparrows :—
* A letter just received from Mr, Strickland informs me, that— ‘‘ Horsfield’s so
called Pl. philippinus from Java, is bright yellowish above, back striped with dusky ;
wings dusky, each feather margined whitish ; tail dusky, narrowly tipped with whitish.
Beak shorter than in bengalensis, the cheeks and throat blackish with a yellow
streak dividing that on the lower jaw. Lower parts deep yellow. No doubt a well
known species, though I cannot at the moment give the right name.”’
946 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. [No. 156.
1. Passer domesticus (?), Lin. ; P. indicus, Jardine and Selby, J7/. Ora.,
Ist. series, pl. CXVIII. I have had no opportunity of comparing Euro-
pean and Indian specimens of the common Sparrow of the respective
regions; but it has always seemed to me, judging from recollection,
that the upper parts of the male are somewhat redder, the under parts
whiter, and that the females are decidedly paler altogether, in the Indian
than in the British Sparrow: but the Indian bird certainly is no
‘‘ smaller in all its proportions,” as stated by Messrs. Jardine and Selby ;
nor are the upper parts of the male nearly so red as represented in their
plate. The common Sparrow of India is generally distributed over
the country, even in the hottest districts ; and Mr. Crawfurd notices
its abundance in the capital of Siam; with “more than its European
familiarity. 1n proceeding towards the equator,” he adds, ‘it appears here
for the last time, not to my knowledge being found in any Asiatic country
to the south of Siam, except in a few spots where it has been introduced
by Europeans.” (‘Embassy to Siam and Cochin China,’ p. 452.)
2. P. pyrrhonotus, Nobis, 2. s. Closely resembles the last in plu-
mage, but is readily distinguished by its inferior size, its conspicuously
smaller bill and feet, and by having the rump feathers dull maronne,
instead of greyish-olive. Length about four inches and three-quarters,
of wing two and five-eighths, and tail two and one-eighth ; bill to forehead
five-sixteenths, and to gape seven-sixteenths of an inch; tarse barely
five-eighths, middle toe and claw five-eighths. Obtained, together with
the preceding, at Buhawalpore, in Scinde, by the late Sir Alexander
Burnes. The female I have not seen.
3. P. flaveolus, Nobis, n. s. Witha close resemblance in its markings
to the common Sparrow, except that the back is not streaked, this
pretty species is distinguished by its smaller size and predominating
yellowish plumage. The bill somewhat inclines to be slender, and in
this respect, as well as in the absence of all streakiness above, some
approach is shewn to Gymnoris flavicollis. In the male, the top of the
head, nape, and rump, are of a dull light green, inclining to yellowish
on the forehead; the cheeks and sides of the forehead are tolerably
bright yellow, and the rest of the under parts are sullied yellow : streak
from eye to mouth, and the usual patch on the throat and fore-neck,
1844. ] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 947
deep black: sinciput, mantle, and anterior third of wing, chesnut-bay,
passing to maronne at the bend of the wing : there is a whitish bar on the
wing, formed by the tips of the smaller range of coverts ; and the rest
of the wing, with the tail, is dusky, the feathers margined with yellowish-
brown. Bill black (in the breeding season); and legs brown. The female
is nearly uniform pale brown above, darker on the mantle, and hav-
ing the whitish bar on the wing somewhat narrower; supercilium,
cheeks, and under parts, dull yellowish; and bill light brown. Length
five inches, or nearly so; of wing two and three-quarters, and tail two
inches: bill to forehead seven-sixteenths, and tarse five-eighths. From
Arracan, where procured by Capt. Phayre.
4. P. pyrrhopterus ; Fringilla pyrrhoptera, Lesson, Zoologie du Voy.
de M. Belanger, p. 271. (Non vidi.) ‘‘ Size of the common Sparrow. Head
and neck spotless rufous-brown; the mantle bright rufous, with black
central streaks to the feathers; shoulder deep maronne, bordered by a
small oblique white line; the middle wing-coverts black, edged with
rufous and maronne, and the rest of the wing pale ashy externally,
and brownish on the inner barbs of the feathers: under parts ru-
fous-grey, the throat reddish-grey, with a black patch commencing
on the lower part of the neck: bill and tarse yellowish [but the former
doubtless black during the breeding season as in the other species].
Female grey-brown, above silky, with brown central streaks to the fea-
thers of the mantle ; below of a blonde-grey throughout : wings ash-grey
with a white ray on the shoulder, but no maronne.” Described to inha-
bit the Coromandel coast, and especially the neighbourhood of Pondi-
cherry ; but the species has not been obtained by Mr. Jerdon.
5. P. cinnamomeus ; Pyrgita cinnamomea, Gould, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1835,
p. 85, and noticed in J. A. S. XI, 108. Inhabits the Upper Provinces of
Hindoostan. 7
6. P. montanus ; Fringilla montana, Lin. This British species is com-
mon in the Himalaya, and extends eastward to China and Japan: it takes
the place of the common Sparrow in Chusan. But amore unexpected
locality for this bird to inhabit, is the island of Ramree, Arracan, whence
fine specimens have been forwarded to the Society by Capt. Abbott.
This Sparrow is remarkable for the female and young resembling the
adult male in plumage, all being clad in a dress analogous in colouring
to that of the adult males only, of the other species.
948 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. [No. 156.
7. P. (2) concolor, Jerdon, Madr. Journ. XI, 28: perhaps Emberiza
olivacea, Tickell, J, A. S§. II. 578, which specific name would have the
priority. (Non vidi.) According to Mr. Jerdon, this bird ‘‘ does not ex-
actly agree with the characters of Pyrgita (7. e. Passer], having the bill
more turgid, and with the commissure slightly sinuated. The third
quill is shorter than the two first, and the inner toe is shorter than the
outer one ; its claws moreover are less curved. Colour uniform light
ash-brown above, still paler below (indeed almost white at chin and
vent), and darkish on the quills and tail, Length six inches; wing three
inches and three-eighths ; tail two and a quarter : tarse rather more than
seven-tenths ; bill at front four-tenths. Irides brown: bill brown above,
yellowish below ; legs flesh-coloured yellow.” The only specimen obtained
by Mr. Jerdon was shot on the ground in an open plain, along with a
lot of the Coryphidea baghaira, p. 961 Hab. 8. India.
Gymnoris, Hodgson, n. g. Differs from Passer in having the beak
more elongated, slender, and Carduelis-like; it being more slender than
in restricted Fringilla.
G. flavicollis ; Fringilla flavicollis, Franklin, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 120;
referred to Ploceus by Col. Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 94, and with more
propriety to Pyrgita vel Passer by Mr. Jerdon.* India generally, though
* Mr. Strickland remarks, in his recent letter to me, ‘‘ I consider Fringilla flavicollis
to be a true Passer. It is one of the many instances, among the Fringillide, of the va-
riable amount of development of the beak in the same genus. Its style of plumage
is completely that of Passer, and the yellow spot on the throat resembles that of
Fringilla petronia which I also consider a Passer. Fringilla flavicollis is certainly
not a Plocepasser, wanting the spurious quill found in all the Ploceine ; still less is it
a Ploceus.’’ To this may be added that its nest and eggs, as described in Mr. Jer-
don’s catalogue, are quite those of Passer, the former being widely different from
that of Plocepasser. Mr. G. R. Gray, however, in his illustrated work on the genera
of birds, now in course of publication, includes this bird among the species of Plo-
ceus, following Col. Sykes, and he also refers to Ploceus the Fringilla erythrocephalus,
Gm., which is decidedly a Hyphantornis, G. R. Gray (v. Ploceus apud Swainson) ;
there is some considerable difference between the beaks of either of these species
and that of Pl. capensis, which deviates in the opposite manner from the type of
Ploceus: still I agree with Mr. Strickland in his appreciation of the systematic
value of various strongly marked modifications of the beak, observable in several
natural divisions among the Fringillide, and indeed have expressed my opinion on
the subject in the course of the present paper. Had Mr. Hodgson not separated
Gymnoris from Passer as above, I should scarcely have myself ventured upon do-
ing so.
1844. ] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 949
I have not hitherto met with it in Lower Bengal. Mr, Hodgson ob-
tained it in Nepal, and Sir A. Burnes in Scinde. f
I next pass to the Mooniahs,—Amadina, Swainson, y. Lonchura,
Sykes, v. Lowigilla (in part), Lesson, v. Munia, Hodgson ; Spermestes,
Swainson, apud Jerdon.
1. A. malacca; Lozxia malacca, Lin.: Munia rubronigra, Hodgson, As.
Res. XIX, 153; Lonchura melanocephala, Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p.
163. Common throughout the country.
2. A. maja; Loxia maja, (nec Fringilla maja,) Lin.; Malacca Gros-
beak, Edwards. I include this species on the authority of Mr. Frith,
who assures me that he has now and then observed it in different parts
of Bengal, but not commonly, nor in large flocks like the others, two or
three only having been seen by him together. It is common in the
Malay countries.
3. A. pectoralis, Jerdon, MS.; Spermestes, No. 103 (bis), Madr.
Journ. No. XXX, p. 171. South of India.
4. A. acuticauda; Munia acuticauda, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 153.
Nepal,
5. A. striata; Lowia striata, Latham: Fringilla leuconota, Tem.
Indian peninsula; Arracan.
6. A. punctularia; Loxia punctularia, Lin.: Fringilla nisoria, Tem. ;
Mumia lineoventer, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 154. Common throughout
the country.
4. A, malabarica; Loxia malabarica, Lin.: Lonchura cheet, Sykes,
P. Z. 8. 1832, p. 95; Lowxia bicolor, Tickell, J. 4. §. Il, 578. Also
generally diffused.
Eistrelda, Swainson; Lozigilla (in part), Lesson. The Waxbills.
Of this extensive genus, I know only of two Indian species, which are
by no means closely allied.
1. E£. amandava; Fringilla amandava, Lin.: F. punicea, Horsf., Lin.
Trans. XIII, 160. Occurs in enormous flocks in many parts of the
country.
2. E. formosa ; Fringilla formosa, Lath. Central India.
The foregoing three groups, — of Weaver-finches, — of Sparrows,
— and of Mooniahs, Amaduvats and Waxbills, — are very distinct from
any of the following genera, and appear to me to range most naturally
61
*~
950 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. LNo. 156.
in the order in which I have placed them.* We now come to the more
typical Finches, which have endless mutual affinities, and are most
difficult to arrange in anything like a satisfactory series.
Coccothraustes, Brisson. Grosbeaks. The three Himalayan species are
remarkable for their black and yellow plumage, in which respect, and
perhaps others, they approximate the C. vespertinus of North America.
Each of them, however, presents peculiarities in the modification of the
beak, and each likewise differs in the character of plumage proper to
the female sex.
1. C. melanozanthus, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 150: male figured in
Mr. G. R. Gray’s illustrated work on the genera of birds, but the beak
made to appear too much elongated, the colour of the upper parts too
black, and the tail too much truncated. As compared with the Eu-
ropean C. vulgaris, the beak is not longer, but is much broader, and
more bulged (or Pyrrhuline), and the basal denticulation of the upper
mandible is strongly developed. It is probably the largest Finch in
existence.
2. C. carnipes, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX. 151. The beak of this fine
species approaches to the Pyrenestes form, being much less bulged
than in the preceding, and a good deal compressed towards the ie the
basal denticulation very decided.
3. C. icterioides, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 8; Gould’s ‘ coun: pl.
XLV. Beak more elongated than in the others, or rather more drawn
out towards the tip; and approaching most nearly in form to that of
C. vulgaris. This species would seem to be allied to the Chinese
C. melanura.
Hematospiza, Nobis, n.g. Bill nearly as in Guiraca, Sw., or Pyr-
* Mr. Strickland remarks, in epistold,—‘* An excellent distinction between the
Ploceiné and Fringilline was pointed out by Swainson, viz. the spurious quill in the
former, wanting in the latter. On this ground I refer all the Amadina tribe (which
possess this quill) to the Ploceine.’? The character here mentioned would re-
tain the Sparrows with the Fringilling, and it seems to hold good throughout
the two groups : but the Alaudine vary in this respect, as the spurious quill occurs
in Mirafra, in Pyrrhulauda, and also in Cethilanda, while it is absent in all or most of
the rest. I cannot, however, quite agree with Mr. Strickland in referring the Amadina
series to the Ploceing as a major division, but would retain it as a distinct and cor-
responding supergeneric group ; and I much incline to the same opinion, as regards
the separation of both the Sparrows and the Buntings from the Fringilling.
V9 sap ns
a oe ee Oe
1844.] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 951
rhuline in form, but more elongated, the tip of the upper mandible
curving distinctly downward over the lower, with a minute but distinct
notch at the bend: wings as in Corythus, reaching to the middle of the
rather short tail : feet adapted for arboreal habits.
H. boetonensis ; Loxia boetonensis, Lath. :* L. indica, Gm., nec Lath. :
Corythus sepahi, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 151. Himalaya, Examples
of this brilliant species are now and then brought for sale to Calcutta.
I suspect that it is allied in form to Guiraca ludoviciana.
Pyrrhula, (Antiq.) Mehring. The Bullfinches.
1. P. nipalensis, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 155. Himalaya.
2. P. erythrocephalus, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, 174 ; Gould’s ‘ Century,’
pl. XXXII. Himalaya.
Pyrrhuloides, Nobis, n. g. This curious form connects the Pyrrhu-
line with the Bunting form of bill, and presents some appearance of an
affinity with the Ploceus group. As viewed from above, the beak is
bulged as in Pyrrhula, but not quite so short and broad; and the
lateral aspect is that of a stout Hmberiza bill, having the tomiz of the
mandibles much inflected, and the upper one similarly scooped, while
the lower is proportionably thickened: the tip of the upper a little
overhangs that of the lower mandible: nostrils basal, and concealed by
short reflected plumes. Wings of mean length, having the second,
third, and fourth primaries subequal and longest. Tarse as long as
the middle toe, the feet formed for perching, the two lateral toes nearly -
equal, and the claws moderate, the anterior somewhat straight.
P. epauletia; Pyrrhula epauletta, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 156.
Of this species I took the following description from specimens taken to
England by Mr. Hodgson. Male wholly brownish-black, excepting an
orange or golden-saffron patch occupying the posterior half of the
crown with the occiput, and the axillary plumes under the wing which
are similarly coloured. Female spotless reddish-brown, brightest on
the belly and flanks, greater wing-coverts, and tertiaries; the forehead
and neck grey; coronal patch, with the ear-coverts, dull greenish-
saffron; axillaries as in the male; primaries and tail dusky; and the
inner webs of the uppermost tertiaries are more or less white, a trace of
which also occurs in the male. Bill of both dusky-horny, and feet
* Probably meant for bovtanensis, or bott mensis as more elegantly rendered.
952 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. LNo. 156.
brown. Length about five inches and three-quarters, of wing three
inches, and tail two anda quarter; bill to forehead seven-sixteenths
of an inch, and tarse eleven-sixteenths. Himalaya, and I believe rather
uncommon.
Propyrrhula, Hodgson, MS. This connecting form has the beak of
a true Pyrrhula, though not quite so short as in P. vulgaris and P. ery-
throcephalus ; while the plumage and colouring ally it to Corythus and
Erythrospiza, the former being, however, a degree less firm, wherein it
approximates the true Pyrrhula, It can only be arranged satisfactorily
as a separate division.
P. subhemachalana ; Corythus subhemachalus, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX,
152. Himalaya.
From Propyrrhula the genus Erythrospiza would conduct us by an
easy gradation to the Linnets and allied forms; but the remarkable
genus Corythus branches off from the present group, and leads us
direct to the very curious group of Crossbills, Loa#ia, of which L. cur-
virostra occurs in Afghanistan, and the following new species in Ne-
pal :—
L. himalayensis, Hodgson, MS. Distinguished from L. curvirostra by
its very inferior size, being smaller than L. leucoptera; the bill also is as
slender as in Carduelis, but deeper in conformity with the generic
characters of the Crossbills. Length about five inches and a half, of
wing three to three and a quarter, and tail two inches; bill (in a
straight line) half an inch, Plumage as in ZL. curvirostra and L. pytio-
psittacus.
Erythrospiza, Bonap.; Heemorrhous, Swainson. The birds of this
division are essentially Linnets with more or less tumid bills.
1. E. erythrina, (Pallas): Coccothraustes rosea, apud Vieillot; des-
cribed as “ &. rosea?” in J. A. S. XI, 461. India generally, being
the only representative of the present great series of northern Finches
upon the plains of India.
2. H. rodopepla; Fringilla rodopepla, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 23;
male figured in Gould’s ‘Century,’ pl, XXXI, fig. 1 (the lower figure
in the plate). Billless Pyrrhuline than in the preceding species, more
so than in the next, Length about six inches and three-quarters,
of wing three and one-eighth, and tail two and _ three-quarters.
Female rather less; her colour deep brown above, with paler lateral
_—
~~ ee
1844.] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 953
margins to the feathers; below light yellowish-brown, each feather
with a dark central line; a broad pale supercilium reaching to the
occiput, and another pale line from the base of the upper mandible.
Himalaya.
8. FH. rodochroa; Fringilla rodochroa, Vigors, P. Z. 8S. 1831, p. 23;
male figured in Gould’s ‘ Century,’ pl. XXXI, fig. 2, but the middle of the
crown erroneously represented as of the same pale rosy colour as the
eye-streak and a slight frontal band. Beak scarcely more bulged than
in Linota cannabina, and chiefly so as viewed from above. Length about
five inches and three-quarters, of wing two and three-quarters, and
tail two and three-eighths. Female paler and more decidedly streaky
than that of the last species, especially paler upon the rump ana upper
tail-coverts, and with the light supercilium much less distinct and
contrasting with the feathers above and below it: in the female of
E.. rodopepla, these last are dark and contrast strongly with the broad
pale supercilium. Himalaya.
We might next pass to the Linnets ; but there is a long-winged and
more terrene form, with narrower and more elongated beak than in the
last, which cannot be introduced better than in this place, and which
constitutes the division.
Pyrrhospiza, Hodgson, MS. Bill conical; elongate, with a slightly cur-
ved outline above and below, somewhat compressed, and tapering evenly
to the tip as viewed from above; the gonys arched: wings long, reach-
ing to more than half the length of the tail, which is also moderately
long ; the first four primaries subequal, the second and third being rather
the longest. Feet adapted for ground habits, the toes rather long,
with large and arched claws, especially that on the hind-toe.
P. punicea, Hodgson, MS. Length about seven inches and a half,
of wing four and a half, and tail three and one-eighth ; bill to fore-
head five-eighths of an inch, tarse seven-eighths, middle toe and claw
an inch, hind toe three-quarters of an inch: upper-parts nearly uni-
form dusky-brown, the feathers margined paler; forehead and rump,
with the cheeks, ear-coverts, and the under-parts excepting the abdominal
region, roseate in winter, brightening to rich crimson in the breeding
season, and varying to orange-saffron*; flanks and abdomen coloured
* A variation more or less frequent in the species of Lovia, Corythus, Propyrrhula,
Erythrospiza, Linota, &c.
954 Synopsis of Indian Fringiltide. [No. 156.
like the back; bill dark horny, and feet dusky-black. Female devoid
of the red, having the forehead, cheeks, fore-neck, and breast, more or
less fulvescent, each feather marked with a blackish mesial streak,
widening at the tip ; belly and lower tail-coverts dingy. Himalaya.
A second species of this division not improbably exists in the Fringzlla
sanguinea of Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 127, received from Erzeroum.
The form would seem allied to Montifringilla of Brehm, and holds the
same relationship to the Hrythrospiza group, which Montifringilla does
to the restricted #ringille, as exemplified by the British Chaffinch and
Bramble-finch. ‘The next is an analogous long-winged modification of
the true Linnets.
Fringillauda,* Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 158. This may be described
as a Linnet with very long wings and tail, and somewhat elongated beak.
The plumage is remarkable for the absence of any rosy colouring.
Fr. (v. Montifringilla ?) nemoricola, Hodgson, Joc. cit, Himalaya.
Procarduelis, Hodgson, MS. If the Hrythrospiza rodochroa ap-
proaches so closely to the true Linnets that it might even be classed
with them, did not the division Erythrospiza exist to claim it as an
aberrant member, so the present form might include the sub-division of
Redpole Linnets (Rubricapilla of Brehm,) were it not that this falls
better under true Linota, as exemplified by L. cannabina, which again
is directly connected with the Redpoles by the intervention of L. mon-
tium. The present form is indeed an Hrythrospiza with a slender
Carduelis bill, and exhibiting a marked affinity for the Redpole Linnets ;
but it will not bear to be admitted into either of the established sub-
divisions.
Pr. nipalensis ; Carduelis nipalensis, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 157:
Linota saturata, Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 192. The Linota fusca, Nobis,
ibid. p. 198, so nearly approximates to the female of the present spe-
cies, to judge from my description of it, that I shall here provisionally
refer it to Pr. nipalensis, although my impression (from recollection) still
is that it constitutes a distinct species, referable to true Linota: this
question must remain in abeyance until the L. fusca can be verified
on additional specimens.
Carduelis, Stephens. The Goldfinches. I have been assured that
* Spelt Fringalanda in the original, evidently a mistake.
1844.) Synopsis of Indian Fringilliide. 955
as many as three species of true Goldfinches, allied to the European
species, and similarly adorned with crimson around the base of the
beak, inhabit Chinese Tartary, and at least one I believe occurs at
Darjeeling ; but I have never chanced to see either species in any col-
lection from the Himalaya, though the two following are described to
inhabit the range.
1. C. caniceps, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 238; Gould’s ‘ Century,’
pl. XXXIII, fig. 1, and more correctly represented in Royle’s ‘ Illustra-
tions of the Botany &c. of the Himalaya mountains,’ pl. VIII; Gould’s
figure being much too dark, and, together with that of Royle, having
the wings too short, and the fore-neck and breast too uniformly em-
browned, at least than in an Afghan specimen from which I took
the following description.—‘‘ Differs most obviously from C. commu-
nis in the absence of any black upon the head, excepting between
the bill and eye. Length about four inches and three-quarters, of
wing three and a quarter, and tail two and one-eighth; bill to fore-
head five-eighths, and tarse half an inch. Upper-parts light greyish-
brown, greyer on the head and neck; band crossing the front of the
neck, with the sides of the breast, the same: forehead and around the
bill crimson; and wing black, marked with bright yellow, and with white
on the extremity of the outer edge of the tertiaries, as in the European
species; tail likewise similar to that of C. communis: the rump,
upper and lower tail-coverts, belly, middle of breast, and around the
crimson of the throat and sides of the head, are white : beak pale carneous
with a black tip; and legs pale.”
2. C. Burtoni, Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 90. “ C. fronte et regione
circum-oculari pulchré roseis ; vertice genisque nigris ; corpore obscuré
fuscescenti-roseo, alis externé nigris, singulis plumis plis minus’ve
albo ad apicem notatis; ala spurid alba; rectricibus caude nigris,
duabus intermediis ad apicem albis, duabus proximis longius ad apicem
albis, reliquis alba nota interné ad basin excurrente, ornatis ; rostro,
pedibusque pallidé fuscis. Long. tot. 64 unc.; rostri3; ale 32; cau-
dz 24; tarsi #» Himalaya. This species departs in some respects from
the other members of the genus, particularly in the robust form of the
beak, which is slightly angulated at the base: the form of its wings
and tail, together with their peculiar markings, however, clearly points
out that it is only an aberrant species of that group.”
956 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. CNo. 156.
Chrysomitris, Boie. The Siskins. The only Himalayan Siskin I
know, like the Goldfinch last described, is remarkable for its thickened
beak, approximating it to Ligurinus, Brisson, or the Greenfinches ; one
species of which, inhabiting the western coast of S. America, the L.
zanthogrammica, G. R. Gray, presents a close approach on the part of
the Greenfinches to the Goldfinches, the Siskins, and also to the Lin-
nets, the form of its beak scarcely differing from that of the Himalayan
Siskin, or
Chr. spinoides; Carduelis spinoides, Vigors, P. Z. S, 1831, p. 44;
Gould’s ‘ Century,’ pl. XXXIII, fig. 2.
With the Siskins I terminate the series of Indian true Finches; and
next in succession would come the Greenfinches, which would bring
us back to the Grosbeaks with which we commenced; but this circle
might be formed quite as_ satisfactorily in various other ways, the
transitional forms of the present series being so numerous and com-
pletely intermediate, that all minute classification of them must be, in
various instances, more or less arbitrary. By way of assistance to the
student, I annex a plate with representations of the beaks of most of
the species here comprised: but it must be remembered that it is not
the beak alone, but the ensemble, which is our guide in the systematic
arrangement of the Fringiliide, In various most natural minor groups
of this family, the same variety of modifications of the bill present
themselves again and again, even to the Bullfinch, Grosbeak, and Gold-
finch, extremes of form; as is especially well exemplified by the very
peculiar group of short-tailed Finches so extensively developed in the
Gallapagos islands ; and in the instance of the common northern Snow-
fleck (Plectrophanes nivalis) and the Alpine Snowfinch (Montifringilla
nivalis), we find the closest approximation in general characters com-
bined with a very striking diversity in the conformation of the beak,
which in the one case is that of a Bunting, and in the other that of a
restricted Fringilla; the affinity of the birds themselves being further
manifested even by the seasonal changes of colour which take place in
the beak, however dissimilar its form, for in both of these birds it turns
quite black at the breeding season.* Were we to follow the indications
* Mr. Strickland, in his recent letter to me before referred to, alludes to ‘‘the
many cases among the Fringillida, in which the form of beak must give way to the
preponderance of other characters, and especially to the style of colours in the plu-
| .chalerta. | p
4 Preprrrhula bie ivnses| Mh [Pre hadpetr a
A Sa4frer Jrrricwtis .
2. GIRO ES SLA vied ts.
OG. Mer7ea Casjet ra Go kijecare2 | Py Freer, ellatwa
1844.] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 957
furnished by the beak alone, we should have to arrange various most in-
congruous species together, which in their affinities are much further re-
moved apart than are the Snowfleck and Alpine Snowfinch, with dissi-
milar beaks ; but it will not do, on the other hand, to disregard important
distinctions in the form of this part, even when the rest of the struc-
ture is in accordance, and hence it appears impossible to arrange into
intelligible minor groups the enormous series of the Lozie and Fringille
of the old systematists, without recognising as many and as minute divi-
‘sions as have been adopted in this synopsis. I now pass to the genus.
Emberiza. The Buntings: of which the Indian species are referred
toa group, Huspiza, by Mr. G. R. Gray, consisting of the more slender-
billed species generally; but the limits of which, apart from restricted
Emberiza, 1 cannot at all recognise, and shall therefore retain them
under the latter title.
> 1. #.Lathami, Gray, Zool, Misc., 1, p.2; H. cristata, Vigors, P. Z. S.
1831, p. 35; EH. subcristata, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 93, (the female) ;
E. erythroptera, Jardine and Selby, fll. Orn., 1st series, pl. CAXXII ;
i. nipalensis, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 157: type of Melophus, Swain-
son. More elevated parts of India generally, but chiefly the Himalaya.
2. E. melanocephala, Scop.; Fringilla crocea, Vieillot; Xanthornis
caucasicus, Pallas; Emberiza granativora, Menitries ; Tanagra melanic-
tera, Guidenstadt. S. India,
3. #. aureola, Pallas; Fringilla pinetorum, Lepech. ; Emberiza sibi-
rica, Gm. :* Himalaya, Arracan.
4. E. fucata, Pallas; #. lesbia; apud Tem., nec Gmelin; £. cia,
apud Jerdon, vide J. 4. S. XI, 601. Bengal, Indian peninsula.
5. E. icterica, Eversm., apud G. R. Gray, who figures it as Huspiza
icterica. Central and western India.
6. EF. flavicollis ; Mirafra flavicollis, McClelland and Horsfield, P.
Z. S. 1839, p. 163, which species Mr. Strickland informs me pertains
to the present genus. Assam.
7. E. Buchanani, Nobis ; Fringilla jamjohari, Buch. Hamilton’s draw-
mage, of which,”’ he adds, ‘‘ I know no more striking instance than the Emberiza
palastris vel pyrrhuloides (though Isee, Gray makes these into two species), the beak
of which is wholly unlike that of an Hmberiza, yet in all other respects the bird
almost exactly resembles EZ. scheeniculus.’’
* I have copied the synonyms of EF. melanocephala and E, aureola from Mr.
G. R, Gray’s work.
6M
958 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. [No. 156.
ings; probably EF. hortulana, apud Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p.93. Would
appear to be closely allied to H. hortulana, but differs in having the
head, neck, and streak descending from the lower mandible ash-grey
instead of dull green. Indian peninsula.
8. E£. sordida, Hodgson, MS. Presumed female about five inches
and a half in length, the wing two and a half, and tail two anda
quarter ; bill to forehead nearly half an inch, and tarse three-quarters of
an inch. General hue of the upper parts dull olive-greenish, the fea-
thers of the crown and back partially tinged with rufous, having medial
dusky streaks; alars and greater wing-coverts also margined with ru-
fescent-brown, and the two greater ranges of wing-coverts tipped with
dull whitish ; throat, belly, and under tail-coverts, whitish-yellow,
sullied on the breast, and marked with dusky streaks on the flanks and
sides of the fore-neck: upper mandible and tip of the lower one dull
horny, the rest pale; and legs also pale. Nepal. Described from a spe-
cimen taken to England by Mr. Hodgson.
The Indian Larks follow next, which are as follow :—
Pyrrhulauda, A. Smith. Of this African form, there is one common
Indian species :—
P. grisea ; Alauda grisea, Sesnati A, gingica, Lath; Fringilla cruci-
gera, Temminck. India generally.
Mirafra, Horsfield: the Agguns. The species of this genus vary
considerably in the degree of thickness of the bill, and also in the length
of the wings and relative proportion of the primaries; but the first
quill is always short, though varying a good deal in development, and
the second rarely equals the third. Those with shorter and more
rounded wings are also of a thicker form and less active in their habits ;
while the others present a nearer approximation to the true Larks.
1. M. assamica, McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839, p. 162;
described in J. A. S. XI, 199. Remarkable for its thick bill, and
obese, squat figure. Wings moderately long, with the first primary an
inch in length, or nearly so, the second a quarter of an inch shorter
than the third, and the third, fourth, and fifth, equal and longest.
Common in Bengal, Assam, and Nepal.
2. M. erythroptera, Jerdon, MS.; “M. javanica ?,” Jerdon’s
Catalogue, Madr. Journ. XI, 38, and probably of Franklin’s catalogue.
This species a good deal approximates the M. javanica, Horsf., Lin, Tr.
1844.] Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 959
XIII, 159, judging from the more full description of Dr. Horsfield’s
specimens by Stephens, in Shaw’s ‘Zoology’: but the Javanese bird is
stated to have ‘‘ the greater portion of the outer tail-feather white, and
the following is of that colour on its outer web only; whereas in the
Indian bird the white is confined to the exterior web of the outermost
feather. Length about five inches and a half, of wing three inches
and one-eighth, and tail two and one-eighth ; bill to forehead somewhat
exceeding half an inch, and tarse three-quarters ; the outermost primary
seven-eighths of an inch long, and second an eighth shorter than the
third, fourth, and fifth, which are equal. Upper-parts streaky, the
centres of the feathers dusky-brown, and their edges light fulvous-
brown ; coronal feathers lengthened, as in the Larks generally : beneath
pale fulvescent, the throat white, and the breast marked with large oval
blackish spots: primaries and secondaries ferruginous on both webs of
each feather, except towards the tip, this dusky portion increasing to
the outermost: tail blackish, its four middle feathers brown, and the
outermost only white on its external web: bill and feet pale, the beak
tolerably thick. Inhabits the more northern portion of the peninsula of
India, being represented by the next species southward.
3. M. affinis, Jerdon, MS. Very similar to the last species, but
having much less ferruginous colour on the wings, this being confined
to the outer webs of the primaries, and a deep internal margin to the
basal half only of their inner webs, never extending across the feather
as in M. erythroptera, but continued throughout the length of the
inner margin of the secondaries: the wing also is somewhat differently
formed, being rounder, with the short first primary longer and broader,
exceeding an inch in length, the second three-sixteenths to a quarter of
an inch minus the third, which equals the next three in some specimens,
whilst in others the fourth is somewhat the longest: and the tail-
feathers are less black, with the external web of the outermost, and a
slight exterior margin to the next, fulvescent-white, occasionally
spreading more or less on the inner web of the outermost feather.
Inhabits the southern part of the peninsula of India.
4. M. Hayi, Jerdon, MS. Also very like the two preceding species,
but readily distinguished by its coronal feathers forming a pointed crest,
and by the total absence of rufous on the outside of the wings, while
on the inner surface this is pale and diminished in quantity ; the under-
960 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. [No. 156.
parts also are nearly uniform pale rufescent, but little whiter on the
throat, and with but few and small dark spots on the breast; and the
sides of the occiput above the ear-coverts, with the nape and sides of
the neck, are pretty much of the same colour as the parts below. The
wings, too, of this species are remarkable for having the first primary
but half an inch long, while the second equals or even somewhat ex-
ceeds the three next: and the tail has its outermost feather wholly to
near the base, and also the greater part of the next, rufous-white.
Discovered on the eastern coast of the peninsula by Lord Arthur Hay,
a zealous and successful cultivator of Ornithology, to whose honour
the species has been dedicated.
5. M. cantillans, Jerdon, MS. ; the true Aggun of the natives of India.
Most allied to the last species, and having nearly the same form of
wing, but at once distinguished by the absence of any marked crest,
and by having the outer web only of the penultimate tail-feather white,
together with the whole of the outermost excepting an oblique basal
third of its inner web. Length five inches and three-quarters, by ten
inches in alar expanse; wing two inches and seven-eighths (or two
and five-eighths in the female); tail two inches: first primary three-
quarters of an inch, the four next generally about equal, but the second
and fifth sometimes a trifle shorter. Upper-parts dusky brown, the
feathers laterally margined and slightly edged at tip with rufescent-
brown, imparting a little the appearance of the nestling plumage charac-
teristic of the Lark tribe: alars and their coverts margined with rufous-
brown: a pale streak over the eye; throat and below the ear-coverts
whitish; and the under-parts pale rufescent with small breast-spots,
in general not very distinct. Bill dusky horn-colour, the lower man-
dible pale; and feet fleshy-brown. Inhabits Bengal as well as the
Indian peninsula, and is a favorite cage bird with the natives for its
sweet and plaintive, but not much varied, song.
6. M. phenicura, Franklin, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 119. Remarkable for the
length and straightness of its wings, of which the first primary measures
an inch, and the second is a quarter of an inch shorter than the third
and fourth. Inhabits the peninsula of India.
Coryphidea, Nobis, n. g. In this form, the wings are long and straight,
with the first three primaries equal (the representative of the usual small
first one being obsolete). Bill rather short, subconical and moderately
1844. | Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 961
compressed, but essentially Lark-like. Feet with shortish toes, and short
but straight hind claw. The general contour much recals to mind that
of the northern Snowflecks ( Plectrophanes).
C. baghaira; Emberiza Bag-haira, Franklin; Baggeyra Lark, Lath.
Alauda dukhunensis, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 93; described as Corypha
baghaira, J. A. S. XI, 200: Ortolan of Europeans in India.
Alauda, Lin. Typical Larks.
1. A. arvensis, Lin. Nepal. Specimens of this bird sent as a new
species by Mr. Hodgson differ in no respect from others killed in Eng-
land.
2. A. gulgula, Franklin, P. Z. §. 1831, p. 119; described in J. 4. S.
XI, 201.—Var. (?), A, gracilis, Nobis, J. A. §. XI. 201; A. gulgula,
apud Sykes and Jerdon.—Var. (?), A. letopus, Hodgson, MS. A puzzling
species, either subject to some degree of local variation, or, in Mr. Jer-
don’s opinion, separable into at least three most closely allied species as
above indicated. Comparison, however, of numerous specimens from vari-
ous parts renders the definition of these species or varieties extremely dif-
ficult, ifnot impossible. Those from southern India have the colours more
intense, and for the most part agree with the Bengal specimen which I
ventured to separate by the name 4. gracilis, even according very
commonly in the trivial distinction which I pointed out, of having the
penultimate tail-feather somewhat largely tipped with the rufescent-
white continued along its outer web, and this trifling character I have
sought for in vain among heaps of the ordinary Bengal Lark killed for
the table. Again, Mr. Hodgson marked a Nepalese specimen of the
common Bengal variety as being probably distinct in species from his
A, leiopus, and one of his specimens of Jeiopus resembles most minutely
the common peninsular variety (or 4. gracilis), while in general the
Nepalese specimens seem to be rather short in the bill, and to have the
outer tail-feathers of a purer and brighter white than in the others : but
I confess my inability to draw up any marked and constant distinguish-
ing characters. Specimens exactly resembling the common Bengal bird
were procured by Sir A. Burnes in Scinde; and one from Arracan is
remarkable for being rather small, and for having the exterior web of
the penultimate tail-feather merely narrowly edged with rufous-white,
instead of this occupying the whole outer web of the feather in question,
I should remark that the Nepal specimens are also, in general, a good
962 Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. LNo. 156.
deal less rufescent underneath than those from southern India, while .
the Bengal ones are in this respect intermediate. The common Bengal
Lark very closely resembles the preceding species, or British Sky Lark,
in its song and habits.
3. A. malabarica, Scopoliand Gmelin ; 4. deva, Sykes, P. Z. S. 1882,
p. 92; Jerdon, in ‘ Madras Journal,’ XI, 31. So closely allied to the
preceding as to bear out the supposition of the distinctness of the differ-
ent races of the latter which I have brought together; but at once dis-
tinguishable by the pointed form of its crest. Indian peninsula.
4. A. raytal, Buch. Hamilton, J7S. Length five inches and a quarter,
by eight and a half across; of wing three inches and three-eighths ;
tail two and one-eighth : bill to gape five-eighths ; tarse three-quarters,
and hind-toe and claw half an inch. General hue of the upper-parts
brownish-ashy, with narrow dark centres to the feathers ; of the lower
white, faintly tinged with yellowish on the breast, where obscurely
marked with small spots; wing-coverts and tertiaries margined with
pale fulvescent ; outermost tail-feather white, except the inner half of
the internal web throughout its length, and the next tail-feather white
along the marginal half of its outer web only ; there is also a whitish line
through the eyes: bill pale horny ; and legs yellowish, the hind-claw
not exceeding the toe in length. I obtained a fine specimen of this
bird alive, and kept it for some time, when just as it had come into
good plumage it died, and, as a specimen, was destroyed by the ants.
Buchanan Hamilton received a pair from Lucknow; and an example of
apparently the same species was procured by Sir A. Burnes in the west.
Certhilauda, Swainson. Larks’with slender incurved bill, and small first
primary-quill to the wing. With the following exception, so far as
known, natives of Africa.
C. chendoola; Alauda chendoola, Franklin, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 119,
(nec apud Jerdon). Bengal, Nepal, Northern India generally, extending
westward to Scinde.*
* The following description was taken from a pale specimen of a large, thick-bil-
led, subcrested Lark from Afghanistan. Length seven inches, or more; of wing four
inches; and tail two and a quarter; bill to forehead three-quarters of an inch, thickish
and compressed ; tarse an inch or nearly so. Head crested asin A. arborea. Colour
of variety pale sandy fulvescent-brown above, the centres of dorsal feathers darker,
those of crown but slightly so: under-parts whitish, fulvescent on breast, with much
1844. | Synopsis of Indian Fringillide. 963
I have reason to believe that the series of Alaudine here given is yet
‘incomplete ; but that very few species, on the whole, remain to be
added to the present synopsis of Indian Fringillide, notwithstanding
that many more are currently ascribed to India in the old systematic
works. With the assistance of the accompanying plate, little difficulty
will be found in recognising the various divisions of these birds, which
I have seen reason to adopt, if the descriptions themselves do not suffice
for the purpose; and I may hope and expect that this endeavour at
reducing the group to something like order, will lead to further examina-
tions, more especially in the Himalaya and to the westward, in which
latter direction we have at present by far the most to learn of the Zoo-
logy of India.
Of the birds noticed in this paper, the following species are all that
are absolutely wanting to the Society’s Museum :—Passer pyrrhopterus,
P. (2?) concolor, Pyrrhuloides epaulatta, Carduelis caniceps and C. Bur-
toni, Emberiza flavicollis, E. sordida, and EH. Buchanani, and the male
of Pyrrhospiza punicea, and female Passer pyrrhonotus: but better
specimens are desirable of many more, as especially Proparus chrysotis,
Parus (or Sylviparus) modestus, P. dichrous, P. emodius, P. melanolophos,
P. iouschistos, and P. erythrocephalus, Passer pyrrhonotus, Amadina
acuticauda, Estrelda formosa, Pyrrhula nipalensis and P. erythrocephalus,
Chrysomitris spinoides, Emberiza Lathami, E. icterica, and Alauda raytal ;
and, in general, specimens of the Himalayan Fringillid@ are very accept-
able, for transmission to the Honorable Company’s and different Euro-
pean national Museums.
blackish on the sides of the fore-neck meeting across: tail, excepting its middle fea-
thers, having a subterminal dusky band, and tipped with pale fulvescent: also a pale
superciliary streak to sides of occiput; and the beak and legs pale.
964
Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieutenant R. Baird Smith, Ben-
gal Engineers.
Part II. Analysis of the Phenomena of Indian Earthquakes, as exhibited
in the two preceding parts of this Memoir.
All available facts connected with earthquakes in India and its
frontier countries having now been given, it remains that the infer-
ences authorised by these facts shall be duly exhibited. To this li-
mited object I propose confining myself, it forming no part of my design
to offer any general views of the theory of Earthquake shocks, but
simply to illustrate their nature and causes so far as the materials
collected in this country admit. The combination of these materials
with others gleaned from different earthquake tracts, will doubtless
lead to interesting general results, but such a work must be left to
some one who commands better opportunities and greater leisure than
I at present have.
The facts already given naturally subdivide themselves into two
main classes; first, those illustrating the various phenomena; and
second, those indicating the causes of earthquake shocks. To the
former, attention will in the first instance be directed.
1. Characteristics of the Shock in Earthquakes.
The sensations experienced during earthquakes, as described by ob-
servers, are of three kinds.
a. A sensation of undulatory movements illustrated by comparison
with the motion of a ship at sea, the wavelike progress of a snake in
water, or the rocking of a cradle.
By far the larger portion of shocks in India give origin to sensa-
tions of this character. It would be tedious, and it is unnecessary to de-
tail a large number of examples, but reference may be made to the
great shock of the 19th February, 1842, as peculiarly illustrative of the
point under notice. At Jellalabad it is said, “ the earth swung to and
fro like the rocking of a cradle,” and at Peshawar, “ the earth rocked
like an infant’s cradle, or like a ship at sea.
6. A sensation of sharp, severe concussion, as though the observer
were struck heavily from beneath or behind; as examples of this se-
1844. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 965
cond class, the shocks of the 9th February 1841, and 5th March 1842,
may be referred to. In the former case the shock is described as hav-
ing been “ sharp and stunning, as if a blow had been struck under
you ;” and in the latter, the observer felt as though he had received a
severe blow from behind, and been impelled forward.
c. A sensation of tremulousness, without any defined motion or
concussion. This feeling ordinarily follows great shocks, when the
erust of the earth seems to be gradually subsiding from intense distur-
bance toits former state of quiescence. The inhabitants of the valley of
Cabool, distinguish this merely tremulous shock by a peculiar term
ealling it, ‘ Zill-Zillie,’ in contradistinction to ‘ Goozur,” which
appears to be the word used for the first class (@) ; numerous instances
of class (c), occur in the register, among which may be mentioned the
central Himalayan shocks of the 18th August and 28d September
1832, the lateral Himalayan shocks which followed the great earth-
quakes of August 1833, and February 1842, and the shocks in the
delta of the Indus from the 18th to the 26th June, 1819.
d. The next characteristic of the shocks to be noticed, is the method,
of propagation. There is evidence of two varieties of this, (1,) when
the shock traverses a zone of the earth’s surface, the breadth of which
is very small as compared with the length ; (2), when the shock is
propagated on ail sides equally as from a central point ; the difference
between the two varieties arises in all probability from difference of
physical structure in the localities affected by the shock. The cases
illustrating the first, as for example, the shocks of February 1842,
or August 1833, occurred in the vicinity of great mountain ranges
where faults and disturbances of the strata are numerous. The shocks
were propagated in directions parallel to the mountains, and the breadth
of the tracts affected by them was but small. The most marked case
of circular propagation occurred in the alluvial plains of the delta of
the Ganges on the I|lth of November, 1842, and there, from the
greater continuity of the strata, Jess obstruction would occur to the
dissemination of the shock in all directions from the central point.
That shocks, whether they affect zones or spaces which, though not
strictly circular, may yet for the sake of avoiding periphrasis be called
circles, are propagated from central points or lines of maximum intensity
is a fact so clearly established that it is scarcely necessary to advert to
6 N
one Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
it.” The diminution of intensity with increase of distance from a central
point is a phenomenon to be observed in all the principal earthquakes
recorded in these pages, and although our observations are yet too
imperfect to admit of our ascertaining precisely the place of maximum
intensity, it is indicated generally in a sufficiently distinct manner.
Thus the valley of Jellalabad was the seat of the maximum inten-
sity of the earthquake of 19th February, 1842, Lady Sale men-
tioning that its course from east to west was distinctly indicated by
clouds of dust. The valley of Nepaul was also evidently the place of
maximum intensity of the shock of 26th August 1833. Doctor Camp-
bell observing that, ‘‘ the valley of Nepaul though not geographically
the central point, is most assuredly the portion that has suffered the
greatest violence of the calamity.” To the east and west of the valleys
just mentioned the force of the shock probably decreased.
e. Had the materials collected admitted of it, I would willingly
have given some examples of the velocity of propagations of earthquake
shocks in this country, but unfortunately notices of time are so very
imperfect and contradictory, that no inference worthy of confidence
can be drawn from even the best of them. I must therefore content
myself with a mere allusion to the velocity as a characteristic of the
shock still requiring elucidation.
I now pass on to the next series of phenomena, viz. (2), motion of
the ground during shocks.
The motion of the ground during shocks is of three different kinds.
a. A horizontal or forward motion, illustrated by the shock of the
5th March, 1842, during which an observer in Saharunpore felt
himself, and the chair on which he was seated, impelled forward as if
by a force applied from behind him. Another example is given by
the shock of 3d April, 1810, (Part II. p. 47), in which it is stated, “ the
girandoles and lamps were seen to swing, and even the mirrors, (such
as were fastened at the upper extremity with a cord), were seen to
vibrate towards the wall”. It may be inferred from this statement
that the room in which these articles were suspended was moved bo-
dily forward, while they by their inertia were left behind, and appa-
rently moved towards the wall. In the account of the same shock
a further illustration of the forward movement is given in the case of
a person in the Lower Orphan School at Howrah, whose couch was
1844.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 967
moved forward nearly a foot from its original position, and subse-
quently thrown back again; these instances will serve to explain
the first kind of motion.
The second is:
6. A vertical, or as many observers style it, an “‘ up and down
motion”, with no lateral movement. This variety was well marked
during the minor shoeks that followed the great earthquake of the 26th
August, 1833. Dr. Campbell remarks, ‘“‘ many of them have been se-
vere, and throughout the whole course of these visitations, there have been
two distinct varieties observed in the character of the shocks ; all those
at the commencement were of the undulatory or swinging kind, the
others wanted the swell, and were a violent up and down shaking,
with little lateral motion.” The shocks of the 4th October and 29th
November, 18338, which were severe, were of the vertical kind.
c. The third kind of motion observed is a combination of the two
preceding, giving rise to an undulatory movement or swell like that
of the sea. This is by far the most common species of motion accom-
panying earthquake shocks, and is sometimes exhibited on a very large
scale, as during the Jellalabad earthquake of 1842, the Nepaul earth-
quake of 1833, the Scinde earthquake of 1819. The surface of water
in ponds and rivers frequently exhibited the undulation, as during
the Calcutta earthquakes of the 11th November, 1842, and the great
shock of the 2nd April, 1762, when the water in tanks in Calcutta
rose upwards of 6 feet, and formed large waves.
In some instances the shocks commence with the vertical and ter-
minate in the horizontal motion; this remark is illustrated by the
phenomena of the shock of the 11th November, 1842, as described in
Part I. p, 30. Two or three slight vertical shakes or heaves of the
earth occurred, followed by a strong horizontal movement ; this pecu-
liarity seems to have been observed in Calcutta only; at other places
the movement is described as of the purely undulatory character.
The undulatory motion has been remarked as invariably the most
destructive kind of shock. Thus Dr. Campbell remarks of the Nepaul
shocks in 1833, that the swinging motion was alone destructive to
property, while the vertical, from the greater noise and more rapid
succession, was the more terrifying. This difference of the two kinds
of motion is easily explicable ; the vertical shock merely raises the
968 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
building up without altering its centre of gravity; while the waving
motion throws it completely out of equilibrium and insures its fall ;
the horizontal motion is occasionally destructive, but not so much so
by any means as the undulatory.
3. Miscellaneous effects on the Earth’s crust.
A certain degree and kind of motion of the ground accompany all
earthquake shocks, but there are other effects on the earth’s crust
which are only occasionally observed ; these may now be noticed.
a. Alterations of level. The most remarkable cases of permanent
alteration of level caused by earthquakes recorded in this memoir,
are the Arracan and Chittagong earthquakes of 1762, and the Scinde
earthquake of 1819. In the former case there is evidence of an up-
heavement of a large extent of the eastern coast of the Bay of Ben-
gal, while in the latter the Ullah Bund, was suddenly raised and most
striking changes occurred in the level of the eastern branch of the
Indus. Subsidences of extensive tracts of country accompanied these
upheavements: referring to Part II. page 48 and 50, examples of this
kind of action will be found in abundance, and in the account of the
Scinde earthquake, the formation of a salt. water lagoon or marsh of
nearly 2,000 square miles in area is noticed. At one part of the
eastern branch of the Indus, a depression of level to the extent of 17
feet is recorded, while in other parts it varied from 4 to 10 feet.
6. Rents in the ground with ejection of water and gases.
A remarkable example of rents in the ground accompanied by the
ejection of fetid water occurs in the account of the Cashmere earth-
quake of June 1828. Mr. Vigue remarks, “‘ the earth opened in seve-
ral places about the city, and fetid water, rather warm, rose rapidly
from the clefts and then subsided.
Another remarkable instance of a great rent occurs in the Calcutta
earthquake of 1737, when the English church is said to have sunk
bodily into the ground.
In the Matura earthquake of 1803, extensive fissures were observ-
ed in the fields, through which water rose with great violence, and
continued flowing from the Ist to 24th of September.
During the Chittagong earthquake of 1762, many great fissures in
the earth occurred, from which water in large quantities rushed with
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 969
“ prodigious” violence ; these waters were strongly impregnated with
sulphureous gas.
c. Landslips. These are confined to mountainous regions, and in the
central Himalayan tract have been exhibited ona large scale. The
effect of the earthquake of 1803, as described by Colonel Hodgson,
in producing such slips of enormous masses of rock were of the most
destructive character. ‘‘ Whole villages’ he remarks, ‘having been
buried by the fall of cliffs and sliding down of the faces of hills.” Ano-
ther instance is recorded on the authority of Dr. Falconer, as having
occurred in the same region in 1809, when the Bishnoo Gunga, one
of the great branches of the Ganges, was blocked up by a landslip,
and the water raised to 40 feet above its usual level. Colonel Hodgson
notices the slip of a whole face of a mountain 4,000 feet high, during
the earthquake of the 28th May 1817. During the Cashmere earth-
quake of 1828, large rocks and stones were seen to roll down from
the mountains, and by the Nepaul shock of 1833, the Passes across the
Himalayas from the valley towards Lassa, were completely blocked
up by rocks and earth thrown down from the mountains. By the
Chittagong earthquake of 1762, several hills are described as having
been rent asunder, sinking down and stopping up the river near them ;
these examples sufficiently illustrate the extent to which landslips
occur during earthquake shocks, and furnish striking indications of
the great energy of the disturbing forces in operation.
d. Formation of sand cones. The only instance recorded in which
these cones, so frequently observed during the Calabrian and South
American earthquakes, were formed, isin the Scinde and Cutch earth-
quakes of 1819. “ During the earthquake,” it is remarked (Part II.
p- 33,) “‘numerous jets of black muddy water were thrown out from
fissures throughout this region (the Runn of Cutch,) and cones of
sand, six and eight feet high were thrown up;’ no facts are given
whereby we can form any opinion as to the method in which these
cones are formed, or of the causes to which they are due.*
e. Effects on springs. The Jellalabad earthquake of the 19th
February, 1842, furnishes the only ascertained instance of a shock
having produced any perceptible effects on springs. These effects
* We are informed that in the valley of the Irrawaddy no earthquake occurs without
numerous ejections of black sand, stinking water, ke. &c. This locality is subject to
very frequent shocks.—Eps,
970 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 156.
are described in Part. I. of this Memoir; the water of the Sonah
spring was deprived of its ordinarily high temperature, and the quan-
tity of water discharged fell much below the usual average, and the
flow occasionally ceased altogether.
I have no doubt that were observations to be more minutely made,
many cases of this class would be discovered ; they are not unusual in
other earthquake tracts, and doubtless frequently occur in India.
4 Sounds accompanying Shocks.
a. Subterranean sounds. Although sounds asifin the interior of the
earth are occasionally noted as accompanying shocks, they would
appear to be rare. An example is found in the first shock of the
Great Nepaul earthquake of 1833. During this shock there was a
distinctly audible noise as of ordnance passing rapidly over a draw-
bridge, of which Dr. Campbell remarks ; “I felt it was travelling with
the speed of lightning towards the west, and just under my feet ;” a
second case occurred at Ram Sing Chok, north-east of the Nepaul
valley, where it is said that for four or five days preceding the earth-
quake, “noises similar to the firing of cannon were heard as if under
ground ;” a third example is furnished by the Jellalabad earthquake
of February 1842, of which Lieutenant Eyre remarks, “ A loud sub-
terraneous rumbling was heard as of a boiling sea of liquid lava, and
wave after wave seemed to lift the ground on which we stood, causing
every building to rock to and fro like a floating vessel.” These are
the only cases I have found in which sounds appeared to be in the earth.
6. Sounds in the air. These sounds are of two different kinds;
Ist explosions, which vary in intensity from the sound of a cannon to
a rumbling noise ; the Cashmere earthquake of the 26th of June 1828,
furnishes an example of the highest degree of intensity ; ‘‘on that night,”
Mr. Vigne states, “ only one shock took place, but just before sunrise
there was another accompanied by a terrific and lengthened explosion
louder thana cannon ; on that day there were twenty such shocks each
with a similar explosion ;” similarly in describing the Nepaul shock of
1833, Dr. Campbell remarks, “ in a dead calm the noise of ahundred
cannon broke forth.” The Jellalabad earthquake of 1842, was preceded
by a ‘rumbling noise like a heavy wagon rolling over a wooden
bridge.” Under dates 25th July, 26th September, and 6th November
‘1844.] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 97
1842, other examples of the rumbling noise accompanying shocks will
be found.
2d. A rushing sound. In describing the shock of 2d July 1832,
(Part II.) Dr. McClelland remarks, ‘‘ during twelve seconds the
earth shook or rather trembled, and afforded a noise which it is
difficult to describe, but which may be compared to the sound of a
heavy but transient rush of water: the noise preceded and suc-
eeeded the motion about three seconds.” Similar rushing sounds ac-
companied the shocks of the 23d September 1832, 30th May 1833,
and 4th January 1835. The Calcutta shock of the 11th November
1842, is described as having been accompanied by ‘‘ a noise which at
_first resembled a mighty rushing wind,” and afterwards “the loud
rattling of carriages over a stony street ;” the shock of the 19th June
1819, as felt at Chunar, ‘‘ was accompanied by a noise in the atmos-
phere resembling the rapid flight of birds.”
These sounds always appear to be in the air, and although not inva-
riable accompaniments of earthquake shocks, are rarely wanting. The
movements of the crust of the earth must communicate similar move-
ment to the air, and hence give rise to sounds; but it must be con-
fessed that this cause is not sufficient to explain satisfactorily the loud
and sudden explosions, and the peculiar rushing or whizzing sounds,
that are so often observed ; explanatory evidence is not yet collected to
enable us to form a confident opinion, and although plausible specu-
lative causes might be stated, I prefer waiting for further information,
especially as among materials not yet arranged, there appear some
facts which may illustrate this subject.
There is a notice of a sound observed during the Scinde earthquake
of 1819, which although merely incidental and far from specific, yet
merits remark. Under date the 25th June 1819, (Part II. p. 36,)
an observer at Porebunder states, “‘ the late phenomena have brought
to my recollection, my having observed to an Officer of the Marines
about the beginning of March last, that there was a cloud in the north
east, which appeared uncommonly charged with electric matter ; its
direction was nearly opposite to the one from which I heard the sound
that preceded the great shock of the 16th.” It is perhaps rash to base
any inference on an isolated fact like this, but it leads me to suspect
972 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
that the peculiar rushing or whizzing sound previously alluded to, is
an indicationjof thejdischarge of electric matter, such a sound being
familiar to those who have ever watched the phenomena of electric
discharges in the laboratory.
5. Meteorological Phenomena accompanying shocks.
a. Barometric observations on the state of the Barometer during
earthquakes in India, are few in number and not decisive in their
results. In relating his account of the shock of the 23d January, 1832,
Lieutenant Burnes notes, “‘ the atmosphere had indicated nothing
unusual before the earthquake, nor did the Barometer undergo any
variation before or after it. ” During the Calcutta earthquake of the
llth November, 1842, an interesting Barometric phenomena was
observed in St. Xavier’s College, where the mercury rose and fell
repeatedly to the extent of seven or eight tenths of an inch during
the shock ; ‘‘ again, during the same shock, an observer on board the
ship “ Southampton” in describing a peculiar luminous appearance that
accompanied the earthquake remarks, “ the Barometer had slightly
fallen previous to this, whether from the preceding rain or caused by
the earthquake it is for others more capable to judge; I am inclined
to think from the latter.” It is difficult indeed to say whether the
movement in this case was merely a result of the earth’s movements,
or of atmospheric disturbance, but from the quantity of rain that
accompanied the shock, it is probable it was due to the latter. The
following notices however throw considerable doubts on the Barome-
tric movement in this case, and shew that it certainly was not general ;
Mr. Piddington remarks, “‘it did not occur to me to examine the
Barometer, but I found no difference afterwards at home, and a friend
who has an excellent Simpiesometer assured me that no effect was
produced upon it, he having examined it immediately afterwards, so
that in slight shocks the atmosphere seems to have no share.”
Arranging the materials given in the general Tabular view of
Indian earthquakes, (part II, p. 63,) so as to exhibit the relation of
the number of shocks to the months of the year, we have the following
general results :—
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 973
Number of shocks in January, .. a3 ae ERA F
Y) » February, .-. oe ie AG ai
ne », March, ee “ bs 3
a Pe: 4 | ee aa Je 4s ph as 5
9 ys lay, tb. ie ae ae
ss sg A MLMO oe ih ~: od Bee |
33 33 July,.. oe ae 2° ee 4
», August, ve oe ve : 15
ye 3, September, .. We on heart WC
ss », October, a are Dig. et ae
Py 3, November. .. sg oye or. 4
Hp ,» December, .. oe a Pi diob
etek yin 'ss a = sis wk sig ... 144
Dividing the year into two portions, from May to October, the
summer and rainy seasons ; and from November to April, the winter
and spring seasons, we have the following distribution of shocks
throughout the year.
During summer and rainy seasons,.. .. .- «+s 93 Shocks.
” cold 5 Spring ,, ecb ha sides eumpihcaens o ss
Excess in summer and rainy ,, SP 7 Axil AO arama
Had all the minor shocks been taken into account, the excess
would have been very much greater, but the above is sufficient to shew
that earthquakes are much more frequent in the months between
May and October, than during the remainder of the year. Of these
months, June, July, and August exhibit some of the severest shocks,
as also the greatest number.
Now from May to October, the mean height of the Barometer is
invariably less than from November to April inclusive. Prinsep’s
Meteorological Tables, (As. Soe. Journal, vol. I. p. 29,) furnish materi-
rials for comparison on this point, for several places within the earth-
quake tracts adverted to in the preceding part of this Memoir. The
following three are given as illustrations.
60
974 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. (No. 156.
Calcutta.
Mean height of Barometer from May to October, mA - 29.606
Ditto, ditto, November to April, .. .. 20.908
.- 302
Ava.
Mean height of Barometer from May to October, it, se aed
Ditto, ditto, November to April, ... .. 29.684
263
Saharunpore.
Mean height of Barometer from May to October, « 2. (i miele pes
Ditto, ditto, November to April, one moog
... 306
It therefore appears that during the six months of the year when the
Barometer is lowest, the greatest number of earthquake shocks occur,
and further, since during the months of June, July and August, the
mean of the height of the Barometric column is lower than at any
other period of the year, (taking averages of a number of years), there
appears an interesting coincidence between the greatest intensity of
the forces to which earthquakes are due, which are displayed during
these months, and the minimum weight of the atmospheric column. I
note this point as an interesting one, since it has been observed in
other earthquake countries, and it appears to be one of those facts which
will be found intimately connected with the theory of earthquakes.
There are other facts, to be noticed immediately, which further esta-
blish the connection between the depressed state of the Barometer and
the occurence of earthquake shocks, such as heavy rains, hurricanes
and storms, a close and sultry state of the air, &c. These will be
recorded in their proper order and are now merely alluded to as tend-
ing to establish the connection just stated. —
6. Direct Thermometric observations on the Thermometer during
our Indian earthquakes are as rare as those on the Barometer, but
the uniform testimony of observers establishes the fact, that a high
—
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 975
temperature is an almost invariable accompaniment of such shocks.
Parts I and II, present many examples; but a few of the principal
only need be stated in illustration of the point under notice. During
the great shock of June, 1819, it is stated that ‘‘ the heat for the last
two or three days has been excessive. ’”’ Relative to the weather preceding
the Jellalabad shock of the 19th February 1842, Captain Eyre remarks,
** On the 6th we had a heavy fall of rain since which the weather has
become exceedingly close, this morning (the 19th), it was observed that
an unusual degree of heat and stillness pervaded the air.” An interesting
notice occurs regarding another Jellalabad shock under date the 2/st
July 1842, it is as follows: “ a severe shock of an earthquake was ex-
perienced at Jellalabad on the 2Ist at a little past 9 Pp. M., a reduction
of temperature followed it.” The Calcutta earthquake of the 11th
November 1842, was also preceded by very hot weather, as were those
of the 2]st and 23d May of the same year. A specific statement of the
condition of the Thermometer at Calcutta during the great Chittagong
earthquake of April 1762, is given by the Rev. Mr. Hirst who re-
marks, ‘‘ the heights of the Thermometer on Farenheit’s scale was
then at Calcutta, 95.30,” much higher than it had been observed to be
during the whole month. The preceding will suffice to shew that
great heat is a characteristic of the weather accompanying earthquakes
in this country, the high temperature seems to precede the shock, a
decrease to follow it.
It has formerly been remarked that the largest portion of shocks
occur, during the months between May and October, or the hot and
rainy seasons of our year. May, usually the hottest month of the year,
shews the largest number of shocks, a number indeed as may be seen
on referring to the table of distribution of shocks throughout the year,
very much greater than any of the rest. The inference from par-
ticular cases of earthquakes is therefore confirmed by the result of
the general examination of the whole number recorded.
c. Pluviometric. Heavy rain although certainly not an invariable,
is a very frequent accompaniment of earthquakes in India; the
rain in some instances follows, in others precedes the shocks. The
Nepaul earthquake of August 1833, is an instance of the former, it
being noted, ‘‘ that torrents of rain fell in the valley, washing down
the walls that had formerly only been shaken.” Relative to the
976 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No, 156.
earthquakes of the Jellalabad valley, as illustrations of the latter,
Captain Eyre remarks; ‘‘ These shocks have always appeared to me
to be in some way connected with heavy rain beforehand.” Similarly
during the shock of the 11th November 1842, heavy rain fell during
the shock, none having fallen for some time before. The shock having
been felt about half past nine p. m. the rain commenced about 8 Pp. m.
and continued till about 2 a. m. Captain Hannay records in his
notice of the earthquake of the 14th January 1839, experienced in
Assam that ‘‘ some days of heavy rain in the valley, and snow in the
mountains preceded it,” also in his notice of the shock of the 3d June
1839, it is observed the weather was wet and disagreeable. It would
therefore appear that heavy rain before, during and after shocks has
frequently been observed ; and this remark, founded on our local ex-
perience, is interesting, as being in perfect analogy with observations
made on earthquakes in other parts of the world.
d. Winds and storms. There are several cases noted in the pre-
ceding parts in which a connection is indicated between earthquake |
shocks and atmospheric currents. The circumstances accompanying
them are such as to render it difficult to suppose that, the con-
nection was merely an accidental one. Thus during the Calcutta
shock of the llth November 1842, it was observed, that “ there
was an unpleasant stillness in the air previous to this occurrence
(the earthquake), but the wind rose strongly from the eastward
almost immediately afterwards.” Again in the notice of the Delhi
earthquake of the 24th October 1842, it is remarked, ‘‘ the wind
was west, from which quarter it had been blowing steadily for
some days, but just previous to the earthquake it was in strong
gusts.” The great Calcutta shock of October 1737, was accompanied
by ‘‘a furious hurricane at the mouth of the Ganges which reached
60 leagues up the river,’ and the shock of April 1810, in the same
locality, occurred contemporaneously with a heavy north-wester. The
Chittagong earthquake of 1762, was in like manner accompanied by
‘‘fresh gales of wind at south-east” and lastly, the severe shock of the
19th October 1800, at Ongole, occurred while ‘‘ the wind was blowing
a hurricane, and rain so heavy was falling that the whole country ex-
hibited an entire sheet of water.” These cases may suffice to draw at-
tention to the possible connection of earthquakes with variations of winds,
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 977
and the occurrence of storms. That the connection is not an invaria-
ble one, scarcely lessens the interest of the enquiry, as observations may
yet be accumulated which will exhibit the causes of this variability,
and throw light on the true nature of the dependence of the earth-
quaking and atmospheric forces on each other. As a very interesting
indication of this dependence, arrived at by a totally different course
of enquiry from the present, I may quote the few following remarks
from Mr. Piddington’s Sixth memoir on the Law of Storms in
India (Journal Asiatic Society, No. 127, p. 717.) ‘‘ Before I conclude,
I must allude, as a question of research only, to another remarkable
feature in these tracks, and indeed all the storm tracks we have yet
traced out, which is this: If we look at the chart, we shall see that
almost the whole of the storms seem to come in groups from certain
quarters, and these quarters are those in which active and half extinct
volcanoes are situated.
“‘ Considering our charts in this point of view, we shall observe that,
to commence from the northward six tracks, Nos. XXIX to X appear
to come from the north-eastward, or from the direction of the great
voleanic centre of the Japanese archipelago. Between these we have
two tracks, Nos. II and XIX, which may be supposed, if they origi-
nated at so great a distance, to have come from the active volcanoes at
the north extremity of the Marianas, as may also Nos. XVIII and X.
“We have then two groups from Nos. VIII to XXVII, which all
pass over, if they do not arise from active or half extinct volcanoes;
the north extremity of Luzon having the volcano of Camiguin, and
another yet active, while a chain of active or half extinct ones ex-
tends through the almost unknown centre of that Island.
“We have next a group of three storms, Nos. XVI to XXI, which
appear to issue from the straits of Mindoro, the eastern extremity of
which has the great volcano of Albay; and to the south of it, the half
extinct or active ones of Samar, Leyte, and Mindanao. Lastly we have
a group of three tracks which originate at or cross the Island of Pa.
Jawan, which having itself active volcanoes, has also to the south east-
ward ofit Mindanao, with Siao, and Sangir a chain of active volcanoes.”
Mr. Piddington after stating that his object is simply to draw atten-
tion to circumstances sufficiently remarkable to merit it, further re-
marks, ‘“‘ I have already alluded to the well known fact at Manila
978 Memotr on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
that no hurricane occurs without some volcanic action more or less
violent being observed, and as the whole of the chain of the Phillipines
from Mindanao to the northern extreme is full of active or partially
active centres, far more so even than Java, there seems good ground
for supposing some connection, but whether the volcanoes are the cause,
or are agitated by the effect of the atmospheric disturbance, we are
as yet ignorant. In the Bay of Bengal, if the tracks of most of our
storms be prolonged to the south-east they will all be seen to start from
near the yet active volcanic centre of Barren Island, and some of the
old ones which I have traced certainly do the same.
“* Again ; if we look at Mr. Redfield’s chart of West Indian hurricanes,
we shall find them also mostly beginning about the volcanic Leeward
Islands. The neighbourhood of Bourbon and Mauritius, and the
Timor sea, where hurricanes seem very prevalent, are all instances
of this sort of relation whatever it may be, if it really exists.’
The general question of the relation of voleanic to atmospheric dis-
turbances is one well worthy of investigation, and it is to be hoped
that observers favourably situated may not neglect opportunities of
collecting such information as may throw light upon its true character.
Circumstances are favourable for observations on this point in the
earthquake tract of the eastern coast of the Bay of Bengal, including
Chittagong, Arracan, &c. along the whole of the Malayan Archi-
pelago and the coast of the Persian Gulf.
e. Mists and Fogs. The last indication of atmospheric disturbance
during earthquakes I have to notice, is the not unfrequent occurrence
of mists and fogs in connection with the shocks. Thus during the
earthquake of the 2lst May 1842, it is noted “that for some days
before and after this, the sky had a white, thick, hazy appearance ;”
again during the Assam shock of the 4th March 1840, it was obser-
ved by Captain Hannay, that although “ the sky was cloudless yet
the atmosphere was hazy.” The shock of the 24th October, 1832
near Delhi was in like manner accompanied by haziness in the air.
The general results under this head may now be summed up in
a few words. The atmospheric phenomena which have been observed
to accompany earthquakes in India, so generally as to suggest
the existence of an intimate connection between the two classes of
facts, are, a depressed state of the Barometer, unusually high tem-
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. O72
perature, frequently very heavy rain, accompanied by storms and
changes of wind with occasionally a misty and foggy state of the
atmosphere.
6. Electric Phenomena accompanying shocks.
These have been observed but rarely in this country, a few in-
stances however are recorded. During the earthquake of the 7th
September 1842, at the moment of its occurrence, sensations precisely
similar to those accompanying an electric shock, were experienced by
an observer at Mussoorie in the Himalayas, as noted in detail in the
register for 1842. During the shock of the 11th of November, of
the same year, a peculiar brightness was observed on the waters
of the Hoogly which was exactly contemporaneous with the shock,
and on closing round the Southampton communicated to that vessel
‘‘a general and severe tremor as if a taut cable was grinding under the
keel, or that a sudden squall had struck the ship.” It was observed
that this brightness could not possibly be the reflected light of the
moon and the possibility suggests itself that it may have been a dis-
play of electric light. An interesting fact is noted among the Pore-
bunder observations on the great Scinde earthquake of June 1819,
under date the 24th of that month ; after a severe shock accompanied
by much rain, it is noted ‘‘ Immediately after it observed a long nar-
row black cloud, running west and east, or quite the contrary way
to what Iam accustomed to seea line of such cloud extend: it ap-
peared stationary for halfan hour, during which time there were con.
stant tremorsin the earth.” It is possible that these tremors may have
been an effect of what has been called ‘‘ the return stroke” or the pas-
sage of electric matter from the surcharged earth to the clouds, a not
unusual phenomenon. During the month of April 1762, when the
great Chittagong earthquake occurred, it is remarked by the Reverend
Mr. Hirst, that ‘ there was much thunder and lightning in this
month.” Similarly during the shock of the 29th October 1800,
the incessant thunder and vivid lightning are specially remarked ;
it would therefore appear that severe shocks of earthquakes are fre-
quently accompanied by electric phenomena, and although the facts
may not be sufficiently determinate to enable us to say that such
980 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
phenomena are essentially connected with earthquakes they are yet
enough to warrant our drawing attention to the subject and endea-
vouring to secure information more minute and specific.
We have not as yet any evidence from this country to indicate a
connection between earthquake shocks and disturbances of the magne-
tism of the earth, although both in Europe and in South America,
such a connection has been very distinctly exhibited, so much so, as to
lead some to propose the magnetic needle as the best indication of
earthquaking forces. The magnetic observatory of Singapore situated
in the midst of one of the greatest tracks of volcanic force in the world,
is peculiarly favourably placed for observations on this point, and as
several earthquakes have occurred since its establishment it may be
hoped that some interesting information has been collected.
7. Volcanic Phenomena accompanying shocks.
A few instances occur in the preceding portions of this memoir in which
earthquake shocks are intimately connected with the action of volca-
noes. Thus regarding the Scinde earthquake of 1819, it is remarked
“ the first and greatest shock occurred at a few minutes before 7 Pp. M. on
the 16th June, but shocks of inferior violence continued till the 20th,
when the volcano called Denodur, situated 30 miles north west from
Bhooj the Capital of Cutch, burst into action and the movements of the
earth immediately stopped.’ Again during the great shock of April
1762, it is observed by Mr. Edward Gulston “‘ as we are informed that
two volcanoes opened, I am in great hopes these will prove a sufficient
vent to discharge all the remaining sulphureous matter in the bowels
of these countries and put a stop to any further earthquakes here, at
least for many years to come.” During the principal shock of the
Nepaul earthquake of 1833, vapour and flame were seen to issue from
Nayadong one of the largest of the mud volcanoes of the Arracan coast.
Whether these resulted from the mechanical effect of the concussion
in opening some new fissure in the volcano or from an actual subter-
ranean connection between the disturbing forces of the lateral Hima-
layan and Arracan tracts, there is no evidence to determine ; the cases
just noted occurred in volcanoes situated very near to, or actually upon
the sea shote, a point which in the theory of the subject is worthy of
1844. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 981
note, although, in accordance with the plan laid down for this analysis,
I do not dwell upon it here.*
8. Physiological Phenomena accompanying Earthquake shocks.
Without inferring any actual connection between earthquakes and
the diseases which are not unfrequently found to accompany them,
the coincidence between the two is sufficiently remarkable to merit
a brief notice in this analysis. The first instance is recorded in the
note from Mr. Wathen’s memoir on Kokan, (Part 2, p. 3,) where it is
menticned that in 1832 and 1833, the province was visited by con-
stant earthquakes and simultaneously devastated by cholera. Again in
1828, during the severe earthquakes of that year in Cashmere, the
cholera made its appearance with very fatal consequence to the inha-
bitants of the valley. The following extract from the Agra Ukbar of
the 19th November 1836, gives another interesting instance of the
coincidence now under remark ; “‘Sumbhul (Rohilcund) a series of
earthquake shocks has been for some time and is still felt at this place,
the shocks are of almost daily occurrence and are accompanied with a
heavy rumbling noise which traverses the entire place; the duration of
each averages two minutes ; co-existent with the phenomenon is a fever
of a more virulent nature than for years has visited the town.”
The unpleasant personal sensations experienced during shocks are
repeatedly alluded to in the previous pages. Considerable details will
be found in Part II; indeed scarcely a shock is recorded in
which these feelings of nausea, tendency to faint, pains in the limbs
and general lassitude of the system are not adverted to; they resemble
strikingly the sensations experienced by many when the atmosphere
is overcharged with electric matter, and may serve as another indica-
tion that, during shocks excess of electricity actually exists. When it is
borne in mind that during earthquakes, large quantities of sulphureted
hydrogen and other deleterious gases are evolved, and that to the pre-
sence of the former of these, high authorities have attributed the fatal
fevers of Africa, there is nothing irrational in supposing that conti-
nuous earthquakes may induce diseases of severe types. Without
* In the accout of the blowing up of the mountain of Gammacanore in the Moluccas
in 1673, it is said that ‘‘ there was first a great earthquake which overturned the sur-
rounding villages and several thousands of persons were buried under heaps of stones.
When the mountain blew up the weather was cali and very fine.’’—Ebs.
6p
982 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 156.
attaching undue importance to the cases brought forward I may yet
remark that the point is one well worthy of attention and investiga-
tion by better qualified parties.
9. Concluding Remarks.
Having now grouped as well as circumstances will allow, the vari-
ous phenomena of Indian earthquakes, there remain only a few gene-
ral remarks to conclude this part of the subject.
a. It will doubtless have been remarked that the localities subject
to earthquake shocks, are characterised by certain features of general
resemblance. In most, indications of volcanic action, of violent disturb-
ing forces producing rents and fissures in the crust of the earth, of con-
nection between the surface and interior of the earth, have been found.
These features coincide with those of localities similarly affected in
other parts of the world, and maintain that general analogy between
earthquake tracts which has more than once been adverted to.
b. Of the earthquake tracts of India some are situated close to the
ocean, others are removed from all connection, at least all external
connection with it: this point is noticed because it has been thought
by some that the presence of sea water is essential to the generation-
of the disturbing forces to which earthquakes are due. The central
and lateral Himalayan tracts can scarcely have any connection with
the ocean, removed as they are so far from it, and yet in these tracts,
earthquakes of the utmost severity have been experienced.
c. The last peculiarity to be noted is the local nature of Indian
earthquake tracts. Shocks occur in each of these with entire inde-
pendence of the others, shewing that the forces operating in each are
of local and limited extent. This circumstance is irreconcileable with
the idea that earthquakes are due to the movement ofa general fluid
nucleus in the interior of the earth, it rather indicates that at various
depths from the surface, reservoirs of materials, whether gases, fluids,
or both, capable of generating disturbing forces exist, and that these
reservoirs under ordinary circumstances act independently of all
others.
To present at one view the contents of this part, the following
tabular statement has been prepared.
———
1844. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 983
Synopsis of the Phenomena of Indian earthquakes.
1. Characteristics of the shocks.
a. Undulatory shock.
6. Shock by concussion.
c. Tremulous shock.
d. Method of propagation.
e. Velocity of propagation.
2. Nature of the movement of the Ground during shocks.
a. Horizontal or forward movement.
6. Vertical or “‘ up and down” movement.
c. Composite or wave-like movement.
3. Effect on the crust of the earth.
a. Alterations of level.
6. Formation of fissures with ejection of water and gases,
c. Landslips.
d. Formation of sand cones.
e. Effects on springs.
4. Sounds accompanying shocks.
a. Subterranean sounds.
6. Sounds in the air.
5. Meteorological Phenomena.
a. Barometric.
5. Thermometric.
c. Pluviometric.
d. Winds and storms.
6. Electric phenomena.
7. Volcanic phenomena.
8. Physiological phenomena.
9. Concluding remarks.
a. Geological resemblance of earthquake tracts.
6. Relation of earthquake tracts to the ocean.
c. Independent action of forces in Indian earthquake localities.
Nore.—I may mention here that the large quantity of new materials connected
with Indian earthquakes, which has come into my possession, since this paper was
concluded will probably require the whole to be re-written so as to embody the new
information obtained,
984
Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula from Masulipatam to
Goa, comprising remarks on the origin of the Regur* and Laterite ;
occurrence of Manganese veins in the latter, and on certain traces
of aqueous denudation on the surface of Southern India. By Capt.
NewBo.1p, F. R. S. Assistant Commissioner, Kurnool.
Masulipatam stands on the sea coast in nearly 16° N. Lat: and about
28 miles N. from the principal northerly embouchure of the Kistnah.
The adjacent country is the flattish maritime plain which according
to Benza, extends between the mouths of the Godavery and the Kistnah.
The alluvial sands that cover the surface rest on a bluish black
tertiary, or post-pliocene clay, resembling regur, imbedding terres-
trial marine shells of existing species, and apparently identical with
the black clay beds underlying the Cities of Madras and Pondicherry
and other places on the Coromandel Coast. In many places the
overlying sand is aggregated into a loose sandstone of a nodular form,
and often perforated with sinuous and straight cavities, the work of
pholades. The structure of this sandstone, which contains fragments
of recent shells, is here concretionary. The cementing matter is clay, and
carbonate of lime with a little oxide of iron. The sand continues to
cover the plain to the distance of 15 or 16 miles inland, partially under
laid by these beds of black clay, to within some miles of Bezwarah,
when the gneiss is first seen to outcrop from these recent strata.
The plain of Masulipatam, it is quite clear, once formed the bottom
of a lagoon, or marine lake, and was elevated and dried up probably in
the post-pliocene period. The channel of the Kistnah, which it is likely
supplied much of the fresh water, appears to have suffered a south-
erly deflection from tke elevatory forces and consequent alteration
of surface.
At Bezwarah the gneiss rises into a ridge, 600 feet high, running
N. E, and S. W. its dip confused and contorted. Through a gorge in this
ridge at right angles withits direction, runs the Kistnah. No evidence
could be discovered of the Kistnah’s having cut the channel through
the ridge: it appears to have been originally formed, like the trans-
* Regur, the black, tenacious, but usually fertile soils of central and Southern India
ere known by this name,—Eps.
1844.] Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula, §c. 985
verse river courses through the chalk escarpments of the weald, by the
elevatory forces that raised the strata to their present position. The
features of the original fissure have doubtless been modified by the
abrading power of the river; which, when swelled by the freshes
entirely fills the gap, about a mile in width, its sides rising rather pre-
cipitously from the river’s banks.
Beyond this ridge, which is of no great length, the surface of the
country appears flat as before, and the rise from the coasts scarcely
perceptible. With regard to the theory, of the tract between Bez-
warah and Condapilly having once formed the bed of an extensive
lake, my friend Mr. Malcolmson has justly observed, that, “ a careful
survey of the hills from the summit shows, that they are short insu-
lated ranges, such as are found over the Circars and other tracts rising
from a level country ; and that had a lake existed in the plain above,
every slight rise of the river would have carried its waters round their
shoulders to the North and South.”
The gneiss composing the ridge of Bezwarah is garnetiferous, Clea-
velandite often replaces the common felspar, and renders the gneiss li-
able to decay. It contains large veins of quartz, and is intersected by
greenstone dykes, the presence of which may serve to account for the
distortion observable in its strata.
A little to the N. E. of Bezwarah are the diamond mines of Mal-
lavelly where the gneiss is in some places covered by a conglomerate
sandstone, resembling the diamond conglomerate of Banganpilly and
Kurnool, and of which it appears here as an outlying patch. The dia-
monds are however dug for in a bed of gravel composed chiefly of
rolled pebbles of quartz, sandstone, chert, ferruginous jasper, conglo-
merate sandstone and kunkur, lying under a stratum of dark mould -
about a foot thick. Dr. Benza traced the conglomerate sandstone hence
by Ellore and Rajahmundry to Samulcotah.
From Bezwarah by Condapilly to the vicinity of the Warapilly
ghaut, the hypogene schists, chiefly gneiss and granite occur. East of
Warapilly these rocks are covered by the Northern termination of the
Cuddapah limestone beds. The diamond sandstone associated with
this limestone, stretches still further North as already mentioned, by
the diamond pit of Mallavelly to Samulcotah,
A little North of Warapilly, granite and the hypogene rocks con-
986 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula [No. 156.
tinue to Hydrabad, and 48 miles to the N. W. of that city to the
village of Moonopilly, on the Beder, where they are covered by the
great overlying trap formation.
Most of the rocks about Hydrabad are of granite, that of Moeb
Ally is of the laminar variety, often approximating to gneiss. The rock
on which stands the celebrated fortress of Golconda, rises in the
centre of the Valley of the Moossi, about 6 or 7 miles westerly from
Hydrabad, and is composed of a granite with reddish felspar, trans-
lucent quartz, with dull dark green mica, and a few crystals of horn-
blende. Of this granite, which resembles that of Syene, the domes
and outer walls of the Mausolea of the old Golconda kings are built.
Through this royal cemetery runs a dyke of a dark crystaline green-
stone, nearly EK. and W., which is probably identical, from its direction,
with a dyke observed 6 miles west of this, between the British resi-
dency and the great tank of Hussain Saugur. The rocks of the dyke
bear evident marks of the chisel; and no doubt furnished material for
the sepulchres of the Golconda kings, which are constructed of this,
or an exactly similar greenstone exquisitely polished.
From Golconda the road towards Beder lies, for the few first miles,
over the low granitic ridges which form the northern side of the
Valley of the Moossi, to Lingumpilly, near which the ridge gently
sinks into an undulating plain. Between this village, and that of
Puttuncherroo, which is situate about 18 miles W. by N, from Hy-
drabad, the face of the country has a gentle N. W. declination towards
the bed of the Mangera. Granitic rocks constitute its basis as far as
Cummumpilly about 50 miles W. N. W. from Hydrabad. The granite
is both of the small grained, red felspathic variety, and large grained.
Both varieties are met with at Kundi, and Moonopilly 48 miles from
Hydrabad. The small grained is seen to penetrate the other in
sinuous veins. There is also a third variety, fine grained, containing
much quartz and imbedded nests of a dark steel coloured mica. Veins
of reddish felspar with actynolite, and a little quartz also are seen. Both
granite and gneiss, and the veins by which they are intersected, are
penetrated by dykes of basaltic greenstone; the largest dykes observed
were east of Puttuncherroo; a little W. of Lingumpilly and Moo-
tinghi:—also at Sedashipett, and Yernanpilly. The Mootinghi dyke
runs nearly N. and §S., the rest preserve an Easterly and Westerly
Nl
veil.
Culberga
Beat of theBhi ma
%
oS
See ke
P js watage (se
rhs PAC
Ri eg ae
eT ee ee
1844. ] from Masulipatam to Goa, 987
direction. The felspar of the granite and gneiss near the line of
contact, is deprived of its lustre and translucency: and becomes
opaque and white like porcelain: the mica either almost disappears, or
shrinks and becomes hard, compact, and of a ferruginous aspect;
while the rock ez masse acquires a tendency to split into rhomboids.
Near the line of contact with the overlying trap a reddish felspathic
zone is observed similar to that described as occurring on the trap and
granite boundaries at Gurdinny in the S. Mahratta country, S. of
Bejapore, which passes into pegmatite soz. The soil from Hydrabad
and Golconda to Puttuncherroo is generally the light reddish sandy
detritus washed down from the granite heights in the vicinity, occa-
sionally mingled with nodules of a ferruginous clay resembling the debris
of laterite. A little to the N. and W. of Puttuncherroo, the granitic
soil thins out and disappears, leaving exposed the sheet of Regur that
underlies it, and which occurs first at intervals, but afterwards as an
almost continuous sheet from Moonopilly to Beder.
Between Puttuncherroo and Moonopilly the strips of granite
alluvium with which it is alternated appear to have resulted from
the decay of salbandes and bosses of granite, which formerly outcrop-
ped from the bed of the Regur, but have since crumbled down by a
process of weathering, which I have described elsewhere; and being
washed by the rains, have covered the surrounding soil with a sandy
detritus thus :—(See plate, Diagram No. 1.)
A. undecomposed granite.
B. B. B. decomposed granite forming an alluvial surface soil.
C. C. Regur.
Near Sedashipett, a stratum of kunkur intervenes between the Regur
and the granite. The surface of the Regur, where it overliés the trap
from Moonopilly to Beder, is often intermixed with the detritus of
the outcropping trap and laterite rocks associated. The soil resulting
from the disintegration of the former is easily distinguishable from
the Fegur by its much lighter and reddish tinge, arising from the per-
oxidation of the protoxide of iron it contains. The detritus of the
darkest portions of the trap, even before peroxidation takes place, have
a greyish or greenish-brown hue, totally dissimilar to the Regur.
Boundary of the great overlying trap formation of the Deccan.—A
little to the W. of Moonapilly, rounded and angular fragments of the
988 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula [ No. 156.
trap of the overlying formation, are seen lying on and partially imbed-
ded in the Regur, with scattered, rugged, scabrous blocks of a com-
pact cream and buff-coloured limestone passing into chert. The
latter contained a cast of a small fresh water shell resembling a
Physa.
Ascending the gentle slope, beyond the village of Cummumpilly, the
overlying trap was first seen in situ in a section afforded by the steep
bank of a nullah. The trap is petrographically identical with that of
Bejapore. The structure is at once sheeted like that of modern lavas
imperfectly columnar, and globular. The globular trap disintegrates
by a process of concentric exfoliation. The concentric coats, weather
into a brown speckled, friable wacke, which falling off and washed
away by the rain leaves the hard spheroidal nuclei of basalt scattered
on the surface; frequently in such numbers as to present the appear-
ance of having being showered down by some volcano. These spheroids,
vary in size from a pigeon’s egg to a 16 inch shell.
Recent conglomerate.—A few miles to the S. of Sedashipett, a low
flat topped range of hills is seen; which, from the calcedonies, jasper
and fragments of trap brought down by the nullah, are probably of trap.
These transported pebbles have been formed into a solid bed cemented
together by lime, and form cliffs from three to ten feet in thickness on -
the nullah bank. Small rounded fragments of laterite are also included
in this recent conglomerate, which is also seen in the beds of other rivu-
lets between Moonapilly and Beder. These conglomerates rarely extend
more than 20 or 30 yards from the present channels of the streams,
and generally not above several feet. The lime contained in the water
of the stream, and its tributary springs, has evidently assisted in the
consolidation.
About four or five miles S.W. from Moonapilly, the low range of hills
there seen was found to be of trap; the highest peak capped by a
lateritic rock resembling that of Hor Muth S. of Bijopore described
pp. 6 and 7 No. 2 Geological notes. This laterite near its junction with
the trap passes into a bed of crimson-spotted, lithomargic earth resem-
bling that of the Nilgherries, and is slightly impregnated with calcare-
ous matter. The trap occupies the lowest situations, and constitutes
the basis of the plain to Beder, where it is overlain by an extensive bed
of laterite 200 feet thick.
1844. ] from Masulipatam to Goa. 989
Laterite bed of Beder.—The laterite bed of Beder commences about
16 miles ESE. from that city ; it is first seen resting on the trap in a
bed about 100 feet thick, forming a hill, shaped like a truncated cone,
about two miles SW. from the village of Sungum. Thence it continues
capping the trap with little interruption, and forming the surface rock
of the level and extensive tract of table land on which the city of Beder
stands. The laterite bed terminates to the west about 12 miles WNW.
from Beder, descending to the plain by a short, but steep declivity
and at its basis the trap is again seen. It is about 28 miles in extent
from ESE. to WNW. and about 22 miles, from WSW. to ENE. Its
average thickness is about 100 feet, and maximum 200 feet ; it rises from
the trap of the plain in abrupt, and sometimes precipitous acclivities. The
cliffs supporting this table land of laterite on the northern and eastern
sides, are from 100 to 200 feet high, but much lower and less abrupt on
the W. side where the general level of the country appears to rise. The
general direction of the cliff line, marking the termination of the bed
near Beder, is E. by S. but the outline is irregular, the cliffs forming
salient and re-entering angles.
The plain on the summit is almost one monotonous level, and less
broken by nullahs than is generally the case on table ands. This ap-
_ pears in part owing to the rain water being mostly drained off through
the porous structure of the rock before it has time to collect.
The height of this table land above the sea, as barometrically taken
by Voysey, is 2359 feet, about 200 feet lower than the indications
afforded me by means of the boiling point of water. Sheets of
bare laterite impart a barren appearance to portions of its sur-
face. The soil resulting from the disintegration of the laterite, is
brown or reddish, gravelly or pulverulent, according to the varying
petrographical structure of the parts of the rock of which it is
composed. The soil formed from the dark and silicious varieties
is usually sterile, but that from the softer and more argillaceous va-
rieties is carefully cultivated, producing abundant mungéri, or early
crops. The yellow juare and bajra grown on it are said by natives
to be sweeter than those produced by any other soils. It seems
probable that among other causes of the sterility for which later-
itic soils have been abused may be ranked that of the porous
character of the laterite when it forms the substratum which carries
69
990 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula (No. 156.
off the water, particularly from the loose siliceous varieties of the soil,
before it has had time to fertilize the surface. In the more clayey
kinds of the soil the water is longer retained. Inthe immediate vicinity
of Beder the soil does not lie thick, and the trees have a stunted appear-
ance, particularly the mango trees that shade most of the Mausolea and
Tombs in the precincts. Wherever there is a sufficient depth of soil
and capability of retention of moisture, its chemical nature is certainly
not against arboreous vegetation as the picturesque banyan tree, in
front of the cavern spring in the Farabagh can testify. On the sum-
mit of the table land, a few narrow belts of the regur occur outcropping
from the alluvium, Voysey counted four well defined zones of the
cotton soil on this elevated insulation, between Beder and Shela-
pilly, running N. and S. and lying between ridges of laterite,
termed by him “Iron clay.” The fact of its being thus found on the
tops of hills, and covering the bottoms of valleys and plains, at a
distance from any river’s course, and out of the reach of present in-
undations, militates strongly against the theory of the regur being a
fluviatile deposit as thought by some.
The principal wild shrubs growing in the lateritic soil on the surface
are the Pulas, the Kutlungi, or Chunqu Cheltu; the Cassia auricu-
lata, the Anona squamosa, Asclepias gigantea, the Bair, (Zizphus
Jujuba) the Acacia, the cara thorn, and the small leafed Burratiri.
Petrographical character of the Beder Laterite.
The laterite of Beder, generally speaking, is a purplish or brick-
red, porous rock, passing into liver brown perforated by numerous
sinuous and tortuous tubular cavities either empty, filled, or partially
filled with a greyish-white clay passing into an ochreous, reddish and
yellowish brown dust; or with a lilac tinted litheomargic earth. The
sides of the cavities are usually ferruginous and often of a deep brown
or chocolate colour: though generally not more than a line or two in
thickness, their laminar structure may frequently be distinguished by
the naked eye. Before the blow-pipe it melts into a black clay at-
tracted by the magnet, but is rarely so ferruginous as to entitle it to
the character of an ore of iron; though some of the nodules are picked
out, and smelted by the natives. The interior of the cavities has
usually a smooth polished superficies, but sometimes mammillary, and
1844.] from Masulipatam to Goa. 991
stalactiform on a minute seale. The hardest varieties of the rock are
the darkest coloured, and most ferruginous. The surface masses of
the softer kinds present a variegated appearance. The clay and litho-
marge exhibit lively coloured patches of yellow, lilac, and white, inter-
sected by a network of red, purple, or brown. The softness of this
rock is such that it may be cut with a spade; hardening by exposure
to the sun and air, like the laterite of Malabar. The surface of the
harder or more ferruginous varieties is usually barren, flat like a pave-
ment and often presents a glazed or semi-vitrified appearance. The de-
bris of this rock washed from its surface by the rains is often seen ac-
cumulating in low situations, and reconsolidating into a nodular con-
glomerate ; when the fragments of the laterite have been much rolled they
assimilate externally to pisiform iron ore, but have neither its specific
gravity, internal concentric structure, nor distinguishing lustre. The
felapathic cement agglutinating these nodules is often of a deep
brown eolour, passing into various lighter shades according to the
quantity of iron it contains, and is evidently composed of the more
powdery parts of the parent rock: this alluvial laterite is seen in all
lateritic areas in the S. of India and is as easily to be distinguished by
its nodular and pisiform character, its position, and the thinness of its
beds from the true laterite, as the reconsolidated debris of quartz, mica,
and felspar is from the true granite rocks, at the bases of which it is often
seen, in India, to accumulate in beds of some thickness and tenacity,
In tracts where kunkur and limestone prevail, as near Bejapore and
Bangwari, the lime often enters into the cement of this lateritic alluvial
conglomerate.
Sections of the laterite presented by the cliffs and wells of Beder.
In the sections afforded by the faces of the cliffs and deep wells of
Beder the laterite sometimes presents a homogeneous cellular structure
from summit to base. Generally speaking however, it becomes softer
and more sectile as it descends ; and the cavities in the lower portions
are better filled than those higher up. This may be attributed in
some measure to the action of the rain, which falling on the surface
percolates through the cavities of the upper portions of the rock car-
rying downwards much of the ochreous and lithomargic earths they
contain until at length the cavities of the lower parts of the rock be-
992 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula [No. 156.
come so full that they form an impervious bed where the water collects
in hollows and cavities. Here it accumulates until it either trickles
through the passes of the side of the cliff, or finds its way out by some
of the nearly horizontal joints that intersect the rock. Such are the
sources of the shallower wells and springs observed in the substance of
laterite rocks. The deeper wells and springs are usually found at its basis
where it rests upon the impervious trap. Near the line of junction
the trap is almost invariably observed to be ina state of disintegration
either as a friable wacke, or as a brownish or greenish grey clay. The
laterite is no longer hard or porous; its cavities are broken up or
filled with lithomarge and ochreous earth; and in short, it presents a
dense bed of clay variegated with shades of purple, red, yellow, and
white. This clayey state of disintegration of both rocks is ascribable
chiefly to the collection here of the percolated water from above.
The line of demarcation between the two rocks is not easy to distinguish
as the clays are intermixed by the water; that of the trap is easily to
be distinguished at a little distance from the contact by its greenish
hue, and soapy feel, that of the laterite is often meagre to the touch,
and either white, or tinged of various shades by iron. The disintegra-
tion of the trap rock rarely extends more than four or five feet below
the junction.
The tubular cavities in the laterite have not unfrequently a hori-
zontal direction; and, where numerous, impart a somewhat laminar
structure to the rock. They are observed to be most numerous where
the water, obstructed from passing lower down, is compelled to find
its way to the sides of the cliffs; empty sinous tubes having a general
vertical direction are also observed varying from a few lines to one or
two inches in diameter passing through the rock, one was traced 30
feet until it disappeared in a projecting portion of the cliff. These
cavities are sometimes lined with drusy crystals of quartz. The surface
of the interior is generally ferruginous and shining, and sometimes mam-
millary and stalactiform veins of manganese in the laterite. I am
not aware that any writer on laterite has noticed the occurrence of veins
of manganese associated with oxide of iron in this singular rock, a
mineral which has probably afforded the beautiful lilac colour seen in
its lithomargic earth.
At the western base of the cliffs; about 16 miles W. by N. from
1844. ] from Masulipatam to Goa. 993
Beder and 12 mile from the village of Hulfergah, on the left of the
road leading down from the table land into the plain, the laterite is
seen penetrated by a great number of veins, which at first sight,
from their dark aspect and singular direction, might be taken for those
of basalt. They are composed of black, often earthy manganese, com-
bined with iron. The veins are extremely tortuous, and crossing
each other in every direction, and give a reticulated appearance to the
rock. On the sides of these veins the laterite is so hard as to stand
out in relief from the weathered portions of the rock. The veins are
usually thicker near the bottom of the cliff, fining off as they ascend
until they are gradually lost in the substance of the laterite: others are
horizontal. As they diminish from an inch to a line in thickness,
they gradually lose the deep bluish black colour, becoming mixed witi.
the matter of the matrix, and pass into a brown, yellowish brown, and
lastly, a purplish thread which is lost in the substance of the rock.
The bluish black substance of the veins is compact and hard, in some
parts; sectile and earthy in others, easily frangible. Before the blow
pipe, per se, it is converted into a black slag affected by the magnet ;
with borax it fuses into a bead of amethyst coloured glass.
The indurated sides of the veins are of a mottled reddish grey colour,
resembling indurated lithomarge: portions of the greyish-white clay in
their vicinity acquire an almost vitreous hardness and a cellular fritty
aspect, a dull greenish enamel lines most of the cavities in the laterite :
the lithomarge is slightly indurated. The fritty parts of the rock exhi-
bit traces of calcareous infiltration. The greyish white clay fuses into
a greenish enamel similar to that lining the cavities. The pure litho-
marge undergoes little alteration, before the blow pipe; does not fuse
but becomes indurated, darker and more mottled. The impure varie-
ties exhibit in the reducing flame, minute greenish globules.
The lithomarge, and the greyish white, and coloured clays, all emit air
bubbles, when placed in water, they also slightly decrepitate but do not
fall to pieces ; with water they form a plastic clay. The purer varieties
of lithomarge are little adhesive, feel meagre ; the streak and fracture is
earthy : that of the white clays shining, feel slightly greasy to the touch,
It must not remain unnoticed that near at the base of the laterite
cliff, in which the maganese veins just described occur, runs a dyke of
compact and exceedingly tough basalt, occupying the space of a few
994 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula __[No. 156.
yards in breadth between the laterite and the trap of the plain. There
I was unable to discover any veins of maganese either in the latter or
the basalt.
The basalt of this dyke is seen, in the bank of an adjoining nullah,
to assume both the globular and columnar structure.
Valley of denudation.—-At the N. E. extremity of the cliffs of Beder
an instructive example of a valley of denudation and excavation about
a mile in breadth is afforded, of which the following is a Section.
It shows at the same time the immediate superposition of the laterite on
the overlying trap of the Deccan. (Plate Diagram No. II.)
A. A. Are cliffs of laterite from 120 feet to90 feet high once evidently
a continuous bed over B. B. B. sheeted trap and amygdaloid, and
occupying C. C. The space D. D. hard ferruginous masses of laterite.
Though evidently much waterworn and disrupted, they have success-
fully maintained their position against the transporting effects of the
stream, which not only stripped off the laterite and denuded the sub-
jacent trap, but excavated the latter to the depth of many feet having
the hard mass Ba. in the centre, and the valley of denudation, and
excavation D. D.
This valley runs E. by S. and over the plain at its eastern extremity
are scattered the harder nodular fragments of the stripped laterite
mingled with regur, and the recent lateritic alluvium of the adja-
cent cliffs.
Economical uses of the laterite of Beder.—The laterite, particularly
its closer varieties, has been largely used in building the city walls ;
in the revetements of its ditches, wells &c. and in the construction of
the more common cemeteries. The principal edifices, walls, and bas-
tions of the fortress are of the trap. The laterite quarries of Beder re-
semble those on the coast of Malabar and Canara, but are deeper in
consequence of the sectile beds, which are usually preferred, lying deeper
below the surface than in Malabar, where the far greater moisture of the
atmosphere may have some effect in preserving the moisture and secti-
lity of the upper parts of the rock. Both rocks harden on exposure to
the air. There is little appearance of stratification in the cliffs; and
on the other hand, no tendency to a prismatic, columnar, or globular
structure. The rock has much the appearance of those enormously
thick bedded sandstones, where in cliffs even of 200 feet high there is no
1844. ] jrom Masultpatam to Goa. 995
alternation of other beds, and the rock appears one unstratiform trap
often cleft by vertical fissures, into columns and pinnacles.
I have dwelt longer upon the subject of the Beder laterite, than it at
first sight might appear to merit, but I may plead in extenuation that
it is the first bed seen, beyond the granitic and hypogene area, resting on )
the overlying trap (a rock and the nature of the rock on which it rested
had been differently stated by Malcolmson and Voysey, by the former as
granite, the question however by this visit has been set at rest for ever)
which probably belongs to the tertiary period. Calder to whom we are in-
debted for the only general view of Indian geology hitherto published,
and whose ideas have been quoted by some eminent European geologists,
terms laterite ‘‘a contemporaneous rock associating with trap, and com-
mencing only where the overlying trap ends, alittle to the N. of Bankote,
or Fort Victoria, and thence covering the primitive rocks of the Ghauts
and W. coast to Cape Comorin”. Now the laterite of Beder, and many
other localities, some of which will be described in the course of this
paper, lies beyond the area of the rocks termed primitive by Mr.
Calder, and rests wpon the overlying trap ; it has never been observed
underlying or alternating with it, therefore the only proofs available, viz.
that of superposition and non-alteration, tend to prove its more recent
and non-contemporaneous origin; a point of great importance. The
existence in it of veins of manganese and of large beds of the same
mineral I afterwards discovered in the laterite area capping the granitic
and hypogene rocks of the Kupputgode range in the S. Mahratta coun-
try are remarkable facts worthy of note, for until we find beds and
veins of this mineral in the granitic and trappean rocks underlying the
laterite we must be slow to admit the theory, advocated by several
geologists, of the latter being nothing more than the result of the re-
cent disintegration of the former rocks zz siz. The beds of lignite
discovered by General Cullen and myself in the laterite of Malabar
and Travancore, and the deposits of petrified wood in the red hills of
Pondicherry in a rock which though differing in structure, I con-
sider as identical in age with the laterite, and other facts too long for
enumeration here point rather to its detrital origin, like sandstones.
I do not ever recollect having seen in the laterite resting on the
overlying trap any fragments of the calcedonies or zeolites that of-
ten so greatly abound in the rock immediately below it, a fact which
996 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula __[_No. 156.
while decisive against the decomposition im situ theory, would lead
us to the inference that the laterite owed its origin to the detritus of
other rocks than the overlying trap.
Laterite by many geologists in Europe is supposed only to fringe
our coasts, and exist as a thin cap on the ghaut summits; every day
however is adding to our knowledge of its extent in the interior of the
peninsula, and it is evident not only that it must have covered it formerly
to a much greater extent than at present; but that it has since been
much broken up by the subsequent denudation of which on the small
scale, Beder affords a specimen (vide section.) The effects of this
denudation however, are visible on the grand scale in the interior of S.
India, where the ‘tops of mountains of granite, hypogene rocks, and
sandstone many miles asunder are seen capped with laterite in almost
horizontal beds, and little or no laterite in the intervening plains and
valleys. As in Mac Culloch’s description of the great denudation of the
red sandstone on the N. W. coast of Ross-shire. It is impossible to com-
pare these scattered and detached portions without imagining that the
whole intervening country has once been covered with a great body of
Jaterite, enormous masses of which have been removed by denuda-
tion. The same remarks might be applied with some modification
to the subjacent sandstone. Some fragments of this great denudation
may be recognized in the laterite gravel and clay which overspreads the
surface of many parts of the country, and which when reconsolidated it is
often difficult to distinguish from the true laterite, from which it has
been derived and for which it has often been mistaken.
From Beder to Calliany, Trap and Laterite.
It is now time to resume our journey towards the old Jaiu city of
Calliany, more lately the Metropolis of the* Kings, a provincial city
under Aurungzebe and now under the Nizam.
From the foot of the cliffs of Beder, a plain, based on trap amygda-
loid abounding with calcedonies, zeolites, and cale spar, broken only
by a few slight undulations, extends to Calliany near which the sur-
face undergoes a gentle but considerable ascent, a few belts of the
reconsolidated laterite gravel just described cross the road resting on
the trap, and are evidently derived from some high laterite cliffs to the
W. and N. of the city to which I traced the debris. On one of these
* MSS. illegible.
1844, | from Masulipatam to Goa. 997
heights stood a few denuded laterite cliffs about 20 or 30 feet high,
insulated from each other by spaces 4 or 5 feet wide and resembling
those already delineated in the Beder valley section. A piece of
caleedony was picked up in the gravel. but none could be discovered
in the unfractured laterite. The trap, in the form of wacke, here
underlies both the laterite and its detritus; the line of demarcation is
perfectly defined and distinct.
Bazaar excavated in the Laterite cliffs of Calliany.
Nearer Calliany the bed of laterite gravel is succeeded by laterite,
which forms a low ridge of hills immediately to the West of the town.
A street has been cut from the rock, running along the side, about mid-
way up the ascent, in the scarp of which a long row of now deserted
houses and shops have been excavated, and also small caves supported
by pillars of the laterite left untouched, while excavating. The bases
of the cliffs in the vicinity are quarried for the softer variety of the
laterite, which is carried off in baskets, ground with water into a plastic
clay, and used as a water proof covering to the tops of the flat roofed
houses of Calliany. The laterite is here called by the natives from its
worm-eaten appearance kire ka putthur, or silika putihur. The Ta-
muls call it chori kulloo, vettic and culloo and on the Malabar coast
it is termed sézka culloo.
The wells here are of considerable depth. The temp. of one, 35 feet
to the surface of the water was 78° 5’—-Temp. of air in shade, 89°;
the boiling point of water 206° 5’—Temp. of air 84.°
The soil betweea Beder and Calliany is principally lateritic mixed
with the detritus of the subjacent trap crossed in a few situations by
zones of regur, often blended with the trap and laterite soils, the low
flat-topped hills avoided by the route appear to be of laterite resting
on the trap. -
From Calliany to Gulburgah.
The laterite continues from Calliany to a few miles beyond Murbi,
a distance of about 15 miles, forming long flat-topped ranges of hills
rising about 100 feet above the general level of the table land, and
running E. S.E. They are separated by narrow flattish valleys having
a similar direction to that of the hills, and to that of the wider valley
GR
998 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula [No. 156.
separating the Beder and Calliany laterite cliffs : they present the usual
appearances of vallies of denudation, and in many places the trap and
amygdaloid underlying the laterite have been exposed.
At Murbi the laterite table land of Calliany is descended to a terrace
or step of comparatively level land, where the trap and its associated
wacke, amygdaloids and kunker, are the only rocks met with,
A little N. of Gulburgah another terrace formed by these rocks, is
descended to the still lower level on which the city stands in the
valley of the Bhima, about 12 or 14 miles to the N. of the present
channel of this fine river. About 10 miles S. of the city, beds of
limestone outcrop from the trap between the villages of Nundipoor
and Sinnoor, and continue forming the bed of the Bhima at Firozabad,
dipping slightly towards the S. W. The limestone continues on the op-
posite or S. bank of the river about 4 miles, alittle to the N. E. of the
village of Gownully, where it is again overlaid by the trap. (Plate
Diagram No. IX1.) is a rough section from the table land of Calliany
to the S. bank of the Bhima, comprehending a tract of land about 50
miles N. and S. exhibiting extensive denudation ; both laterite and trap
having been stripped off the subjacent limestone exposed in the valley
of the Bhima. On the South side of the valley the trap re-appears,
but the softer laterite has been entirely swept away.
A iente, ‘, Rolled and waterworn fragments of the
r in i Vv
Bein des Recrui trap occur in, and on, the soil and gravel
a continuous sheet.
C. Limestone.
overlying the limestone, at a distance of two
or three miles from the present channel of
the river, and far above the reach of its
highest floods. The traces have all the appearance of having been
formed by the action of water.
Iron smelting at Murbi.
It must not be omitted to mention that at Murbi, near the edge
of the Calliany table land, and the adjacent village of Boghirry, the more
ferruginous nodules occurring in the laterite are collected, roasted,
coarsely pounded, and smelted. The furnace at Murbi is a small one,
and capable of smelting about one Kwcha maund of 12 seers per
diem. The ore is subjected three times to the action of the fire; twice
to reduce it and cleanse it from dross by beating the half molten mass
i844. ] from Masulipatam to Goa. 999
with heavy hammers; and the third time to form it into bars, and
other forms convenient for agricultural implements ; which are sent to
Gulbergah, and Calliany. These markets are also supplied with iron
from Mogumpilly in the Koil Talook. The ore, which is in the form
of nodules, often exhibits, on fractured surfaces, stripes of heematic red
earthy ore, alternating with others of a metallic iron blue. It is sold
by the people who collect it to the iron contractor on the spot at the
rate of 34 Hydrabad rupees the Kucha maund of 12 seers.
Lithologic character of the Firozabad limestone and Traps.—The
denuded limestone, in lithologic character, closely resembles that of
Kuddapah, Kumool, Warapilly and Talicota, no fossils were found
in it. The prevailing tint is a greyish blue, strings of small spherical
cavities occur in it as in the limestones just alluded to, some empty,
others filled with a brown ferruginous dust.
The trap has often a porphyritic structure, imbedding crystals of
a dull olive green mineral, which in disintegration assume a greenish-
brown tinge, and finally fall out, leaving cavities in the rock. They
are not unlike some varieties of olivine, a mineral occasionally seen in
this trap; a great development of kunker is observed in its fissures
previous to coming on the outcropping of the limestone.
The Bhima River.—The Bhima is about 600 yards in apparent
breadth at Firozabad, its temp. 78° Faht. temp. of air 90°. Approxi-
mate height of bed above sea by boiling point 1730 ft. The waters
were swollen and muddy from the Monsoon rains (June) and running
at the rate of 24 feet per second. A tumblerful of the water deposit-
ed about a* its bulk of a fine reddish brown sediment, which efferves-
ced with dilute sulphuric acid, evidently the debris of the trap, amyg-
daloids and limestone rocks, over which it passes. The banks are
shelving, and composed of the laminar greyish blue laminar limestone
covered with silt and regur, and their surface strewed to a considerable
distance on either side with rolled fragments of agates, calcedonies
&c. marking the extent of the floods.
The bed has been hollowed in the limestone, exposing shelving sur-
faces of the rock, in some places perfectly bare, others covered with silt
or a gravel from the size of a pea to that of an egg, fragments of trap,
and limestone, calcedonies, jasper, and agates. In consequence of the
* Soin MSS.
1000 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula [No. 156.
disorders committed by the irregular Arab soldiery, the town of Firoza-
bad had been almost deserted: and the ambzkars with their basket
boats had quitted the ferry which was now unfordable and the water
running with considerable rapidity. The village people collected a
number of pumpkins, and about noon they succeeded in netting these
together and constructing a tolerable raft, with which the stream
was easily crossed.
The sources of this fine river rise in the western ghauts a little to
the N. and S. of Poonah ; after watering the fertile plains of the coun-
try of the Marhattas, where its banks are famous for the breed of horses
and mares from which the hardy cavalry of this warlike race has been
chiefly supplied, and flowing S. Easterly towards the Bay of Bengal
over the almost continuous sheet of the great overlying trap formation
of the Deccan, it joins the Kistnah on the granite and hypogene area of
Hydrabad about 50 miles direct distance S. E. from Firozabad. It con-
tributes to the Kistnah many of the Pietrt duri of the overlying trap
formation that are rolled along its bed over more than half the penin-
sula.
Trap Formation from the right bank of the Bhima to the laterite
of Inglisswara.
The trap again covers the limestone a little to the N.E. of the village
of Gonnully, about 4 miles from the river: the latter rock is seen out-
cropping for the last time at the base of a low hill of trap between
Gowncolly and Sunnoo. The trap is amygdaloidal, veined with kunker,
and imbedding calcedonies and cale spar.
From Sunnoo to Jyattaky the calcedony is seen both in veins and
nodules, and passes into plasma; the colour varies from the lightest
tinge of apple green to the deep hue of heliotrope into which tt passes ;
in some translucent varieties the colouring matter is desposed in deli-
cate moss-like filaments, the colouring matter of the plasma has not
been exactly ascertained by chemists, but it seems to be similar to
that of the heliotrope, both disappearing before the blow-pipe.* The
colour of this variety of plasma when exposed to the reducing flame
changes to a purplish white, the plasma becoming opaque and easily
frangible. I have little doubt that the red spots of the variety of Calce-
* Perhaps silicate of Iron? that of Heliotrope being the red oxide ?—Eps.
*
1844. ] . from Masulipatam to Goa. 1001
dony termed heliotrope are derived from thin beds of fine bright red
bole which are often seen alternating with the trap, and in nests, in this
vicinity.
The surface of the country to Sindaghi presents the long, low, flat,
step-like elevations of trap, separated by plains along which the route
lies, and running in a S.E. direction. The soil is usually the detritus
of the trap and laterite in belts and patches of a grey colour, and dark
red, sometimes sandy ; the vegetation stunted consisting chiefly of the
Acacias the Cassia Auriculataand Hingun thorn. Ona fallen blight-
ed acacia amid the low jungle I observed a chameleon perched motion-
less, with his head erect and jaws wide open, asif indeed making a meal
of the afternoon breeze. His skin, which mimics the prevailing hues
of surrounding objects; blue when basking beneath a cloudless sky,
and emerald when shaded by the forest’s verdure, had here so strongly
assimilated that of the black and ashy white stem on which he lay, that
at first I thought it was a singular excrescence of the wood itself.
A little to the N. W. of Sindaghi the summit of a ridge is observed
covered with globular masses of a compact basaltic trap, underlain by
a bed of the fine red clay imbedding a profusion of Zeolites, also
heliotrope, plasma, geodes of calcedony lined with quartz, crystals,
semiopal, cacholong agate, and calc spar, resting on a greenish grey
wacke. Both rocks are veined and interstratified with Kunker of a
somewhat cancellar structure. The horizontal layers of Kunker are
often from 10 to 12 inches thick. The softer wacke and amygdaloid,
in weathering often leaves the harder layers of Kunker projecting from
the surface. (Plate Diagram No. V.)
A Globular basaltic trap. B Red amygdaloid. C kunker layer. B red
amygdaloid. C Kunker layer, D Wacke.
From Sindaghi by Ipperghi to Ingleswara, the aspect of the country
is much the same as from the Bhima to Sindaghi, but the plains become
flatter, more extensive, and more intersected by nullahs. At Ipperghi
the trap assumes the rich brownish purple or chocolate hue of the
trap of Bejapore, and is seen in the bed of the rivulet resting ona
beautiful red zeolitic amygdaloid: the line of contact is marked and
distinct : heliotrope and plasma are less common here.
Indications of the laterite are perceived before reaching Ingleswara
in beds of its detritus re-cemented by a brown ferruginous and calca-
reous paste, also fragments of chert and a variety of limestone por-
1002 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula. [No. 156.
phyry. As anticipated, the laterite was found capping a ridge of trap
and wacke a little to the S. W. of Ingleswara presenting a similar deve-
lopment of the lithomarge near the line of contact with the trap as ob-
served at Beder. The latter rock passes into a friable greenish wacke,
and also into a dark amygdaloid containing spheroidal cavities, often
filled or lined with green earth.
The hill of Ingleswara, marked by an old tower, is principally com-
posed of wacke penetrated by flattish, apparently compressed, veins of
fibrous arragonite. On the top of the hill are scattered globular and
angular fragments of basaltic trap; while partially imbedded in
the soil covering its sides, are rough, scabrous-looking blocks of a
light coloured rock, resembling altered limestone passing into chert.
These blocks are mostly angular, from generally 6 inches to two feet
thick, have a whitish exterior so rough in aspect and touch as, in these
respects, to resemble trachyte, and when fractured the small glistening,
red, and white calcareous crystals they imbed, might at first sight be
taken for those of glassy felspar. The softer and more crystalline
portions of this singular rock effervesce with acids. It occurs also, in
detached blocks, on the wacke at the base of the laterite cliffs S. W.,
of Ingleswara. The rock here is more compact, homogeneous, less
crystalline in structure and exhibits dark dendritic delineations. Some
fragments are partly coated with a thin bluish white enamel, which is
apt to assume a botryoidal form ; on its surface are seen numerous small
white globules of white enamel. Among the lateritic debris intermin-
gled with these blocks are interspersed numerous nodules of a black cine-
ritious looking mineral, containing cavities filled with an impure,
earthy, brown manganese ; their black outer crust is often so indurated
as to give fire with steel. Before the blowpipe, per se it reddens slightly
and exhibits minute globules of a bluish white enamel.
The following section will exhibit the position of these blocks of
cherty limestone as they occur on the sides of a valley of denudation
and excavation, a mile in width. (Plate Diagram No. lV.)
A. Laterite, overlying trap at B. and stripped off at E and B. b.
B. B. b. Trap.
C. Globular basaltic trap.
D. D. Blocks of whitish scabrous limestone passing into dust and
half imbedded in lateritic gravel.
E. Valley of denudation and excavation.
va
_ ».- = > 2
1844. ] from Masulipatam to Goa. 1003
The Limestone has very much the appearance of the freshwater
limestone of Nirmul, Moonapilly, and Koolkonda between Gulberga
and Muetul, and has evidently been broken up and altered by the
basalt, The angularity of the fragments and their little waterworn ap-
pearance, prove that this bed must have been deposited, and existed in
situ, at no great distance from the present locality. The blocks were
not observed in the centre of the valley, from which it may be inferred
that the limestone was only a littoral deposit, or that its fragments
were carried away by the aqueous current by which the valley was
excavated. The laterite cliffs of Ingleswara like those of Beder, Son-
dur, and on the western coast, are cavernous: one of the caves near
the summit, is held sacred by the MHindoos. The entrance was
barred by a locked gate; it is said by the natives (credat Judzus)
to communicate with another similar cavern on the hill of
Nageswar, also said to be of laterite, about three coss to the S. W.
Near the mouth is one of those remnants of the strange ophitic adora-
tion that prevailed over great part of S. India, in the shape of an image,
of which the upper portions resemble those of a young female, and the
lower terminating in the coils of a serpent.* Ingleswara is famed in
Hindoo annals as the place where the nuptials of Buswapa the founder
of the great sect of Jungums and Singayets, and the overthrower of
the Jain dynasty of Calliany, were celebrated. The small laterite hill
of Hori muth his birth place, is at a little distance.
From Ingleswara to about 11 miles S. W. of Bagwari, trap, wacke
and amygdaloid form the basis of the plain where its southern limit
is again crossed to the hypogene area. A reddish felspathic zone, similar
to that already noticed in the Bejapore notes, intervenes between
the trap and the gneiss, which is first seen to outcrop in the bed of a
nullah between the villages of Hungraghi and Wondal, where a section
is afforded showing the thinned-out edges of this great couleé of trap
resting on and coating the reddish intervening felspar zone. This zone,
or salbande, is probably nothing more than the altered gneiss.
The mica in the gneiss is replaced by hornblende and at a little dis-
tance, the gneiss passes into hornblende schist. Both rocks are highly
inclined, dipping westerly ; gneiss, felspathic veined and interspersed
* Wehave inthe Museum a double image of this kind formed by two female busts
with serpent terminations,—Eps,
1004 Notes, chiefly Geological, across the Peninsula, &c. [No. 156.
with quartz continues to the left or N. bank of the Kistnah to Chimla-
ghi where it disappears under beds of a bluish limestone resembling that
of Firozabad. The gneiss is in some situations capped by laterite
fragments of a greyish blue and buff limestone; the latter crystalline
and effervescing feebly with acids, and penetrated by tortuous veins of the
dark chert. A few globular boulders of granite and greenstone are
scattered over the low hill of Chimlaghi, out of the reach of the floods
of the Kistnah. They have a rugged waterworn exterior. The hill itself
is capped with a layer of kunker, varying in thickness from a few
inches to five feet, imbedding nodules of a ferruginous clay and angu-
lar fragments of a grey and dark coloured chert, a bed of which is seen
intervening between the limestone and the gneiss. The kunker bed
rests upon disturbed strata of the bluish limestone, so much broken
up that it was impossible to ascertain the dip, or direction of the rock.
The gneiss underlying the limestone imbeds crystals of calc spar.
From the junction of the Kistnah, and the Gutpurba near Chimla-
ghi, by Kulladghi, to the West of the falls of Gokauk on the eastern
flank of the Western Ghauts a limestone and sandstone formation sup-
posed to be identical with those of Cuddapah and Warapilly, extends,
with partial outcroppings of the hypogenes, and a few patches of over-
lying trap and laterite. The nature of the rocks composing the sum-
mits of the Ghauts inmmediately behind the falls of Gokauk have not
been noticed. A little further south they are composed of the hypogene
schists and granitic rocks covered, partially, to the Sea at Goa,
Vingorla and Malwan by laterite. North of Malwan the overlying trap
is almost the exclusive rock seen to Surat. Of the geology of the
Southern Mahratta country I intend speaking more fully in a subse-
quent paper.
Oriental Publications for Sale, at Repucen prices, by the Asiatic
Society.
WorKS. Rs,
Mahdbharata, vol. ist. pages 831, vol. 2d, pages 868, vol. 3rd, pages 839, vol. 4th,
pages 1007, royal 4to. on see an 40
Large paper do. do. see eve Ac 50
I ndex to the 4 vols. of the Mahabharut complete. “he ap 6
Harriwansa, 563 pages, royal 4to. a as A, 5
RAja Tarangini, 440 pages, 4to. ove ane a 5
Large paper, do. do. “fe ya Bes 8
Naishada, 917 pages, 8vo. ane eas e 6
Sausruta, Ist vol. 378 pages, 2d vol. 562 pages, 8vo. ar ae 8
Fatawé A’lemgiri, 1st vol. 763 pages, 2d vol. 759 pages, 3d vol. 565 pages, 4th vol.
759 pages, 5th vol.€97 pages, 6th vol. 667 pages, royal 4to. per vol. ne 8
Tndya, 2d vol. 690 pages, 3rd vol. 682 pages, 4th vol. 937 pages, 4to. sac 8
Khazanat ul Ilm, 694 pages, 4to. nee ore mae 8
Jawdme ul Ilm ul Riazi, 168 pages, with 17 plates, 4to. ne ae 4
Anis ul Musharrahin, 541 pages, 4to. ... ans 5
Sharaya-ool-Islam, 631 pages, 4to. ete ina sae 8
Tibetan Grammar, 256 pages, 4to. ao an as 8
Tibetan Dictionary, 373 pages. 4to. ane see cee 10
Asiatic Researches, per vol. “oe che : 10
Burnouf Memoire sur deux inscriptions cunéiformes, 4to. 199 pp. cee 3
Burnouf Commentaire sur le Yacna, with notes &c. 2 parts, pp 945. ve 10
Burnouf et Lassen, Essai sur le Pali, ou Langue Sacrée de la presquile au de la
du Gange. Paris, 1826, pages 222, 8vo.
Elémens de la Grammaire Japonaise, par M. M. Rodriguez et Remusat. Paris,
1825, pages 158, 8vo. ase ans
Ditto ditto Supplément, Paris, 1826, pages 31, 8vo. ais
Contes Arabes, traduits par J. J. Marcel. Paris, 1835, avee notes, vol. I, pages
484, vol. II. pages 496, vol. III. pages 508, 8vo.
Brosset, Elémens de la Langue Georgienne. Paris 1837, pages 122, 8vo,
Klaproth, Vocabulaire et Grammaire de la langue Georgienne. Paris, 1827, pages
232, Ist part, 8vo.
Cronique Georgienne, traduite par M. Brosset, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,
pages 370, 8vo.
Choix de Fables de Vartan, en Arménien et en Francais, Paris, 1825, pages 96,
8vo.
soe eee
Elegie sur La Prise D’Edesse, en Arménien. Paris 1828, pages 112, 8yo.
Chrestomathie Chinoise—Chinese Characters, 1833, pages 183, 4to.
ore
Meng-Tscu, texte Chinoise, pages 161y, 80.
Former.
Price.
48
61
0
6
20
12
6
10
10
10
4
5
15
38
12
12
0
0
Rs. As.
3 0
3 0
3
5 0
4 0
3 0
1
2
wow ow
ooc.UmWlUm
ti
Oriental Publications for Sale, at RepuceD prices, by the Asiatic
Society.— ( Continued, )
Rs. As.
Meng-Tseu, traduction Latine, par S. Julien. Lutetiea Parisiorum, 1824, pages
593, 8vo. on co ae 8 0
Lassen, Institutiones Lingue Pracritice. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1837, pages 167,
8vo. eee oe oes =a 51 ONO
Lassen, Anthologia Sanscritica. Bonne, 1838, pages 371, 8vo. ape tee
Lassen, Gita Govinda, Sanscrit et Latine. Bonne ad Rhenum, 1836, pages 180,
4to. oe oat ave ie oS
Chezy, Yajnadattabada, ou La Mort D’yadjnadatta, Text, Analysis and Transla-
tion. Paris, 1826, pages 142, 4to. ach cae Saal. or SO
Chezy, La reconnaissance de Sacountala, Text and Translation. Paris, 1830,
pages 665, 4to. isa 4s ae 10 6
Geographie D’Aboulféda, Texte Arabe. Paris, 1837-40, pages 586, 4to. nee DEO
The Travels of Ibn Batuta, translated from the Arabic Manuscript, by S. Lea.
London 1829, 143 pages, 4to. a ae ate) es
The Travels of Macarius, translated by F. C. Belfour. London, 1829, pt. I. 114
pages, 4to. a aon wow 4 0
Memoir of the Emperor Jehanguire, translated from the Persian Manuscript, by
Major D. Price. London, 1829, 141 pages, 4to. tase ee 4 8
History of the Afghans, translated from the Persian, by B. Dorn, part I. London,
1829, 184 pages, 4to. “3 oe Sit, oO
Han-Koong-Tsew, or the Sorrows of Has, a Chinese Tragedy, translated by J.
F. Davis. London, 1829, 28 pages, 4to. she PS |
Vocabulary of Scinde Language, by Capt. Eastwick. ee aa
Leech’s Grammar and Vocabulary of the Baloochi and Punjabee Languages. ... 1 0
Points in the History of the Greek and Indo-Scythian Kings, &c. ‘Translated
from the German of Professor Lassen, by J. H. E. Roeer, and Edited by
H. Torrens, !'sq.
Panes
(Er Separate Canti cles Ft he Journal are also re-
printed, and sold at proportionate rates.
nee
as
tm ee Oy panied he eh yin
PAR HEATON ORE et
‘ ’ ‘
‘ r fs pyle rx
vt Ula 5
Sui
ws' ¥
eT ATy 21
ss)
Le
a,
y
; wy,
Ay
Me
$
ae
I Pin A pe eS
ale Fi (ah
an a ae
1?
>
, uh v Ad
J ie, ¢ ae ¢
or vey nl
9
HOM. ‘) ery +
a
ne
—
2 =
er ered
fw
“”
aes
J
ats
“a
Eo
cae
es r ay
r
.
a:
3
be Saimin et (i
: met MT
Aig:
ee gy OA Tae eee